WO2018207701A1 - Composition for optical members, optical member and image display device - Google Patents

Composition for optical members, optical member and image display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018207701A1
WO2018207701A1 PCT/JP2018/017528 JP2018017528W WO2018207701A1 WO 2018207701 A1 WO2018207701 A1 WO 2018207701A1 JP 2018017528 W JP2018017528 W JP 2018017528W WO 2018207701 A1 WO2018207701 A1 WO 2018207701A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
carbon atoms
film
optionally substituted
substituent
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2018/017528
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
普史 形見
昌邦 藤田
崇弘 野中
丈治 喜多川
Original Assignee
日東電工株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2018086402A external-priority patent/JP6510113B2/en
Application filed by 日東電工株式会社 filed Critical 日東電工株式会社
Priority to CN201880009453.7A priority Critical patent/CN110249242B/en
Priority to KR1020197022167A priority patent/KR102051269B1/en
Priority to SG11201909102R priority patent/SG11201909102RA/en
Publication of WO2018207701A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018207701A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08KUse of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K5/00Use of organic ingredients
    • C08K5/16Nitrogen-containing compounds
    • C08K5/34Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen in the ring
    • C08K5/3442Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen in the ring having two nitrogen atoms in the ring
    • C08K5/3462Six-membered rings
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08LCOMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L101/00Compositions of unspecified macromolecular compounds
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J133/00Adhesives based on homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical, or of salts, anhydrides, esters, amides, imides, or nitriles thereof; Adhesives based on derivatives of such polymers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • G02B5/22Absorbing filters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/30Polarising elements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B33/00Electroluminescent light sources
    • H05B33/02Details

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an optical member composition and an optical member formed from the optical member composition. Moreover, this invention relates to the image display apparatus using the said composition for optical members.
  • the optical member to which the present invention is applied is a member that is applied to various optical uses.
  • the functional layer etc. which are provided in are mentioned.
  • the optical film include a polarizing film, a polarizer, a transparent protective film for a polarizer, a retardation film, a light diffusion film, a brightness enhancement film, a lenticular film, a cover window film (front plate), a scattering prevention film, and a decoration.
  • a printing film etc. can be illustrated.
  • the optical member can be used as an optical laminate including a polarizer and a retardation film.
  • the surface treatment layer examples include a hard coat layer, an antiglare layer, an antireflection layer, and a refractive index adjustment layer.
  • the functional layer examples include an easy adhesion layer, an antistatic layer, an antiblocking layer, an oligomer prevention layer, and a barrier layer.
  • the said optical member can be used as an intermediate
  • the intermediate layer include a refractive index adjustment layer, an easy-adhesive layer, a hard coat layer, and a crack prevention layer.
  • These optical members can form an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device (LCD) or an organic EL (electroluminescence) display device (OLED).
  • LCD liquid crystal display device
  • OLED organic EL
  • image display devices are widely used as constituent members.
  • Image display devices are widely used in various applications such as mobile phones, car navigation devices, personal computer monitors, and televisions.
  • an optical member used when the image display device is an organic EL display device
  • a surface on the viewing side of the organic EL panel is used to prevent external light from being reflected by a metal electrode (cathode) and viewed like a mirror surface.
  • a circularly polarizing film (a laminated body of a polarizing film and a quarter-wave plate or the like) is disposed on the surface.
  • a decorative panel etc.
  • the transparent conductive film is used as a transparent electrode film to form a touch panel or the like.
  • the constituent members of the organic EL display device such as the circularly polarizing film and the decorative panel, the transparent electrode film and the like are usually laminated as an optical member via a bonding material such as an adhesive layer and an adhesive layer.
  • a component or the like in the image display device may be deteriorated by incident ultraviolet light, and a layer containing an ultraviolet absorber in order to suppress deterioration due to the ultraviolet light. It is known to provide Specifically, for example, it has at least one ultraviolet absorbing layer, the light transmittance at a wavelength of 380 nm is 30% or less, and the visible light transmittance at a wavelength longer than the wavelength of 430 nm is 80% or more.
  • Transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets for image display devices for example, see Patent Document 1
  • pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets having a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer containing an acrylic polymer and a triazine-based ultraviolet absorber are known (for example, see Patent Document 2).
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets described in Patent Documents 1 and 2 can control the transmittance of light having a wavelength of 380 nm.
  • the organic EL element can be used over a long period of time. May deteriorate and was not sufficient.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets described in Patent Documents 1 and 2 can absorb light having a wavelength of 380 nm, but the wavelength region on the shorter wavelength side (380 nm) than the light emitting region of the organic EL element (longer wavelength side than 430 nm). ( ⁇ 430 nm) light is not sufficiently absorbed, and it is considered that deterioration is caused by the transmitted light.
  • the organic EL element in order to suppress deterioration of the organic EL element, transmission of light having a wavelength shorter than the light emitting region (longer wavelength side than 430 nm) (380 nm to 430 nm) is suppressed, and the organic EL element Therefore, it is necessary to use a layer having a high transparency that can sufficiently ensure the transmittance of visible light in the light emitting region of the organic EL display device. Further, since the image display device is used in a high temperature and high humidity environment, the image display device is also required to have durability under severe environmental conditions.
  • the present invention When applied to an image display apparatus, the present invention forms an optical member that can suppress deterioration of a display element, has high transparency, and is excellent in durability under severe environmental conditions.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a composition for an optical member.
  • Another object of the present invention is to provide an optical member formed from the composition, and further to provide an image display device using the optical member.
  • this invention relates to the composition for optical members characterized by including the compound represented by a base polymer and following General formula (1).
  • m represents an integer of 1 to 6
  • Q 1 represents a hydrogen atom when m is 1
  • D 1 represents a group in which one hydrogen atom is removed from the compound represented by the following general formula (2).
  • a plurality of D 1 may be the same or different. It may be.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
  • R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a cyano group.
  • R 7 represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71
  • R 8 represents a halogen atom.
  • R 71 and R 81 to R 84 are the same or different and each represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a substituent; Or the aryl group which may have a substituent is represented.
  • R 3 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
  • R 402 and R 403 are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group, an optionally substituted aryl group, —NR 406 R 407 , —OR 408 , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409 , —O—C (O) R 410 or —C (O) OR 411 ,
  • R 404 to R 411 are the same or different and each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
  • R 404 , R 405, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404 and R 405 are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent. ))
  • m in the general formula (1) is preferably 1 or 2.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (3).
  • R 1a is a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • R 2a represents a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7a or —SO 2 —R 8a , where R 7a represents a hydroxy group Or -OR 71a , R 8a represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, -OR 81a , -NR 82a R 83a, or -R 84a, and R 71a and R 81a to R 84a are the same or different, Represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R 3a represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • R 402a represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, —NR 406a R 407a , —OR 408a , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409a , —O—C (O) R 410a or —C (O) OR 411a , and R 404a to R 411a are the same or different and represent hydrogen It represents an atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R 404a , R 405a, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404a and R 405a are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent.
  • R 413 represents a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or the following general formula The group represented by Formula (4) is represented.
  • Q 2 represents an optionally substituted divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms
  • * represents a bonding site with the general formula (3).
  • R 1b represents a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms
  • R 2b represents a hydrogen atom.
  • An atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7b or —SO 2 —R 8b is represented.
  • R 7b represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71b
  • R 8b represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, —OR 81b , —NR 82b R 83b or —R 84b
  • R 71b and R 81b to R 84b are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an alkyl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Represents an aryl group.
  • R 3b represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • R 402b is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, —NR 406b R 407b , —OR 408b , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409b , —O—C (O) R 410b or —C (O) OR 411b , and R 404b to R 411b are the same or different and represent hydrogen It represents an atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R 404b , R 405b, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404b and R 405b are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent. )
  • R 413 is preferably a group represented by General Formula (4).
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) is a compound represented by the following general formula (5).
  • R 2c represents a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7c or —SO 2 —R 8c ).
  • R 7c represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71c
  • R 8c represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, —OR 81c , —NR 82c R 83c or —R 84c
  • R 71c and R 81c to R 84c are the same or Differently, it represents a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • R 3c represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • R 402c and R 403c are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon atom having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • Represents an aryl group, —NR 406c R 407c , —OR 408c , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409c , —O—C (O) R 410c or —C (O) OR 411c , and R 404c to R 411c Are the same or different and each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R 404c , R 405c, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404c and R 405c are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent.
  • R 501 is a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or the following general formula (6 ) Represents a group represented by
  • Q 3 represents a divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and * represents a binding site with the general formula (5).
  • R 2d represents a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7d or —SO 2 —R 8d .
  • R 7d represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71d
  • R 8d represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, —OR 81d , —NR 82d R 83d or —R 84d .
  • R 71d and R 81d to R 84d are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • R 3d represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. .
  • R 402d and R 403d are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon atom having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • An aryl group of —NR 406d R 407d , —OR 408d , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409d , —O—C (O) R 410d or —C (O) OR 411d , and R 404d to R 411d Are the same or different and each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R 404d , R 405d, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404d and R 405d are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent. ))
  • R 501 is preferably a group represented by General Formula (6).
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) is preferably a dye compound having an absorption maximum wavelength of an absorption spectrum in a wavelength region of 380 to 430 nm.
  • the composition for optical members further contains an ultraviolet absorber.
  • the absorption maximum wavelength of the absorption spectrum of the ultraviolet absorber is preferably in the wavelength region of 300 to 400 nm.
  • the present invention also relates to an optical member formed from the composition for optical members.
  • the optical member can be used as an optical film, for example.
  • the optical member can be used as, for example, an optical film pressure-sensitive adhesive layer or an adhesive layer.
  • the base polymer contained in the composition for forming the optical film pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is preferably a (meth) acrylic polymer.
  • the optical member can be used, for example, as a surface treatment layer provided on an optical film.
  • Examples of the optical film relating to the optical member include a polarizing film, a polarizer, a transparent protective film for a polarizer, and a retardation film.
  • the present invention is an optical laminate including a polarizer and a retardation film
  • the optical layered body is an optical layered body (1) containing the optical member.
  • the present invention also relates to an image display device comprising the image display unit and the optical member or the optical laminate (1).
  • the image display device of the present invention is suitable when the optical member or the optical laminated body (1) is provided on the viewing side with respect to the image display unit.
  • Examples of the image display device include, from the viewing side, an organic EL display device including at least an optical laminate including a polarizer and a retardation film in this order, and an organic EL panel as the image display unit. What an optical laminated body contains the said optical member or an optical laminated body (1) can be used suitably.
  • the optical member can be used as the transparent base film or an intermediate layer provided between the transparent base film and the transparent conductive layer.
  • Examples of the intermediate layer include at least one selected from a refractive index adjustment layer, an easy-adhesive layer, a hard coat layer, and a crack prevention layer.
  • this invention is a transparent conductive film which has a transparent base film and a transparent conductive layer, Comprising: The said optical member is contained as an intermediate
  • the present invention also relates to an image display device comprising the image display unit and the transparent conductive film.
  • the image display device of the present invention is suitable when the transparent conductive film is provided closer to the viewer than the image display unit.
  • Examples of the image display device include an organic EL display device including an organic EL panel as the image display unit.
  • the composition for an optical member of the present invention contains the compound represented by the above general formula (1) in addition to the base polymer to be formed having the optical member. Since the compound has an absorption maximum wavelength in the absorption spectrum near 400 nm, the compound is suitably used as a dye. By using the compound (dye compound) and an ultraviolet absorber in combination, the compound can be used in a display element such as an organic EL panel. Light in a region that is not affected can be sufficiently absorbed, and a longer wavelength side than the region can be sufficiently transmitted. Furthermore, the compound represented by the general formula (1) is also excellent in durability under severe environmental conditions under a high temperature and high humidity environment. As a result, the optical member formed from the composition for optical members of the present invention can suppress deterioration due to external light of the display element, and has excellent weather resistance deterioration, and can extend the life. it can.
  • composition for optical member contains the compound represented by the said General formula (1) other than the base polymer which has an optical member.
  • the composition for optical members of this invention can contain various additives other than the compound represented by the said General formula (1) according to various uses.
  • the base polymer is appropriately selected according to the application to which the optical member is applied.
  • the resin used for the base polymer is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a thermoplastic resin, a photocurable resin, and a thermosetting resin.
  • the resin include ether sulfone resin, fluorine resin, silicone resin, polyester resin, epoxy resin, phenol resin, and melamine resin. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the base polymer is a main component that forms each optical member, and will be described later together with a description of optical applications. Materials related to the base polymer are also shown as well-known marks in various applications. For example, in the use of an adhesive, if it is an acrylic adhesive, a (meth) acrylic polymer can be recognized as a base polymer.
  • the present invention includes any of the geometric isomers.
  • the present invention relates to a compound in which each asymmetric carbon atom is in the R configuration, a compound in the S configuration, and a compound in any combination thereof. Any of these are included. Any of those racemates, racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, and diastereomeric mixtures are also included in the present invention.
  • m represents an integer of 1 to 6.
  • m is preferably 2 to 6 because the heat resistance of the compound (1) is improved.
  • m is preferably 1 or 2, and more preferably 2.
  • Q 1 represents a hydrogen atom when m is 1 and a divalent to hexavalent linking group when m is 2 to 6.
  • the divalent to hexavalent linking group include an optionally substituted divalent to hexavalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, —SO 2 — and the like.
  • Examples of the divalent to hexavalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent include straight chain, branched or cyclic 2 to 6 carbon atoms having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • Q 1 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a divalent linking group.
  • an optionally substituted divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, —SO 2 — and the like are preferable, and an optionally substituted substituent having 1 to Twenty divalent hydrocarbon groups are more preferred.
  • the divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent is preferably a linear, branched or cyclic divalent group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Or a divalent arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • the linear, branched or cyclic divalent alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is a divalent alkyl in which an arylene group which may have an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a substituent is inserted between carbon and carbon.
  • a divalent alkyl group substituted with one or more halogen atoms is also preferable, and examples thereof include a bistrifluoromethylmethylene group.
  • the carbon number of the linear divalent alkyl group is preferably 2 to 10 (k1 in the above formula is 2 to 10), more preferably 4 to 8 (k1 in the above formula is 4 to 8).
  • divalent arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent for example, a group represented by the following general formula (20) is preferable.
  • X independently represents a halogen atom, a nitro group, a hydroxy group, a sulfo group, an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and s is 0 Represents an integer of ⁇ 4.
  • D 1 represents a group in which one hydrogen atom is removed from the compound (2).
  • the group in which one hydrogen atom is removed from the compound (2) can also be referred to as a group in which one hydrogen atom has been removed from the compound (2).
  • Compound (2) contains a nitrogen-containing aromatic ring and an electron-withdrawing group, and contains a methine structure that can be a dye. Since the compound (1) includes such a methine structure, it can be used as a dye compound.
  • the plurality of D 1 may be all the same or different. In one aspect, it is preferred that the plurality of D 1 are all the same.
  • the compound (1) in which m is 1 is the compound (2).
  • the compound (1) in which m is 1 is also referred to as a monomer compound.
  • the compound (1) in which m is 2 to 6 is a compound having a 2 to 6-mer structure in which 2 to 6 groups in which a hydrogen atom is removed from the compound (2) are linked by a linking group (Q 1 ).
  • the compound (1) in which m is 2 to 6 can also be referred to as a dimer to hexamer compound.
  • D 1 is preferably a group in which one hydrogen atom is removed from R 1 , R 403 or R 404 of the compound (2) (or a group in which R 1 is removed when R 1 is a hydrogen atom), R 1 or R 403 is more preferably a group in which one hydrogen atom is removed.
  • Q 1 is preferably bonded to the portion of R 1 , R 403 or R 404 in the general formula (2), and is bonded to the portion of R 1 or R 403. More preferably.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
  • the alkyl group which may have a substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • the aryl group which may have a substituent include an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • —C (O) —O—R 1 is an electron withdrawing group.
  • R 1 is preferably an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably a substituent group.
  • the alkyl group may have 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • R 2 represents a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group (CF 3 group), a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7 or —SO 2 —R 8 .
  • R 7 represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71
  • R 8 represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, —OR 81 , —NR 82 R 83 or —R 84 .
  • R 71 and R 81 to R 84 are the same or different and each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
  • Heterocycle-containing groups in R 2 include nitrogen-containing heterocycles such as pyrrole ring, pyridine ring, quinoline ring, pyrimidine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrazine ring, imidazole ring, benzimidazole ring, triazine ring, triazole ring, tetrazole ring; Oxygen-containing heterocycles such as rings and benzofuran rings; sulfur-containing heterocycles such as thiophene rings and benzothiophene rings; heterocycles containing oxygen and nitrogen atoms such as oxazole rings and benzoxazole rings; thiazole rings, benzothiazole rings, thiadiazoles And a sulfur-containing heterocycle such as a ring.
  • nitrogen-containing heterocycles such as pyrrole ring, pyridine ring, quinoline ring, pyrimidine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrazine
  • These rings may further form a condensed ring with another carbocycle (for example, a benzene ring) or a heterocycle (for example, a pyridine ring), an oxazole ring, A benzoxazole ring is preferred.
  • the heterocyclic ring-containing group in R 2 is a benzoxazole ring or a group in which a hydrogen atom is removed from the carbon (2-position) between nitrogen and oxygen in the oxazole ring (referred to as a group excluding a hydrogen atom) It is also preferably a group in which a hydrogen atom is removed from the carbon (position 2) between nitrogen and oxygen of the benzoxazole ring.
  • R 2 is a benzoxazole ring or a group in which a hydrogen atom is removed from the oxazole ring
  • Q 1 and D 1 are compound (2) If the bound at the site of R 2, R 2 is preferably bound to Q 1 a carbon atom other than carbon (2-position) between the nitrogen and oxygen of the benzoxazole ring or an oxazole ring.
  • Examples of the alkyl group which may have a substituent in R 1 , R 71 , R 81 , R 82 , R 83 and R 84 include an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. It is done. Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent include linear, branched or cyclic alkyl groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent described later. In one embodiment of the present invention, the optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, and having 4 carbon atoms.
  • the branched or cyclic sterically bulky alkyl groups described above are preferable, more preferably a cyclic alkyl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having a substituent. It is also a good cyclic alkyl group.
  • Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in R 1 , R 71 , R 81 , R 82 , R 83 and R 84 include, for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an i-propyl group, and an n-butyl group.
  • I-butyl group, t-butyl group, n-hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, n-octyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, 4-t-butylcyclohexyl group, 2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methyl Cyclohexyl and the like are preferable, t-butyl group, cyclohexyl group, 4-t-butylcyclohexyl group, 2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methylcyclohexyl group and the like are more preferable, 4-t-butylcyclohexyl group, 2 , 6-di-t-butyl-4-methylcyclohexyl group is more preferable.
  • Examples of the aryl group which may have a substituent in R 1 , R 71 , R 81 , R 82 , R 83 and R 84 include an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. It is done. Examples of the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent include an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent described later. For example, the aryl group may be substituted with an alkyl group. Preferable phenyl groups (for example, phenyl group, 3-methylphenyl group, 2,6-dimethylphenyl group) and the like are preferable.
  • R 1 is preferably n-butyl, s-butyl, i-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, n-hexyl, cyclohexyl, n-octyl, 2-ethylhexyl, 4-t-butylcyclohexyl group, 2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methylcyclohexyl group, etc., 4-t-butylcyclohexyl group, 2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methylcyclohexyl group Etc. are more preferable.
  • R 2 is preferably a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7 or —SO 2 —R 8 , more preferably a cyano group or a heterocyclic ring-containing group.
  • R 71 and R 81 are the same or different and are, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, i-propyl group, n-butyl group, s-butyl group, i-butyl group, t-butyl group, n-pentyl group, n-hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, n-octyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, 4-t-butylcyclohexyl group, 2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methylcyclohexyl group and the like are preferable.
  • R 82 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R 83 is preferably a hydrogen atom, a phenyl group, a 3-methylphenyl group or a 2,6-dimethylphenyl group.
  • R 84 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a t-butyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, or the like.
  • R 3 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
  • R 402 and R 403 are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group, an optionally substituted aryl group, —NR 406 R 407 , —OR 408 , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409 , —O—C (O) R 410 or —C (O) OR 411 ;
  • R 404 to R 411 are the same or different and each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
  • R 404 , R 405, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404 and R 405 are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic
  • Examples of the alkyl group for R 3 , R 402, and R 403 include linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • Specific examples of the straight-chain, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms include methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, iso-propyl group, n-butyl group, iso-butyl group, sec- Butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, 2-methylbutyl, 1-methylbutyl, neo-pentyl, 1,2-dimethylpropyl, 1,1-dimethylpropyl, cyclopentyl, n-hexyl Group, 4-methylpentyl group, 3-methylpentyl group, 2-methylpentyl group, 1-methylpentyl group, 3,3-dimethylbutyl group, 2,3-dimethylbutyl group, 1,3-dimethyl
  • the substituent in the alkyl group which may have a substituent is not particularly limited, and is a monocyclic or polycyclic aromatic ring group (phenyl group, naphthyl group, etc.) having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, or having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • An alkoxycarbonyl group having 8 to 8 carbon atoms, an acyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms for example, acetyl group, propionyl group, butyryl group, valeryl group, pivaloyl group, acryloyl group, methacryloyl group, benzoyl group, toluoyl group, cinnamoyl group, anisoyl group) , Naphthoyl group, etc.
  • acyloxy groups having 2 to 10 carbon atoms for example, acetyl group, propionyl group, butyryl group, valeryl group, pivaloyl group, acryloyl group, methacryloyl group, be
  • Examples of the aryl group for R 3 , R 402 and R 403 include monocyclic or polycyclic aromatic ring groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • a monocyclic aromatic hydrocarbon group such as a phenyl group; a naphthyl group, an anthracenyl group, a naphthacenyl group, a pentacenyl group, a phenanthrenyl group
  • Examples include polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbon groups such as a pyrenyl group.
  • the substituent in the aryl group which may have a substituent is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an amino group, Mono- or di-alkylamino group (alkyl has 1 to 8 carbon atoms), halogen atom, cyano group, hydroxy group, nitro group, halogenated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, carboxy group, 1 to carbon atoms 8 alkoxycarbonyl groups and the like.
  • it is a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • a phenyl group and a naphthyl group having a substituent nitrophenyl group, cyanophenyl group, hydroxyphenyl group, methylphenyl group, dimethylphenyl group, trimethylphenyl group, fluorophenyl group, chlorophenyl group, dichlorophenyl group , Bromophenyl group, methoxyphenyl group, ethoxyphenyl group, trifluoromethylphenyl group, N, N-dimethylaminophenyl group, nitronaphthyl group, cyanonaphthyl group, hydroxynaphthyl group, methylnaphthyl group, fluoronaphthyl group, chloronaphthyl Group, bromonaphthyl group, trifluoromethylnaphthyl group and the like.
  • the 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocycle formed by R 404 , R 405, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404 and R 405 are bonded is a nitrogen-containing oxygen atom. It may be a heterocyclic ring.
  • the nitrogen-containing heterocycle include non-aromatic nitrogen-containing heterocycles.
  • the 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocycle include non-aromatic nitrogen-containing heterocycles such as pyrrolidine ring, piperidine ring, piperazine ring and morpholine ring.
  • the substituent in the 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • An alkoxy group, an amino group, a mono- or di-alkylamino group (the alkyl has 1 to 8 carbon atoms), a halogen atom, a cyano group, a hydroxy group, a nitro group, a halogenated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms examples thereof include a carboxy group and an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • it is a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • each substituent may be the same or different.
  • R 3 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a cyano group, more preferably a carbon atom having 1 carbon atom which may have a hydrogen atom or substituent.
  • R 402 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or alkoxy group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, An alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent is more preferable. More preferably, it is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a methyl group. It is.
  • R 403 is preferably —OR 408 .
  • R 408 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably , A hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an ethyl group.
  • at least one of R 402 and R 403 is preferably a substituent other than a hydrogen atom, and R 402 and R 403 are the same or different and are each a substituent other than a hydrogen atom. More preferably.
  • R 404 and R 405 are the same or different and are preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. More preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, still more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, n- A propyl group and an n-butyl group.
  • R 406 , R 407 , R 408 , R 409 , R 410 and R 411 are the same or different and preferably have an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a substituent. It may be an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • compound (3) is preferred as compound (1).
  • the compound (3) is preferable because of excellent light resistance.
  • R 1a represents a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • R 2a represents a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7a or —SO 2 —R 8a .
  • R 7a represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71a
  • R 8a represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, —OR 81a , —NR 82a R 83a or —R 84a
  • R 71a and R 81a to R 84a are the same or different and each is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an optionally substituted group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. Represents an aryl group.
  • R 1a is the same as the preferred embodiment of R 1 described above.
  • R 2a is preferably a cyano group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, or —C (O) —R 7a, more preferably a cyano group or —C (O) —OR 71a .
  • Preferred embodiments of R 71a , R 81a , R 82a , R 83a and R 84a are the same as the preferred embodiments of R 71 , R 81 , R 82 , R 83 and R 84 described above.
  • R 3a is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon atom. Represents 20 to 20 aryl groups.
  • R 402a represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, —NR 406a R 407a , —OR 408a , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409a , —O—C (O) R 410a or —C (O) OR 411a , and R 404a to R 411a are the same or different and represent hydrogen It represents an atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R 404a , R 405a, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404a and R 405a are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent.
  • the preferred embodiments of R 3a , R 402a , R 404a , R 405a , R 406a , R 407a , R 408a , R 409a , R 410a, and R 411a are R 3 , R 402 , R 404 , R 405 , R 406 described above. , respectively and preferred embodiments of R 407, R 408, R 409 , R 410 and R 411 same.
  • R 413 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Or a group represented by the general formula (4).
  • R 413 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a group represented by the general formula (4), more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms or It is group represented by General formula (4), More preferably, it is group represented by an ethyl group or the said General formula (4).
  • R 413 is preferably a group represented by General Formula (4).
  • Q 2 represents an optionally substituted divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and * represents a bonding site with the general formula (3).
  • Q 2 is bonded to the general formula (3).
  • the divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent in Q 2 and preferred embodiments thereof are those having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent in Q 1 described above. The same as the divalent hydrocarbon group and preferred embodiments thereof.
  • R 1b represents a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • R 2b represents a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7b or —SO 2 —R 8b .
  • R 7b represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71b
  • R 8b represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, —OR 81b , —NR 82b R 83b or —R 84b .
  • R 71b and R 81b to R 84b are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an alkyl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Represents an aryl group.
  • a preferred embodiment of R 1b is the same as the preferred embodiment of R 1 described above.
  • R 2b is preferably a cyano group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, or —C (O) —R 7b, more preferably a cyano group or —C (O) —OR 71b .
  • R 71b, R 81b, R 82b , preferred embodiments of R 83 b and R 84b are each a preferred embodiment of R 71, R 81, R 82 , R 83 and R 84 as described above the same.
  • R 3b is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon atom. Represents 20 to 20 aryl groups.
  • R 402b is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, —NR 406b R 407b , —OR 408b , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409b , —O—C (O) R 410b or —C (O) OR 411b , and R 404b to R 411b are the same or different and represent hydrogen It represents an atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R 404b , R 405b, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404b and R 405b are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent.
  • the preferred embodiments of R 3b , R 402b , R 404b , R 405a , R 406b , R 407b , R 408b , R 409b , R 410b, and R 411b are R 3 , R 402 , R 404 , R 405 , R 406 described above. , R 407 , R 408 , R 409 , R 410 and R 411 are the same as the preferred embodiments.
  • R 2c represents a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7c or —SO 2 —R 8c .
  • R 7c represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71c
  • R 8c represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, —OR 81c , —NR 82c R 83c or —R 84c .
  • R 71c and R 81c to R 84c are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. Represents an aryl group.
  • R 2c is preferably a cyano group, a heterocyclic group, or —C (O) —R 7c, more preferably a cyano group or —C (O) —OR 71c .
  • R 71c , R 81c , R 82c , R 83c and R 84c are the same as the preferred embodiments of R 71 , R 81 , R 82 , R 83 and R 84 described above.
  • R 3c is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon atom.
  • R 402c and R 403c are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon atom having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • Represents an aryl group, —NR 406c R 407c , —OR 408c , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409c , —O—C (O) R 410c or —C (O) OR 411c , and R 404c to R 411c Are the same or different and each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R 404c , R 405c, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404c and R 405c are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent.
  • Preferred embodiments of R 3c , R 402c , R 403c , R 404c , R 405c , R 406c , R 407c , R 408c , R 409c , R 410c, and R 411c are the aforementioned R 3 , R 402 , R 403 , and R 404.
  • R 405 , R 406 , R 407 , R 408 , R 409 , R 410 and R 411 are the same as the preferred embodiments.
  • R 501 is a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, Or represents the group represented by the said General formula (6).
  • R 501 is preferably an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms (for example, methyl group, ethyl group, t-butyl group, cyclohexyl group, 4-t-butylcyclohexyl group, 2, 6-di-t-butyl-4-methylcyclohexyl group), an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent (eg, phenyl group, methylphenyl group, dimethylphenyl group, trimethylphenyl group) Etc.) or a group represented by the general formula (6).
  • R 501 is preferably a group represented by General Formula (6).
  • Q 3 represents an optionally substituted divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and * represents a bonding site with the general formula (5).
  • Q 3 is bonded to the general formula (5).
  • the divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent in Q 3 and preferred embodiments thereof are those having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent in Q 1 described above. The same as the divalent hydrocarbon group and preferred embodiments thereof.
  • Q 3 is more preferably a divalent aryl group represented by the general formula (20) and s is 0.
  • R 2d represents a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7d or —SO 2 —R 8d .
  • R 7d represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71d
  • R 8d represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, —OR 81d , —NR 82d R 83d or —R 84d .
  • R 71d and R 81d to R 84d are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. Represents an aryl group.
  • R 2d is preferably a cyano group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, or —C (O) —R 7d, more preferably a cyano group or —C (O) —OR 71d .
  • R 71d , R 81d , R 82d , R 83d and R 84d are the same as the preferred embodiments of R 71 , R 81 , R 82 , R 83 and R 84 described above.
  • R 3d represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • R 402d and R 403d are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon atom having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • An aryl group of —NR 406d R 407d , —OR 408d , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409d , —O—C (O) R 410d or —C (O) OR 411d , and R 404d to R 411d are the same or different and each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R 404d , R 405d, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404d and R 405d are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent.
  • Preferred embodiments of R 3d , R 402d , R 403d , R 404d , R 405d , R 406d , R 407d , R 408d , R 409d , R 410d, and R 411d are R 3 , R 402 , R 403 , R 404 described above.
  • R 405 , R 406 , R 407 , R 408 , R 409 , R 410 and R 411 are the same as the preferred embodiments.
  • R 413 is a group represented by the general formula (4)
  • Q 1 is Q 2 (optionally having 1 to 20 carbon atoms).
  • a compound having a dimer structure in which the group represented by the general formula (3) and the group represented by the general formula (4) are linked to both sides by Q 2. is there.
  • the group represented by the general formula (3) and the group represented by the general formula (4) include a methine structure, and both are structures that become a dye. Since the molecular weight is increased due to the dimer structure of such a dye structure, the compound is difficult to sublimate, and the dye compound is excellent in heat resistance.
  • the compound (3) in which R 413 is a group represented by the general formula (4) is a compound represented by the following general formula (3-1).
  • R 1a , R 2a , R 3a , R 402a , R 404a and R 405a , and Q 2 , R 1b , R 2b , R 3b , R 402b , R 404b and R 405b are Are as defined above.
  • R 501 when R 501 is a group represented by the general formula (6), in the general formula (1), Q 1 is Q 3 (which may have a substituent having 1 to 20 carbon atoms). And a compound having a dimer structure in which the group represented by the general formula (5) and the group represented by the general formula (6) are linked to both sides according to Q 3. is there.
  • the group represented by the general formula (5) and the structure represented by the general formula (6) include a methine structure and serve as a dye. Since the molecular weight is increased due to the dimer structure of such a dye structure, the compound is difficult to sublimate, and the dye compound is excellent in heat resistance.
  • the compound (5) in which R 501 is a group represented by the general formula (6) is a compound represented by the following general formula (5-1).
  • R 2c , R 3c , R 402c , R 403c , R 404c and R 405c , and Q 3 , R 2d , R 3d , R 402d , R 403d , R 404d and R 405d Is as defined above.
  • Examples of preferred embodiments of the compound (1) of the present invention include, for example, the compounds C1 to C5 produced in the examples. Of these, compounds C1, C2 and C5 are preferred because of high light resistance. From the viewpoint of high heat resistance, compounds C1 to C3 are preferred. From the viewpoint of high solubility in an organic solvent, compounds C1 to C5 are preferred. Compounds C1 to C5 are examples of compound (3).
  • the method for producing the compound (1) of the present invention is not particularly limited, and for example, it can be produced by the following method.
  • the method for producing the compound of the present invention will be described below with an example of the synthesis method, but the method for producing the compound (1) of the present invention is not limited to the following method.
  • the below-mentioned reaction about functional groups other than the said site
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) is a compound represented by the following general formula (11) (compound (11))
  • synthesis is performed by the following method. Can do.
  • the compound (11) is an example of the compound (1) of the present invention, and is a compound (dimer compound) in which m is 2 in the general formula (1).
  • the compound (11) can be said to be an example of a compound in which R 413 is a group represented by the general formula (4) in the compound (3).
  • compound (11) is obtained by subjecting compound (M4) to dehydration condensation reaction with compound (M21).
  • Q f represents a divalent linking group.
  • R 1f , R 2f and preferred embodiments thereof are the same as R 1 , R 2 and preferred embodiments described above, respectively.
  • R 402f , R 404f and R 405f and preferred embodiments thereof are the same as the above-described R 402 , R 404 and R 405 and preferred embodiments thereof.
  • the divalent linking group in Q f is the same as the divalent linking group in Q 1 .
  • Q f is preferably a divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • wavy line is the same as the wavy line in the chemical formula
  • the configuration of the double bond to which it is bonded is independently an E configuration or a Z configuration. Or a mixture thereof. The same applies to the following.
  • the compound (M4) can be obtained, for example, by reacting a dihalogenated alkyl compound with the compound (M1) represented by the following general formula (M1) to alkoxylate the hydroxy group of the compound (M1).
  • Compound (M1) can be obtained according to the method described in Journal of the Chemical Society, 1957, 4845.
  • R 402f , R 404f and R 405f have the same meanings as described above.
  • the compound (11) can also be obtained by dehydrating and condensing the compound (M1) and the compound (M21) and then dimerizing by alkoxylation.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) is a compound represented by the following general formula (12) (compound (12)), for example, it can be synthesized by the following method.
  • the compound (12) is an example of the compound (1) of the present invention and is a dimer compound.
  • the compound (12) can be said to be an example of a compound in which R 501 is a group represented by the general formula (6) in the compound (5).
  • compound (12) is obtained by subjecting compound (M2-1) to dehydration condensation reaction of compound (M22).
  • R 2g and preferred embodiments thereof are the same as R 2c described above and preferred embodiments thereof.
  • W g represents —C (O) —O—Q g —O—C (O) —
  • Q g represents a divalent linking group.
  • Divalent linking group for Q g is the same as the divalent linking group for Q 1.
  • Q g is preferably a divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R 402g , R 403g , R 404g and R 405g and preferred embodiments thereof are the same as R 402 , R 403 , R 404 and R 405 described above and preferred embodiments thereof, respectively.
  • the compound (M2-1) and the compound (M2-2) described later can be obtained, for example, by alkoxylating the hydroxy group of the compound (M1).
  • the compound (12) can also be obtained by dehydrating and condensing the compound (M21) and the compound (M2-1), and then linking with R 1f to dimerize as W g .
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) is a compound represented by the following general formula (13) (compound (13)), for example, it can be synthesized by the following method.
  • the compound (13) is an example of the compound (1) of the present invention, and is a monomer compound (m in the general formula (1) is 1).
  • Compound (13) is compound (3), wherein R 413 is a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an optionally substituted carbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. It is also an example of a compound representing the aryl group.
  • compound (13) is obtained by subjecting compound (M2-2) to dehydration condensation reaction of compound (M23).
  • R 402h , R 403h , R 404h and R 405h and preferred embodiments thereof are the same as R 402 , R 403 , R 404 and R 405 described above and preferred embodiments thereof, respectively.
  • R 1h , R 2h and preferred embodiments thereof are the same as R 1 , R 2 and preferred embodiments described above, respectively.
  • Isolation and purification of each product in the above production method can be performed by appropriately combining methods used in ordinary organic synthesis, for example, filtration, extraction, washing, drying, concentration, crystallization, various chromatography and the like. .
  • the intermediate can be subjected to the next reaction without any particular purification.
  • the compound (1) of the present invention usually has an absorption maximum wavelength at 360 to 430 nm. When the absorption maximum wavelength is in the range of 360 to 430 nm, ultraviolet light and blue light can be selectively absorbed.
  • the compound (1) of the present invention preferably has an absorption maximum wavelength at 370 to 420 nm, and more preferably has an absorption maximum wavelength at 380 to 400 nm.
  • the compound (1) of the present invention preferably has a gram extinction coefficient of 400 nm of 30 or more. The absorption maximum wavelength and the gram extinction coefficient can be measured by the methods described in Examples.
  • the compound (1) of the present invention usually has good solubility in an organic solvent.
  • the compound (1) of the present invention is preferably a compound that is soluble in the following organic solvents.
  • organic solvent include aromatic hydrocarbons (eg, toluene, xylene, etc.), ketones (methyl ethyl ketone, acetone, cyclohexanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone, etc.), ethers (eg, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate).
  • Compound (1) is preferably dissolved in an amount of 0.1% by mass or more, and preferably dissolved in an amount of 0.1% by mass or more and 50% by mass or less, based on at least one of the above organic solvents.
  • the solubility in an organic solvent at 20 ° C. is in such a range.
  • the compound (1) of the present invention is preferable because, for example, when the compound (1) is used for the production of an optical member, the productivity is good.
  • the thermal decomposition temperature of the compound (1) of the present invention is preferably 200 ° C. or higher, more preferably 210 ° C. or higher, for example, preferably 250 to 400 ° C.
  • the thermal decomposition temperature can be measured with a thermogravimetric measuring device.
  • the compound (1) of the present invention usually has an absorption maximum wavelength at 360 to 430 nm, and can effectively absorb light of this wavelength.
  • the compound (1) of the present invention can effectively absorb light around 400 nm.
  • the compound (1) of the present invention is a dimer to hexamer compound (m is 2 to 6 in the general formula (1))
  • the heat resistance can be improved.
  • the compound (1) of the present invention is excellent in solubility in an organic solvent. For this reason, the compound (1) of this invention is used suitably for an optical member etc., for example.
  • the compound (1) having the absorption maximum wavelength at 360 to 430 nm can be used as a dye compound.
  • a dye compound having an absorption maximum wavelength in the absorption spectrum in the wavelength region of 380 to 430 nm is preferably used.
  • the absorption maximum wavelength of the absorption spectrum of the dye compound is more preferably in the wavelength region of 380 to 420 nm.
  • the present invention by using a combination of such a dye compound and the ultraviolet absorber, for example, light in a region (wavelength of 380 nm to 430 nm) that does not affect the light emission of the organic EL element can be sufficiently absorbed, In addition, the light emitting region (longer wavelength side than 430 nm) of the organic EL element can be sufficiently transmitted, and as a result, deterioration of the organic EL element due to external light can be suppressed.
  • the dye compound is not particularly limited as long as it has the above-mentioned wavelength characteristics, but a material that does not have fluorescence and phosphorescence performance (photoluminescence) so as not to hinder the display properties of the organic EL element is preferable.
  • the full width at half maximum of the dye compound is not particularly limited, but is preferably 80 nm or less, more preferably 5 to 70 nm, and still more preferably 10 to 60 nm.
  • the half-value width of the dye compound is in the above range, it is possible to control to sufficiently transmit light having a wavelength longer than 430 nm while sufficiently absorbing light in a region that does not affect light emission of the organic EL element. Therefore, it is preferable.
  • the measuring method of a half value width is based on the method as described below.
  • the compound (1) particularly the dye compound, may be used alone or in combination of two or more, but the total content is determined based on the base polymer (or its polymer).
  • the monomer component to be formed) is preferably about 0.01 to 10 parts by weight, more preferably about 0.02 to 5 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight.
  • the ultraviolet absorber is not particularly limited, and for example, a triazine ultraviolet absorber, a benzotriazole ultraviolet absorber, a benzophenone ultraviolet absorber, an oxybenzophenone ultraviolet absorber, a salicylic acid ester ultraviolet absorber, a cyanoacrylate An ultraviolet absorber etc. can be mentioned, These can be used individually by 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types. Among these, triazine-based UV absorbers and benzotriazole-based UV absorbers are preferable, triazine-based UV absorbers having 2 or less hydroxyl groups in one molecule, and benzones having one benzotriazole skeleton in one molecule.
  • an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition when used as an optical member, it can be dissolved in a monomer used for the formation of at least one ultraviolet absorber selected from the group consisting of triazole-based ultraviolet absorbers. It is preferable because of its good properties and high ultraviolet absorption ability in the vicinity of a wavelength of 380 nm.
  • triazine ultraviolet absorbers having 2 or less hydroxyl groups in one molecule include 2,4-bis-[ ⁇ 4- (4-ethylhexyloxy) -4-hydroxy ⁇ -phenyl] -6. -(4-Methoxyphenyl) -1,3,5-triazine (Tinosorb S, manufactured by BASF), 2,4-bis [2-hydroxy-4-butoxyphenyl] -6- (2,4-dibutoxyphenyl) -1,3,5-triazine (TINUVIN 460, manufactured by BASF), 2- (4,6-bis (2,4-dimethylphenyl) -1,3,5-triazin-2-yl) -5-hydroxyphenyl And [(C10-C16 (mainly C12-C13) alkyloxy) methyl] oxirane reaction product (TINUVIN400, manufactured by BASF), 2- [4,6-bis (2 , 4-Dimethylphenyl) -1,3,5-triazin-2-yl]
  • benzophenone ultraviolet absorber (benzophenone compound) and oxybenzophenone ultraviolet absorber (oxybenzophenone compound)
  • examples of the benzophenone ultraviolet absorber (benzophenone compound) and oxybenzophenone ultraviolet absorber (oxybenzophenone compound) include 2,4-dihydroxybenzophenone, 2-hydroxy-4-methoxybenzophenone, and 2-hydroxy. -4-methoxybenzophenone-5-sulfonic acid (anhydrous and trihydrate), 2-hydroxy-4-octyloxybenzophenone, 4-dodecyloxy-2-hydroxybenzophenone, 4-benzyloxy-2-hydroxybenzophenone, 2, 2 ′, 4,4′-tetrahydroxybenzophenone, 2,2′-dihydroxy-4,4-dimethoxybenzophenone, 2,2 ′, 4,4′-tetrahydroxybenzophenone (SeeSorb 106, manufactured by Cypro Kasei Co., Ltd.) , , 2'-dihydroxy-4-
  • salicylic acid ester ultraviolet absorber examples include, for example, phenyl-2-acryloyloxybenzoate, phenyl-2-acryloyloxy-3-methylbenzoate, and phenyl-2-acryloyloxy.
  • cyanoacrylate ultraviolet absorber examples include alkyl-2-cyanoacrylate, cycloalkyl-2-cyanoacrylate, alkoxyalkyl-2-cyanoacrylate, alkenyl-2-cyanoacrylate, alkynyl- Examples include 2-cyanoacrylate.
  • the absorption maximum wavelength of the absorption spectrum of the ultraviolet absorber is preferably in the wavelength region of 300 to 400 nm, and more preferably in the wavelength region of 300 to 380 nm.
  • the absorption maximum wavelength means an absorption maximum wavelength exhibiting the maximum absorbance among the plurality of absorption maximums in the spectral absorption spectrum in the wavelength region of 300 to 460 nm.
  • the measuring method of the absorption maximum wavelength is the same as the measuring method of the dye-based compound.
  • the ultraviolet absorber may be used singly or in combination of two or more, but the total content thereof is 100% of the base polymer (or monomer component forming the polymer).
  • the amount is preferably about 0.1 to 8 parts by weight, more preferably about 0.2 to 6 parts by weight with respect to parts by weight.
  • the ultraviolet absorbing function of the optical member can be sufficiently exhibited.
  • the base polymer of the optical member is, for example, an acrylic polymer, it is preferable to perform ultraviolet polymerization of the acrylic polymer because it does not hinder the polymerization.
  • composition for optical members of the present invention may contain an appropriate additive in addition to the above components depending on the application.
  • the composition for optical members of the present invention can be prepared by mixing at least a base polymer to be formed having an optical member, an ultraviolet absorber, and a compound represented by the above general formula (1).
  • the ultraviolet absorber and the above compound (1) can be kneaded into the base polymer, or dissolved and mixed in a solvent, and the ultraviolet absorber and the above-described monomer component for forming the base polymer can be mixed.
  • the said composition can be prepared by mix
  • the composition for an optical member can appropriately contain a solvent, and can contain various additives depending on the optical member. Although it does not restrict
  • the optical member composition of the present invention can form various optical members by various methods according to the optical member.
  • a forming method a composition for an optical member is molded by an injection molding method, a compression molding method, an extrusion molding method, or the like, or the optical member composition of the present invention is applied and formed on a support described later.
  • Various methods such as a method can be adopted.
  • the coating method include a dip coating method, an air knife coating method, a curtain coating method, a roller coating method, a wire bar coating method, a gravure coating method, a spin coating method, and an extrusion coating method. The method of forming a coating film is mentioned.
  • optical member examples include an optical film.
  • an optical film applicable as the optical member of the present invention a transparent protective film for a polarizer, a retardation film, a light diffusion film, a light collecting film, a brightness enhancement film, a lenticular film, a cover window film (front plate) ), An anti-scattering film, a decorative printing film, and the like.
  • examples of the optical member include a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer or an adhesive layer applied to the optical film.
  • These pressure-sensitive adhesive layers or adhesive layers are polarizing films, polarizers, transparent protective films for polarizers, retardation films, light diffusion films, light-condensing films, brightness enhancement films, lenticular films, cover window films (front plates), It can be applied by providing it on an optical film such as a scattering prevention film or a decorative printing film.
  • the optical member can be used as an optical laminate including a polarizer and a retardation film.
  • examples of the optical member include a surface treatment layer provided on the optical film.
  • examples of these surface treatment layers include hard coat layers, antireflection layers, antiglare treatment layers, antireflection layers, refractive index adjustment layers, and the like.
  • Polarizing films, polarizers, transparent protective films for polarizers, retardation films It can be applied by providing it on an optical film such as a light diffusion film, a light collecting film, a brightness enhancement film, a lenticular film, a cover window film (front plate), a scattering prevention film, or a decorative printing film.
  • examples of the optical member include a functional layer provided on the optical film.
  • these functional layers include an easy-adhesion layer, an antistatic layer, an antiblocking layer, an oligomer prevention layer, a barrier layer, and the like.
  • Polarizing film, polarizer, transparent protective film for polarizer, retardation film, light diffusion film It can be applied by providing it on an optical film such as a light collecting film, a brightness enhancement film, a lenticular film, a cover window film (front plate), a scattering prevention film, or a decorative printing film.
  • the optical member can be used as an intermediate layer provided between the transparent substrate film or the transparent substrate film in a transparent conductive film having a transparent substrate film and a transparent conductive layer.
  • the intermediate layer include a refractive index adjusting layer, an easy adhesive layer, a hard coat layer, and crack prevention.
  • the image display device of the present invention includes an image display unit and the optical member.
  • Typical examples of the image display device including the image display unit include a liquid crystal display device and an organic electroluminescence (EL) display device.
  • the optical member is preferably provided on the viewing side with respect to the image display unit.
  • the optical laminate in an organic EL display device, includes an organic EL panel as the image display unit, and the viewing side of the organic EL panel includes at least a polarizer and a retardation film in this order from the viewing side.
  • the optical member of this invention can be used as a member which forms the said optical laminated body, for example.
  • optical member containing the compound represented by the general formula (1) of the present invention is used in an optical laminate used in an organic EL display device as a representative example.
  • the optical laminate includes a polarizer and a retardation film.
  • the optical laminate 1 has at least an adhesive layer 2 / transparent protective film 3 / polarizer 4 / retardation film 5 / adhesive layer 6 laminated in this order from the viewing side. Things can be illustrated.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 6 may be laminated in this order.
  • functional layers such as a hard coat layer, an antiglare treatment layer, and an antireflection layer, a sensor layer, and a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and an adhesive layer for laminating them can be included. .
  • the transparent protective film 4 / polarizer 5 may be referred to as a polarizing film.
  • the optical member containing the compound represented by the general formula (1) of the present invention can be used as various members or layers forming the optical laminate.
  • the optical layered body is preferably an optical layered body (1) containing an optical member containing the compound represented by the general formula (1) of the present invention.
  • Adhesive layer 2 refers to a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer or an adhesive layer.
  • Adhesive Layer As the adhesive layer, a layer made of any appropriate adhesive can be adopted. Examples of such adhesives include natural rubber adhesives, ⁇ -olefin adhesives, urethane resin adhesives, ethylene-vinyl acetate resin emulsion adhesives, ethylene-vinyl acetate resin hot melt adhesives, and epoxy resins.
  • Adhesives vinyl chloride resin solvent adhesives, chloroprene rubber adhesives, cyanoacrylate adhesives, silicone adhesives, styrene-butadiene rubber solvent adhesives, nitrile rubber adhesives, nitrocellulose adhesives, Reactive hot melt adhesives, phenol resin adhesives, modified silicone adhesives, polyester hot melt adhesives, polyamide resin hot melt adhesives, polyimide adhesives, polyurethane resin hot melt adhesives, polyolefin resin hot melt adhesives
  • Adhesive polyvinyl acetate resin solvent-based adhesive, Styrene resin solvent adhesive, polyvinyl alcohol adhesive, polyvinyl pyrrolidone resin adhesive, polyvinyl butyral adhesive, polybenzimidazole adhesive, polymethacrylate resin solvent adhesive, melamine resin adhesive, urea resin adhesive Agents, resorcinol adhesives, and the like.
  • Such an adhesive agent can be used individually by 1 type or in mixture of 2 or more types.
  • adhesives include, for example, thermosetting adhesives and hot-melt adhesives when classified according to the adhesive form. Only one kind of such an adhesive may be used, or two or more kinds thereof may be used.
  • thermosetting adhesive exhibits an adhesive force when cured by heating and solidified.
  • thermosetting adhesive include an epoxy thermosetting adhesive, a urethane thermosetting adhesive, and an acrylic thermosetting adhesive.
  • the curing temperature of the thermosetting adhesive is, for example, 100 to 200 ° C.
  • the hot melt adhesive is melted or softened by heating, thermally fused to the adherend, and then solidified by cooling to adhere to the adherend.
  • hot melt adhesives include rubber hot melt adhesives, polyester hot melt adhesives, polyolefin hot melt adhesives, ethylene-vinyl acetate resin hot melt adhesives, polyamide resin hot melt adhesives, and polyurethane resins. Examples thereof include hot melt adhesives.
  • the softening temperature (ring ball method) of the hot melt adhesive is, for example, 100 to 200 ° C.
  • the melt viscosity of the hot melt adhesive is 180 ° C., for example, 100 to 30000 mPa ⁇ s.
  • the thickness of the adhesive layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably about 0.01 to 10 ⁇ m, and more preferably about 0.05 to 8 ⁇ m.
  • the type of pressure-sensitive adhesive composition forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include rubber-based pressure-sensitive adhesives, acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesives, silicone-based pressure-sensitive adhesives, Examples thereof include urethane adhesives, vinyl alkyl ether adhesives, polyvinyl alcohol adhesives, polyvinyl pyrrolidone adhesives, polyacrylamide adhesives, and cellulose adhesives.
  • acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesives are preferably used because they are excellent in optical transparency, exhibit appropriate adhesiveness, cohesiveness, and adhesive pressure-sensitive adhesive properties, and are excellent in weather resistance, heat resistance, and the like.
  • a base polymer corresponding to the type of the pressure-sensitive adhesive is used.
  • an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing a (meth) acrylic polymer as a base polymer is preferable.
  • the acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition preferably includes, for example, a partial polymer of a monomer component containing an alkyl (meth) acrylate and / or a (meth) acrylic polymer obtained from the monomer component.
  • a dye compound and also an ultraviolet absorber can be added to the agent composition.
  • the acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition includes a partially polymerized monomer component containing an alkyl (meth) acrylate and / or a (meth) acrylic polymer obtained from the monomer component.
  • alkyl (meth) acrylate examples include those having a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms at the ester end.
  • Alkyl (meth) acrylate can be used individually by 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types.
  • Alkyl (meth) acrylate refers to alkyl acrylate and / or alkyl methacrylate, and (meth) in the present invention has the same meaning.
  • alkyl (meth) acrylate examples include the aforementioned linear or branched alkyl (meth) acrylates having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, and among these, alkyl (meth) having 1 to 9 carbon atoms. Acrylates are preferred, and alkyl (meth) acrylates having 4 to 9 carbon atoms are preferred.
  • the alkyl (meth) acrylate is preferable in terms of easily balancing the adhesive properties.
  • Specific examples of the alkyl (meth) acrylate having 4 to 9 carbon atoms include n-butyl (meth) acrylate, s-butyl (meth) acrylate, t-butyl (meth) acrylate, and isobutyl (meth).
  • n-pentyl (meth) acrylate isopentyl (meth) acrylate, isohexyl (meth) acrylate, isoheptyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, isooctyl (meth) acrylate, isononyl (meth) acrylate, etc.
  • These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the alkyl (meth) acrylate having an alkyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms at the ester terminal is 40% by weight or more based on the total amount of the monofunctional monomer component forming the (meth) acrylic polymer. It is preferably 50% by weight or more, more preferably 60% by weight or more.
  • the monomer component may contain a copolymerization monomer other than the alkyl (meth) acrylate as a monofunctional monomer component.
  • a copolymerization monomer can be used as the remainder of the said alkyl (meth) acrylate in a monomer component.
  • a cyclic nitrogen-containing monomer can be included.
  • a polymerizable functional group which has unsaturated double bonds such as a (meth) acryloyl group or a vinyl group
  • has a cyclic nitrogen structure can be especially used without a restriction
  • the cyclic nitrogen structure preferably has a nitrogen atom in the cyclic structure.
  • cyclic nitrogen-containing monomers examples include lactam vinyl monomers such as N-vinyl pyrrolidone, N-vinyl- ⁇ -caprolactam, and methyl vinyl pyrrolidone; vinyl pyridine, vinyl piperidone, vinyl pyrimidine, vinyl piperazine, vinyl pyrazine, vinyl pyrrole, vinyl Examples thereof include vinyl monomers having a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring such as imidazole, vinyl oxazole and vinyl morpholine. Moreover, the (meth) acryl monomer containing heterocyclic rings, such as a morpholine ring, a piperidine ring, a pyrrolidine ring, a piperazine ring, is mentioned.
  • N-acryloylmorpholine N-acryloylpiperidine, N-methacryloylpiperidine, N-acryloylpyrrolidine and the like.
  • lactam vinyl monomers are preferable.
  • the cyclic nitrogen-containing monomer is preferably 0.5 to 50% by weight, and preferably 0.5 to 40% by weight, based on the total amount of the monofunctional monomer component forming the (meth) acrylic polymer. Is more preferable, and 0.5 to 30% by weight is even more preferable.
  • the monomer component used in the present invention can contain a hydroxyl group-containing monomer as a monofunctional monomer component.
  • a hydroxyl group-containing monomer a monomer having a polymerizable functional group having an unsaturated double bond such as a (meth) acryloyl group or a vinyl group and having a hydroxyl group can be used without particular limitation.
  • hydroxyl group-containing monomer examples include 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth) acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl ( Hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylates such as (meth) acrylate, 6-hydroxyhexyl (meth) acrylate, 8-hydroxyoctyl (meth) acrylate, 10-hydroxydecyl (meth) acrylate, 12-hydroxylauryl (meth) acrylate; -Hydroxyalkylcycloalkane (meth) acrylates such as -hydroxymethylcyclohexyl) methyl (meth) acrylate.
  • hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylamide examples include hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylamide, allyl alcohol, 2-hydroxyethyl vinyl ether, 4-hydroxybutyl vinyl ether, diethylene glycol monovinyl ether, and the like. These can be used alone or in combination. Of these, hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate is preferred.
  • the hydroxyl group-containing monomer is preferably 1% by weight or more from the viewpoint of enhancing adhesive force and cohesive force with respect to the total amount of the monofunctional monomer component forming the (meth) acrylic polymer, It is more preferably 2% by weight or more, and further preferably 3% by weight or more.
  • the amount of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer is too large, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer becomes hard and the adhesive strength may decrease, and the viscosity of the pressure-sensitive adhesive may become too high or gel.
  • the hydroxyl group-containing monomer is preferably 30% by weight or less, more preferably 27% by weight or less, and more preferably 25% by weight or less based on the total amount of the monofunctional monomer component forming the (meth) acrylic polymer. Is more preferable.
  • the monomer component that forms the (meth) acrylic polymer can contain other functional group-containing monomers as monofunctional monomers, such as carboxyl group-containing monomers and monomers having a cyclic ether group. It is done.
  • carboxyl group-containing monomer a monomer having a polymerizable functional group having an unsaturated double bond such as a (meth) acryloyl group or a vinyl group and having a carboxyl group can be used without particular limitation.
  • the carboxyl group-containing monomer include (meth) acrylic acid, carboxyethyl (meth) acrylate, carboxypentyl (meth) acrylate, itaconic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, crotonic acid, and isocrotonic acid. Can be used alone or in combination. These anhydrides can be used for itaconic acid and maleic acid. Among these, acrylic acid and methacrylic acid are preferable, and acrylic acid is particularly preferable.
  • a carboxyl group-containing monomer can be arbitrarily used for the monomer component used for manufacture of the (meth) acrylic-type polymer of this invention, On the other hand, it is not necessary to use a carboxyl group-containing monomer.
  • a monomer having a cyclic ether group a monomer having a polymerizable functional group having an unsaturated double bond such as a (meth) acryloyl group or a vinyl group and a cyclic ether group such as an epoxy group or an oxetane group.
  • the epoxy group-containing monomer include glycidyl (meth) acrylate, 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl (meth) acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth) acrylate glycidyl ether, and the like.
  • Examples of the oxetane group-containing monomer include 3-oxetanylmethyl (meth) acrylate, 3-methyl-oxetanylmethyl (meth) acrylate, 3-ethyl-oxetanylmethyl (meth) acrylate, and 3-butyl-oxetanylmethyl (meth) acrylate. , 3-hexyl-oxetanylmethyl (meth) acrylate and the like. These can be used alone or in combination.
  • the carboxyl group-containing monomer and the monomer having a cyclic ether group are preferably 30% by weight or less based on the total amount of the monofunctional monomer component forming the (meth) acrylic polymer, and 27% by weight. % Or less is more preferable, and 25% by weight or less is more preferable.
  • the monomer component forming the (meth) acrylic polymer of the present invention includes, for example, CH 2 ⁇ C (R 1 ) COOR 2 (wherein R 1 is hydrogen or a methyl group, and R 2 is the number of carbon atoms). And an alkyl (meth) acrylate represented by 1 to 3 substituted alkyl groups and cyclic cycloalkyl groups.
  • the substituent of the substituted alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms as R 2 is preferably an aryl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms or an aryloxy group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • the aryl group is not limited, but is preferably a phenyl group.
  • Examples of such a monomer represented by CH 2 ⁇ C (R 1 ) COOR 2 include phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, 3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexyl. (Meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, etc. are mentioned. These can be used alone or in combination.
  • the (meth) acrylate represented by CH 2 ⁇ C (R 1 ) COOR 2 is 50% by weight or less based on the total amount of the monofunctional monomer component forming the (meth) acrylic polymer. 45% by weight or less is preferable, 40% by weight or less is more preferable, and 35% by weight or less is more preferable.
  • copolymerization monomers include vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate, styrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene; (meth) acrylic acid polyethylene glycol, (meth) acrylic acid polypropylene glycol, (meth) acrylic acid methoxyethylene glycol, (meth) Glycol acrylic ester monomers such as methoxypolypropylene glycol acrylate; Acrylic ester monomers such as tetrahydrofurfuryl (meth) acrylate, fluorine (meth) acrylate, silicone (meth) acrylate and 2-methoxyethyl acrylate; Monomers, amino group-containing monomers, imide group-containing monomers, N-acryloylmorpholine, vinyl ether monomers and the like can also be used. Moreover, as a copolymerization monomer, the monomer which has cyclic structures, such as terpene (meth) acrylate and dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, can be used.
  • silane monomers containing silicon atoms examples include silane monomers containing silicon atoms.
  • examples of the silane monomer include 3-acryloxypropyltriethoxysilane, vinyltrimethoxysilane, vinyltriethoxysilane, 4-vinylbutyltrimethoxysilane, 4-vinylbutyltriethoxysilane, and 8-vinyloctyltrimethoxysilane.
  • the monomer component that forms the (meth) acrylic polymer of the present invention contains a polyfunctional monomer as necessary in order to adjust the cohesive strength of the pressure-sensitive adhesive, in addition to the monofunctional monomer exemplified above. be able to.
  • the polyfunctional monomer is a monomer having at least two polymerizable functional groups having an unsaturated double bond such as a (meth) acryloyl group or a vinyl group, such as (poly) ethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, (Poly) propylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol di (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, 1,2-ethylene Glycol di (meth) acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,12-dodecanediol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, tetramethylol methanetri (meth) acrylate Ester compounds of poly
  • trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, hexanediol di (meth) acrylate, and dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate can be preferably used.
  • a polyfunctional monomer can be used individually by 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types.
  • the amount of the polyfunctional monomer used varies depending on the molecular weight, the number of functional groups, etc., but it is preferably used at 3 parts by weight or less, more preferably 2 parts by weight or less, with respect to a total of 100 parts by weight of monofunctional monomers 1 part by weight or less is more preferable. Moreover, it does not specifically limit as a lower limit, However It is preferable that it is 0 weight part or more, and it is more preferable that it is 0.001 weight part or more. Adhesive force can be improved when the usage-amount of a polyfunctional monomer exists in the said range.
  • the production of the (meth) acrylic polymer can be appropriately selected from known production methods such as radiation polymerization such as solution polymerization and ultraviolet (UV) polymerization, various radical polymerizations such as bulk polymerization and emulsion polymerization. Further, the (meth) acrylic polymer obtained may be any of a random copolymer, a block copolymer, a graft copolymer, and the like.
  • a partial polymer of the monomer component can also be suitably used.
  • polymerization can be carried out by appropriately adding a polymerization initiator, a chain transfer agent, an emulsifier and the like used for radical polymerization to the monomer component.
  • the polymerization initiator, chain transfer agent, emulsifier and the like used for the radical polymerization are not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected and used.
  • the weight average molecular weight of a (meth) acrylic-type polymer can be controlled by the usage-amount of a polymerization initiator and a chain transfer agent, and reaction conditions, and the usage-amount is suitably adjusted according to these kinds.
  • solution polymerization for example, ethyl acetate, toluene or the like is used as a polymerization solvent.
  • the reaction is carried out in an inert gas stream such as nitrogen and a polymerization initiator is added, and the reaction is usually performed at about 50 to 70 ° C. under reaction conditions for about 5 to 30 hours.
  • thermal polymerization initiators used for solution polymerization include 2,2′-azobisisobutyronitrile, 2,2′-azobis-2-methylbutyronitrile, 2,2′-azobis (2 -Methylpropionic acid) dimethyl, 4,4'-azobis-4-cyanovaleric acid, azobisisovaleronitrile, 2,2'-azobis (2-amidinopropane) dihydrochloride, 2,2'-azobis [2- (5-Methyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl) propane] dihydrochloride, 2,2′-azobis (2-methylpropionamidine) disulfate, 2,2′-azobis (N, N′-dimethyleneisobutyl) Amidine), 2,2′-azobis [N- (2-carboxyethyl) -2-methylpropionamidine] hydrate (VA-057, Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) Azo initiators such as potassium persulfate, ammonium persulfate,
  • Examples include oxide initiators, redox initiators that combine a peroxide and a reducing agent, such as a combination of persulfate and sodium bisulfite, and a combination of peroxide and sodium ascorbate. It is not limited to.
  • the polymerization initiator may be used alone or in combination of two or more, but is preferably about 1 part by weight or less with respect to 100 parts by weight of the total amount of monomer components.
  • the amount is more preferably about 0.005 to 1 part by weight, and further preferably about 0.02 to 0.5 part by weight.
  • the amount of the polymerization initiator used is about 0.2 parts by weight or less with respect to 100 parts by weight of the total amount of monomer components.
  • the amount is preferably about 0.06 to 0.2 parts by weight.
  • chain transfer agent examples include lauryl mercaptan, glycidyl mercaptan, mercaptoacetic acid, 2-mercaptoethanol, thioglycolic acid, 2-ethylhexyl thioglycolate, and 2,3-dimercapto-1-propanol.
  • the chain transfer agent may be used alone or in combination of two or more, but the total content is 0.3 parts by weight relative to 100 parts by weight of the total amount of monomer components. Less than or equal to
  • emulsifier used in emulsion polymerization examples include anionic emulsifiers such as sodium lauryl sulfate, ammonium lauryl sulfate, sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate, ammonium polyoxyethylene alkyl ether sulfate, sodium polyoxyethylene alkylphenyl ether sulfate, and polyoxy Nonionic emulsifiers such as ethylene alkyl ether, polyoxyethylene alkyl phenyl ether, polyoxyethylene fatty acid ester, polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene block polymer and the like can be mentioned. These emulsifiers may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • reactive emulsifiers as emulsifiers into which radical polymerizable functional groups such as propenyl groups and allyl ether groups are introduced, specifically, for example, Aqualon HS-10, HS-20, KH-10, BC-05 BC-10, BC-20 (all of which are manufactured by Daiichi Kogyo Seiyaku Co., Ltd.), Adeka Soap SE10N (manufactured by ADEKA), and the like.
  • the amount of the emulsifier used is preferably 5 parts by weight or less with respect to 100 parts by weight of the total amount of the monomer components.
  • the (meth) acrylic polymer when produced by radiation polymerization, it can be produced by polymerizing the monomer component by irradiating the monomer component with radiation such as an electron beam or ultraviolet (UV). Among these, ultraviolet polymerization is preferable.
  • ultraviolet polymerization which is a preferable embodiment in radiation polymerization will be described.
  • the photopolymerization initiator examples include a photopolymerization initiator (B) having an absorption band at a wavelength of less than 400 nm. Moreover, it is preferable that a photoinitiator (B) does not have an absorption band in wavelength 400nm or more.
  • the photopolymerization initiator (B) is not particularly limited as long as it generates radicals by ultraviolet rays and starts photopolymerization and has an absorption band at a wavelength of less than 400 nm. Any initiator can be suitably used.
  • benzoin ether photopolymerization initiator acetophenone photopolymerization initiator, ⁇ -ketol photopolymerization initiator, photoactive oxime photopolymerization initiator, benzoin photopolymerization initiator, benzyl photopolymerization initiator, benzophenone A photopolymerization initiator, a ketal photopolymerization initiator, a thioxanthone photopolymerization initiator, an acylphosphine oxide photopolymerization initiator, or the like can be used.
  • examples of the benzoin ether photopolymerization initiator include benzoin methyl ether, benzoin ethyl ether, benzoin propyl ether, benzoin isopropyl ether, benzoin isobutyl ether, 2,2-dimethoxy-1,2-diphenylethane- Examples thereof include 1-one and anisole methyl ether.
  • acetophenone photopolymerization initiator examples include 2,2-diethoxyacetophenone, 2,2-dimethoxy-2-phenylacetophenone, 1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone, 4-phenoxydichloroacetophenone, and 4-t-butyldichloroacetophenone. Etc.
  • Examples of ⁇ -ketol photopolymerization initiators include 2-methyl-2-hydroxypropiophenone, 1- [4- (2-hydroxyethyl) phenyl] -2-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-1-one, and the like. Is mentioned.
  • Examples of the photoactive oxime photopolymerization initiator include 1-phenyl-1,2-propanedione-2- (O-ethoxycarbonyl) -oxime.
  • benzoin photopolymerization initiator examples include benzoin.
  • benzyl photopolymerization initiator examples include benzyl and the like.
  • benzophenone photopolymerization initiator examples include benzophenone, benzoylbenzoic acid, 3,3′-dimethyl-4-methoxybenzophenone, polyvinylbenzophenone, ⁇ -hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone, and the like.
  • Ketal photopolymerization initiators include benzyl dimethyl ketal and the like.
  • thioxanthone photopolymerization initiator examples include thioxanthone, 2-chlorothioxanthone, 2-methylthioxanthone, 2,4-dimethylthioxanthone, isopropylthioxanthone, 2,4-dichlorothioxanthone, 2,4-diethylthioxanthone, 2,4 -Diisopropylthioxanthone, dodecylthioxanthone and the like are included.
  • acylphosphine oxide photopolymerization initiator examples include 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl-diphenyl-phosphine oxide, bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) -phenylphosphine oxide, and the like.
  • the photopolymerization initiator (B) having an absorption band at a wavelength of less than 400 nm can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the photopolymerization initiator (B) having an absorption band at a wavelength of less than 400 nm can be added within a range that does not impair the effects of the present invention, and the addition amount is a monofunctional that forms a (meth) acrylic polymer.
  • the amount is preferably about 0.005 to 0.5 part by weight, more preferably about 0.02 to 0.1 part by weight based on 100 parts by weight of the monomeric monomer component.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer contains a dye compound (further, an ultraviolet absorber) and ultraviolet polymerization is performed, for example, the monomer component containing the alkyl (meth) acrylate and / or the monomer component It is preferably formed by ultraviolet polymerization of a UV curable acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing a partial polymer, a dye compound (and UV absorber), and a photopolymerization initiator. Since the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed by ultraviolet polymerization of the ultraviolet curable acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition can be formed to have a thickness of 150 ⁇ m or more, and a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having a wide thickness can be formed. preferable.
  • the photopolymerization initiator preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator (A) having an absorption band at a wavelength of 400 nm or longer.
  • a photopolymerization initiator (A) having an absorption band at a wavelength of 400 nm or longer When the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition contains a dye compound (moreover, an ultraviolet absorber), when ultraviolet polymerization is performed, the dye compound (further, the ultraviolet absorber) absorbs ultraviolet rays, and there are cases where the polymerization cannot be sufficiently performed.
  • the photopolymerization initiator (A) having an absorption band at a wavelength of 400 nm or more is preferable because it can be sufficiently polymerized even if it contains a dye compound (and an ultraviolet absorber).
  • photopolymerization initiator (A) having an absorption band at a wavelength of 400 nm or more bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) -phenylphosphine oxide (Irgacure 819, manufactured by BASF), 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl- And diphenyl-phosphine oxide (LUCIRIN TPO, manufactured by BASF).
  • the photopolymerization initiator (A) having an absorption band at a wavelength of 400 nm or more may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the addition amount of the photopolymerization initiator (A) having an absorption band at a wavelength of 400 nm or more is not particularly limited, but is preferably less than the addition amount of the dye compound (and also the ultraviolet absorber).
  • the amount of the monofunctional monomer component forming the (meth) acrylic polymer is preferably about 0.005 to 1 part by weight and preferably about 0.02 to 0.8 part by weight. More preferred. It is preferable that the amount of the photopolymerization initiator (A) added is in the above range because ultraviolet polymerization can sufficiently proceed.
  • the photopolymerization initiator (B) having an absorption band at a wavelength of less than 400 nm is included in the monomer component.
  • a photopolymerization initiator (A) having an absorption band at a wavelength of 400 nm or more, a dye compound (further added to the partial polymerization product (prepolymer composition) of the monomer component previously added and partially polymerized by irradiation with ultraviolet rays are preferably subjected to ultraviolet polymerization by adding an ultraviolet absorber.
  • the photopolymerization initiator (A) having an absorption band at a wavelength of 400 nm or more is added to the partial polymerization product (prepolymer composition) of the monomer component partially polymerized by ultraviolet irradiation, the photopolymerization is started. It is preferable to add the agent after dissolving it in the monomer.
  • a rubber polymer is public as a base polymer.
  • Rubber polymers are conjugated diene polymers obtained by polymerizing one kind of conjugated diene compound, conjugated diene copolymers obtained by polymerizing two or more kinds of conjugated diene compounds, conjugated diene compounds and aromatics.
  • a conjugated diene copolymer obtained by copolymerizing with an aromatic vinyl compound can be included.
  • these hydrogenated materials can also be used suitably.
  • the diene copolymer may be a random copolymer or a block copolymer, and may be a copolymer of a compound other than a conjugated diene compound or an aromatic vinyl compound.
  • conjugated diene (co) polymers include butadiene rubber (BR), isoprene rubber (IR), styrene-butadiene copolymer (SBR), and butadiene-isoprene-styrene random copolymer.
  • BR butadiene rubber
  • IR isoprene rubber
  • SBR styrene-butadiene copolymer
  • NBR acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber
  • these can be used alone or in combination of two or more. Of these, isoprene-styrene copolymers are preferred.
  • these hydrogenated materials can also be used suitably.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition of the present invention can contain a silane coupling agent.
  • the amount of the silane coupling agent is preferably 1 part by weight or less, more preferably 0.01 to 1 part by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the base polymer (for example, the (meth) acrylic polymer). More preferred is 0.02 to 0.6 parts by weight.
  • silane coupling agent examples include 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropyltriethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, 2- (3,4 epoxy cyclohexyl).
  • Epoxy group-containing silane coupling agents such as ethyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, N-2- (aminoethyl) -3-aminopropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-triethoxysilyl-N- (1, (3-dimethylbutylidene) propylamine, amino group-containing silane coupling agents such as N-phenyl- ⁇ -aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-acryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropyltriethoxysilane ( (Meth) acrylic group-containing sila Coupling agents, such as isocyanate group-containing silane coupling agents such as 3-isocyanate propyl triethoxysilane and the like.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition of the present invention can contain a crosslinking agent.
  • crosslinking agents include isocyanate crosslinking agents, epoxy crosslinking agents, silicone crosslinking agents, oxazoline crosslinking agents, aziridine crosslinking agents, silane crosslinking agents, alkyletherified melamine crosslinking agents, metal chelate crosslinking agents, Crosslinkers such as oxides are included.
  • a crosslinking agent can be used alone or in combination of two or more. Among these, an isocyanate type crosslinking agent is preferably used.
  • the crosslinking agent may be used alone or in combination of two or more, but the total content is a monofunctional monomer that forms a (meth) acrylic polymer.
  • the amount is preferably 5 parts by weight or less, more preferably 0.01 to 5 parts by weight, still more preferably 0.01 to 4 parts by weight, and 0.02 to 3 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the component. Particularly preferred.
  • the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent refers to a compound having two or more isocyanate groups (including an isocyanate-regenerating functional group in which the isocyanate group is temporarily protected by a blocking agent or quantification) in one molecule.
  • the isocyanate-based crosslinking agent include aromatic isocyanates such as tolylene diisocyanate and xylene diisocyanate, alicyclic isocyanates such as isophorone diisocyanate, and aliphatic isocyanates such as hexamethylene diisocyanate.
  • lower aliphatic polyisocyanates such as butylene diisocyanate and hexamethylene diisocyanate
  • alicyclic isocyanates such as cyclopentylene diisocyanate, cyclohexylene diisocyanate and isophorone diisocyanate
  • 2,4-tolylene diisocyanate Aromatic diisocyanates such as 4,4'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, xylylene diisocyanate, polymethylene polyphenyl isocyanate, trimethylolpropane / tolylene diisocyanate trimer adduct (trade name: Coronate L, manufactured by Nippon Polyurethane Industry Co., Ltd.) ), Trimethylolpropane / hexamethylene diisocyanate trimer adduct (trade name: Coronate HL, manufactured by Nippon Polyurethane Industry Co., Ltd.), hexamethyle Isocyan
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition of the present invention may contain appropriate additives in addition to the above components depending on the application.
  • tackifiers for example, rosin derivative resins, polyterpene resins, petroleum resins, oil-soluble phenol resins, etc., solid, semi-solid, or liquid at room temperature
  • fillers such as hollow glass balloons; plasticizers; aging An antioxidant; an antioxidant; a light stabilizer (HALS) and the like.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is adjusted to a viscosity suitable for work such as coating on a substrate. Adjustment of the viscosity of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is performed, for example, by adding various polymers such as thickening additives, polyfunctional monomers, or the like, or by partially polymerizing the monomer components in the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition. The partial polymerization may be performed before or after adding various polymers such as thickening additives, polyfunctional monomers, and the like.
  • the viscosity of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition varies depending on the amount of the additive and the like, the polymerization rate when the monomer component in the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is partially polymerized cannot be uniquely determined, but as a guideline, it is about 20% or less. It is preferably about 3 to 20%, more preferably about 5 to 15%. If it exceeds 20%, the viscosity becomes too high, so that it is difficult to apply to the substrate.
  • the method for forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is not particularly limited, and can be formed by a method usually used in this field. Specifically, the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is applied to at least one surface of the substrate, and a coating film formed from the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is formed by drying, or irradiated with active energy rays such as ultraviolet rays. Can be formed. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed on the substrate can be transferred to a polarizing film or the like.
  • the substrate is not particularly limited, and for example, various substrates such as a release film and a transparent resin film substrate, and a polarizing film described later can also be suitably used as the substrate.
  • constituent material of the release film examples include resin films such as polyethylene, polypropylene, polyethylene terephthalate, and polyester films, porous materials such as paper, cloth, and nonwoven fabric, nets, foam sheets, metal foils, and laminates thereof. Suitable thin leaf bodies and the like can be mentioned, but a resin film is suitably used from the viewpoint of excellent surface smoothness.
  • the resin film examples include polyethylene film, polypropylene film, polybutene film, polybutadiene film, polymethylpentene film, polyvinyl chloride film, vinyl chloride copolymer film, polyethylene terephthalate film, polybutylene terephthalate film, polyurethane film, and ethylene.
  • -Vinyl acetate copolymer film and the like examples include polyethylene film, polypropylene film, polybutene film, polybutadiene film, polymethylpentene film, polyvinyl chloride film, vinyl chloride copolymer film, polyethylene terephthalate film, polybutylene terephthalate film, polyurethane film, and ethylene.
  • -Vinyl acetate copolymer film and the like examples include polyethylene film, polypropylene film, polybutene film, polybutadiene film, polymethylpentene film, polyvinyl chloride film, vinyl chloride copolymer film, polyethylene terephthal
  • the thickness of the release film is usually 5 to 200 ⁇ m, preferably about 5 to 100 ⁇ m.
  • release agent and antifouling treatment with silicone-based, fluorine-based, long-chain alkyl-based or fatty acid amide-based release agent, silica powder, etc., coating type, kneading type, An antistatic treatment such as a vapor deposition type can also be performed.
  • the release property from the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be further improved by appropriately performing a release treatment such as silicone treatment, long-chain alkyl treatment, or fluorine treatment on the surface of the release film.
  • the transparent resin film substrate is not particularly limited, and various resin films having transparency are used.
  • the resin film is formed of a single layer film.
  • the materials include polyester resins such as polyethylene terephthalate and polyethylene naphthalate, acetate resins, polyethersulfone resins, polycarbonate resins, polyamide resins, polyimide resins, polyolefin resins, (meth) acrylic resins.
  • polyester resins, polyimide resins and polyethersulfone resins are particularly preferable.
  • the thickness of the film substrate is preferably 15 to 200 ⁇ m, and more preferably 25 to 188 ⁇ m.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is applied onto the substrate by roll coating, kiss roll coating, gravure coating, reverse coating, roll brushing, spray coating, dip roll coating, bar coating, knife coating, air knife coating, curtain.
  • a known and appropriate method such as a coat, a lip coat, or a die coater can be used and is not particularly limited.
  • the drying conditions are not particularly limited, and the composition of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition,
  • the concentration can be appropriately set depending on the concentration or the like, and is, for example, about 60 to 170 ° C., preferably 60 to 150 ° C., for 1 to 60 minutes, preferably 2 to 30 minutes.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is an ultraviolet curable pressure-sensitive adhesive composition and is formed by irradiating a coating film formed from the ultraviolet-curable pressure-sensitive adhesive composition with ultraviolet rays
  • the illuminance of the irradiated ultraviolet rays is 5 mW / cm 2 or more is preferable.
  • the illuminance of the ultraviolet light is less than 5 mW / cm 2 , the polymerization reaction time becomes long and the productivity may be inferior.
  • the illuminance of the ultraviolet light is preferably 200 mW / cm 2 or less.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is consumed rapidly, so that the polymer has a low molecular weight, and the holding power particularly at high temperatures may be reduced.
  • the integrated quantity of ultraviolet light is preferably 100mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 5000mJ / cm 2.
  • the ultraviolet lamp used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but an LED lamp is preferable. Since the LED lamp has a lower emission heat than other ultraviolet lamps, the temperature during polymerization of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be suppressed. Therefore, the molecular weight reduction of the polymer can be prevented, the cohesive strength of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be prevented from being lowered, and the holding power at a high temperature when the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is used can be increased. It is also possible to combine a plurality of ultraviolet lamps. Further, it is possible to intermittently irradiate ultraviolet rays, and to provide a light period in which ultraviolet rays are irradiated and a dark period in which ultraviolet rays are not irradiated.
  • the final polymerization rate of the monomer component in the ultraviolet curable pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is preferably 90% or more, more preferably 95% or more, and still more preferably 98% or more.
  • the peak wavelength of ultraviolet rays irradiated to the ultraviolet curable pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is preferably in the range of 200 to 500 nm, and more preferably in the range of 300 to 450 nm.
  • the peak wavelength of ultraviolet rays exceeds 500 nm, the photopolymerization initiator may not be decomposed and the polymerization reaction may not start.
  • the peak wavelength of the ultraviolet light is less than 200 nm, the polymer chain may be cut and the adhesive properties may be deteriorated.
  • a release film or the like is formed on the coating film formed from the ultraviolet curable acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition to block oxygen, or the photopolymerization reaction is performed by nitrogen. It is preferable to carry out in an atmosphere.
  • the above-mentioned thing can be mentioned as a release film.
  • the said release film can be used as a separator of a polarizing film with an adhesive layer as it is.
  • the ultraviolet curable adhesive composition used by this invention contains a pigment
  • the composition containing the “addition polymerization initiator” may be irradiated with ultraviolet rays to form a partial polymer of the monomer component, and the partial polymer of the monomer component is converted into a dye compound (and an ultraviolet absorber).
  • a photopolymerization initiator (A) having an absorption band at a wavelength of 400 nm or more (sometimes referred to as “post-addition polymerization initiator”) to prepare an ultraviolet curable pressure-sensitive adhesive composition.
  • the polymerization rate of the partially polymerized product is preferably about 20% or less, more preferably about 3 to 20%, and further preferably about 5 to 15%.
  • the ultraviolet irradiation conditions are as described above.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is formed from the ultraviolet curable pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing the dye compound (and also the ultraviolet absorber), the polymerization rate of the monomer component is increased by polymerizing in two steps as described above. In addition, the ultraviolet absorbing function of the finally produced pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be improved.
  • the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is preferably 12 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 50 ⁇ m or more, further preferably 100 ⁇ m or more, and particularly preferably 150 ⁇ m or more.
  • the upper limit of the thickness of an adhesive layer is not specifically limited, It is preferable that it is 1 mm or less. When the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer exceeds 1 mm, it becomes difficult to transmit ultraviolet rays, and it takes time to polymerize the monomer component, and causes problems in workability, winding in the process, and transportability, resulting in poor productivity. This is not preferable.
  • the gel fraction of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer of the present invention is not particularly limited, but is preferably 35% or more, more preferably 50% or more, and further preferably 75% or more, It is particularly preferably 85% or more. When the gel fraction of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is small, there may be a problem in workability and handling properties.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer preferably has a haze value measured at a thickness of 25 ⁇ m of 2% or less, more preferably from 0 to 1.5%, and even more preferably from 0 to 1.0%. It is preferable that the haze is in the above range because the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer has high transparency.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer When the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is exposed, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be protected with a release film until practical use.
  • Polarizing film examples include those having a transparent protective film on at least one surface of a polarizer.
  • Polarizer 4 The polarizer is not particularly limited, and various types can be used.
  • polarizers include dichroic iodine and dichroic dyes on hydrophilic polymer films such as polyvinyl alcohol films, partially formalized polyvinyl alcohol films, and ethylene / vinyl acetate copolymer partially saponified films.
  • hydrophilic polymer films such as polyvinyl alcohol films, partially formalized polyvinyl alcohol films, and ethylene / vinyl acetate copolymer partially saponified films.
  • examples thereof include polyene-based oriented films such as those obtained by adsorbing substances and uniaxially stretched, polyvinyl alcohol dehydrated products and polyvinyl chloride dehydrochlorinated products.
  • a polarizer composed of a polyvinyl alcohol film and a dichroic substance such as iodine is preferable.
  • the thickness of these polarizers is not particularly limited, but is generally about 5 to 80 ⁇ m.
  • a polarizer obtained by dyeing a polyvinyl alcohol film with iodine and uniaxially stretching it can be produced, for example, by dyeing polyvinyl alcohol in an aqueous iodine solution and stretching it 3 to 7 times the original length. If necessary, it can be immersed in an aqueous solution of potassium iodide or the like which may contain boric acid, zinc sulfate, zinc chloride or the like. Further, if necessary, the polyvinyl alcohol film may be immersed in water and washed before dyeing.
  • the polyvinyl alcohol film In addition to washing the polyvinyl alcohol film surface with stains and antiblocking agents by washing the polyvinyl alcohol film with water, the polyvinyl alcohol film is also swollen to prevent unevenness such as uneven coloring. is there. Stretching may be performed after dyeing with iodine, may be performed while dyeing, or may be dyed with iodine after stretching. The film can be stretched even in an aqueous solution of boric acid or potassium iodide or in a water bath.
  • a thin polarizer having a thickness of 10 ⁇ m or less can also be used.
  • the thickness is preferably 1 to 7 ⁇ m.
  • Such a thin polarizer is preferable in that the thickness unevenness is small, the visibility is excellent, the dimensional change is small, the durability is excellent, and the thickness of the polarizing film can be reduced.
  • the thin polarizer typically, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 51-069644, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-338329, International Publication No. 2010/100917, International Publication No. 2010/100917, or a patent.
  • the thin polarizing film described in the specification of 4751481 and Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-0753563 can be mentioned.
  • These thin polarizing films can be obtained by a production method including a step of stretching and dyeing a polyvinyl alcohol-based resin (hereinafter also referred to as PVA-based resin) layer and a stretching resin substrate in the state of a laminate. With this production method, even if the PVA-based resin layer is thin, it can be stretched without problems such as breakage due to stretching by being supported by the stretching resin substrate.
  • PVA-based resin polyvinyl alcohol-based resin
  • International Publication No. 2010/100917 pamphlet in that it can be stretched at a high magnification and the polarization performance can be improved among the production methods including the step of stretching in the state of a laminate and the step of dyeing.
  • those obtained by a production method including a step of stretching in an aqueous boric acid solution as described in International Publication No. 2010/100917 pamphlet or Japanese Patent No. 47514881 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-0753563 are preferable.
  • Those obtained by a production method including a step of stretching in the air before stretching in a boric acid aqueous solution described in the specification of 4751481 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-0753563 are preferable.
  • a transparent protective film formed from a material (base polymer) excellent in transparency, mechanical strength, thermal stability, moisture barrier property, isotropy, etc. is preferable.
  • a material (base polymer) excellent in transparency, mechanical strength, thermal stability, moisture barrier property, isotropy, etc. is preferable.
  • base polymer polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, etc.
  • polyethylene, polypropylene, polyolefins having a cyclo or norbornene structure polyolefin polymers such as ethylene / propylene copolymers, vinyl chloride polymers, amide polymers such as nylon and aromatic polyamide, imide polymers, sulfone polymers , Polyether sulfone polymer, polyether ether ketone polymer, polyphenylene sulfide polymer, vinyl alcohol polymer, vinylidene chloride polymer, vinyl butyral polymer, arylate polymer, polyoxymethylene polymer, epoxy polymer, or Examples of the polymer that forms the transparent protective film include polymer blends.
  • the transparent protective film can also be formed as a cured layer of thermosetting or ultraviolet curable resin such as acrylic, urethane, acrylurethane, epoxy, and silicone.
  • the thickness of the transparent protective film can be appropriately determined, but is generally about 1 to 500 ⁇ m from the viewpoints of workability such as strength and handleability, and thin film properties.
  • the polarizer and the transparent protective film are preferably in close contact with each other through an aqueous adhesive or the like.
  • the water-based adhesive include an isocyanate-based adhesive, a polyvinyl alcohol-based adhesive, a gelatin-based adhesive, a vinyl-based latex, a water-based polyurethane, and a water-based polyester.
  • the adhesive between the polarizer and the transparent protective film include an ultraviolet curable adhesive and an electron beam curable adhesive.
  • the electron beam curable polarizing film adhesive exhibits suitable adhesiveness with respect to the various viewing-side transparent protective films.
  • the adhesive used in the present invention can contain a metal compound filler.
  • (1-2-4) Surface treatment layer functional layer A functional layer such as a hard coat layer, an antireflection layer, or an antisticking layer can be formed on the surface of the transparent protective film to which the polarizer is not adhered. It may be subjected to a treatment for diffusion or anti-glare.
  • a functional layer such as a hard coat layer, an antireflection layer, or an antisticking layer can be formed on the surface of the transparent protective film to which the polarizer is not adhered. It may be subjected to a treatment for diffusion or anti-glare.
  • the hard coat layer for example, a cured film made of a curable resin having a base polymer of melamine resin, urethane resin, alkyd resin, acrylic resin, silicone resin, or the like is preferably used.
  • the curable resin can be used as an active energy ray-curable compound having a functional group having at least one polymerizable double bond in the molecule.
  • the thickness of the hard coat layer is preferably 0.1 to 30 ⁇ m.
  • HALS light stabilizer
  • nx ny includes not only the case where nx and ny are completely the same, but also the case where nx and ny are substantially the same.
  • ny nz includes not only the case where ny and nz are completely the same, but also the case where ny and nz are substantially the same.
  • the retardation film is preferably a 1 ⁇ 4 wavelength plate with a front retardation of 1 ⁇ 4 wavelength (about 100 to 170 nm).
  • Lamination of the polarizing film and the quarter wave plate is preferable because it functions as a circularly polarizing film for preventing reflection of an organic EL display device.
  • This linearly polarized light is generally elliptically polarized light by the retardation film, but becomes circularly polarized light particularly when the retardation film is a quarter wavelength plate and the angle formed by the polarization direction with the retardation film is ⁇ / 4.
  • This circularly polarized light is transmitted through the transparent substrate, transparent electrode and organic thin film in the organic EL panel, reflected by the metal electrode, again transmitted through the organic thin film, transparent electrode and transparent substrate, and again linearly polarized by the retardation film. It becomes. And since this linearly polarized light is orthogonal to the polarization direction of a polarizing film, it cannot permeate
  • the retardation film examples include a birefringent film obtained by uniaxially or biaxially stretching a polymer material, a liquid crystal polymer alignment film, and a liquid crystal polymer alignment layer supported by the film.
  • polymer material examples include polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl butyral, polymethyl vinyl ether, polyhydroxyethyl acrylate, hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, methyl cellulose, polycarbonate, polyarylate, polysulfone, polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, Polyethersulfone, polyphenylene sulfide, polyphenylene oxide, polyallylsulfone, polyamide, polyimide, polyolefin, polyvinyl chloride, cellulose polymer, cycloolefin resin, or a binary or ternary copolymer thereof, Examples include graft copolymers and blends. These polymer materials become an oriented product (stretched film) by stretching or the like.
  • liquid crystal polymer examples include various main chain types and side chain types in which a conjugated linear atomic group (mesogen) imparting liquid crystal alignment is introduced into the main chain or side chain of the polymer.
  • main chain type liquid crystal polymer examples include a nematic alignment polyester liquid crystal polymer, a discotic polymer, and a cholesteric polymer having a structure in which a mesogenic group is bonded to a spacer portion that imparts flexibility.
  • the side chain type liquid crystal polymer include polysiloxane, polyacrylate, polymethacrylate, or polymalonate as a main chain skeleton, and a nematic alignment-providing para-substitution through a spacer portion composed of a conjugated atomic group as a side chain.
  • examples thereof include those having a mesogenic part composed of a cyclic compound unit.
  • These liquid crystal polymers are prepared by, for example, applying a solution of a liquid crystalline polymer on an alignment treatment surface such as a surface of a thin film such as polyimide or polyvinyl alcohol formed on a glass plate or an oblique deposition of silicon oxide. This is done by developing and heat treatment.
  • Adhesive layer 6 interlayer adhesive layer (or adhesive layer)
  • Examples of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 6 (pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on the organic EL panel side) used in the present invention include an interlayer pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (or adhesive layer) and the same pressure-sensitive adhesive layer as the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
  • an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed from a (meth) acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition having a (meth) acrylic polymer as a base polymer is preferable.
  • a rubber pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed from a rubber-based pressure-sensitive adhesive composition having a rubber-based polymer as a base polymer can be preferably applied.
  • the manufacturing method of a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, a preferable aspect, and the like can be exemplified.
  • the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably about 10 to 75 ⁇ m, and more preferably about 12 to 50 ⁇ m.
  • Examples of the (organic EL panel side) transparent protective film include those similar to the transparent protective film 3, and the organic EL panel side first pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (or adhesive) As the layer), any pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and adhesive layer in the present specification can be suitably used.
  • the transmittance at a wavelength of 380 nm of the optical member (each layer) formed from the composition of the present invention is preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less, and further preferably 7% or less. 3% or less is particularly preferable. Since the transmittance at a wavelength of 380 nm is in the above range, incident ultraviolet rays can be blocked to a higher degree, and thus the deterioration of the organic EL element can be remarkably suppressed.
  • the transmittance at a wavelength of 400 nm of the optical member (each layer) formed from the composition of the present invention is preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less, and further preferably 7% or less. Preferably, it is particularly preferably 3% or less. Since the transmittance at a wavelength of 400 nm is in the above range, incident ultraviolet rays can be blocked to a higher degree, and thus the deterioration of the organic EL element can be remarkably suppressed.
  • the transmittance at a wavelength of 440 nm of the optical member (each layer) formed from the composition of the present invention is preferably 60% or more, more preferably 75% or more, and more preferably 85% or more. preferable.
  • the transmittance at a wavelength of 440 nm is within the above range, it is preferable because the light emission of the organic EL element can be sufficiently transmitted and sufficient display performance can be secured in the organic EL display device.
  • the transmittance at a wavelength of 380 nm of the optical layered body is preferably 9% or less, more preferably 7% or less, further preferably 5% or less, and particularly preferably 3% or less. . Since the transmittance at a wavelength of 380 nm is within the above range, it is preferable because incident ultraviolet rays can be blocked to a higher degree and deterioration of the organic EL element can be remarkably suppressed.
  • the transmittance of the optical layered body at a wavelength of 400 nm is preferably 20% or less, preferably 15% or less, and more preferably 10% or less.
  • the transmittance at a wavelength of 400 nm is in the above range, it is preferable because incident ultraviolet rays can be blocked to a higher degree and deterioration of the organic EL element can be remarkably suppressed.
  • the transmittance of the optical laminate at a wavelength of 440 nm is preferably 25% or more, preferably 30% or more, and more preferably 33% or more.
  • the transmittance at a wavelength of 440 nm is within the above range, it is preferable because the light emission of the organic EL element can be sufficiently transmitted and sufficient display performance can be secured in the organic EL display device.
  • the organic EL display device of the present invention includes the optical laminate 1 and an organic EL panel, and can also include other layers. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, from the viewing side, cover member 7 / adhesive layer 2 / protective film 3 / polarizer 4 / retardation film 5 / adhesive layer 6 / organic EL panel 8 The organic EL display device 10 laminated in this order is preferable, and cover member 7 / adhesive layer 2 / (viewing side) protective film 3 / polarizer 4 / organic EL panel side protective film / organic EL panel side first adhesive.
  • An organic EL display device in which an agent layer (or adhesive layer) / retardation film 5 / (organic EL panel side second) pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 6 / organic EL panel 8 are laminated in this order can also be exemplified.
  • functional layers such as a hard coat layer, an antiglare treatment layer, an antireflection layer, a sensor layer, a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer or an adhesive layer for laminating them, and the like can be mentioned. it can.
  • the cover member is not particularly limited, and those normally used in this field can be suitably used, and examples thereof include cover glass and cover plastic.
  • the organic EL panel is not particularly limited, and those normally used in this field can be suitably used. For example, a plurality of base materials and a plurality of side by side provided on the base material can be used. The panel which has the organic EL element of this, the protective layer provided on the said organic EL element, and the sealing film provided on the said protective layer can be mentioned.
  • the transparent conductive film includes a transparent base film and a transparent conductive layer.
  • the transparent conductive film 20 for example, a transparent conductive layer 22 / intermediate layer 23 / transparent substrate film 21 laminated in this order can be exemplified.
  • the intermediate layer 23 can be arbitrarily provided. Examples of the intermediate layer include a refractive index adjusting layer, an easy-adhesive layer, a hard coat layer, a cracking prevention layer, and the like, and at least one selected from these can be used.
  • the optical member containing the compound represented by the general formula (1) of the present invention can be used as a transparent substrate film or an intermediate layer forming the transparent conductive film.
  • the anti-blocking layer 24 can be provided in the transparent conductive film 20 in the transparent base film 21 in the side in which the transparent conductive layer 22 is not provided.
  • the anti-blocking layer can be used as an optical member containing the compound represented by the general formula (1) of the present invention.
  • Aspect 1 Transparent conductive layer 22 / intermediate layer 23 (refractive index adjusting layer) / transparent substrate film 21 / anti-blocking layer 24.
  • Aspect 2 Transparent conductive layer 22 / intermediate layer 23 (refractive index adjusting layer / hard coat layer) / transparent substrate film 21 / anti-blocking layer 24
  • Aspect 3 Transparent conductive layer 22 / intermediate layer 23 (crack prevention layer) / transparent substrate film 21 / anti-blocking layer 24
  • Aspect 4 Transparent conductive layer 22 / intermediate layer 23 (crack prevention layer / adhesive layer) / transparent substrate film 21 / anti-blocking layer 24
  • Aspect 5 Transparent conductive layer 22 / intermediate layer 23 (refractive index adjusting layer / hard coat layer / adhesive layer) / transparent substrate film 21 / anti-blocking layer 24.
  • the optical member containing the compound represented by the general formula (1) of the present invention is preferably used as a transparent base film or an intermediate layer forming the transparent conductive film.
  • scratch resistance is caused by a problem with the adhesion of the anti-blocking particles in the anti-blocking layer. It may be difficult to secure.
  • (2-1) Transparent base film 21 Although it does not restrict
  • the material (base polymer) polyester resins such as polyethylene terephthalate and polyethylene naphthalate, acetate resins, polyethersulfone resins, polycarbonate resins, polyamide resins, polyimide resins, polyolefin resins, polynorbornene
  • Polycycloolefin resins such as resin, (meth) acrylic resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, polyvinylidene chloride resin, polystyrene resin, polyvinyl alcohol resin, polyarylate resin, polyphenylene sulfide resin, etc. It is done. Among these, polycycloolefin resins, polyester resins, polycarbonate resins, and polyolefin resins are particularly preferable.
  • the thickness of the transparent base film is usually preferably 30 to 250 ⁇ m, more preferably 45 to 200 ⁇ m.
  • the constituent material of the transparent conductive layer is not particularly limited and is at least selected from the group consisting of indium, tin, zinc, gallium, antimony, titanium, silicon, zirconium, magnesium, aluminum, gold, silver, copper, palladium, tungsten.
  • One metal metal oxide is used.
  • the metal oxide may further contain a metal atom shown in the above group, if necessary.
  • ITO indium oxide
  • ATO tin oxide
  • the thickness of the transparent conductive layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 nm or more in order to obtain a continuous film having a good electrical resistance of 1 ⁇ 10 3 ⁇ / ⁇ or less.
  • the film thickness is preferably 15 to 35 nm, more preferably in the range of 20 to 30 nm, since transparency is lowered when the film thickness becomes too thick.
  • the method for forming the transparent conductive layer is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known method can be employed. Specifically, for example, a vacuum deposition method, a sputtering method, and an ion plating method can be exemplified. In addition, an appropriate method can be adopted depending on the required film thickness. In addition, after forming the transparent conductive layer, it can be crystallized by performing an annealing treatment within a range of 100 to 150 ° C., if necessary.
  • the refractive index adjusting layer can be formed of an inorganic material, an organic material, or a mixture of an inorganic material and an organic material.
  • an inorganic material for example, NaF (1.3), Na 3 AlF 6 (1.35), LiF (1.36), MgF 2 (1.38), CaF 2 (1.4), BaF 2 (1. 3), inorganic materials such as SiO 2 (1.46), LaF 3 (1.55), CeF 3 (1.63), Al 2 O 3 (1.63) [the numerical values in parentheses for the above materials are It is the refractive index of light].
  • organic substances examples include acrylic resins, urethane resins, melamine resins, alkyd resins, siloxane polymers, and organic silane condensates, and these organic substances can be used as a base polymer. At least one of these base polymers is used.
  • the refractive index adjusting layer may have nanoparticles having an average particle diameter of 1 nm to 500 nm, preferably 5 nm to 300 nm.
  • the content of the nanoparticles in the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably 0.1% to 90% by weight, more preferably 10% to 80% by weight, and still more preferably 20% to 70% by weight.
  • Examples of the inorganic oxide forming the nano fine particles include fine particles such as silicon oxide (silica), hollow nano silica, titanium oxide, aluminum oxide, zinc oxide, tin oxide, and zirconium oxide. Among these, fine particles of silicon oxide (silica), titanium oxide, aluminum oxide, zinc oxide, tin oxide, and zirconium oxide are preferable. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the thickness of the refractive index adjusting layer is not particularly limited, but it is usually preferably 10 nm to 200 nm, preferably 20 nm to 200 nm, from the viewpoint of optical design and the effect of preventing oligomer generation from the transparent substrate film. It is more preferably 150 nm, and further preferably 20 nm to 130 nm.
  • intermediate layer 23 hard coat layer
  • the hard coat layer is formed of a coating liquid containing an organic component (base polymer) or the like, and the hard coat layer is a coating containing an organic component (base polymer) or the like.
  • the thickness of the hard coat layer is not particularly limited, it is preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or more and 3 ⁇ m or less, and more preferably 0.8 ⁇ m or more and 2 ⁇ m or less.
  • the organic component is not particularly limited, and an ultraviolet curable resin, a thermosetting resin, a thermoplastic resin, or the like is used. From the viewpoint of suppressing the processing speed and thermal damage to the transparent substrate film, it is particularly preferable to use an ultraviolet curable resin.
  • an ultraviolet curable resin for example, a curable compound having at least one of an acrylate group and a methacrylate group that is cured by light (ultraviolet rays) can be used.
  • curable compound examples include acrylates and methacrylates of polyfunctional compounds such as silicone resins, polyester resins, polyether resins, epoxy resins, urethane resins, alkyd resins, spiroacetal resins, polybutadiene resins, polythiol polyene resins, and polyhydric alcohols. Oligomers or prepolymers. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the hard coat layer can contain an inorganic component.
  • the inorganic component include fine particles or fine powders of inorganic oxides such as silicon oxide (silica), titanium oxide, aluminum oxide, zinc oxide, tin oxide, and zirconium oxide.
  • the inorganic component is preferably a nanoparticle having a mode particle diameter of 1 nm to 100 nm, more preferably a nanoparticle in the range of 5 nm to 80 nm, from the viewpoint of coloring prevention and transparency of the hard coat layer. More preferred are nanoparticles in the range of 10 nm to 60 nm.
  • the mode particle size of the nanoparticles is small, it is difficult for visible light to scatter, and even if the refractive index of the organic component and the nanoparticles is different, the haze of the hard coat layer is greatly increased. Is suppressed.
  • the hard coat layer may contain coarse particles having a particle size larger than that of the nanoparticles for the purpose of controlling surface irregularities and optical properties in addition to or in place of the nanoparticles.
  • the mode particle diameter of the coarse particles needs to consider the relationship with the thickness of the hard coat layer, it is preferably in the range of 0.5 ⁇ m to 3.0 ⁇ m, and preferably 1.0 ⁇ m to 2.5 ⁇ m. Is more preferably 1.5 ⁇ m to 2.0 ⁇ m.
  • various additives can be added to the hard coat layer forming material.
  • the additive include a polymerization initiator for curing an organic component to form a hard coat layer, a leveling agent, a pigment, a filler, a dispersant, a plasticizer, an ultraviolet absorber, a surfactant, and an antioxidant.
  • Thixotropic agents and the like can be used.
  • the material for forming the hard coat layer can appropriately contain a solvent.
  • the thickness of the crack prevention layer is not particularly limited, but is 150 nm or less, preferably about 20 to 100 nm, from the viewpoints of heat and humidity resistance, the effect of preventing oligomer generation from the transparent resin film 1 and optical characteristics. More preferably, the thickness is 30 to 50 nm. When two or more crack prevention layers 2 are provided, the thickness of each layer is about 20 to 60 nm, preferably 25 to 55 nm.
  • a crack preventing layer obtained by curing a resin composition containing an epoxy resin having a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or more can be used.
  • the epoxy resin is preferably a rubber-modified epoxy resin. Thereby, toughness and impact resistance can be suitably imparted to the crack prevention layer.
  • the rubber component for modifying the epoxy resin is not particularly limited.
  • butadiene rubber acrylonitrile butadiene rubber, styrene butadiene rubber, butyl rubber, nitrile rubber, natural rubber, isoprene rubber, chloroprene rubber, ethylene-propylene rubber, urethane rubber, silicone Examples thereof include rubber, fluororubber, ethylene-vinyl acetate rubber, epichlorohydrin rubber and the like. Of these, butadiene rubber is preferable in terms of toughness and chemical resistance.
  • the rubber-modified epoxy resin may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the resin composition preferably contains a curing accelerator.
  • a curing accelerator is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include organic metal salts of organic acids such as octanoic acid, stearic acid, acetylacetonate, naphthenic acid and salicylic acid, such as zinc, copper, iron and antimony; metal chelates and the like.
  • a hardening accelerator contains antimony.
  • the antimony-containing curing accelerator can rapidly and sufficiently advance the curing reaction of the resin composition and can efficiently form a stronger cured product film.
  • a hardening accelerator can be used individually or in combination of 2 or more types.
  • the content of the curing accelerator is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.005 to 5 parts by weight, more preferably 0 with respect to the total amount (100 parts by weight) of the epoxy group-containing compound contained in the resin composition. 0.01 to 4 parts by weight, more preferably 0.01 to 1 part by weight. If the content of the curing accelerator is below the lower limit, the curing acceleration effect may be insufficient.
  • an acrylic resin, a urethane resin, an amide resin, a silicone resin, or the like may be appropriately added to the resin composition.
  • various additives can also be added to the resin composition.
  • a leveling agent, a pigment, a filler, a dispersant, a plasticizer, an ultraviolet absorber, a surfactant, an antioxidant, a thixotropic agent, and the like can be used.
  • Intermediate layer 23 Easy adhesive layer
  • the base polymer that forms the easy adhesive layer include, for example, a polyester skeleton, a polyether skeleton, a polycarbonate skeleton, a polyurethane skeleton, a silicone-based, a polyamide skeleton, and a polyimide skeleton.
  • Various resins having a polyvinyl alcohol skeleton or the like can be used. These polymer resins can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • an additive may be added to the base polymer.
  • a stabilizer such as a tackifier, an ultraviolet absorber, and a heat stabilizer may be used.
  • the film thickness of the easy adhesion layer is preferably 0.01 to 20 ⁇ m.
  • the anti-blocking layer is a cured product layer of a resin composition containing a binder resin (base polymer) and particles, and has a flat portion and a raised portion on the surface, thereby providing a high level of handling properties and low reflection characteristics. Can demonstrate.
  • the thickness of the flat part of the anti-blocking layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 200 nm or more and 30 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 500 nm or more and 10 ⁇ m or less, and further preferably 800 nm or more and 5 ⁇ m or less.
  • the mode particle diameter of the particles can be appropriately set in consideration of the relationship between the size of the protruding portion of the outermost surface layer and the thickness of the flat portion of the anti-blocking layer, and is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of sufficiently imparting blocking resistance to the transparent conductive film and sufficiently suppressing light scattering and the like, the mode particle diameter of the particles is preferably 500 nm to 30 ⁇ m, and more preferably 800 nm to 20 ⁇ m. It is more preferable that it is 1 ⁇ m or more and 10 ⁇ m or less.
  • the “mode particle diameter” means a particle diameter showing the maximum value of the particle distribution, using a flow type particle image analyzer (product name “FPIA-3000S” manufactured by Sysmex).
  • the measurement sample is prepared by diluting the particles to 1.0% by weight with ethyl acetate and uniformly dispersing the particles using an ultrasonic cleaner.
  • the height of the raised part is set in consideration of the required slipping property.
  • the height of the protruding portion that is, the portion protruding upward from the flat portion of the anti-blocking layer can be controlled by the thickness of the flat portion of the anti-blocking layer, the mode particle diameter of the particles, and the like.
  • the height of the raised portion is preferably 100 nm or more and 3 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 200 nm or more and 2 ⁇ m or less, and further preferably 300 nm or more and 1.5 ⁇ m or less.
  • the particles may be either polydisperse particles or monodisperse particles, but monodisperse particles are preferred in view of ease of providing the raised portions and light scattering prevention.
  • the particle size and mode particle size can be regarded as substantially the same.
  • the content of the particles in the anti-blocking layer is preferably 0.01 to 5 parts by weight, more preferably 0.02 to 1 part by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the solid content of the resin composition. More preferably, it is 0.05 to 0.5 parts by weight.
  • binder resin in the resin composition for forming the anti-blocking layer it is possible to disperse particles, and it is possible to use a transparent material having sufficient strength and transparency as a film after the anti-blocking layer is formed.
  • binder resins to be used include thermosetting resins, thermoplastic resins, ultraviolet curable resins, electron beam curable resins, and two-component mixed resins. Among these, curing treatment by ultraviolet irradiation is simple. An ultraviolet curable resin capable of efficiently forming a film by a simple processing operation is preferable.
  • Examples of the ultraviolet curable resin include polyesters, acrylics, urethanes, amides, silicones, epoxies, and the like, and ultraviolet curable monomers, oligomers, polymers, and the like are included.
  • Examples of the ultraviolet curable resin preferably used include those having an ultraviolet polymerizable functional group, and among them, those containing an acrylic monomer or oligomer component having 2 or more, particularly 3 to 6 functional groups. Further, an ultraviolet polymerization initiator is blended in the ultraviolet curable resin.
  • additives such as leveling agents, thixotropic agents, antistatic agents, plasticizers, surfactants, antioxidants, curing catalysts, and ultraviolet absorbers can be used for the resin composition.
  • a thixotropic agent is used, the content of these additives, which is advantageous for the formation of protruding particles on the surface with fine irregularities, is usually about 15 parts by weight or less, preferably about 0.1 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the ultraviolet curable resin. It is preferable that the content be 01 to 15 parts by weight.
  • the resin composition forming the anti-blocking layer can appropriately contain a solvent.
  • the particles contained in the anti-blocking layer 2 those having transparency such as various metal oxides, glass, and plastic can be used without particular limitation.
  • inorganic particles such as silica, alumina, titania, zirconia, calcium oxide, cross-linked or unpolymerized polymers such as polymethyl methacrylate, polystyrene, polyurethane, acrylic resin, acrylic-styrene copolymer, benzoguanamine, melamine, and polycarbonate.
  • crosslinked organic particles and silicone particles examples include crosslinked organic particles and silicone particles.
  • the particles can be used by appropriately selecting one type or two or more types, but organic particles are preferable.
  • the organic particles are preferably acrylic resins from the viewpoint of refractive index.
  • GC-MS Gas chromatograph mass spectrometer GCMS-QP2010Plus (EI method) manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation (LC / MS) Shimadzu Corporation high performance liquid chromatograph mass spectrometer LCMS-2010EV (ESI method)
  • Compound C1 is a compound represented by the following formula.
  • Compounds C2 to C4 are compounds represented by the following formula.
  • R in the following formula is a 2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methylcyclohexyl group.
  • R in the following formula is a 4-t-butylcyclohexyl group.
  • R in the following formula is a t-butyl group.
  • Compound C5 is a compound represented by the following formula.
  • Comparative Example Compound Z3 was obtained in the same manner as described in JP-A-2009-069773. (Synthesis of Comparative Compound Z4) Comparative Example Z4 was obtained in the same manner as in the method described in US2986528.
  • ⁇ Light resistance test> A light resistance test was performed on some of the compounds obtained in Production Examples and Comparative Production Examples. 10 mg of each compound was melted in 5 mL of a polymethacrylate 8 wt% toluene solution, applied onto a glass substrate by a spin coat method, and dried to prepare a thin film having a thickness of 1.5 ⁇ m. The prepared thin film was continuously irradiated with light from a xenon lamp (142 klux) for 96 hours, the transmittance of the thin film before and after irradiation (0 hour) was measured with a spectrophotometer, and the dye remaining according to the following formula (1) The rate was measured.
  • a xenon lamp 142 klux
  • Dye residual ratio (%) ⁇ (1-T 1 ) / (1-T 0 ) ⁇ ⁇ 100 (1) [However, T 0 is transmittance before xenon lamp irradiation, T 1 is the transmittance after xenon lamp irradiation, T 0 and T 1 is 0-1. ] “Transmittance” represents the transmittance of each compound at the absorption maximum wavelength, and the higher the dye residual ratio, the less the compound is decomposed by light and the higher the light resistance. Light resistance was evaluated according to the following criteria. A: Dye remaining ratio is 65% or more B: Dye remaining ratio is 40% or more and less than 65% C: Dye remaining ratio is 10% or more and less than 40% D: Dye remaining ratio is less than 10%
  • the weight loss due to thermal decomposition was measured under the following measurement conditions using a thermogravimetry apparatus TGA-50 manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation. The temperature reduced by 1% was measured as the decomposition start temperature. (Measurement condition) The measurement was performed under the conditions of a sample amount of 5 mg, a heating rate of 10 ° C./min (maximum temperature reached 400 ° C.), and a flow rate of 10 mL / min in a nitrogen atmosphere. The heat resistance was evaluated from the decomposition start temperature according to the following criteria. A: 250 ° C. or higher B: 210 ° C. or higher and lower than 250 ° C. C: less than 210 ° C.
  • the compounds C1 to C5 produced in each production example had an absorption maximum wavelength near 400 nm and a high gram extinction coefficient at 400 nm. These compounds can effectively absorb light around 400 nm.
  • Compounds C1 to C5 had good solubility in organic solvents. These compounds also had good durability.
  • the compounds C1 and C2 are excellent in light resistance, solubility, and heat resistance.
  • Production Example 3 (Preparation of acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (a)) Photopolymerization started on a monomer mixture composed of 76 parts by weight of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA), 18 parts by weight of N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone (NVP), and 16 parts by weight of 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate (HEA).
  • EHA 2-ethylhexyl acrylate
  • NDP N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone
  • HSA 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate
  • 0.035 parts by weight of 1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone (trade name: Irgacure 184, having an absorption band at a wavelength of 200 to 370 nm, manufactured by BASF), 2,2-dimethoxy-1,2-diphenylethane-1 -ON (trade name: Irgacure 651, having an absorption band at a wavelength of 200 to 380 nm, manufactured by BASF) 0.035 parts by weight and then viscosity (measurement conditions: BH viscometer No.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (A1) is applied on the release film of the release film so that the thickness after forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is 100 ⁇ m, and then on the surface of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition layer.
  • the release film was bonded together. Thereafter, the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition layer was photocured by irradiating with ultraviolet rays under the conditions of illuminance: 6.5 mW / cm 2 , light amount: 2000 mJ / cm 2 , and peak wavelength: 350 nm to form a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1). .
  • the addition amount of the ultraviolet absorber was 0.8% by weight with respect to the acrylic polymer weight (100% by weight) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1).
  • Production Example 4 (Production of pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B1)) In a separable flask equipped with a thermometer, a stirrer, a reflux condenser and a nitrogen gas introduction tube, 95 parts by weight of butyl acrylate, 5 parts by weight of acrylic acid, 0.2 part by weight of azobisisobutyronitrile as a polymerization initiator, and After 233 parts by weight of ethyl acetate was added, nitrogen gas was passed, and nitrogen substitution was performed for about 1 hour while stirring. Thereafter, the flask was heated to 60 ° C. and reacted for 7 hours to obtain an acrylic polymer having a weight average molecular weight (Mw) of 1.1 million.
  • Mw weight average molecular weight
  • a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (solution) was prepared by adding 0.1 part by weight of a silane coupling agent (trade name: KBM-403, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B1: solution) was applied on a 38 ⁇ m-thick separator (polyethylene terephthalate film having a release treatment on the surface: release film) so that the thickness after drying was 15 ⁇ m, The solvent was removed by drying at 100 ° C. for 3 minutes to obtain an adhesive layer. Then, the crosslinking process was performed by heating at 50 degreeC for 48 hours.
  • this pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is referred to as “pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1)”.
  • another release film was bonded to the exposed surface of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
  • Production Example 5 Manufacture of adhesive layer (B2)
  • a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer was formed in the same manner as in Production Example 4 except that the thickness after drying was 20 ⁇ m. Then, the crosslinking process was performed by heating at 50 degreeC for 48 hours.
  • this pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is referred to as “pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B2)”.
  • Example 1 (Production of pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (A1-1))
  • the addition amount of bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) -phenylphosphine oxide (trade name: Irgacure 819, manufactured by BASF Japan) was 0.6.
  • 0.48 parts by weight (solid content weight) of the dye compound (C5) “absorption maximum wavelength of absorption spectrum: 394 nm, full width at half maximum of 48.5 nm” obtained in Production Example 2 was directly added and stirred. Except for this, a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (A1-1) was obtained in the same manner as in Production Example 3.
  • Example 2 (Production of pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (A1-2))
  • the ultraviolet absorber was 2- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) -6- (1-methyl-1-phenylethyl) -4- (1 , 1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl) phenol (trade name: Tinuvin 928, “UV absorber b2” in Table 3, absorption maximum wavelength of absorption spectrum: 349 nm, manufactured by BASF Japan Ltd.) 1.0 part by weight ( The amount of bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) -phenylphosphine oxide (trade name: Irgacure 819, manufactured by BASF Japan) was changed to 0.6 parts by weight.
  • a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (A1-2) was obtained in the same manner as in Production Example 3, except that 0.5 part by weight (solid content weight) of the dye compound (C5) obtained in 2 was directly added and stirred.
  • Example 3 (Production of pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B1-1))
  • the acrylic polymer solution (with a solid content of 100 parts by weight) was combined with an isocyanate crosslinking agent and a silane coupling agent, 2 ′, 4,4′-tetrahydroxybenzophenone (trade name: Seesorb 106, “UV absorber b3” in Table 3, absorption maximum wavelength of absorption spectrum: 348 nm, manufactured by Sipro Kasei Co., Ltd.) 3.0 parts by weight
  • the pigment compound (C1) “absorption maximum wavelength: 393 nm, full width at half maximum 49.5 nm)” 3.0 parts by weight (solid content weight) obtained in Production Example 2 was added.
  • a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (solution) was prepared in the same manner as in Production Example 4.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B1-1: solution) was applied on a 38 ⁇ m-thick separator (polyethylene terephthalate film whose surface was peeled) so that the thickness after drying was 15 ⁇ m, and 100 ° C. And dried for 3 minutes to remove the solvent to obtain a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. Then, the crosslinking process was performed by heating at 50 degreeC for 48 hours.
  • this pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is referred to as “pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1-1)”.
  • the added amount of the UV absorber is 3.0% by weight and the added amount of the dye compound (C1) is 3.0% with respect to the acrylic polymer weight (100% by weight) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1-1). % By weight.
  • Example 4 (Production of pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B1-2))
  • the dye compound (C1) obtained in Production Example 2 instead of the dye compound (C1) obtained in Production Example 2, the dye compound (C2) “absorption of absorption spectrum” obtained in Production Example 2 was used.
  • a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (solution) was prepared in the same manner as in Example 3 except that 3.0 parts by weight (solid content weight) of a maximum wavelength of 393 nm and a full width at half maximum of 49.5 nm were used.
  • the adhesive layer was formed like Example 3 except the thickness after drying having been 20 micrometers using the said adhesive composition (solution). Then, the crosslinking process was performed by heating at 50 degreeC for 48 hours.
  • this pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is referred to as “pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1-2)”.
  • the addition amount of the UV absorber is 3.0% by weight and the addition amount of the dye compound (C2) is 3.0% with respect to the acrylic polymer weight (100% by weight) in the adhesive layer (B1-2). % By weight.
  • Example 5 (Production of pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B1-3)) A pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (solution) was prepared in the same manner as in Example 3 except that the ultraviolet absorber (b3) was not added in the production of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B1-1) of Example 3.
  • the adhesive layer was formed like Example 3 except the thickness after drying having been 20 micrometers using the said adhesive composition (solution). Then, the crosslinking process was performed by heating at 50 degreeC for 48 hours.
  • this pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is referred to as “pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B2-2)”.
  • the amount of the dye compound (C2) added was 3.0% by weight relative to the weight of the acrylic polymer (100% by weight) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1-3).
  • a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1-3) was formed in the same manner as in Example 1.
  • the addition amount of the UV absorber is 1.0% by weight and the addition amount of the dye compound (C6) is 0.45% with respect to the acrylic polymer weight (100% by weight) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1-3). % By weight.
  • the adhesive layer was formed like Example 3 except the thickness after drying having been 20 micrometers using the said adhesive composition (solution). Then, the crosslinking process was performed by heating at 50 degreeC for 48 hours.
  • this pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is referred to as “pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1-4)”.
  • the addition amount of the UV absorber is 2.0% by weight and the addition amount of the dye compound (C6) is 2.5% with respect to the acrylic polymer weight (100% by weight) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1-4). % By weight.
  • the transmittance in the wavelength range of 350 nm to 780 nm (measured values of 380 nm, 400 nm, 420 nm, and 440 nm are shown in Table 3), and the transmission Y value and transmission hue (L * , a * , b * ) are D65.
  • Hue was measured with a light source and a field of view of 2 degrees.
  • ⁇ Reliability evaluation> The test piece subjected to the initial measurement by the above-described method was put in an oven at 85 ° C. and 85% RH for 500 hours to perform a heat resistance test. Similarly, a test piece was placed in an ultraviolet fade tester (device name; ultraviolet fademeter tester U48, manufactured by Suga Test Instruments Co., Ltd.), and a light resistance test was performed by continuously irradiating for 100 hours. The test piece after the test was measured for the transmission Y value and the transmission hue (L * , a * , b * ) in the same manner as the initial measurement. The Y value change ⁇ Y and the hue change ⁇ E * before and after the test were calculated, and the case of ⁇ Y ⁇ 0.3 and ⁇ E * ⁇ 1.0 was accepted (OK), and the others were rejected (NG).
  • a sheet piece having a length of 100 mm and a width of 20 mm was cut out from the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer obtained in Examples and Comparative Examples.
  • one release film of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer was peeled off, and a PET film (trade name: Lumirror S-10, thickness: 25 ⁇ m, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.) was attached (backed).
  • the other release film is peeled off, and a glass plate (trade name: soda lime glass # 0050, manufactured by Matsunami Glass Industry Co., Ltd.) is used as a test plate, and is crimped with a 2 kg roller and one reciprocating pressure condition.
  • a sample composed of a test plate / adhesive layer / PET film was prepared.
  • the obtained sample was autoclaved (50 ° C., 0.5 MPa, 15 minutes), and then 23 ° C., 50% R.D. H. And allowed to cool for 30 minutes. After allowing to cool, a tensile tester (device name: Autograph AG-IS, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) was used, and the temperature was 23 ° C. and 50% R.D. according to JIS Z0237. H. Under the above conditions, the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet (pressure-sensitive adhesive layer / PET film) was peeled off from the test plate under the conditions of a tensile speed of 300 mm / min and a peeling angle of 180 °, and the 180 ° peel-off adhesive strength (N / 20 mm) was measured.
  • a tensile tester device name: Autograph AG-IS, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation
  • ⁇ Total light transmittance, haze> One release film was peeled off from the pressure-sensitive adhesive layers obtained in Examples and Comparative Examples, and a slide glass (trade name: white polishing No. 1, thickness: 0.8 to 1.0 mm, total light transmission) Rate: 92%, haze: 0.2%, manufactured by Matsunami Glass Industrial Co., Ltd.). Further, the other release film was peeled off to prepare a test piece having a layer structure of pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A) / slide glass. The total light transmittance and haze value in the visible light region of the test piece were measured using a haze meter (device name: HM-150, manufactured by Murakami Color Research Laboratory).
  • Cycloolefin polymer film (G) A cycloolefin polymer film (trade name: ZEONOR FILM, manufactured by Nippon Zeon Co., Ltd.) having a thickness of 25 ⁇ m was used.
  • (Acrylic resin film (E)) Resin pellets consisting of 100 parts by weight of imidized MS resin described in Production Example 1 of JP 2010-284840 A are dried at 100.5 kPa at 100 ° C. for 12 hours, and a die temperature of 270 ° C. in a single screw extruder. And extruded from a T-die to form a film (thickness 80 ⁇ m). Further, the film is stretched in an atmosphere of 150 ° C. in the transport direction (thickness 40 ⁇ m), and then stretched in an atmosphere of 150 ° C. in a direction orthogonal to the film transport direction, and an acrylic resin film having a thickness of 20 ⁇ m. Got.
  • Phase difference film (H) A polycarbonate film having a thickness of 56 ⁇ m (“NRF” manufactured by Nitto Denko Corporation, in-plane retardation Re (550): 135 nm) was used.
  • Adhesive layer (A1) / cycloolefin polymer film (G) / polarizer (P1) / acrylic resin film (E) / adhesive layer (B1: interlayer adhesive layer) / retardation film (H) / adhesive The polarizing film with an adhesive layer which has a structure of a layer (B2) was produced.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1) used was manufactured in Production Example 3.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1) used was manufactured in Production Example 4.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B2) used was manufactured in Production Example 5.
  • the films were bonded together via the pressure-sensitive adhesive layers.
  • the cycloolefin polymer film (G) and the acrylic resin film (E) on both sides of the polarizer (P1) were bonded using a polyvinyl alcohol adhesive.
  • the obtained polarizing film with an adhesive layer can be used as an optical laminate used for an organic EL display device, and the adhesive layer (A1) corresponds to the viewing side, and the adhesive layer (B2) corresponds to the organic EL panel side. To do.
  • Example 6 In Comparative Example 4, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1-1) was obtained in the same manner as in Comparative Example 4 except that the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1-1) produced in Example 1 was used instead of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1). ) / Cycloolefin polymer film (G) / polarizer / acrylic resin film (E) / adhesive layer (B1) / retardation film (H) / adhesive layer (B2) polarized light with an adhesive layer A film was prepared.
  • Example 7 In Comparative Example 4, in the same manner as in Comparative Example 4 except that the adhesive layer (B1-2) produced in Example 4 was used instead of the adhesive layer (B2), the adhesive layer (A1) / Polarized light with pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having the structure of cycloolefin polymer film (G) / polarizer / acrylic resin film (E) / pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1) / retardation film (H) / pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1-2) A film was prepared.
  • Example 8 In Comparative Example 4, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1-1) produced in Example 1 was used instead of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1), and the protection with a surface treatment layer was used instead of the cycloolefin polymer film (G).
  • a polarizing film with a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having a configuration of film (E) / pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1) / retardation film (H) / pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B2) was produced.
  • the protective film with a surface treatment layer (D-1) is shown below.
  • the protective film with surface treatment layer (D-1) was bonded using a polyvinyl alcohol-based adhesive so that the following base film A side was in contact with the polarizer (P1).
  • the base film A thus obtained has a light transmittance of 380 nm at a wavelength of 7%, a light transmittance at a wavelength of 400 nm of 68%, a light transmittance of 420 nm of 90%, and a light transmittance of 440 nm of 91%. there were.
  • UV curable resin containing 13 parts isocyanuric acid triacrylate, 16 parts pentaerythritol triacrylate, 62 parts dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, and 9 parts isophorone diisocyanate polyurethane (trade name: Unidic 17-806, solid content: 80%, Solvent: butyl acetate, manufactured by DIC Corporation), 100 parts by weight of the dye compound (C2) obtained in Production Example 2, and a leveling agent (trade name: GRANDIC PC-4100, manufactured by DIC Corporation) ) 5 parts, bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) -phenylphosphine oxide (trade name: Irgacure 819, having an absorption band at a wavelength of 200 to 450 nm, manufactured by BASF Japan) as a photopolymerization initiator, 5 weight The parts so that the solids concentration is 50%.
  • the obtained protective film with a surface treatment layer (D-1) has a light transmittance of 0.2%, a light transmittance of 400%, a light transmittance of 3.0%, and a light transmittance of 420 nm of 65%. %, The transmittance of light at 440 nm is 89%, and the addition amount of the dye compound (C2) is 0.5% with respect to the total weight (100% by weight) of the protective film with surface treatment layer (D-1). %Met.
  • Example 9 In Comparative Example 4, the acrylic resin film (E-1) shown below was used instead of the acrylic resin film (E), and the adhesive produced in Example 3 was used instead of the adhesive layer (B1).
  • ) / Pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1-1) / Phase difference film (H) / Pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B2) A polarizing film with a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer was produced.
  • the acrylic resin film (E-1) is shown below.
  • the acrylic resin film (E-1) thus obtained has a light transmittance of 380 nm at a wavelength of 0.2%, a light transmittance at a wavelength of 400 nm of 1.2%, a light transmittance of 420 nm of 59%, The transmittance of light at 440 nm was 89%.
  • the amount of the dye compound (C1) added was 1.2% by weight based on the weight of the base polymer (100% by weight) in the acrylic resin film (E-1).
  • Example 10 In Comparative Example 4, the triacetyl cellulose film (F-1) shown below was used instead of the acrylic resin film (E), and the adhesive produced in Example 4 instead of the adhesive layer (B2).
  • the triacetylcellulose film (F-1) is shown below.
  • a triacetyl cellulose film (F1) having a thickness of 20 ⁇ m was obtained by peeling from the plate.
  • the obtained triacetylcellulose film (F-1) has a light transmittance of 0.2%, a light transmittance of 8.8 nm, a light transmittance of 8.8%, a light transmittance of 420 nm, a light transmittance of 64%, and a wavelength of 440 nm.
  • the light transmittance was 90%.
  • the amount of the dye compound (C5) added was 1.0% by weight relative to the weight of the base polymer (100% by weight) in the triacetylcellulose film (F-1).
  • Example 11 In Comparative Example 4, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1-1) produced in Example 1 was used instead of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1), and it was prepared in Example 8 instead of the cycloolefin polymer film (G).
  • the surface-treated protective film (D-1) was used, the following cycloolefin polymer film (G-1) was used in place of the acrylic resin film (E), and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B3-1) shown below was used instead of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1-1) / protective film with surface treatment layer (D-1)
  • a polarizing film with a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer comprising: / polarizer (P1) / cycloolefin polymer film (G-1) / pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B3-1) / retardation film (H) / pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B2) Produced.
  • the cycloolefin polymer film (G-1) and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B3-1) are shown below.
  • the protective film with surface treatment layer (D1) was bonded using a polyvinyl alcohol-based adhesive so that the base film A side was in contact with the polarizer (P1).
  • cycloolefin polymer film (G-1) As a material resin, a pellet of a cycloolefin polymer (a hydrogenated product of a ring-opening polymer of a norbornene-based monomer, trade name “ZEONOR1420R”, manufactured by Nippon Zeon Co., Ltd., glass transition temperature (Tg) of 136 ° C.) is prepared. It was dried at 5 kPa and 100 ° C. for 12 hours. 1.5 parts by weight of the dye compound (C2) obtained in Production Example 2 is added to the resin weight (100 parts by weight), and a T-die type film melt extrusion is performed at a die temperature of 260 ° C. with a single screw extruder.
  • a cycloolefin polymer a hydrogenated product of a ring-opening polymer of a norbornene-based monomer, trade name “ZEONOR1420R”, manufactured by Nippon Zeon Co., Ltd., glass transition temperature (Tg
  • a cycloolefin polymer resin film (G1) having a thickness of 20 ⁇ m was obtained using a molding machine.
  • the resulting cycloolefin polymer resin film (G1) has a light transmittance of 380 nm, a light transmittance of 2.5%, a light transmittance of a wavelength of 400 nm of 18%, a light transmittance of 420 nm of 75%, and a light of 440 nm.
  • the transmittance of was 91%.
  • the amount of the dye compound (C2) added was 1.5% by weight based on the weight of the base polymer (100% by weight) in the cycloolefin polymer film (G-1).
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B2-1: solution) was applied onto a 38 ⁇ m-thick separator (polyethylene terephthalate-based film whose surface was peeled) so that the thickness after drying was 15 ⁇ m, and 120 ° C. And dried for 3 minutes to remove the solvent to obtain a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
  • this pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is referred to as “pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B3-1)”.
  • the amount of the dye compound (C1) added was 2.0% by weight based on the weight of the rubber-based polymer (100% by weight) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B3-1).
  • Example 12 In Comparative Example 4, the retardation film (H-1) shown below was used instead of the retardation film (H), and the adhesive layer produced in Example 4 was used instead of the adhesive layer (B2).
  • a polarizing film with an adhesive layer having the structure of layer (B1) / retardation film (H-1) / adhesive layer (B1-2) was produced.
  • the retardation film (H-1) is shown below.
  • the pressure in the reaction vessel was changed from normal pressure to 13.3 kPa, and the generated phenol was extracted out of the reaction vessel while the temperature of the heat medium in the reaction vessel was increased to 190 ° C. over 1 hour.
  • the pressure in the reaction vessel is set to 6.67 kPa, and the heat medium temperature of the reaction vessel is increased to 230 ° C. in 15 minutes.
  • the generated phenol was extracted out of the reaction vessel. Since the stirring torque of the stirrer increased, the temperature was raised to 250 ° C. in 8 minutes, and the pressure in the reaction vessel was reduced to 0.200 kPa or less in order to remove the generated phenol.
  • the obtained polycarbonate resin had a glass transition temperature of 136.6 ° C. and a reduced viscosity of 0.395 dL / g.
  • the obtained polycarbonate resin was vacuum-dried at 80 ° C. for 5 hours, and then 1.0 part by weight of the dye compound (C2) was added to the weight of the resin (100 parts by weight).
  • a polycarbonate resin film having a thickness of 120 ⁇ m was produced.
  • the obtained polycarbonate resin film was horizontally stretched using a tenter stretching machine to obtain a retardation film (H-1) having a thickness of 50 ⁇ m.
  • the draw ratio was 250%
  • the draw temperature was 137 to 139 ° C.
  • Re (550) of the obtained retardation film (H1) was 137 to 147 nm
  • ⁇ nxy was 0.0027 to 0.0029.
  • the amount of the dye compound (C2) added was 1.0% by weight relative to the weight of the base polymer (100% by weight) in the retardation film (H-1).
  • a test piece is attached to a measurement jig so that measurement light enters from the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer side (B1 side) on the organic EL display panel side, and an automatic polarizing film measuring device (product name: V7100, manufactured by JASCO Corporation) Measured with The transmittance in the wavelength range of 380 nm to 780 nm (Table 5 shows measured values of 380 nm, 400 nm, 420 nm, and 440 nm), simple substance Y value, simple substance hue (L * , a * , b * ).
  • ⁇ Reliability evaluation> The test piece that had been initially measured by the above-described method was put into an oven at 85 ° C. for 500 hours to conduct a heat resistance test. Similarly, a test piece was put into an ultraviolet fade tester (device name: UV fade meter tester U48, manufactured by Suga Test Instruments Co., Ltd.) so that ultraviolet rays were irradiated from the visible adhesive layer side (A1 side), The light resistance test was carried out by continuous irradiation for 100 hours. The test piece after the test was measured for the simple substance Y value and the simple substance hue (L * , a * , b * ) in the same manner as the initial measurement. Single Y value change ⁇ Y and single hue change ⁇ E * before and after the test were obtained by calculation. When ⁇ Y ⁇ 0.5 and ⁇ E * ⁇ 1.0, the result was accepted (OK), and the others were rejected (NG). .
  • Comparative Example 5 Cycloolefin polymer film (Z1)
  • a cycloolefin polymer film (Z1) (COP film, manufactured by Nippon Zeon Co., Ltd., “Zeonor ZF16”) having a thickness of 40 ⁇ m was prepared.
  • UV curable hard coat resin (trade name “UNIDIC (registered trademark) RS29-120” manufactured by DIC Corporation) with a solid content of 100 parts by weight, a plurality of particles having a diameter of 3 ⁇ m (trade name “SSX105” manufactured by Sekisui Resin Co., Ltd.) was added with 0.07 part by weight and diluted with ethyl acetate so that the solid content concentration was 30% by weight to prepare an anti-blocking layer forming composition.
  • the composition is applied to one side of the cycloolefin polymer film (Z1), dried at 80 ° C.
  • An anti-blocking layer having a thickness of 1.5 ⁇ m was formed on one side of the film.
  • composition solution (Y) An ultraviolet curable acrylic resin (DIC, “ELS888”) 100 parts by weight, a photopolymerization initiator (BASF, “Irgacure 184”) 2 parts by weight and ethyl acetate 160 parts by weight were mixed to prepare a composition solution (Y ) Was prepared.
  • the composition solution (Y) is applied to the surface opposite to the surface on which the anti-blocking layer is formed in the cycloolefin polymer film (Z1), dried at 80 ° C. for 1 minute, and integrated. Irradiation with ultraviolet rays (high pressure mercury lamp) having a light amount of 300 mJ / cm 2 was performed. Thereby, a hard coat layer having a thickness of 1.0 ⁇ m was formed on the upper surface of the cycloolefin polymer film (Z1).
  • composition solution (X) was prepared by mixing 700 parts by weight of propylene glycol monomethyl ether with 100 parts by weight of an inorganic particle-containing resin solution (manufactured by JSR, “KZ7414”). Next, the composition solution (X) is applied to the upper surface of the hard coat layer (Y1) and dried at 60 ° C. for 1 minute, and ultraviolet rays (high pressure mercury lamp) with an integrated light quantity of 300 mJ / cm 2 are applied. Irradiated. Thereby, a refractive index adjusting layer (X) having a thickness of 100 nm was formed on the upper surface of the hard coat layer.
  • the laminate having the structure of the refractive index adjustment layer (X) / hard coat layer (Y) / cycloolefin polymer film (Z1) / anti-blocking layer obtained above is put into a take-up type sputtering apparatus.
  • an ITO layer (amorphous) having a thickness of 30 nm was formed on the upper surface of the refractive index adjustment layer (X1).
  • an ITO target made of a sintered body of 97% by mass indium oxide and 3% by mass tin oxide was used in a vacuum atmosphere at a pressure of 0.4 Pa into which argon gas 98% and oxygen gas 2% were introduced.
  • the refractive index adjustment layer (X1) As described above, a transparent conductive film having a constitution of ITO layer / refractive index adjusting layer (X) / hard coat layer (Y) / cycloolefin polymer film (Z1) / anti-blocking layer was produced.
  • Example 13 In Comparative Example 5, ITO layer / refractive index adjusting layer (X1) / hard coat was obtained in the same manner as Comparative Example 5 except that a hard coat layer (Y-1) was formed instead of the hard coat layer (Y). A transparent conductive film having a structure of layer (Y-1) / cycloolefin polymer film (Z1) / anti-blocking layer was produced.
  • the formation of the hard coat layer (Y-1) is further carried out with respect to 100 parts by weight of the ultraviolet curable acrylic resin (“ELS888” manufactured by DIC) in the formation of the hard coat layer (Y).
  • ELS888 ultraviolet curable acrylic resin manufactured by DIC
  • the same operation as in the formation of the hard coat layer (Y) was carried out except that the composition solution (Y-1) prepared by adding 2 parts by weight of the dye compound (C2) obtained in 1 above was used.
  • the amount of the dye compound (C2) added was 2.0% by weight relative to the base polymer (100% by weight) in the hard coat layer (Y-1).
  • Example 14 In Comparative Example 5, an ITO layer / refractive index adjusting layer (X-1) was prepared in the same manner as Comparative Example 5 except that a refractive index adjusting layer (X-1) was formed instead of the refractive index adjusting layer (X). ) / Hard coat layer (Y) / cycloolefin polymer film (Z1) / anti-blocking layer.
  • the refractive index adjusting layer (X-1) is formed by replacing the composition solution (X) in the formation of the refractive index adjusting layer (X) with an inorganic particle-containing resin solution (“KZ7412” manufactured by JSR). To 100 parts by weight, 700 parts by weight of propylene glycol monomethyl ether is mixed, and further, the dye compound (C2) obtained in Production Example 2 is 5 parts by weight with respect to the resin solid component in the resin solution. The same operation as in the formation of the refractive index adjusting layer (X) was performed except that the composition solution (X-1) prepared by mixing with the above was used. The amount of the dye compound (C2) added was 5.0% by weight based on the weight of the base polymer (100% by weight) in the refractive index adjusting layer (X-1).
  • Example 15 In Comparative Example 5, an ITO layer / refractive index adjusting layer (X-2) was prepared in the same manner as Comparative Example 5 except that a refractive index adjusting layer (X-2) was formed instead of the refractive index adjusting layer (X). ) / Hard coat layer (Y) / cycloolefin polymer film (Z1) / anti-blocking layer.
  • the refractive index adjusting layer (X-2) is formed by using an inorganic particle-containing resin solution (“TYZ68-”, manufactured by Toyo Ink Co., Ltd.) instead of the composition solution (X) in forming the refractive index adjusting layer (X).
  • A12 is mixed with 100 parts by weight of propylene glycol monomethyl ether (700 parts by weight), and 2 parts by weight of the dye compound (C2) obtained in Production Example 2 is added to the resin solid component in the resin solution.
  • the same operation as in the formation of the refractive index adjusting layer (X1) was performed except that the composition solution (X-2) prepared by mixing so as to be 5 parts by weight was used.
  • the amount of the dye compound (C2) added was 5.0% by weight based on the weight of the base polymer (100% by weight) in the refractive index adjusting layer (X-2).
  • Comparative Example 6 (Preparation of polyester film (Z2)) Polymerization was performed from dimethyl terephthalate and ethylene glycol by a conventional method using antimony trioxide as a catalyst to obtain melt-polymerized polyethylene terephthalate. The obtained polyethylene terephthalate was vacuum-dried at 160 ° C. for 2 hours, then charged into a film melt extruder, melted at 290 ° C., extruded onto a casting drum, and stretched to obtain a polyester film (Z2 having a thickness of 50 ⁇ m). )
  • An anti-blocking layer (AB layer) having a thickness of 1.5 ⁇ m was formed on one side of the polyester film (Z2) in the same manner as in Comparative Example 5.
  • Formation of crack prevention layer (Q) 10 parts by weight of Adekafilterra BUR-12A (made by ADEKA) mainly composed of rubber-modified epoxy resin (weight average molecular weight of epoxy resin skeleton part: 2000), Adekafilterra BUR-12B which is an antimony-based curing accelerator 0.001 part of (made by ADEKA) was mixed, 90 weight part of methyl isobutyl ketone was added to this mixture, and the composition solution (Q) was prepared so that the whole might be 100 weight part.
  • the gel time when the composition solution (Q) was heated at 170 ° C. was 10 seconds.
  • the thickness of the polyester film (Z2) is 30 nm by applying the composition solution (Q) on the surface opposite to the surface on which the anti-blocking layer is formed and drying it at 195 ° C. for 1 minute.
  • the anti-cracking layer (Q) was formed on the upper surface of the polyester film (Z2).
  • Example 16 In Comparative Example 6, an ITO layer / crack prevention layer (Q) / polyester film (Z2-) was used in the same manner as Comparative Example 6 except that the polyester film (Z2-1) was used instead of the polyester film (Z2). A transparent conductive film having the structure 1) / anti-blocking layer was produced.
  • the polyester film (Z2-1) further comprises 1 part by weight of the dye compound (C2) obtained in Production Example 2 with respect to 100 parts by weight of the obtained polyethylene terephthalate. Except having formed into a film using the added composition, what was obtained by performing operation similar to preparation of a polyester film (Z2) was used.
  • the amount of the dye compound (C2) added was 1% by weight relative to the weight of the base polymer (100% by weight) in the polyester film (Z2-1).
  • Example 17 In Comparative Example 6, an ITO layer / crack preventing layer (Q) / easy-adhesive layer (R-1) / polyester film (with the exception of further providing an easy-adhesion layer (R-1)) A transparent conductive film having a configuration of Z2) / anti-blocking layer was produced.
  • the easy adhesion layer (R-1) was provided by the following method.
  • the easily adhesive layer forming composition (R-1) is a resin 100 weight formed from phthalic acid ester (phthalic acid / reaction product of ethylene glycol / propylene glycol), methacrylic acid, oxazoline, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, and melamine. It was prepared by adding 5 parts by weight of the dye compound (C2) obtained in Production Example 2 to parts. Next, by applying the easy-adhesive composition (R-1) on the surface opposite to the surface on which the anti-blocking layer is formed in the polyester film (Z2), and drying it at 195 ° C. for 1 minute.
  • an easy-adhesion layer (R-1) having a thickness of 0.1 ⁇ m was formed.
  • a crack prevention layer (Y2) was provided on the easy adhesion layer (R-1).
  • the amount of the dye compound (C2) added was 5% by weight based on the weight of the base polymer (100% by weight) in the easy-adhesion layer (R-1).
  • Example 18 In Comparative Example 6, an ITO layer / crack preventing layer (Q-1) / polyester was prepared in the same manner as Comparative Example 6 except that a crack preventing layer (Q-1) was formed instead of the crack preventing layer (Y2). A transparent conductive film having a structure of film (Z2) / anti-blocking layer was produced.
  • the formation of the crack prevention layer (Q-1) was further carried out with respect to 100 parts by weight of the rubber-modified epoxy resin instead of the composition solution (Q-1) in the formation of the crack prevention layer (Q). Formation of a crack prevention layer (Q) except that the composition solution (Q-1) prepared by adding 5 parts by weight of the dye compound (C2) obtained in Example 2 was used and that the thickness was 70 nm. The same operation was performed.
  • ⁇ Measurement of transmittance and hue of transparent conductive film initial value>
  • the transparent conductive films obtained in Examples and Comparative Examples were cut out to produce test pieces.
  • the test piece was attached to a measurement jig so that measurement light was incident from the transparent conductive layer (ITO layer) side, and measured with a reflection type spectrophotometer (product name: U4100, manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation).
  • the transmittance in the wavelength range of 380 nm to 780 nm (measured values at 380 nm, 400 nm, and 420 nm are shown in Table 5), simple substance Y value, simple substance hue (L * , a * , b * ) were measured.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Electroluminescent Light Sources (AREA)
  • Polarising Elements (AREA)

Abstract

This composition for optical members contains a base polymer and a novel compound that is represented by general formula (1). This composition for optical members enables the formation of an optical member which is capable of suppressing deterioration of a display element in cases where the optical member is used in an image display device, while exhibiting high transparency, and which has excellent durability under harsh environmental conditions.

Description

光学部材用組成物、光学部材及び画像表示装置Composition for optical member, optical member and image display device
 本発明は、光学部材用組成物、及び当該光学部材用組成物から形成された光学部材に関する。また本発明は、前記光学部材用組成物を用いた画像表示装置に関する。 The present invention relates to an optical member composition and an optical member formed from the optical member composition. Moreover, this invention relates to the image display apparatus using the said composition for optical members.
 本発明が適用される光学部材は、各種の光学用途に適用される部材であり、例えば、光学フィルムそのもの、光学フィルム用粘着剤層又は接着剤層、光学フィルムに設けられる表面処理層、光学フィルムに設けられる機能層等が挙げられる。前記光学フィルムとしては、例えば、偏光フィルム、偏光子、偏光子用透明保護フィルム、位相差フィルム、光拡散フィルム、輝度向上フィルム、レンチキュラーフィルム、カバーウィンドウフィルム(前面板)、飛散防止フィルム、加飾印刷フィルム等を例示することができる。前記光学部材は、偏光子及び位相差フィルムを含む光学積層体として用いることができる。また前記表面処理層としては、例えば、ハードコート層、アンチグレア層、反射防止層、屈折率調整層等を例示することができる。前記機能層としては、例えば、易接着層、帯電防止層、ブロッキング防止層、オリゴマー防止層、バリア層等を例示する事ができる。また、前記光学部材は、透明基材フィルム及び透明導電層を有する透明導電性フィルムにおいて、前記透明基材フィルム、又は前記透明基材フィルムとの間に設けられる中間層として用いることができる。前記中間層としては、屈折率調整層、易接着剤層、ハードコート層、クラック防止層等を例示する事ができる。これら光学部材は、液晶表示装置(LCD)、有機EL(エレクトロルミネッセンス)表示装置(OLED)などの画像表示装置を形成しうる。 The optical member to which the present invention is applied is a member that is applied to various optical uses. For example, the optical film itself, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer or adhesive layer for the optical film, the surface treatment layer provided on the optical film, and the optical film The functional layer etc. which are provided in are mentioned. Examples of the optical film include a polarizing film, a polarizer, a transparent protective film for a polarizer, a retardation film, a light diffusion film, a brightness enhancement film, a lenticular film, a cover window film (front plate), a scattering prevention film, and a decoration. A printing film etc. can be illustrated. The optical member can be used as an optical laminate including a polarizer and a retardation film. Examples of the surface treatment layer include a hard coat layer, an antiglare layer, an antireflection layer, and a refractive index adjustment layer. Examples of the functional layer include an easy adhesion layer, an antistatic layer, an antiblocking layer, an oligomer prevention layer, and a barrier layer. Moreover, the said optical member can be used as an intermediate | middle layer provided between the said transparent base film or the said transparent base film in the transparent conductive film which has a transparent base film and a transparent conductive layer. Examples of the intermediate layer include a refractive index adjustment layer, an easy-adhesive layer, a hard coat layer, and a crack prevention layer. These optical members can form an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device (LCD) or an organic EL (electroluminescence) display device (OLED).
 近年、光学部材は各種分野で用いられており、例えば、画像表示装置を構成部材として広く用いられている。画像表示装置は、携帯電話、カーナビゲーション装置、パソコン用モニタ、テレビ等の各種用途において広く用いられるようになっている。画像表示装置が有機EL表示装置の場合に用いる光学部材としては、外光が金属電極(陰極)で反射されて鏡面のように視認されることを抑止するために、有機ELパネルの視認側表面に円偏光フィルム(偏光フィルムと1/4波長板の積層体等)が配置される。また、有機ELパネルの視認側表面に積層された円偏光フィルムには、光学部材として、さらに加飾パネル等が積層される場合がある。また透明導電性フィルムは透明電極フィルムとして用いられて、タッチパネル等を形成する。前記円偏光フィルムや加飾パネル等の有機EL表示装置の構成部材や、透明電極フィルム等は、通常、光学部材として粘着剤層や接着剤層等の接合材料を介して積層される。 In recent years, optical members have been used in various fields, for example, image display devices are widely used as constituent members. Image display devices are widely used in various applications such as mobile phones, car navigation devices, personal computer monitors, and televisions. As an optical member used when the image display device is an organic EL display device, a surface on the viewing side of the organic EL panel is used to prevent external light from being reflected by a metal electrode (cathode) and viewed like a mirror surface. A circularly polarizing film (a laminated body of a polarizing film and a quarter-wave plate or the like) is disposed on the surface. Moreover, a decorative panel etc. may be further laminated | stacked as an optical member on the circularly-polarizing film laminated | stacked on the visual recognition side surface of the organic electroluminescent panel. The transparent conductive film is used as a transparent electrode film to form a touch panel or the like. The constituent members of the organic EL display device such as the circularly polarizing film and the decorative panel, the transparent electrode film and the like are usually laminated as an optical member via a bonding material such as an adhesive layer and an adhesive layer.
 有機EL表示装置等の画像表示装置においては、入射する紫外光により画像表示装置内の構成部材等が劣化する場合があり、当該紫外光による劣化を抑制するために、紫外線吸収剤を含有する層を設けることが知られている。具体的には、例えば、少なくとも1層の紫外線吸収層を有し、波長380nmの光線透過率が30%以下であり、かつ波長430nmよりも長波長側における可視光透過率が80%以上である画像表示装置用透明両面粘着シート(例えば、特許文献1参照)や、アクリル系ポリマー及びトリアジン系紫外線吸収剤を含有する粘着剤層を有する粘着シートが知られている(例えば、特許文献2参照)。 In an image display device such as an organic EL display device, a component or the like in the image display device may be deteriorated by incident ultraviolet light, and a layer containing an ultraviolet absorber in order to suppress deterioration due to the ultraviolet light. It is known to provide Specifically, for example, it has at least one ultraviolet absorbing layer, the light transmittance at a wavelength of 380 nm is 30% or less, and the visible light transmittance at a wavelength longer than the wavelength of 430 nm is 80% or more. Transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets for image display devices (for example, see Patent Document 1) and pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets having a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer containing an acrylic polymer and a triazine-based ultraviolet absorber are known (for example, see Patent Document 2). .
特開2012-211305号公報JP 2012-211305 A 特開2013-75978号公報JP 2013-75978 A
 特許文献1、2に記載の粘着シートは、波長380nmの光の透過率を制御することができるものであるが、当該粘着シートを有機EL表示装置で用いた場合、長時間使用によって有機EL素子が劣化してしまう場合があり、十分なものではなかった。これは、特許文献1、2に記載の粘着シートでは、波長380nmの光を吸収することができるものの、有機EL素子の発光領域(430nmよりも長波長側)より短波長側の波長領域(380nm~430nm)の光が十分に吸収されておらず、当該透過光により劣化が生じると考えられる。 The pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets described in Patent Documents 1 and 2 can control the transmittance of light having a wavelength of 380 nm. When the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is used in an organic EL display device, the organic EL element can be used over a long period of time. May deteriorate and was not sufficient. This is because the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets described in Patent Documents 1 and 2 can absorb light having a wavelength of 380 nm, but the wavelength region on the shorter wavelength side (380 nm) than the light emitting region of the organic EL element (longer wavelength side than 430 nm). (˜430 nm) light is not sufficiently absorbed, and it is considered that deterioration is caused by the transmitted light.
 従って、有機EL素子の劣化抑制のためには、有機EL素子の発光領域(430nmよりも長波長側)より短波長側の波長(380nm~430nm)の光の透過を抑制し、前記有機EL素子の発光領域における可視光の透過率を十分に確保でき、かつ、高い透明性を有する層を有機EL表示装置に用いることが必要とされる。また、画像表示装置は、高温、高湿の環境下で用いられるため、厳しい環境条件下における耐久性についても求められる。 Therefore, in order to suppress deterioration of the organic EL element, transmission of light having a wavelength shorter than the light emitting region (longer wavelength side than 430 nm) (380 nm to 430 nm) is suppressed, and the organic EL element Therefore, it is necessary to use a layer having a high transparency that can sufficiently ensure the transmittance of visible light in the light emitting region of the organic EL display device. Further, since the image display device is used in a high temperature and high humidity environment, the image display device is also required to have durability under severe environmental conditions.
 本発明は、画像表示装置に適用した場合には、表示素子の劣化を抑制することができ、かつ高い透明性を有し、さらに厳しい環境条件下における耐久性にも優れる光学部材を形成することができる、光学部材用組成物を提供することを目的とする。 When applied to an image display apparatus, the present invention forms an optical member that can suppress deterioration of a display element, has high transparency, and is excellent in durability under severe environmental conditions. An object of the present invention is to provide a composition for an optical member.
 また、本発明は、前記組成物から形成される光学部材を提供すること、さらには当該光学部材を用いた画像表示装置を提供することを目的とする。 Another object of the present invention is to provide an optical member formed from the composition, and further to provide an image display device using the optical member.
 本発明者らは前記課題を解決すべく鋭意検討を重ねた結果、下記光学部材用組成物を見出し、本発明を完成するに至った。 As a result of intensive studies to solve the above problems, the present inventors have found the following composition for an optical member and have completed the present invention.
 即ち、本発明は、ベースポリマー及び下記一般式(1)で表される化合物を含有することを特徴とする光学部材用組成物、に関する。 That is, this invention relates to the composition for optical members characterized by including the compound represented by a base polymer and following General formula (1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
(一般式(1)中、mは1~6の整数を表し、
は、mが1のとき水素原子を表し、mが2~6のとき2~6価の連結基を表し、
は、下記一般式(2)で表される化合物から水素原子が1つ外れた基を表し、mが2~6のとき、複数のDは、全て同じであってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
(In the general formula (1), m represents an integer of 1 to 6,
Q 1 represents a hydrogen atom when m is 1, and a divalent to hexavalent linking group when m is 2 to 6,
D 1 represents a group in which one hydrogen atom is removed from the compound represented by the following general formula (2). When m is 2 to 6, a plurality of D 1 may be the same or different. It may be.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
(一般式(2)中、Rは、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。Rは、水素原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、複素環含有基、-C(O)-R又は-SO-Rを表す。Rは、ヒドロキシ基又は-OR71を表し、Rは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、-OR81、-NR8283又は-R84を表す。R71及びR81~R84は、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。
は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。
402及びR403は、同一又は異なって、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよいアリール基、-NR406407、-OR408、シアノ基、-C(O)R409、-O-C(O)R410又は-C(O)OR411を表し、
404~R411は、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。R404と、R405と、R404及びR405が結合している窒素原子とで、置換基を有していてもよい4~8員の含窒素複素環を形成してもよい。))
(In General Formula (2), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent. R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a cyano group. , A nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7 or —SO 2 —R 8. R 7 represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71 , and R 8 represents a halogen atom. Represents an atom, a hydroxy group, —OR 81 , —NR 82 R 83 or —R 84 , wherein R 71 and R 81 to R 84 are the same or different and each represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a substituent; Or the aryl group which may have a substituent is represented.
R 3 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
R 402 and R 403 are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group, an optionally substituted aryl group, —NR 406 R 407 , —OR 408 , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409 , —O—C (O) R 410 or —C (O) OR 411 ,
R 404 to R 411 are the same or different and each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent. R 404 , R 405, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404 and R 405 are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent. ))
 本発明においては、上記一般式(1)におけるmが1又は2であることが好ましい。 In the present invention, m in the general formula (1) is preferably 1 or 2.
 上記一般式(1)で表される化合物は、下記一般式(3)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。 The compound represented by the general formula (1) is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (3).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
(一般式(3)中、R1aは、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表し、R2aは、水素原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、複素環含有基、-C(O)-R7a又は-SO-R8aを表す。R7aは、ヒドロキシ基又は-OR71aを表し、R8aは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、-OR81a、-NR82a83a又は-R84aを表す。R71a及びR81a~R84aは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
 R3aは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
 R402aは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基、-NR406a407a、-OR408a、シアノ基、-C(O)R409a、-O-C(O)R410a又は-C(O)OR411aを表し、R404a~R411aは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。R404aと、R405aと、R404a及びR405aが結合している窒素原子とで、置換基を有していてもよい4~8員の含窒素複素環を形成してもよい。
 R413は、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表すか、又は、下記一般式(4)で表される基を表す。
(In General Formula (3), R 1a is a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. R 2a represents a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7a or —SO 2 —R 8a , where R 7a represents a hydroxy group Or -OR 71a , R 8a represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, -OR 81a , -NR 82a R 83a, or -R 84a, and R 71a and R 81a to R 84a are the same or different, Represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
R 3a represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. .
R 402a represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, —NR 406a R 407a , —OR 408a , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409a , —O—C (O) R 410a or —C (O) OR 411a , and R 404a to R 411a are the same or different and represent hydrogen It represents an atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 404a , R 405a, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404a and R 405a are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent.
R 413 represents a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or the following general formula The group represented by Formula (4) is represented.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
(一般式(4)中、Qは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の2価の炭化水素基を表し、*は一般式(3)との結合部位を表す。
1bは、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表し、R2bは、水素原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、複素環含有基、-C(O)-R7b又は-SO-R8bを表す。R7bは、ヒドロキシ基又は-OR71bを表し、R8bは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、-OR81b、-NR82b83b又は-R84bを表す。R71b及びR81b~R84bは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
 R3bは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
 R402bは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基、-NR406b407b、-OR408b、シアノ基、-C(O)R409b、-O-C(O)R410b又は-C(O)OR411bを表し、R404b~R411bは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。R404bと、R405bと、R404b及びR405bが結合している窒素原子とで、置換基を有していてもよい4~8員の含窒素複素環を形成してもよい。))
(In the general formula (4), Q 2 represents an optionally substituted divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and * represents a bonding site with the general formula (3).
R 1b represents a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and R 2b represents a hydrogen atom. An atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7b or —SO 2 —R 8b is represented. R 7b represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71b , and R 8b represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, —OR 81b , —NR 82b R 83b or —R 84b . R 71b and R 81b to R 84b are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an alkyl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Represents an aryl group.
R 3b represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. .
R 402b is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, —NR 406b R 407b , —OR 408b , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409b , —O—C (O) R 410b or —C (O) OR 411b , and R 404b to R 411b are the same or different and represent hydrogen It represents an atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 404b , R 405b, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404b and R 405b are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent. ))
 本発明の一態様においては、上記R413が、上記一般式(4)で表される基であることが好ましい。 In one embodiment of the present invention, R 413 is preferably a group represented by General Formula (4).
 上記一般式(1)で表される化合物が、下記一般式(5)で表される化合物であることも好ましい。 It is also preferred that the compound represented by the general formula (1) is a compound represented by the following general formula (5).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
(一般式(5)中、R2cは、水素原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、複素環含有基、-C(O)-R7c又は-SO-R8cを表す。R7cは、ヒドロキシ基又は-OR71cを表し、R8cは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、-OR81c、-NR82c83c又は-R84cを表す。R71c及びR81c~R84cは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
 R3cは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
 R402c及びR403cは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基、-NR406c407c、-OR408c、シアノ基、-C(O)R409c、-O-C(O)R410c又は-C(O)OR411cを表し、R404c~R411cは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。R404cと、R405cと、R404c及びR405cが結合している窒素原子とで、置換基を有していてもよい4~8員の含窒素複素環を形成してもよい。
 R501は、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基、又は、下記一般式(6)で表される基を表す。
(In the general formula (5), R 2c represents a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7c or —SO 2 —R 8c ). 7c represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71c , and R 8c represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, —OR 81c , —NR 82c R 83c or —R 84c, and R 71c and R 81c to R 84c are the same or Differently, it represents a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
R 3c represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. .
R 402c and R 403c are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon atom having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. Represents an aryl group, —NR 406c R 407c , —OR 408c , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409c , —O—C (O) R 410c or —C (O) OR 411c , and R 404c to R 411c Are the same or different and each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 404c , R 405c, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404c and R 405c are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent.
R 501 is a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or the following general formula (6 ) Represents a group represented by
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
(一般式(6)中、Qは、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の2価の炭化水素基を表し、*は一般式(5)との結合部位を表す。
 R2dは、水素原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、複素環含有基、-C(O)-R7d又は-SO-R8dを表す。R7dは、ヒドロキシ基又は-OR71dを表し、R8dは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、-OR81d、-NR82d83d又は-R84dを表す。R71d及びR81d~R84dは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
 R3dは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
 R402d及びR403dは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基、-NR406d407d、-OR408d、シアノ基、-C(O)R409d、-O-C(O)R410d又は-C(O)OR411dを表し、R404d~R411dは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。R404dと、R405dと、R404d及びR405dが結合している窒素原子とで、置換基を有していてもよい4~8員の含窒素複素環を形成してもよい。))
(In the general formula (6), Q 3 represents a divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and * represents a binding site with the general formula (5).
R 2d represents a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7d or —SO 2 —R 8d . R 7d represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71d , and R 8d represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, —OR 81d , —NR 82d R 83d or —R 84d . R 71d and R 81d to R 84d are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. Represents an aryl group.
R 3d represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. .
R 402d and R 403d are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon atom having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. An aryl group of —NR 406d R 407d , —OR 408d , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409d , —O—C (O) R 410d or —C (O) OR 411d , and R 404d to R 411d Are the same or different and each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 404d , R 405d, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404d and R 405d are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent. ))
 本発明の一態様においては、上記R501は、上記一般式(6)で表される基であることが好ましい。 In one embodiment of the present invention, R 501 is preferably a group represented by General Formula (6).
 前記光学部材用組成物において、前記一般式(1)で表される化合物は、吸収スペクトルの吸収極大波長が380~430nmの波長領域に存在する色素化合物であることが好ましい。 In the optical member composition, the compound represented by the general formula (1) is preferably a dye compound having an absorption maximum wavelength of an absorption spectrum in a wavelength region of 380 to 430 nm.
 前記光学部材用組成物において、さらに、紫外線吸収剤を含有することが好ましい。前記紫外線吸収剤の吸収スペクトルの吸収極大波長が、300~400nmの波長領域に存在することが好ましい。 It is preferable that the composition for optical members further contains an ultraviolet absorber. The absorption maximum wavelength of the absorption spectrum of the ultraviolet absorber is preferably in the wavelength region of 300 to 400 nm.
 また本発明は、前記光学部材用組成物から形成されることを特徴とする光学部材、に関する。 The present invention also relates to an optical member formed from the composition for optical members.
 前記光学部材は、例えば、光学フィルムとして用いることができる。 The optical member can be used as an optical film, for example.
 前記光学部材は、例えば、光学フィルム用粘着剤層又は接着剤層として用いることができる。前記光学フィルム用粘着剤層を形成する組成物が含有するベースポリマーは、(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーであることが好ましい。 The optical member can be used as, for example, an optical film pressure-sensitive adhesive layer or an adhesive layer. The base polymer contained in the composition for forming the optical film pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is preferably a (meth) acrylic polymer.
 前記光学部材は、例えば、光学フィルムに設けられる表面処理層として用いることができる。 The optical member can be used, for example, as a surface treatment layer provided on an optical film.
 前記光学部材に係る前記光学フィルムとしては、例えば、偏光フィルム、偏光子、偏光子用透明保護フィルム、又は位相差フィルムを挙げることができる。 Examples of the optical film relating to the optical member include a polarizing film, a polarizer, a transparent protective film for a polarizer, and a retardation film.
 また本発明は、偏光子及び位相差フィルムを含む光学積層体であって、
 前記光学積層体が、前記光学部材を含有する光学積層体(1)であることを特徴とする光学積層体、に関する。
Further, the present invention is an optical laminate including a polarizer and a retardation film,
The optical layered body is an optical layered body (1) containing the optical member.
 また本発明は、画像表示部及び前記光学部材又は前記光学積層体(1)を有することを特徴とする画像表示装置、に関する。本発明の前記画像表示装置は、前記光学部材又は光学積層体(1)が画像表示部よりも視認側に設けられている場合に好適である。 The present invention also relates to an image display device comprising the image display unit and the optical member or the optical laminate (1). The image display device of the present invention is suitable when the optical member or the optical laminated body (1) is provided on the viewing side with respect to the image display unit.
 前記画像表示装置としては、例えば、視認側から、少なくとも、偏光子及び位相差フィルムをこの順に含む光学積層体、並びに有機ELパネルを、前記画像表示部として含む有機EL表示装置が挙げられ、前記光学積層体が、前記光学部材又は光学積層体(1)を含有するものを好適で用いることができる。 Examples of the image display device include, from the viewing side, an organic EL display device including at least an optical laminate including a polarizer and a retardation film in this order, and an organic EL panel as the image display unit. What an optical laminated body contains the said optical member or an optical laminated body (1) can be used suitably.
 前記光学部材は、透明基材フィルム及び透明導電層を有する透明導電性フィルムにおいて、前記透明基材フィルム、又は前記透明基材フィルムと透明導電層との間に設けられる中間層として用いることができる。 In the transparent conductive film having a transparent base film and a transparent conductive layer, the optical member can be used as the transparent base film or an intermediate layer provided between the transparent base film and the transparent conductive layer. .
 前記中間層としては、屈折率調整層、易接着剤層、ハードコート層及びクラック防止層から選ばれるいずれか少なくとも1つを挙げることができる。 Examples of the intermediate layer include at least one selected from a refractive index adjustment layer, an easy-adhesive layer, a hard coat layer, and a crack prevention layer.
 また本発明は、透明基材フィルム及び透明導電層を有する透明導電性フィルムであって、前記透明基材フィルム、又は前記透明基材フィルムとの間に設けられる中間層として、前記光学部材を含有することを特徴とする透明導電性フィルム、に関する。 Moreover, this invention is a transparent conductive film which has a transparent base film and a transparent conductive layer, Comprising: The said optical member is contained as an intermediate | middle layer provided between the said transparent base film or the said transparent base film. It is related with the transparent conductive film characterized by doing.
 また本発明は、画像表示部及び前記透明導電性フィルムを含有することを特徴とする画像表示装置、に関する。本発明の前記画像表示装置は、前記透明導電性フィルムが画像表示部よりも視認側に設けられている場合に好適である。 The present invention also relates to an image display device comprising the image display unit and the transparent conductive film. The image display device of the present invention is suitable when the transparent conductive film is provided closer to the viewer than the image display unit.
 前記画像表示装置としては、例えば、前記画像表示部として有機ELパネルを含む有機EL表示装置が挙げられる。 Examples of the image display device include an organic EL display device including an organic EL panel as the image display unit.
 本発明の光学部材用組成物は、光学部材を有する形成するベースポリマーの他に、上記一般式(1)で表される化合物を含有する。当該化合物は、吸収スペクトルの吸収極大波長が400nm付近に存在するため、色素として好適に用いられ、当該化合物(色素化合物)と紫外線吸収剤を組み合わせて用いることで、有機ELパネル等の表示素子に影響しない領域の光を十分に吸収することができ、かつ、前記領域よりも長波長側は十分に透過することができる。さらに、上記一般式(1)で表される化合物は、高温、高湿の環境下の厳しい環境条件下における耐久性にも優れている。その結果、本発明の光学部材用組成物から形成される光学部材は、表示素子の外光による劣化を抑制することができ、かつ、優れた耐候劣化性を有し、長寿命化することができる。 The composition for an optical member of the present invention contains the compound represented by the above general formula (1) in addition to the base polymer to be formed having the optical member. Since the compound has an absorption maximum wavelength in the absorption spectrum near 400 nm, the compound is suitably used as a dye. By using the compound (dye compound) and an ultraviolet absorber in combination, the compound can be used in a display element such as an organic EL panel. Light in a region that is not affected can be sufficiently absorbed, and a longer wavelength side than the region can be sufficiently transmitted. Furthermore, the compound represented by the general formula (1) is also excellent in durability under severe environmental conditions under a high temperature and high humidity environment. As a result, the optical member formed from the composition for optical members of the present invention can suppress deterioration due to external light of the display element, and has excellent weather resistance deterioration, and can extend the life. it can.
本発明の光学部材を適用することができる光学積層体の一実施形態を模式的に示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows typically one Embodiment of the optical laminated body which can apply the optical member of this invention. 本発明の光学部材を適用することができる有機EL表示装置の一実施形態を模式的に示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows typically one Embodiment of the organic electroluminescence display which can apply the optical member of this invention. 本発明の光学部材を適用することができる透明導電性フィルムの一実施形態を模式的に示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows typically one Embodiment of the transparent conductive film which can apply the optical member of this invention.
 <光学部材用組成物>
 以下、本発明の光学部材用組成物が含有する各成分については説明する。本発明の光学部材用組成物は、光学部材を有する形成するベースポリマーの他に、上記一般式(1)で表される化合物を含有する。その他、本発明の光学部材用組成物は、各種の用途に応じて、上記一般式(1)で表される化合物以外の各種の添加剤を含有することができる。
<Composition for optical member>
Hereinafter, each component which the composition for optical members of this invention contains is demonstrated. The composition for optical members of this invention contains the compound represented by the said General formula (1) other than the base polymer which has an optical member. In addition, the composition for optical members of this invention can contain various additives other than the compound represented by the said General formula (1) according to various uses.
 <ベースポリマー>
 前記ベースポリマーは、光学部材が適用される用途に応じて適宜に選択される。前記ベースポリマーに用いる樹脂は特に限定されず、熱可塑性樹脂、光硬化性樹脂、熱硬化性樹脂等が挙げられる。例えば、アクリル樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリスチレン樹脂、低密度ポリエチレン樹脂、ポリプロピレン樹脂、ポリウレタン樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリアセタール樹脂、ポリフェニレンスルフィド樹脂、ポリエチレンテレフタレート樹脂、ポリブチレンテレフタレート樹脂、ポリシクロオレフィン樹脂、ポリスルホン樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン樹脂、フッ素樹脂、シリコーン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、フェノール樹脂、メラミン樹脂等の樹脂が挙げられる。これらは1種のみ使用してもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて使用してもよい。
<Base polymer>
The base polymer is appropriately selected according to the application to which the optical member is applied. The resin used for the base polymer is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a thermoplastic resin, a photocurable resin, and a thermosetting resin. For example, acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polystyrene resin, low density polyethylene resin, polypropylene resin, polyurethane resin, polyamide resin, polyacetal resin, polyphenylene sulfide resin, polyethylene terephthalate resin, polybutylene terephthalate resin, polycycloolefin resin, polysulfone resin, poly Examples of the resin include ether sulfone resin, fluorine resin, silicone resin, polyester resin, epoxy resin, phenol resin, and melamine resin. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 なお、光学用途に応じた、具体的なベースポリマーについては、当該光学用途において用いられているものを用いることができる。ベースポリマーは、各光学部材を形成する主成分であり、光学用途の説明とともに後述する。ベースポリマーに係る材料は、各種用途における周知標記としても示される。例えば、粘着剤の用途において、アクリル系粘着剤であれば、(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーをベースポリマーと認識する事ができる。 In addition, about the specific base polymer according to an optical use, what is used in the said optical use can be used. The base polymer is a main component that forms each optical member, and will be described later together with a description of optical applications. Materials related to the base polymer are also shown as well-known marks in various applications. For example, in the use of an adhesive, if it is an acrylic adhesive, a (meth) acrylic polymer can be recognized as a base polymer.
 <一般式(1)で表される化合物>
 上記一般式(1)で表される化合物を、本明細書中、化合物(1)ともいう。他の式番号の化合物についても同様であり、例えば一般式(2)で表される化合物を、化合物(2)ともいう。
<Compound represented by the general formula (1)>
In the present specification, the compound represented by the general formula (1) is also referred to as a compound (1). The same applies to the compounds of other formula numbers. For example, the compound represented by the general formula (2) is also referred to as the compound (2).
 本発明の化合物(1)において幾何学異性が存在する場合、本発明はその幾何学異性体のいずれも包含する。また、本発明の化合物(1)において1つ以上の不斉炭素原子が存在する場合、本発明は各々の不斉炭素原子がR配置の化合物、S配置の化合物及びそれらの任意の組み合せの化合物のいずれも包含する。またそれらのラセミ化合物、ラセミ混合物、単一のエナンチオマー、ジアステレオマー混合物のいずれも本発明に包含される。 In the case where geometric isomerism exists in the compound (1) of the present invention, the present invention includes any of the geometric isomers. In addition, when one or more asymmetric carbon atoms are present in the compound (1) of the present invention, the present invention relates to a compound in which each asymmetric carbon atom is in the R configuration, a compound in the S configuration, and a compound in any combination thereof. Any of these are included. Any of those racemates, racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, and diastereomeric mixtures are also included in the present invention.
上記一般式(1)中、mは1~6の整数を表す。mが2~6であると、化合物(1)の耐熱性が向上するため好ましい。本発明の一態様においては、mは、好ましくは1又は2であり、より好ましくは2である。 In the general formula (1), m represents an integer of 1 to 6. m is preferably 2 to 6 because the heat resistance of the compound (1) is improved. In one embodiment of the present invention, m is preferably 1 or 2, and more preferably 2.
 Qは、mが1のとき水素原子を表し、mが2~6のとき2~6価の連結基を表す。
 2~6価の連結基として、例えば、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の2~6価の炭化水素基、-SO-等が挙げられる。
 置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の2~6価の炭化水素基として、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の直鎖、分岐又は環状の2~6価のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20の2~6価のアリーレン基が挙げられる。Qは、好ましくは水素原子又は2価の連結基である。
Q 1 represents a hydrogen atom when m is 1 and a divalent to hexavalent linking group when m is 2 to 6.
Examples of the divalent to hexavalent linking group include an optionally substituted divalent to hexavalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, —SO 2 — and the like.
Examples of the divalent to hexavalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent include straight chain, branched or cyclic 2 to 6 carbon atoms having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. And a bivalent to hexavalent arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Q 1 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a divalent linking group.
 2価の連結基として、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の2価の炭化水素基、-SO-等が好ましく、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の2価の炭化水素基がより好ましい。置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の2価の炭化水素基は、好ましくは、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の直鎖、分岐又は環状の2価のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20の2価のアリーレン基である。
 炭素数1~20の直鎖、分岐又は環状の2価のアルキル基は、炭素-炭素間に酸素原子、硫黄原子又は置換基を有していてもよいアリーレン基が挿入された2価のアルキル基であってもよく、好ましくは、-(CHk1-(k1は、1~20の整数を表す)で表される炭素数1~20の直鎖状の2価のアルキル基であり、例えば、メチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基、ペンチレン基、ヘキシレン基、ヘプチレン基、オクチレン基、デシレン基等が挙げられる。また、1個以上のハロゲン原子で置換された2価のアルキル基であることも好ましく、例えば、ビストリフルオロメチルメチレン基等が挙げられる。直鎖状の2価のアルキル基の炭素数は2~10(上記式中のk1が2~10)がより好ましく、4~8(上記式中のk1が4~8)がさらに好ましい。
As the divalent linking group, an optionally substituted divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, —SO 2 — and the like are preferable, and an optionally substituted substituent having 1 to Twenty divalent hydrocarbon groups are more preferred. The divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent is preferably a linear, branched or cyclic divalent group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Or a divalent arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
The linear, branched or cyclic divalent alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is a divalent alkyl in which an arylene group which may have an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a substituent is inserted between carbon and carbon. A linear divalent alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms represented by — (CH 2 ) k1 — (k1 represents an integer of 1 to 20). Examples include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, a pentylene group, a hexylene group, a heptylene group, an octylene group, and a decylene group. A divalent alkyl group substituted with one or more halogen atoms is also preferable, and examples thereof include a bistrifluoromethylmethylene group. The carbon number of the linear divalent alkyl group is preferably 2 to 10 (k1 in the above formula is 2 to 10), more preferably 4 to 8 (k1 in the above formula is 4 to 8).
 置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20の2価のアリーレン基として、例えば、下記一般式(20)で表される基が好ましい。 As the divalent arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, for example, a group represented by the following general formula (20) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 上記一般式(20)中、Xは、互いに独立に、ハロゲン原子、ニトロ基、ヒドロキシ基、スルホ基、炭素数1~3のアルキル基又は炭素数1~3のアルコキシ基を表し、sは0~4の整数を表す。ベンゼン環の2カ所の結合手は、o-、m-、p-配向のいずれでもよい。また、ベンゼン環が置換基を有していない(s=0である)ことが好ましい。 In the general formula (20), X independently represents a halogen atom, a nitro group, a hydroxy group, a sulfo group, an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and s is 0 Represents an integer of ~ 4. The bonds at the two positions of the benzene ring may be any of o-, m-, and p- orientations. Moreover, it is preferable that the benzene ring does not have a substituent (s = 0).
 一般式(1)中、Dは、化合物(2)から水素原子が1つ外れた基を表す。化合物(2)から水素原子が1つ外れた基は、化合物(2)から水素原子を1つ除いた基ということもできる。化合物(2)は、含窒素芳香環及び電子求引性基を含み、色素となり得るメチン構造を含む。化合物(1)は、このようなメチン構造を含むことから、色素化合物として使用され得る。mが2~6のとき、複数のDは、全て同じであってもよく、異なっていてもよい。一態様においては、複数のDは、全て同じであることが好ましい。
 一般式(1)において、mが1である化合物(1)は、化合物(2)である。mが1である化合物(1)を単量体化合物ともいう。mが2~6である化合物(1)は、連結基(Q)により、化合物(2)から水素原子が外れた基が2~6連結した2~6量体構造を有する化合物である。mが2~6である化合物(1)を、2~6量体化合物ということもできる。
 Dは、化合物(2)の、R、R403又はR404から水素原子が1つ外れた基(Rが水素原子の場合は、Rが外れた基)であることが好ましく、R又はR403から水素原子が1つ外れた基であることがより好ましい。換言すると、一般式(1)において、Qは、一般式(2)中のR、R403又はR404の部分に結合していることが好ましく、R又はR403の部分に結合していることがより好ましい。
In the general formula (1), D 1 represents a group in which one hydrogen atom is removed from the compound (2). The group in which one hydrogen atom is removed from the compound (2) can also be referred to as a group in which one hydrogen atom has been removed from the compound (2). Compound (2) contains a nitrogen-containing aromatic ring and an electron-withdrawing group, and contains a methine structure that can be a dye. Since the compound (1) includes such a methine structure, it can be used as a dye compound. When m is 2 to 6, the plurality of D 1 may be all the same or different. In one aspect, it is preferred that the plurality of D 1 are all the same.
In the general formula (1), the compound (1) in which m is 1 is the compound (2). The compound (1) in which m is 1 is also referred to as a monomer compound. The compound (1) in which m is 2 to 6 is a compound having a 2 to 6-mer structure in which 2 to 6 groups in which a hydrogen atom is removed from the compound (2) are linked by a linking group (Q 1 ). The compound (1) in which m is 2 to 6 can also be referred to as a dimer to hexamer compound.
D 1 is preferably a group in which one hydrogen atom is removed from R 1 , R 403 or R 404 of the compound (2) (or a group in which R 1 is removed when R 1 is a hydrogen atom), R 1 or R 403 is more preferably a group in which one hydrogen atom is removed. In other words, in the general formula (1), Q 1 is preferably bonded to the portion of R 1 , R 403 or R 404 in the general formula (2), and is bonded to the portion of R 1 or R 403. More preferably.
 一般式(2)中、Rは、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基として、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基が挙げられる。置換基を有していてもよいアリール基として、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基が挙げられる。一般式(2)中の-C(O)-O-Rは、電子求引性基である。Rは、好ましくは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基であり、より好ましくは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20アルキル基である。 In General Formula (2), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent. Examples of the alkyl group which may have a substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Examples of the aryl group which may have a substituent include an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. In the general formula (2), —C (O) —O—R 1 is an electron withdrawing group. R 1 is preferably an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably a substituent group. The alkyl group may have 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
 Rは、水素原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基(CF基)、複素環含有基、-C(O)-R又は-SO-Rを表す。Rは、ヒドロキシ基又は-OR71を表し、Rは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、-OR81、-NR8283又は-R84を表す。R71及びR81~R84は、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。 R 2 represents a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group (CF 3 group), a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7 or —SO 2 —R 8 . R 7 represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71 , and R 8 represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, —OR 81 , —NR 82 R 83 or —R 84 . R 71 and R 81 to R 84 are the same or different and each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
 Rにおける複素環含有基として、ピロール環、ピリジン環、キノリン環、ピリミジン環、ピリダジン環、ピラジン環、イミダゾール環、ベンゾイミダゾール環、トリアジン環、トリアゾール環、テトラゾール環等の含窒素複素環;フラン環、ベンゾフラン環等の含酸素複素環;チオフェン環、ベンゾチオフェン環等の含硫黄複素環;オキサゾール環、ベンゾオキサゾール環等の酸素原子及び窒素原子を含む複素環;チアゾール環、ベンゾチアゾール環、チアジアゾール環等の含硫黄複素環等が挙げられ、これらの環は更に他の炭素環(例えば、ベンゼン環)や複素環(例えば、ピリジン環)と縮合環を形成していてもよく、オキサゾール環、ベンゾオキサゾール環が好ましい。 Heterocycle-containing groups in R 2 include nitrogen-containing heterocycles such as pyrrole ring, pyridine ring, quinoline ring, pyrimidine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrazine ring, imidazole ring, benzimidazole ring, triazine ring, triazole ring, tetrazole ring; Oxygen-containing heterocycles such as rings and benzofuran rings; sulfur-containing heterocycles such as thiophene rings and benzothiophene rings; heterocycles containing oxygen and nitrogen atoms such as oxazole rings and benzoxazole rings; thiazole rings, benzothiazole rings, thiadiazoles And a sulfur-containing heterocycle such as a ring. These rings may further form a condensed ring with another carbocycle (for example, a benzene ring) or a heterocycle (for example, a pyridine ring), an oxazole ring, A benzoxazole ring is preferred.
 本発明の一態様においては、Rにおける複素環含有基として、ベンゾオキサゾール環又はオキサゾール環の窒素と酸素の間の炭素(2位)から水素原子が外れた基(水素原子を除いた基ということもできる)が好ましく、より好ましくは、ベンゾオキサゾール環の窒素と酸素の間の炭素(2位)から水素原子が外れた基である。
 また、例えば、一般式(1)において、mが2~6であり、Rがベンゾオキサゾール環又はオキサゾール環から水素原子が外れた基であり、QとDとが、化合物(2)のRの部位で結合している場合、Rは、ベンゾオキサゾール環又はオキサゾール環の窒素と酸素の間の炭素(2位)以外の炭素原子でQと結合していることが好ましい。
In one embodiment of the present invention, the heterocyclic ring-containing group in R 2 is a benzoxazole ring or a group in which a hydrogen atom is removed from the carbon (2-position) between nitrogen and oxygen in the oxazole ring (referred to as a group excluding a hydrogen atom) It is also preferably a group in which a hydrogen atom is removed from the carbon (position 2) between nitrogen and oxygen of the benzoxazole ring.
Further, for example, in the general formula (1), m is 2 to 6, R 2 is a benzoxazole ring or a group in which a hydrogen atom is removed from the oxazole ring, and Q 1 and D 1 are compound (2) If the bound at the site of R 2, R 2 is preferably bound to Q 1 a carbon atom other than carbon (2-position) between the nitrogen and oxygen of the benzoxazole ring or an oxazole ring.
 R、R71、R81、R82、R83及びR84における置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基として、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基が挙げられる。置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基として、後述する置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の直鎖、分岐又は環状のアルキル基が挙げられる。本発明の一態様において、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基は、好ましくは炭素数4~20の直鎖、分岐又は環状のアルキル基であり、炭素数が4以上の分岐又は環状の立体的に嵩高いアルキル基が好ましく、より好ましくは、炭素数6~20の環状のアルキル基であり、特に好ましくは、直鎖又は分岐アルキル基を置換基として有してもよい環状のアルキル基である。R、R71、R81、R82、R83及びR84における炭素数1~20のアルキル基として、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、i-プロピル基、n-ブチル基、i-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、n-ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、n-オクチル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、4-t-ブチルシクロヘキシル基、2,6-ジ-t-ブチル-4-メチルシクロヘキシル等が好ましく、t-ブチル基、シクロヘキシル基、4-t-ブチルシクロヘキシル基、2,6-ジ-t-ブチル-4-メチルシクロヘキシル基等がより好ましく、4-t-ブチルシクロヘキシル基、2,6-ジ-t-ブチル-4-メチルシクロヘキシル基等がさらに好ましい。
 R、R71、R81、R82、R83及びR84における置換基を有していてもよいアリール基として、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基が挙げられる。置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基として、後述する置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基が挙げられ、例えば、アルキル基で置換されていてもよいフェニル基(例えば、フェニル基、3-メチルフェニル基、2,6-ジメチルフェニル基等)等が好ましい。
Examples of the alkyl group which may have a substituent in R 1 , R 71 , R 81 , R 82 , R 83 and R 84 include an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. It is done. Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent include linear, branched or cyclic alkyl groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent described later. In one embodiment of the present invention, the optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, and having 4 carbon atoms. The branched or cyclic sterically bulky alkyl groups described above are preferable, more preferably a cyclic alkyl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having a substituent. It is also a good cyclic alkyl group. Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in R 1 , R 71 , R 81 , R 82 , R 83 and R 84 include, for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an i-propyl group, and an n-butyl group. I-butyl group, t-butyl group, n-hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, n-octyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, 4-t-butylcyclohexyl group, 2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methyl Cyclohexyl and the like are preferable, t-butyl group, cyclohexyl group, 4-t-butylcyclohexyl group, 2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methylcyclohexyl group and the like are more preferable, 4-t-butylcyclohexyl group, 2 , 6-di-t-butyl-4-methylcyclohexyl group is more preferable.
Examples of the aryl group which may have a substituent in R 1 , R 71 , R 81 , R 82 , R 83 and R 84 include an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. It is done. Examples of the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent include an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent described later. For example, the aryl group may be substituted with an alkyl group. Preferable phenyl groups (for example, phenyl group, 3-methylphenyl group, 2,6-dimethylphenyl group) and the like are preferable.
 Rは、好ましくは、n-ブチル基、s-ブチル基、i-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、n-ペンチル基、n-ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、n-オクチル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、4-t-ブチルシクロヘキシル基、2,6-ジ-t-ブチル-4-メチルシクロヘキシル基等であり、4-t-ブチルシクロヘキシル基、2,6-ジ-t-ブチル-4-メチルシクロヘキシル基等がより好ましい。
 Rは、好ましくは、シアノ基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、複素環含有基、-C(O)-R又は-SO-Rであり、より好ましくはシアノ基、複素環含有基、又は、-C(O)-Rであり、さらに好ましくは、シアノ基又は-C(O)-OR71である。
R 1 is preferably n-butyl, s-butyl, i-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, n-hexyl, cyclohexyl, n-octyl, 2-ethylhexyl, 4-t-butylcyclohexyl group, 2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methylcyclohexyl group, etc., 4-t-butylcyclohexyl group, 2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methylcyclohexyl group Etc. are more preferable.
R 2 is preferably a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7 or —SO 2 —R 8 , more preferably a cyano group or a heterocyclic ring-containing group. Group, or —C (O) —R 7 , and more preferably a cyano group or —C (O) —OR 71 .
 R71及びR81は、同一又は異なって、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、i-プロピル基、n-ブチル基、s-ブチル基、i-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、n-ペンチル基、n-ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、n-オクチル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、4-t-ブチルシクロヘキシル基、2,6-ジ-t-ブチル-4-メチルシクロヘキシル基等が好ましく、4-t-ブチルシクロヘキシル基、2,6-ジ-t-ブチル-4-メチルシクロヘキシル基等がより好ましい。R82は、好ましくは、水素原子である。R83は、好ましくは、水素原子、フェニル基、3-メチルフェニル基又は2,6-ジメチルフェニル基である。R84は、好ましくは、メチル基、エチル基、t-ブチル基、シクロヘキシル基、フェニル基、ナフチル基等である。 R 71 and R 81 are the same or different and are, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, i-propyl group, n-butyl group, s-butyl group, i-butyl group, t-butyl group, n-pentyl group, n-hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, n-octyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, 4-t-butylcyclohexyl group, 2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methylcyclohexyl group and the like are preferable. 4-t-butylcyclohexyl group, 2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methylcyclohexyl group and the like are more preferable. R 82 is preferably a hydrogen atom. R 83 is preferably a hydrogen atom, a phenyl group, a 3-methylphenyl group or a 2,6-dimethylphenyl group. R 84 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a t-butyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, or the like.
 一般式(2)中、Rは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。
 R402及びR403は、同一又は異なって、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよいアリール基、-NR406407、-OR408、シアノ基、-C(O)R409、-O-C(O)R410又は-C(O)OR411を表す。
 R404~R411は、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。R404と、R405と、R404及びR405が結合している窒素原子とで、置換基を有していてもよい4~8員の含窒素複素環を形成してもよい。
In General Formula (2), R 3 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
R 402 and R 403 are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group, an optionally substituted aryl group, —NR 406 R 407 , —OR 408 , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409 , —O—C (O) R 410 or —C (O) OR 411 ;
R 404 to R 411 are the same or different and each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent. R 404 , R 405, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404 and R 405 are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent.
 R、R402及びR403におけるアルキル基としては、例えば、炭素数1~20の直鎖、分岐又は環状のアルキル基が挙げられる。
 炭素数1~20の直鎖、分岐又は環状のアルキル基として、具体的には、メチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、n-ブチル基、iso-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、n-ペンチル基、2-メチルブチル基、1-メチルブチル基、neo-ペンチル基、1、2-ジメチルプロピル基、1,1-ジメチルプロピル基、シクロペンチル基、n-ヘキシル基、4-メチルペンチル基、3-メチルペンチル基、2-メチルペンチル基、1-メチルペンチル基、3,3-ジメチルブチル基、2,3-ジメチルブチル基、1,3-ジメチルブチル基、2,2-ジメチルブチル基、1,2-ジメチルブチル基、1,1-ジメチルブチル基、2-エチルブチル基、1-エチルブチル基、1,1,2-トリメチルブチル基、1-エチル-2-メチルプロピル基、シクロヘキシル基、n-へプチル基、2-メチルヘキシル基、3-メチルヘキシル基、4-メチルヘキシル基、5-メチルヘキシル基、2,4-ジメチルペンチル基、n-オクチル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、2,5-ジメチルヘキシル基、2,4-ジメチルヘキシル基、2,2,4-トリメチルペンチル基、t-オクチル基、n-ノニル基、3,5,5-トリメチルヘキシル基、n-デシル基、4-エチルオクチル基、4-エチル-4,5-ジメチルヘキシル基、4-t-ブチルシクロヘキシル基、n-ウンデシル基、n-ドデシル基、1,3,5,7-テトラメチルオクチル基、4-ブチルオクチル基、6,6-ジエチルオクチル基、n-トリデシル基、6-メチル-4-ブチルオクチル基、n-テトラデシル基、n-ペンタデシル基、3,5-ジメチルヘプタデシル基、2,6-ジメチルヘプタデシル基、2,4-ジメチルヘプタデシル基、2,2,5,5-テトラメチルヘキシル基、1-シクロペンチル-2,2-ジメチルプロピル基、1-シクロヘキシル-2,2-ジメチルプロピル基、2,6-ジ-t-ブチル-4-メチルシクロヘキシル基、n-オクタデシル基等が挙げられる。
Examples of the alkyl group for R 3 , R 402, and R 403 include linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
Specific examples of the straight-chain, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms include methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, iso-propyl group, n-butyl group, iso-butyl group, sec- Butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, 2-methylbutyl, 1-methylbutyl, neo-pentyl, 1,2-dimethylpropyl, 1,1-dimethylpropyl, cyclopentyl, n-hexyl Group, 4-methylpentyl group, 3-methylpentyl group, 2-methylpentyl group, 1-methylpentyl group, 3,3-dimethylbutyl group, 2,3-dimethylbutyl group, 1,3-dimethylbutyl group, 2,2-dimethylbutyl group, 1,2-dimethylbutyl group, 1,1-dimethylbutyl group, 2-ethylbutyl group, 1-ethylbutyl group, 1,1,2-trimethylbutyl group 1-ethyl-2-methylpropyl group, cyclohexyl group, n-heptyl group, 2-methylhexyl group, 3-methylhexyl group, 4-methylhexyl group, 5-methylhexyl group, 2,4-dimethylpentyl group N-octyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, 2,5-dimethylhexyl group, 2,4-dimethylhexyl group, 2,2,4-trimethylpentyl group, t-octyl group, n-nonyl group, 3,5 , 5-trimethylhexyl group, n-decyl group, 4-ethyloctyl group, 4-ethyl-4,5-dimethylhexyl group, 4-t-butylcyclohexyl group, n-undecyl group, n-dodecyl group, 1, 3,5,7-tetramethyloctyl group, 4-butyloctyl group, 6,6-diethyloctyl group, n-tridecyl group, 6-methyl-4-butyloctyl group, n- Tradecyl group, n-pentadecyl group, 3,5-dimethylheptadecyl group, 2,6-dimethylheptadecyl group, 2,4-dimethylheptadecyl group, 2,2,5,5-tetramethylhexyl group, 1- Examples include cyclopentyl-2,2-dimethylpropyl group, 1-cyclohexyl-2,2-dimethylpropyl group, 2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methylcyclohexyl group, n-octadecyl group and the like.
 置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基における置換基は特に限定されず、炭素数6~10の単環又は多環の芳香環基(フェニル基、ナフチル基等)、炭素数1~8の直鎖、分岐又は環状のアルコキシ基、アミノ基、モノ-又はジ-アルキルアミノ基(アルキルの炭素数は1~8)、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ヒドロキシ基、ニトロ基、カルボキシ基、炭素数1~8のアルコキシカルボニル基、炭素数2~10のアシル基(例えば、アセチル基、プロピオニル基、ブチリル基、バレリル基、ピバロイル基、アクリロイル基、メタクリロイル基、ベンゾイル基、トルオイル基、シンナモイル基、アニソイル基、ナフトイル基等)、炭素数2~10のアシルオキシ基等が挙げられる。 The substituent in the alkyl group which may have a substituent is not particularly limited, and is a monocyclic or polycyclic aromatic ring group (phenyl group, naphthyl group, etc.) having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, or having 1 to 8 carbon atoms. Linear, branched or cyclic alkoxy group, amino group, mono- or di-alkylamino group (alkyl has 1 to 8 carbon atoms), halogen atom, cyano group, hydroxy group, nitro group, carboxy group, carbon number 1 An alkoxycarbonyl group having 8 to 8 carbon atoms, an acyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, acetyl group, propionyl group, butyryl group, valeryl group, pivaloyl group, acryloyl group, methacryloyl group, benzoyl group, toluoyl group, cinnamoyl group, anisoyl group) , Naphthoyl group, etc.), and acyloxy groups having 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
 R、R402及びR403におけるアリール基として、炭素数6~20の単環又は多環の芳香環基が挙げられる。
 炭素数6~20の単環又は多環の芳香環基として、具体的には、フェニル基等の単環の芳香族炭化水素基;ナフチル基、アントラセニル基、ナフタセニル基、ペンタセニル基、フェナントレニル基、ピレニル基等の多環の芳香族炭化水素基が挙げられる。
 置換基を有していてもよいアリール基における置換基は特に限定されず、例えば、炭素数1~8の直鎖、分岐又は環状のアルキル基、炭素数1~8のアルコキシ基、アミノ基、モノ-又はジ-アルキルアミノ基(アルキルの炭素数は1~8)、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ヒドロキシ基、ニトロ基、炭素数1~8のハロゲン化炭化水素基、カルボキシ基、炭素数1~8のアルコキシカルボニル基等が挙げられる。好ましくは、炭素数1~8の直鎖、分岐又は環状のアルキル基である。例えば、置換基を有するフェニル基及びナフチル基の一例を挙げると、ニトロフェニル基、シアノフェニル基、ヒドロキシフェニル基、メチルフェニル基、ジメチルフェニル基、トリメチルフェニル基、フルオロフェニル基、クロロフェニル基、ジクロロフェニル基、ブロモフェニル基、メトキシフェニル基、エトキシフェニル基、トリフルオロメチルフェニル基、N,N-ジメチルアミノフェニル基、ニトロナフチル基、シアノナフチル基、ヒドロキシナフチル基、メチルナフチル基、フルオロナフチル基、クロロナフチル基、ブロモナフチル基、トリフルオロメチルナフチル基等が挙げられる。
Examples of the aryl group for R 3 , R 402 and R 403 include monocyclic or polycyclic aromatic ring groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
As the monocyclic or polycyclic aromatic ring group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, specifically, a monocyclic aromatic hydrocarbon group such as a phenyl group; a naphthyl group, an anthracenyl group, a naphthacenyl group, a pentacenyl group, a phenanthrenyl group, Examples include polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbon groups such as a pyrenyl group.
The substituent in the aryl group which may have a substituent is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an amino group, Mono- or di-alkylamino group (alkyl has 1 to 8 carbon atoms), halogen atom, cyano group, hydroxy group, nitro group, halogenated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, carboxy group, 1 to carbon atoms 8 alkoxycarbonyl groups and the like. Preferably, it is a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms. For example, as an example of a phenyl group and a naphthyl group having a substituent, nitrophenyl group, cyanophenyl group, hydroxyphenyl group, methylphenyl group, dimethylphenyl group, trimethylphenyl group, fluorophenyl group, chlorophenyl group, dichlorophenyl group , Bromophenyl group, methoxyphenyl group, ethoxyphenyl group, trifluoromethylphenyl group, N, N-dimethylaminophenyl group, nitronaphthyl group, cyanonaphthyl group, hydroxynaphthyl group, methylnaphthyl group, fluoronaphthyl group, chloronaphthyl Group, bromonaphthyl group, trifluoromethylnaphthyl group and the like.
 一般式(2)において、R404と、R405と、R404及びR405が結合している窒素原子とで形成される、4~8員の含窒素複素環は、酸素原子を含む含窒素複素環であってもよい。含窒素複素環としては、非芳香族性含窒素複素環が挙げられる。4~8員の含窒素複素環として、例えば、ピロリジン環、ピペリジン環、ピペラジン環、モルホリン環等の非芳香族性含窒素複素環が挙げられる。
 置換基を有していてもよい4~8員の含窒素複素環における置換基は特に限定されず、例えば、炭素数1~8の直鎖、分岐又は環状のアルキル基、炭素数1~8のアルコキシ基、アミノ基、モノ-又はジ-アルキルアミノ基(アルキルの炭素数は1~8)、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ヒドロキシ基、ニトロ基、炭素数1~8のハロゲン化炭化水素基、カルボキシ基、炭素数1~8のアルコキシカルボニル基等が挙げられる。好ましくは、炭素数1~8の直鎖、分岐又は環状のアルキル基である。
In the general formula (2), the 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocycle formed by R 404 , R 405, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404 and R 405 are bonded is a nitrogen-containing oxygen atom. It may be a heterocyclic ring. Examples of the nitrogen-containing heterocycle include non-aromatic nitrogen-containing heterocycles. Examples of the 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocycle include non-aromatic nitrogen-containing heterocycles such as pyrrolidine ring, piperidine ring, piperazine ring and morpholine ring.
The substituent in the 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and 1 to 8 carbon atoms. An alkoxy group, an amino group, a mono- or di-alkylamino group (the alkyl has 1 to 8 carbon atoms), a halogen atom, a cyano group, a hydroxy group, a nitro group, a halogenated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, Examples thereof include a carboxy group and an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms. Preferably, it is a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
 アルキル基、アリール基、含窒素複素環、複素環等の環が置換基を有する場合において、置換基が2以上ある場合には、それぞれの置換基は同一であっても異なっていてもよい。 In the case where a ring such as an alkyl group, an aryl group, a nitrogen-containing heterocycle or a heterocycle has a substituent, when there are two or more substituents, each substituent may be the same or different.
 一般式(2)中の各基の好ましい態様についてさらに説明する。
 Rは、好ましくは水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はシアノ基であり、より好ましくは水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~5のアルキル基であり、さらに好ましくは水素原子又は炭素数1~3のアルキル基であり、特に好ましくは水素原子である。
Preferred embodiments of each group in the general formula (2) will be further described.
R 3 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a cyano group, more preferably a carbon atom having 1 carbon atom which may have a hydrogen atom or substituent. An alkyl group having 5 to 5, more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a hydrogen atom.
 R402は、好ましくは水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基又はアルコキシ基であり、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基がより好ましい。より好ましくは、水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~5のアルキル基であり、さらに好ましくは、水素原子又は炭素数1~3のアルキル基であり、特に好ましくはメチル基である。 R 402 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or alkoxy group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, An alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent is more preferable. More preferably, it is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a methyl group. It is.
 R403は、好ましくは-OR408である。R408は、好ましくは水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基であり、より好ましくは、水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~5のアルキル基であり、さらに好ましくは炭素数1~3のアルキル基であり、特に好ましくはエチル基である。
本発明の一態様において、R402及びR403は、少なくともどちらか一方が水素原子以外の置換基であることが好ましく、R402及びR403が、同一又は異なって、水素原子以外の置換基であることがより好ましい。
R 403 is preferably —OR 408 . R 408 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably , A hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an ethyl group.
In one embodiment of the present invention, at least one of R 402 and R 403 is preferably a substituent other than a hydrogen atom, and R 402 and R 403 are the same or different and are each a substituent other than a hydrogen atom. More preferably.
 R404及びR405は、同一又は異なって、好ましくは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基であり、より好ましくは炭素数1~10のアルキル基又は炭素数6~10のアリール基であり、さらに好ましくは炭素数1~10のアルキル基であり、特に好ましくはメチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、n-ブチル基である。
 R406、R407、R408、R409、R410及びR411は、同一又は異なって、好ましくは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基である。
R 404 and R 405 are the same or different and are preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. More preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, still more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, n- A propyl group and an n-butyl group.
R 406 , R 407 , R 408 , R 409 , R 410 and R 411 are the same or different and preferably have an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a substituent. It may be an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
 一般式(1)においてmが1又は2である化合物として、上記一般式(3)で表される化合物(化合物(3))、一般式(5)で表される化合物(化合物(5))等が好ましい。 As a compound in which m is 1 or 2 in the general formula (1), a compound represented by the above general formula (3) (compound (3)), a compound represented by the general formula (5) (compound (5)) Etc. are preferred.
 本発明の一態様においては、化合物(1)として化合物(3)が好ましい。化合物(3)は、耐光性に優れるため好ましい。
 一般式(3)中、R1aは、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表し、R2aは、水素原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、複素環含有基、-C(O)-R7a又は-SO-R8aを表す。R7aは、ヒドロキシ基又は-OR71aを表し、R8aは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、-OR81a、-NR82a83a又は-R84aを表す。R71a及びR81a~R84aは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
In one embodiment of the present invention, compound (3) is preferred as compound (1). The compound (3) is preferable because of excellent light resistance.
In general formula (3), R 1a represents a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. R 2a represents a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7a or —SO 2 —R 8a . R 7a represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71a , and R 8a represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, —OR 81a , —NR 82a R 83a or —R 84a . R 71a and R 81a to R 84a are the same or different and each is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an optionally substituted group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. Represents an aryl group.
 R1aの好ましい態様は、上述したRの好ましい態様と同じである。
 R2aは、シアノ基、複素環含有基、又は、-C(O)-R7aが好ましく、シアノ基又は-C(O)-OR71aがより好ましい。R71a、R81a、R82a、R83a及びR84aの好ましい態様は、上述したR71、R81、R82、R83及びR84の好ましい態様とそれぞれ同じである。
A preferred embodiment of R 1a is the same as the preferred embodiment of R 1 described above.
R 2a is preferably a cyano group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, or —C (O) —R 7a, more preferably a cyano group or —C (O) —OR 71a . Preferred embodiments of R 71a , R 81a , R 82a , R 83a and R 84a are the same as the preferred embodiments of R 71 , R 81 , R 82 , R 83 and R 84 described above.
 一般式(3)中、R3aは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
 R402aは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基、-NR406a407a、-OR408a、シアノ基、-C(O)R409a、-O-C(O)R410a又は-C(O)OR411aを表し、R404a~R411aは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。R404aと、R405aと、R404a及びR405aが結合している窒素原子とで、置換基を有していてもよい4~8員の含窒素複素環を形成してもよい。
 R3a、R402a、R404a、R405a、R406a、R407a、R408a、R409a、R410a及びR411aの好ましい態様は、上述したR、R402、R404、R405、R406、R407、R408、R409、R410及びR411の好ましい態様とそれぞれ同じである。
In the general formula (3), R 3a is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon atom. Represents 20 to 20 aryl groups.
R 402a represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, —NR 406a R 407a , —OR 408a , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409a , —O—C (O) R 410a or —C (O) OR 411a , and R 404a to R 411a are the same or different and represent hydrogen It represents an atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 404a , R 405a, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404a and R 405a are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent.
The preferred embodiments of R 3a , R 402a , R 404a , R 405a , R 406a , R 407a , R 408a , R 409a , R 410a, and R 411a are R 3 , R 402 , R 404 , R 405 , R 406 described above. , respectively and preferred embodiments of R 407, R 408, R 409 , R 410 and R 411 same.
 一般式(3)中、R413は、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表すか、又は、上記一般式(4)で表される基を表す。R413は、好ましくは、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~5のアルキル基又は一般式(4)で表される基であり、より好ましくは炭素数1~3のアルキル基又は一般式(4)で表される基であり、さらに好ましくはエチル基又は上記一般式(4)で表される基である。本発明の一態様においては、R413は、一般式(4)で表される基であることが好ましい。 In General Formula (3), R 413 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Or a group represented by the general formula (4). R 413 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a group represented by the general formula (4), more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms or It is group represented by General formula (4), More preferably, it is group represented by an ethyl group or the said General formula (4). In one embodiment of the present invention, R 413 is preferably a group represented by General Formula (4).
 一般式(4)中、Qは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の2価の炭化水素基を表し、*は一般式(3)との結合部位を表す。一般式(4)において、Qが一般式(3)に結合している。Qにおける置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の2価の炭化水素基及びその好ましい態様は、上述したQにおける置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の2価の炭化水素基及びその好ましい態様と同じである。 In the general formula (4), Q 2 represents an optionally substituted divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and * represents a bonding site with the general formula (3). In the general formula (4), Q 2 is bonded to the general formula (3). The divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent in Q 2 and preferred embodiments thereof are those having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent in Q 1 described above. The same as the divalent hydrocarbon group and preferred embodiments thereof.
 一般式(4)中、R1bは、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表し、R2bは、水素原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、複素環含有基、-C(O)-R7b又は-SO-R8bを表す。R7bは、ヒドロキシ基又は-OR71bを表し、R8bは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、-OR81b、-NR82b83b又は-R84bを表す。R71b及びR81b~R84bは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
 R1bの好ましい態様は、上述したRの好ましい態様と同じである。
 R2bは、シアノ基、複素環含有基、又は、-C(O)-R7bが好ましく、シアノ基又は-C(O)-OR71bがより好ましい。R71b、R81b、R82b、R83b及びR84bの好ましい態様は、上述したR71、R81、R82、R83及びR84の好ましい態様とそれぞれ同じである。
In General Formula (4), R 1b represents a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. R 2b represents a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7b or —SO 2 —R 8b . R 7b represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71b , and R 8b represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, —OR 81b , —NR 82b R 83b or —R 84b . R 71b and R 81b to R 84b are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an alkyl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Represents an aryl group.
A preferred embodiment of R 1b is the same as the preferred embodiment of R 1 described above.
R 2b is preferably a cyano group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, or —C (O) —R 7b, more preferably a cyano group or —C (O) —OR 71b . R 71b, R 81b, R 82b , preferred embodiments of R 83 b and R 84b are each a preferred embodiment of R 71, R 81, R 82 , R 83 and R 84 as described above the same.
 一般式(4)中、R3bは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
 R402bは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基、-NR406b407b、-OR408b、シアノ基、-C(O)R409b、-O-C(O)R410b又は-C(O)OR411bを表し、R404b~R411bは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。R404bと、R405bと、R404b及びR405bが結合している窒素原子とで、置換基を有していてもよい4~8員の含窒素複素環を形成してもよい。
 R3b、R402b、R404b、R405a、R406b、R407b、R408b、R409b、R410b及びR411bの好ましい態様は、上述したR、R402、R404、R405、R406、R407、R408、R409、R410及びR411の好ましい態様とそれぞれ同じである。
In the general formula (4), R 3b is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon atom. Represents 20 to 20 aryl groups.
R 402b is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, —NR 406b R 407b , —OR 408b , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409b , —O—C (O) R 410b or —C (O) OR 411b , and R 404b to R 411b are the same or different and represent hydrogen It represents an atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 404b , R 405b, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404b and R 405b are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent.
The preferred embodiments of R 3b , R 402b , R 404b , R 405a , R 406b , R 407b , R 408b , R 409b , R 410b, and R 411b are R 3 , R 402 , R 404 , R 405 , R 406 described above. , R 407 , R 408 , R 409 , R 410 and R 411 are the same as the preferred embodiments.
 化合物(1)として、化合物(5)も好ましい。
 一般式(5)中、R2cは、水素原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、複素環含有基、-C(O)-R7c又は-SO-R8cを表す。R7cは、ヒドロキシ基又は-OR71cを表し、R8cは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、-OR81c、-NR82c83c又は-R84cを表す。R71c及びR81c~R84cは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。R2cは、シアノ基、複素環含有基、又は-C(O)-R7cが好ましく、シアノ基又は-C(O)-OR71cがより好ましい。
 R71c、R81c、R82c、R83c及びR84cの好ましい態様は、上述したR71、R81、R82、R83及びR84の好ましい態様とそれぞれ同じである。
As the compound (1), the compound (5) is also preferable.
In the general formula (5), R 2c represents a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7c or —SO 2 —R 8c . R 7c represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71c , and R 8c represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, —OR 81c , —NR 82c R 83c or —R 84c . R 71c and R 81c to R 84c are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. Represents an aryl group. R 2c is preferably a cyano group, a heterocyclic group, or —C (O) —R 7c, more preferably a cyano group or —C (O) —OR 71c .
Preferred embodiments of R 71c , R 81c , R 82c , R 83c and R 84c are the same as the preferred embodiments of R 71 , R 81 , R 82 , R 83 and R 84 described above.
 一般式(5)中、R3cは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
402c及びR403cは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基、-NR406c407c、-OR408c、シアノ基、-C(O)R409c、-O-C(O)R410c又は-C(O)OR411cを表し、R404c~R411cは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。R404cと、R405cと、R404c及びR405cが結合している窒素原子とで、置換基を有していてもよい4~8員の含窒素複素環を形成してもよい。
 R3c、R402c、R403c、R404c、R405c、R406c、R407c、R408c、R409c、R410c及びR411cの好ましい態様は、上述したR、R402、R403、R404、R405、R406、R407、R408、R409、R410及びR411の好ましい態様とそれぞれ同じである。
In general formula (5), R 3c is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon atom. Represents 20 to 20 aryl groups.
R 402c and R 403c are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon atom having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. Represents an aryl group, —NR 406c R 407c , —OR 408c , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409c , —O—C (O) R 410c or —C (O) OR 411c , and R 404c to R 411c Are the same or different and each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 404c , R 405c, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404c and R 405c are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent.
Preferred embodiments of R 3c , R 402c , R 403c , R 404c , R 405c , R 406c , R 407c , R 408c , R 409c , R 410c, and R 411c are the aforementioned R 3 , R 402 , R 403 , and R 404. , R 405 , R 406 , R 407 , R 408 , R 409 , R 410 and R 411 are the same as the preferred embodiments.
 一般式(5)中、R501は、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基、又は、上記一般式(6)で表される基を表す。R501は、好ましくは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、t-ブチル基、シクロヘキシル基、4-t-ブチルシクロヘキシル基、2,6-ジ-t-ブチル-4-メチルシクロヘキシル基等)、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基(例えば、フェニル基、メチルフェニル基、ジメチルフェニル基、トリメチルフェニル基等)、又は、上記一般式(6)で表される基である。本発明の一態様においては、R501は、上記一般式(6)で表される基であることが好ましい。 In the general formula (5), R 501 is a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, Or represents the group represented by the said General formula (6). R 501 is preferably an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms (for example, methyl group, ethyl group, t-butyl group, cyclohexyl group, 4-t-butylcyclohexyl group, 2, 6-di-t-butyl-4-methylcyclohexyl group), an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent (eg, phenyl group, methylphenyl group, dimethylphenyl group, trimethylphenyl group) Etc.) or a group represented by the general formula (6). In one embodiment of the present invention, R 501 is preferably a group represented by General Formula (6).
 一般式(6)中、Qは、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の2価の炭化水素基を表し、*は一般式(5)との結合部位を表す。一般式(6)において、Qが一般式(5)に結合している。Qにおける置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の2価の炭化水素基及びその好ましい態様は、上述したQにおける置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の2価の炭化水素基及びその好ましい態様と同じである。一態様においては、Qは、より好ましくは、上記一般式(20)で表され、sが0である2価のアリール基である。 In the general formula (6), Q 3 represents an optionally substituted divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and * represents a bonding site with the general formula (5). In the general formula (6), Q 3 is bonded to the general formula (5). The divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent in Q 3 and preferred embodiments thereof are those having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent in Q 1 described above. The same as the divalent hydrocarbon group and preferred embodiments thereof. In one embodiment, Q 3 is more preferably a divalent aryl group represented by the general formula (20) and s is 0.
 一般式(6)中、R2dは、水素原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、複素環含有基、-C(O)-R7d又は-SO-R8dを表す。R7dは、ヒドロキシ基又は-OR71dを表し、R8dは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、-OR81d、-NR82d83d又は-R84dを表す。R71d及びR81d~R84dは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
 R2dは、シアノ基、複素環含有基、又は、-C(O)-R7dが好ましく、シアノ基又は-C(O)-OR71dがより好ましい。R71d、R81d、R82d、R83d及びR84dの好ましい態様は、上述したR71、R81、R82、R83及びR84の好ましい態様とそれぞれ同じである。
In the general formula (6), R 2d represents a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7d or —SO 2 —R 8d . R 7d represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71d , and R 8d represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, —OR 81d , —NR 82d R 83d or —R 84d . R 71d and R 81d to R 84d are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. Represents an aryl group.
R 2d is preferably a cyano group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, or —C (O) —R 7d, more preferably a cyano group or —C (O) —OR 71d . Preferred embodiments of R 71d , R 81d , R 82d , R 83d and R 84d are the same as the preferred embodiments of R 71 , R 81 , R 82 , R 83 and R 84 described above.
 R3dは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
 R402d及びR403dは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基、-NR406d407d、-OR408d、シアノ基、-C(O)R409d、-O-C(O)R410d又は-C(O)OR411dを表し、R404d~R411dは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。R404dと、R405dと、R404d及びR405dが結合している窒素原子とで、置換基を有していてもよい4~8員の含窒素複素環を形成してもよい。
 R3d、R402d、R403d、R404d、R405d、R406d、R407d、R408d、R409d、R410d及びR411dの好ましい態様は、上述したR、R402、R403、R404、R405、R406、R407、R408、R409、R410及びR411の好ましい態様とそれぞれ同じである。
R 3d represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. .
R 402d and R 403d are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon atom having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. An aryl group of —NR 406d R 407d , —OR 408d , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409d , —O—C (O) R 410d or —C (O) OR 411d , and R 404d to R 411d Are the same or different and each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 404d , R 405d, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404d and R 405d are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent.
Preferred embodiments of R 3d , R 402d , R 403d , R 404d , R 405d , R 406d , R 407d , R 408d , R 409d , R 410d, and R 411d are R 3 , R 402 , R 403 , R 404 described above. , R 405 , R 406 , R 407 , R 408 , R 409 , R 410 and R 411 are the same as the preferred embodiments.
 化合物(3)は、R413が一般式(4)で表される基である場合は、一般式(1)においてQがQ(置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の2価の炭化水素基)であり、該Qにより、一般式(3)で表される基及び一般式(4)で表される基が両側に連結した2量体構造を有する化合物である。一般式(3)で表される基及び一般式(4)で表される基は、メチン構造を含み、いずれも色素となる構造である。このような色素となる構造が2量体構造となっていることにより分子量が増大するため、化合物が昇華しにくくなって、耐熱性に優れた色素化合物となる。R413が一般式(4)で表される基である化合物(3)は、下記一般式(3-1)で表される化合物である。 In the compound (3), when R 413 is a group represented by the general formula (4), in the general formula (1), Q 1 is Q 2 (optionally having 1 to 20 carbon atoms). And a compound having a dimer structure in which the group represented by the general formula (3) and the group represented by the general formula (4) are linked to both sides by Q 2. is there. The group represented by the general formula (3) and the group represented by the general formula (4) include a methine structure, and both are structures that become a dye. Since the molecular weight is increased due to the dimer structure of such a dye structure, the compound is difficult to sublimate, and the dye compound is excellent in heat resistance. The compound (3) in which R 413 is a group represented by the general formula (4) is a compound represented by the following general formula (3-1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 上記式(3-1)中、R1a、R2a、R3a、R402a、R404a及びR405a、並びに、Q、R1b、R2b、R3b、R402b、R404b及びR405bは、それぞれ上記と同義である。 In the above formula (3-1), R 1a , R 2a , R 3a , R 402a , R 404a and R 405a , and Q 2 , R 1b , R 2b , R 3b , R 402b , R 404b and R 405b are Are as defined above.
 化合物(5)は、R501が一般式(6)で表される基である場合は、一般式(1)においてQがQ(置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の2価の炭化水素基)であり、該Qにより、一般式(5)で表される基及び一般式(6)で表される基が両側に連結した2量体構造を有する化合物である。一般式(5)で表される基及び一般式(6)で表される構造は、メチン構造を含み、色素となる構造である。このような色素となる構造が2量体構造となっていることにより分子量が増大するため、化合物が昇華しにくくなって、耐熱性に優れた色素化合物となる。
 R501が一般式(6)で表される基である化合物(5)は、下記一般式(5-1)で表される化合物である。
In the compound (5), when R 501 is a group represented by the general formula (6), in the general formula (1), Q 1 is Q 3 (which may have a substituent having 1 to 20 carbon atoms). And a compound having a dimer structure in which the group represented by the general formula (5) and the group represented by the general formula (6) are linked to both sides according to Q 3. is there. The group represented by the general formula (5) and the structure represented by the general formula (6) include a methine structure and serve as a dye. Since the molecular weight is increased due to the dimer structure of such a dye structure, the compound is difficult to sublimate, and the dye compound is excellent in heat resistance.
The compound (5) in which R 501 is a group represented by the general formula (6) is a compound represented by the following general formula (5-1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 上記一般式(5-1)中、R2c、R3c、R402c、R403c、R404c及びR405c、並びに、Q、R2d、R3d、R402d、R403d、R404d及びR405dは、上記と同義である。 In the general formula (5-1), R 2c , R 3c , R 402c , R 403c , R 404c and R 405c , and Q 3 , R 2d , R 3d , R 402d , R 403d , R 404d and R 405d Is as defined above.
 本発明の化合物(1)の好ましい態様の一例として、例えば、実施例で製造した化合物C1~C5等が挙げられる。中でも、耐光性が高いことから、化合物C1、C2及びC5が好ましい。耐熱性が高い点から、化合物C1~C3が好ましい。有機溶媒への溶解度が高い点では、化合物C1~C5が好ましい。化合物C1~C5は、化合物(3)の一例である。 Examples of preferred embodiments of the compound (1) of the present invention include, for example, the compounds C1 to C5 produced in the examples. Of these, compounds C1, C2 and C5 are preferred because of high light resistance. From the viewpoint of high heat resistance, compounds C1 to C3 are preferred. From the viewpoint of high solubility in an organic solvent, compounds C1 to C5 are preferred. Compounds C1 to C5 are examples of compound (3).
 本発明の化合物(1)の製造方法は特に限定されず、例えば、以下の方法により製造することができる。本発明の化合物の製造方法について、以下に合成方法の一例を挙げて説明するが、本発明の化合物(1)の製造方法は下記方法に限定されるものではない。また、後述の反応を行う際に、当該部位以外の官能基については、必要に応じてあらかじめ適当な保護基により保護しておき、適当な段階においてこれを脱保護してもよい。 The method for producing the compound (1) of the present invention is not particularly limited, and for example, it can be produced by the following method. The method for producing the compound of the present invention will be described below with an example of the synthesis method, but the method for producing the compound (1) of the present invention is not limited to the following method. Moreover, when performing the below-mentioned reaction, about functional groups other than the said site | part, you may protect beforehand with a suitable protective group as needed, and you may deprotect this in a suitable step.
 本発明の一態様として、一般式(1)で表される化合物が下記一般式(11)で表される化合物(化合物(11))である場合、例えば、次のような方法により合成することができる。化合物(11)は、本発明の化合物(1)の一例であり、一般式(1)においてmが2である化合物(二量体化合物)である。化合物(11)は、化合物(3)において、R413が一般式(4)で表される基である化合物の一例ともいえる。下記では、化合物(M4)に化合物(M21)を脱水縮合反応させることにより化合物(11)が得られる。 As one embodiment of the present invention, when the compound represented by the general formula (1) is a compound represented by the following general formula (11) (compound (11)), for example, synthesis is performed by the following method. Can do. The compound (11) is an example of the compound (1) of the present invention, and is a compound (dimer compound) in which m is 2 in the general formula (1). The compound (11) can be said to be an example of a compound in which R 413 is a group represented by the general formula (4) in the compound (3). In the following, compound (11) is obtained by subjecting compound (M4) to dehydration condensation reaction with compound (M21).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
 上記反応式中、Qは、2価の連結基を表す。R1f、R2f及びこれらの好ましい態様は、上述したR、R及びこれらの好ましい態様とそれぞれ同じである。R402f、R404f及びR405f並びにこれらの好ましい態様は、上述したR402、R404及びR405並びにこれらの好ましい態様とそれぞれ同じである。Qにおける2価の連結基は、Qにおける2価の連結基と同じである。Qは、好ましくは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の2価の炭化水素基である。 In the above reaction formula, Q f represents a divalent linking group. R 1f , R 2f and preferred embodiments thereof are the same as R 1 , R 2 and preferred embodiments described above, respectively. R 402f , R 404f and R 405f and preferred embodiments thereof are the same as the above-described R 402 , R 404 and R 405 and preferred embodiments thereof. The divalent linking group in Q f is the same as the divalent linking group in Q 1 . Q f is preferably a divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
で表される波線(上記の波線は化学式中の波線に同じ)は、単結合であって、それが結合している二重結合についての立体配置が、それぞれ独立して、E配置若しくはZ配置又はそれらの混合であることを示す。以下も同様である。 (The above-mentioned wavy line is the same as the wavy line in the chemical formula) is a single bond, and the configuration of the double bond to which it is bonded is independently an E configuration or a Z configuration. Or a mixture thereof. The same applies to the following.
 化合物(M4)は、例えば、下記一般式(M1)で表される化合物(M1)にジハロゲン化アルキル化合物を反応させて化合物(M1)のヒドロキシ基をアルコキシ化することにより得ることができる。化合物(M1)は、Journal of the Chemical Society 1957,4845に記載の方法に従って得ることができる。 The compound (M4) can be obtained, for example, by reacting a dihalogenated alkyl compound with the compound (M1) represented by the following general formula (M1) to alkoxylate the hydroxy group of the compound (M1). Compound (M1) can be obtained according to the method described in Journal of the Chemical Society, 1957, 4845.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 上記一般式(M1)中、R402f、R404f及びR405fは、上記と同義である。
また、化合物(11)は、化合物(M1)と化合物(M21)とを脱水縮合させた後、アルコキシ化により二量化して得ることも可能である。
In the general formula (M1), R 402f , R 404f and R 405f have the same meanings as described above.
The compound (11) can also be obtained by dehydrating and condensing the compound (M1) and the compound (M21) and then dimerizing by alkoxylation.
 一般式(1)で表される化合物が下記一般式(12)で表される化合物(化合物(12))である場合は、例えば、次のような方法により合成することができる。化合物(12)は、本発明の化合物(1)の一例であり、二量体化合物である。化合物(12)は、化合物(5)において、R501が一般式(6)で表される基である化合物の一例ともいえる。下記では、化合物(M2-1)に化合物(M22)を脱水縮合反応させることにより化合物(12)が得られる。 When the compound represented by the general formula (1) is a compound represented by the following general formula (12) (compound (12)), for example, it can be synthesized by the following method. The compound (12) is an example of the compound (1) of the present invention and is a dimer compound. The compound (12) can be said to be an example of a compound in which R 501 is a group represented by the general formula (6) in the compound (5). In the following, compound (12) is obtained by subjecting compound (M2-1) to dehydration condensation reaction of compound (M22).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 上記反応式中、R2g及びその好ましい態様は、上述したR2c及びこれらの好ましい態様とそれぞれ同じである。Wは、-C(O)-O-Q-O-C(O)-を表し、Qは、2価の連結基を表す。Qにおける2価の連結基は、Qにおける2価の連結基と同じである。Qは、好ましくは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の2価の炭化水素基である。R402g、R403g、R404g及びR405g並びにこれらの好ましい態様は、上述したR402、R403、R404及びR405並びにこれらの好ましい態様とそれぞれ同じである。
 化合物(M2-1)及び後記の化合物(M2-2)は、例えば、上記化合物(M1)のヒドロキシ基をアルコキシ化することにより得ることができる。
 また、化合物(12)は、上記の化合物(M21)と化合物(M2-1)とを脱水縮合させた後、R1fで連結させてWとして二量化して得ることも可能である。
In the above reaction formula, R 2g and preferred embodiments thereof are the same as R 2c described above and preferred embodiments thereof. W g represents —C (O) —O—Q g —O—C (O) —, and Q g represents a divalent linking group. Divalent linking group for Q g is the same as the divalent linking group for Q 1. Q g is preferably a divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 402g , R 403g , R 404g and R 405g and preferred embodiments thereof are the same as R 402 , R 403 , R 404 and R 405 described above and preferred embodiments thereof, respectively.
The compound (M2-1) and the compound (M2-2) described later can be obtained, for example, by alkoxylating the hydroxy group of the compound (M1).
The compound (12) can also be obtained by dehydrating and condensing the compound (M21) and the compound (M2-1), and then linking with R 1f to dimerize as W g .
 一般式(1)で表される化合物が下記一般式(13)で表される化合物(化合物(13))である場合は、例えば、次のような方法により合成することができる。化合物(13)は、本発明の化合物(1)の一例であり、単量体化合物(一般式(1)中のmが1)である。化合物(13)は、化合物(3)において、R413が水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す化合物の一例でもある。下記では、化合物(M2-2)に化合物(M23)を脱水縮合反応させることにより化合物(13)が得られる。 When the compound represented by the general formula (1) is a compound represented by the following general formula (13) (compound (13)), for example, it can be synthesized by the following method. The compound (13) is an example of the compound (1) of the present invention, and is a monomer compound (m in the general formula (1) is 1). Compound (13) is compound (3), wherein R 413 is a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an optionally substituted carbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. It is also an example of a compound representing the aryl group. In the following, compound (13) is obtained by subjecting compound (M2-2) to dehydration condensation reaction of compound (M23).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 上記式中、R402h、R403h、R404h及びR405h並びにこれらの好ましい態様は、上述したR402、R403、R404及びR405並びにこれらの好ましい態様とそれぞれ同じである。R1h、R2h及びこれらの好ましい態様は、上述したR、R及びこれらの好ましい態様とそれぞれ同じである。 In the above formula, R 402h , R 403h , R 404h and R 405h and preferred embodiments thereof are the same as R 402 , R 403 , R 404 and R 405 described above and preferred embodiments thereof, respectively. R 1h , R 2h and preferred embodiments thereof are the same as R 1 , R 2 and preferred embodiments described above, respectively.
 上記の製造方法における各生成物の単離や精製は、通常の有機合成で用いられる方法、例えば濾過、抽出、洗浄、乾燥、濃縮、結晶化、各種クロマトグラフィー等を適宜組み合わせて行うことができる。また、中間体においては、特に精製せずに次の反応に供することも可能である。 Isolation and purification of each product in the above production method can be performed by appropriately combining methods used in ordinary organic synthesis, for example, filtration, extraction, washing, drying, concentration, crystallization, various chromatography and the like. . In addition, the intermediate can be subjected to the next reaction without any particular purification.
 本発明の化合物(1)は、通常360~430nmに吸収極大波長を有するものである。360~430nmに吸収極大波長を有すると、紫外線、青色の光を選択的に吸収することができる。本発明の化合物(1)は、370~420nmに吸収極大波長を有することが好ましく、380~400nmに吸収極大波長を有することがより好ましい。また、本発明の化合物(1)は、400nmのグラム吸光係数が30以上であることも好ましい。吸収極大波長及びグラム吸光係数は、実施例に記載の方法で測定することができる。
 また、本発明の化合物(1)は、通常、有機溶媒への溶解性が良好である。
The compound (1) of the present invention usually has an absorption maximum wavelength at 360 to 430 nm. When the absorption maximum wavelength is in the range of 360 to 430 nm, ultraviolet light and blue light can be selectively absorbed. The compound (1) of the present invention preferably has an absorption maximum wavelength at 370 to 420 nm, and more preferably has an absorption maximum wavelength at 380 to 400 nm. The compound (1) of the present invention preferably has a gram extinction coefficient of 400 nm of 30 or more. The absorption maximum wavelength and the gram extinction coefficient can be measured by the methods described in Examples.
In addition, the compound (1) of the present invention usually has good solubility in an organic solvent.
 本発明の化合物(1)は、以下の有機溶媒に溶解する化合物であることが好ましい。
 有機溶媒としては、例えば、芳香族炭化水素類(例えば、トルエン、キシレン等)、ケトン類(メチルエチルケトン、アセトン、シクロヘキサノン、2-ヘプタノン、3-ヘプタノン等)、エーテル類(例えば、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、メチルセロソルブアセテート、エチルセロソルブアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル等)、エステル類(例えば、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、乳酸エチル、酢酸エチル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル等)及びこれらの2種以上の混合溶媒が挙げられる。
 化合物(1)は、上記有機溶媒の少なくとも1種に対し、0.1質量%以上溶解することが好ましく、例えば、0.1質量%以上50質量%以下溶解することが好ましく、1質量%以上40質量%以下溶解することがより好ましく、3質量%以上30質量%以下溶解することが更に好ましい。より好ましくは、20℃における有機溶媒に対する溶解性がこのような範囲にあることである。有機溶媒に対する溶解性がこのような範囲にあると、本発明の化合物(1)を、例えば、光学部材の製造に使用する際に、製造性が良好であるため好ましい。
The compound (1) of the present invention is preferably a compound that is soluble in the following organic solvents.
Examples of the organic solvent include aromatic hydrocarbons (eg, toluene, xylene, etc.), ketones (methyl ethyl ketone, acetone, cyclohexanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone, etc.), ethers (eg, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate). , Methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, etc.), esters (eg, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl lactate, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate) Etc.) and a mixed solvent of two or more of these.
Compound (1) is preferably dissolved in an amount of 0.1% by mass or more, and preferably dissolved in an amount of 0.1% by mass or more and 50% by mass or less, based on at least one of the above organic solvents. It is more preferable to dissolve 40% by mass or less, and further preferable to dissolve 3% by mass to 30% by mass. More preferably, the solubility in an organic solvent at 20 ° C. is in such a range. When the solubility in an organic solvent is within such a range, the compound (1) of the present invention is preferable because, for example, when the compound (1) is used for the production of an optical member, the productivity is good.
 本発明の化合物(1)は、その熱分解温度が200℃以上であることが好ましく、210℃以上がより好ましく、例えば、250~400℃であることが好ましい。熱分解温度は、熱重量測定装置により測定することができる。 The thermal decomposition temperature of the compound (1) of the present invention is preferably 200 ° C. or higher, more preferably 210 ° C. or higher, for example, preferably 250 to 400 ° C. The thermal decomposition temperature can be measured with a thermogravimetric measuring device.
 本発明の化合物(1)は、通常、360~430nmに吸収極大波長を持ち、この波長の光を効果的に吸収することができる。本発明の化合物(1)は400nm付近の光を効果的に吸収することができる。一態様として、本発明の化合物(1)は、2~6量体化合物(一般式(1)においてmが2~6)であると、耐熱性を向上させることができる。また、本発明の好ましい態様において、本発明の化合物(1)は、有機溶媒への溶解性に優れるものである。このため本発明の化合物(1)は、例えば、光学部材等に好適に使用される。 The compound (1) of the present invention usually has an absorption maximum wavelength at 360 to 430 nm, and can effectively absorb light of this wavelength. The compound (1) of the present invention can effectively absorb light around 400 nm. As one embodiment, when the compound (1) of the present invention is a dimer to hexamer compound (m is 2 to 6 in the general formula (1)), the heat resistance can be improved. In a preferred embodiment of the present invention, the compound (1) of the present invention is excellent in solubility in an organic solvent. For this reason, the compound (1) of this invention is used suitably for an optical member etc., for example.
 <色素化合物>
 前記の吸収極大波長を360~430nmに持つ化合物(1)は、色素化合物として使用することができる。前記化合物(1)のなかでも吸収スペクトルの吸収極大波長が380~430nmの波長領域に存在する色素化合物が好適に用いられる。色素化合物の吸収スペクトルの吸収極大波長は、380~420nmの波長領域に存在することがより好ましい。本発明においては、このような色素化合物と前記紫外線吸収剤を組み合わせて用いることで、例えば、有機EL素子の発光に影響しない領域(波長380nm~430nm)の光を十分に吸収することができ、かつ、有機EL素子の発光領域(430nmよりも長波長側)は十分に透過することができるものであり、その結果、有機EL素子の外光による劣化を抑制することができる。また、色素化合物は前記波長特性を有するものであれば特に限定されないが、有機EL素子の表示性を阻害しないような、蛍光及び燐光性能(フォトルミネセンス)を有しない材料が好ましい。
<Dye compound>
The compound (1) having the absorption maximum wavelength at 360 to 430 nm can be used as a dye compound. Among the compounds (1), a dye compound having an absorption maximum wavelength in the absorption spectrum in the wavelength region of 380 to 430 nm is preferably used. The absorption maximum wavelength of the absorption spectrum of the dye compound is more preferably in the wavelength region of 380 to 420 nm. In the present invention, by using a combination of such a dye compound and the ultraviolet absorber, for example, light in a region (wavelength of 380 nm to 430 nm) that does not affect the light emission of the organic EL element can be sufficiently absorbed, In addition, the light emitting region (longer wavelength side than 430 nm) of the organic EL element can be sufficiently transmitted, and as a result, deterioration of the organic EL element due to external light can be suppressed. The dye compound is not particularly limited as long as it has the above-mentioned wavelength characteristics, but a material that does not have fluorescence and phosphorescence performance (photoluminescence) so as not to hinder the display properties of the organic EL element is preferable.
 また、前記色素化合物の半値幅は、特に限定されるものではないが、80nm以下であることが好ましく、5~70nmであることがより好ましく、10~60nmであることがさらに好ましい。色素化合物の半値幅が、前記範囲にあることで、有機EL素子の発光に影響しない領域の光を十分に吸収しつつ、430nmよりも長波長側の光は十分に透過するコントロールが可能となるため好ましい。なお、半値幅の測定方法は、以下に記載の方法による。
 <半値幅の測定方法>
 色素化合物の半値幅は、紫外可視分光光度計(U-4100、(株)日立ハイテクサイエンス製)を使用し、以下の条件で色素化合物の溶液の透過吸光スペクトルから測定した。吸収極大波長の吸光度が1.0となるよう濃度を調整して測定した分光スペクトルから、ピーク値の50%になる2点間の波長の間隔(半値全幅)をその色素化合物の半値幅とした。
 (測定条件)
 溶媒:トルエン又はクロロホルム
 セル:石英セル
 光路長:10mm
Further, the full width at half maximum of the dye compound is not particularly limited, but is preferably 80 nm or less, more preferably 5 to 70 nm, and still more preferably 10 to 60 nm. When the half-value width of the dye compound is in the above range, it is possible to control to sufficiently transmit light having a wavelength longer than 430 nm while sufficiently absorbing light in a region that does not affect light emission of the organic EL element. Therefore, it is preferable. In addition, the measuring method of a half value width is based on the method as described below.
<Measurement method of half width>
The full width at half maximum of the dye compound was measured from a transmission absorption spectrum of the solution of the dye compound under the following conditions using an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (U-4100, manufactured by Hitachi High-Tech Science Co., Ltd.). From the spectrum measured by adjusting the concentration so that the absorbance at the absorption maximum wavelength is 1.0, the interval between the two wavelengths at which the peak value is 50% (full width at half maximum) is defined as the half width of the dye compound. .
(Measurement condition)
Solvent: Toluene or chloroform Cell: Quartz cell Optical path length: 10 mm
 前記化合物(1)、特に前記色素化合物は、単独で使用してもよく、また2種以上を混合して使用してもよいが、全体としての含有量は、前記ベースポリマー(又はそのポリマーを形成するモノマー成分)100重量部に対して、0.01~10重量部程度であることが好ましく、0.02~5重量部程度であることがより好ましい。前記化合物(1)、特に前記色素化合物の添加量を前記範囲とすることで、例えば、有機EL素子の発光に影響しない領域の光を十分に吸収することができ、当該粘着剤組成物から形成される粘着剤層を用いることで、有機EL素子の劣化を抑制することができるため、好ましい。 The compound (1), particularly the dye compound, may be used alone or in combination of two or more, but the total content is determined based on the base polymer (or its polymer). The monomer component to be formed) is preferably about 0.01 to 10 parts by weight, more preferably about 0.02 to 5 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight. By setting the addition amount of the compound (1), particularly the dye compound, within the above range, for example, light in a region that does not affect the light emission of the organic EL element can be sufficiently absorbed and formed from the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition. Since the deterioration of an organic EL element can be suppressed by using the adhesive layer to be used, it is preferable.
 <紫外線吸収剤>
 前記紫外線吸収剤としては、特に限定されないが、例えば、トリアジン系紫外線吸収剤、ベンゾトリアゾール系紫外線吸収剤、ベンゾフェノン系紫外線吸収剤、オキシベンゾフェノン系紫外線吸収剤、サリチル酸エステル系紫外線吸収剤、シアノアクリレート系紫外線吸収剤等を挙げることができ、これらを1種単独で又は2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。これらの中でも、トリアジン系紫外線吸収剤、ベンゾトリアゾール系紫外線吸収剤が好ましく、1分子中にヒドロキシル基を2個以下有するトリアジン系紫外線吸収剤、及び、1分子中にベンゾトリアゾール骨格を1個有するベンゾトリアゾール系紫外線吸収剤からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の紫外線吸収剤であることが、例えば、光学部材として、アクリル系粘着剤組成物を用いる場合にはその形成に用いられるモノマーへの溶解性が良好であり、かつ、波長380nm付近での紫外線吸収能力が高いため好ましい。
<Ultraviolet absorber>
The ultraviolet absorber is not particularly limited, and for example, a triazine ultraviolet absorber, a benzotriazole ultraviolet absorber, a benzophenone ultraviolet absorber, an oxybenzophenone ultraviolet absorber, a salicylic acid ester ultraviolet absorber, a cyanoacrylate An ultraviolet absorber etc. can be mentioned, These can be used individually by 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types. Among these, triazine-based UV absorbers and benzotriazole-based UV absorbers are preferable, triazine-based UV absorbers having 2 or less hydroxyl groups in one molecule, and benzones having one benzotriazole skeleton in one molecule. For example, when an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is used as an optical member, it can be dissolved in a monomer used for the formation of at least one ultraviolet absorber selected from the group consisting of triazole-based ultraviolet absorbers. It is preferable because of its good properties and high ultraviolet absorption ability in the vicinity of a wavelength of 380 nm.
 1分子中にヒドロキシル基を2個以下有するトリアジン系紫外線吸収剤としては、具体的には、2,4-ビス-[{4-(4-エチルヘキシルオキシ)-4-ヒドロキシ}-フェニル]-6-(4-メトキシフェニル)-1,3,5-トリアジン(Tinosorb S、BASF製)、2,4-ビス[2-ヒドロキシ-4-ブトキシフェニル]-6-(2,4-ジブトキシフェニル)-1,3,5-トリアジン(TINUVIN 460、BASF製)、2-(4,6-ビス(2,4-ジメチルフェニル)-1,3,5-トリアジン-2-イル)-5-ヒドロキシフェニルと[(C10-C16(主としてC12-C13)アルキルオキシ)メチル]オキシランとの反応生成物(TINUVIN400、BASF製)、2-[4,6-ビス(2,4-ジメチルフェニル)-1,3,5-トリアジン-2-イル]-5-[3-(ドデシルオキシ)-2-ヒドロキシプロポキシ]フェノール)、2-(2,4-ジヒドロキシフェニル)-4,6-ビス-(2,4-ジメチルフェニル)-1,3,5-トリアジンと(2-エチルヘキシル)-グリシド酸エステルの反応生成物(TINUVIN405、BASF製)、2-(4,6-ジフェニル-1,3,5-トリアジン-2-イル)-5-[(ヘキシル)オキシ]-フェノール(TINUVIN1577、BASF製)、2-(4,6-ジフェニルー1,3,5-トリアジン-2-イル)-5-[2-(2-エチルヘキサノイルオキシ)エトキシ]-フェノール(ADK STAB LA46、ADEKA製)、2-(2-ヒドロキシ-4-[1-オクチルオキシカルボニルエトキシ]フェニル)-4,6-ビス(4-フェニルフェニル)-1,3,5-トリアジン(TINUVIN479、BASF社製)等を挙げることができる。 Specific examples of triazine ultraviolet absorbers having 2 or less hydroxyl groups in one molecule include 2,4-bis-[{4- (4-ethylhexyloxy) -4-hydroxy} -phenyl] -6. -(4-Methoxyphenyl) -1,3,5-triazine (Tinosorb S, manufactured by BASF), 2,4-bis [2-hydroxy-4-butoxyphenyl] -6- (2,4-dibutoxyphenyl) -1,3,5-triazine (TINUVIN 460, manufactured by BASF), 2- (4,6-bis (2,4-dimethylphenyl) -1,3,5-triazin-2-yl) -5-hydroxyphenyl And [(C10-C16 (mainly C12-C13) alkyloxy) methyl] oxirane reaction product (TINUVIN400, manufactured by BASF), 2- [4,6-bis (2 , 4-Dimethylphenyl) -1,3,5-triazin-2-yl] -5- [3- (dodecyloxy) -2-hydroxypropoxy] phenol), 2- (2,4-dihydroxyphenyl) -4 , 6-bis- (2,4-dimethylphenyl) -1,3,5-triazine and (2-ethylhexyl) -glycidic acid ester reaction product (TINUVIN405, manufactured by BASF), 2- (4,6-diphenyl) -1,3,5-triazin-2-yl) -5-[(hexyl) oxy] -phenol (TINUVIN 1577, manufactured by BASF), 2- (4,6-diphenyl-1,3,5-triazin-2-yl ) -5- [2- (2-Ethylhexanoyloxy) ethoxy] -phenol (ADK STAB LA46, manufactured by ADEKA), 2- (2-hydroxy-4) [1- octyloxycarbonylethoxy] phenyl) -4,6-bis (4-phenylphenyl) -1,3,5-triazine (TINUVIN 479, manufactured by BASF), and the like.
 また、1分子中にベンゾトリアゾール骨格を1個有するベンゾトリアゾール系紫外線吸収剤としては、2-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-6-(1-メチル-1-フェニルエチル)-4-(1,1,3,3-テトラメチルブチル)フェノール(TINUVIN 928、BASF製)、2-(2-ヒドロキシ-5-tert-ブチルフェニル)-2H-ベンゾトリアゾール(TINUVIN PS、BASF製)、ベンゼンプロパン酸及び3-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-5-(1,1-ジメチルエチル)-4-ヒドロキシ(C7-9側鎖及び直鎖アルキル)のエステル化合物(TINUVIN384-2、BASF製)、2-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-4,6-ビス(1-メチル-1-フェニルエチル)フェノール(TINUVIN900、BASF製)、2-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-6-(1-メチル-1-フェニルエチル)-4-(1,1,3,3-テトラメチルブチル)フェノール(TINUVIN928、BASF製)、メチル-3-(3-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-5-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネート/ポリエチレングリコール300の反応生成物(TINUVIN1130、BASF製)、2-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-p-クレゾール(TINUVIN P、BASF製)、2(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-4-6-ビス(1-メチル-1-フェニルエチル)フェノール(TINUVIN234、BASF製)、2-〔5-クロロ(2H)-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル〕-4-メチル-6-(tert-ブチル)フェノール(TINUVIN326、BASF製)、2-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-4,6-ジ-tert-ペンチルフェノール(TINUVIN328、BASF製)、2-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-4-(1,1,3,3-テトラメチルブチル)フェノール(TINUVIN329、BASF製)、メチル3-(3-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-5-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネートとポリエチレングリコール300との反応生成物(TINUVIN213、BASF製)、2-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-6-ドデシル-4-メチルフェノール(TINUVIN571、BASF製)、2-[2-ヒドロキシ-3-(3、4、5,6-テトラヒドロフタルイミドーメチル)-5-メチルフェニル]ベンゾトリアゾール(Sumisorb250、住友化学工業(株)製)、2-(2-ヒドロキシ-3-tert-ブチル-5-メチルフェニル)-5-クロロベンゾトリアゾール(SeeSorb 703、シプロ化成(株)製、又は、KEMISORB 73、シプロ化成(株)製)等を挙げることができる。 As a benzotriazole ultraviolet absorber having one benzotriazole skeleton in one molecule, 2- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) -6- (1-methyl-1-phenylethyl) -4- (1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl) phenol (TINUVIN 928, manufactured by BASF), 2- (2-hydroxy-5-tert-butylphenyl) -2H-benzotriazole (TINUVIN PS, manufactured by BASF), benzene Propanoic acid and ester compounds of 3- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) -5- (1,1-dimethylethyl) -4-hydroxy (C7-9 side chain and linear alkyl) (TINUVIN 384-2, BASF 2-, (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) -4,6-bis (1-methyl-1-phenol) Ruethyl) phenol (TINUVIN900, manufactured by BASF), 2- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) -6- (1-methyl-1-phenylethyl) -4- (1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl) ) Phenol (TINUVIN 928, manufactured by BASF), methyl-3- (3- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) -5-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate / polyethylene glycol 300 reaction product (TINUVIN 1130, BASF), 2- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) -p-cresol (TINUVIN P, manufactured by BASF), 2 (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) -4-6-bis (1-methyl- 1-phenylethyl) phenol (TINUVIN234, manufactured by BASF), 2- [5 Chloro (2H) -benzotriazol-2-yl] -4-methyl-6- (tert-butyl) phenol (TINUVIN 326, manufactured by BASF), 2- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) -4,6-di -Tert-pentylphenol (TINUVIN 328, manufactured by BASF), 2- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) -4- (1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl) phenol (TINUVIN 329, manufactured by BASF), methyl 3 -(3- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) -5-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate and polyethylene glycol 300 reaction product (TINUVIN 213, manufactured by BASF), 2- (2H-benzotriazole -2-yl) -6-dodecyl-4-methylphenol ( TINUVIN571 (manufactured by BASF), 2- [2-hydroxy-3- (3,4,5,6-tetrahydrophthalimido-methyl) -5-methylphenyl] benzotriazole (Sumsorb 250, manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd.), 2 -(2-Hydroxy-3-tert-butyl-5-methylphenyl) -5-chlorobenzotriazole (SeeSorb 703, manufactured by Cypro Kasei Co., Ltd., or KEMISORB 73, manufactured by Cypro Kasei Co., Ltd.) Can do.
 また、前記ベンゾフェノン系紫外線吸収剤(ベンゾフェノン系化合物)、オキシベンゾフェノン系紫外線吸収剤(オキシベンゾフェノン系化合物)としては、例えば、2,4-ジヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、2-ヒドロキシ-4-メトキシベンゾフェノン、2-ヒドロキシ-4-メトキシベンゾフェノン-5-スルホン酸(無水及び三水塩)、2-ヒドロキシ-4-オクチルオキシベンゾフェノン、4-ドデシルオキシ-2-ヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、4-ベンジルオキシ-2-ヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、2,2´,4,4´-テトラヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、2,2´-ジヒドロキシ-4,4-ジメトキシベンゾフェノン、2,2´,4,4’-テトラヒドロキシベンゾフェノン(SeeSorb 106、シプロ化成(株)製)、2,2’-ジヒドロキシ-4-メトキシベンゾフェノン(KEMISORB 111、ケミプロ化成(株)製)等を挙げることができる。 Examples of the benzophenone ultraviolet absorber (benzophenone compound) and oxybenzophenone ultraviolet absorber (oxybenzophenone compound) include 2,4-dihydroxybenzophenone, 2-hydroxy-4-methoxybenzophenone, and 2-hydroxy. -4-methoxybenzophenone-5-sulfonic acid (anhydrous and trihydrate), 2-hydroxy-4-octyloxybenzophenone, 4-dodecyloxy-2-hydroxybenzophenone, 4-benzyloxy-2-hydroxybenzophenone, 2, 2 ′, 4,4′-tetrahydroxybenzophenone, 2,2′-dihydroxy-4,4-dimethoxybenzophenone, 2,2 ′, 4,4′-tetrahydroxybenzophenone (SeeSorb 106, manufactured by Cypro Kasei Co., Ltd.) , , 2'-dihydroxy-4-methoxybenzophenone (KEMISORB 111, manufactured by Chemipro Kasei Co.) and the like.
 また前記サリチル酸エステル系紫外線吸収剤(サリチル酸エステル系化合物)としては、例えば、フェニル-2-アクリロイルオキシベンゾエ-ト、フェニル-2-アクロリイルオキシ-3-メチルベンゾエ-ト、フェニル-2-アクリロイルオキシ-4-メチルベンゾエ-ト、フェニル-2-アクリロイルオキシ-5-メチルベンゾエ-ト、フェニル-2-アクリロイルオキシ-3-メトキシベンゾエ-ト、フェニル-2-ヒドロキシベンゾエ-ト、フェニル-2-ヒドロキシ-3-メチルベンゾエ-ト、フェニル-2-ヒドロキシ-4メチルベンゾエ-ト、フェニル-2-ヒドロキシ-5-メチルベンゾエ-ト、フェニル2-ヒドロキシ-3-メトキシベンゾエ-ト、2,4-ジ-tert-ブチルフェニル-3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシベンゾエート(TINUVIN120、BASF製)等を挙げることができる。 Examples of the salicylic acid ester ultraviolet absorber (salicylic acid ester compound) include, for example, phenyl-2-acryloyloxybenzoate, phenyl-2-acryloyloxy-3-methylbenzoate, and phenyl-2-acryloyloxy. -4-methylbenzoate, phenyl-2-acryloyloxy-5-methylbenzoate, phenyl-2-acryloyloxy-3-methoxybenzoate, phenyl-2-hydroxybenzoate, phenyl-2-hydroxy -3-methyl benzoate, phenyl-2-hydroxy-4 methyl benzoate, phenyl-2-hydroxy-5-methyl benzoate, phenyl 2-hydroxy-3-methoxy benzoate, 2,4-di-tert -Butylphenyl-3,5-di-tert- Chill-4-hydroxybenzoate (TINUVIN120, manufactured by BASF), and the like.
 前記シアノアクリレート系紫外線吸収剤(シアノアクリレート系化合物)としては、例えば、アルキル-2-シアノアクリレート、シクロアルキル-2-シアノアクリレート、アルコキシアルキル-2-シアノアクリレート、アルケニル-2-シアノアクリレート、アルキニル-2-シアノアクリレート等を挙げることができる。 Examples of the cyanoacrylate ultraviolet absorber (cyanoacrylate compound) include alkyl-2-cyanoacrylate, cycloalkyl-2-cyanoacrylate, alkoxyalkyl-2-cyanoacrylate, alkenyl-2-cyanoacrylate, alkynyl- Examples include 2-cyanoacrylate.
 前記紫外線吸収剤の吸収スペクトルの吸収極大波長は、300~400nmの波長領域に存在することが好ましく、300~380nmの波長領域に存在することがより好ましい。ここで、吸収極大波長とは、300~460nmの波長領域での分光吸収スペクトルにおいて、複数の吸収極大が存在する場合には、その中で最大の吸光度を示す吸収極大波長を意味するものである。吸収極大波長の測定方法は、色素系化合物の測定方法と同様である。 The absorption maximum wavelength of the absorption spectrum of the ultraviolet absorber is preferably in the wavelength region of 300 to 400 nm, and more preferably in the wavelength region of 300 to 380 nm. Here, the absorption maximum wavelength means an absorption maximum wavelength exhibiting the maximum absorbance among the plurality of absorption maximums in the spectral absorption spectrum in the wavelength region of 300 to 460 nm. . The measuring method of the absorption maximum wavelength is the same as the measuring method of the dye-based compound.
 前記紫外線吸収剤は、単独で使用してもよく、また2種以上を混合して使用してもよいが、全体としての含有量は、前記ベースポリマー(又はそのポリマーを形成するモノマー成分)100重量部に対して、0.1~8重量部程度であることが好ましく、0.2~6重量部程度であることがより好ましい。紫外線吸収剤の添加量を前記範囲とすることで、光学部材の紫外線吸収機能を十分に発揮することできる。また、光学部材のベースポリマーが、例えば、アクリル系ポリマーの場合には、アクリル系ポリマーを紫外線重合する場合は、当該重合の妨げとはならないため、好ましい。 The ultraviolet absorber may be used singly or in combination of two or more, but the total content thereof is 100% of the base polymer (or monomer component forming the polymer). The amount is preferably about 0.1 to 8 parts by weight, more preferably about 0.2 to 6 parts by weight with respect to parts by weight. By setting the addition amount of the ultraviolet absorber within the above range, the ultraviolet absorbing function of the optical member can be sufficiently exhibited. Further, when the base polymer of the optical member is, for example, an acrylic polymer, it is preferable to perform ultraviolet polymerization of the acrylic polymer because it does not hinder the polymerization.
 <その他添加剤>
 本発明の光学部材用組成物には、前記成分の他に、用途に応じて、適宜な添加剤が含まれていてもよい。
<Other additives>
The composition for optical members of the present invention may contain an appropriate additive in addition to the above components depending on the application.
 <光学部材用組成物の調製>
 本発明の光学部材用組成物は、少なくとも、光学部材を有する形成するベースポリマー、紫外線吸収剤、及び、上記一般式(1)で表される化合物を混合することにより調製することができる。例えば、ベースポリマーに紫外線吸収剤、及び上記の化合物(1)を混練したり、溶剤に溶解して混合することができ、また、ベースポリマーを形成するモノマー成分に予め紫外線吸収剤、及び上記の化合物(1)を配合して、その配合物を重合してポリマー得ることにより、前記組成物を調製することができる。また、光学部材の形成に当たっては、光学部材用組成物は適宜に溶剤を含有することができ、また、光学部材に応じた各種の添加剤を含有することができる。上記溶媒としては、特に制限されないが、上述した有機溶媒等が挙げられる。
<Preparation of composition for optical member>
The composition for optical members of the present invention can be prepared by mixing at least a base polymer to be formed having an optical member, an ultraviolet absorber, and a compound represented by the above general formula (1). For example, the ultraviolet absorber and the above compound (1) can be kneaded into the base polymer, or dissolved and mixed in a solvent, and the ultraviolet absorber and the above-described monomer component for forming the base polymer can be mixed. The said composition can be prepared by mix | blending a compound (1) and polymerizing the compound and obtaining a polymer. In forming an optical member, the composition for an optical member can appropriately contain a solvent, and can contain various additives depending on the optical member. Although it does not restrict | limit especially as said solvent, The organic solvent mentioned above etc. are mentioned.
 本発明の光学部材用組成物は、光学部材に応じた各種方法により、各種の光学部材を形成することができうる。例えば、形成方法としては、光学部材用組成物を射出成形法、圧縮成形法、押出成形法等により成形する方法や、後述の支持体上に本発明の光学部材用組成物を塗布し形成する方法等の各種の方法を採ることができる。前記塗布方法としては、ディップコート法、エアーナイフコート法、カーテンコート法、ローラーコート法、ワイヤーバーコート法、グラビアコート法、スピンコート法、エクストルージョンコート法等の塗工方法によって支持体上に塗膜形成する方法が挙げられる。 The optical member composition of the present invention can form various optical members by various methods according to the optical member. For example, as a forming method, a composition for an optical member is molded by an injection molding method, a compression molding method, an extrusion molding method, or the like, or the optical member composition of the present invention is applied and formed on a support described later. Various methods such as a method can be adopted. Examples of the coating method include a dip coating method, an air knife coating method, a curtain coating method, a roller coating method, a wire bar coating method, a gravure coating method, a spin coating method, and an extrusion coating method. The method of forming a coating film is mentioned.
<光学部材>
 光学部材としては、例えば、光学フィルムが挙げられる。具体的には、本発明の光学部材として適用できる光学フィルムとしては、偏光子用透明保護フィルム、位相差フィルム、光拡散フィルム、集光フィルム、輝度向上フィルム、レンチキュラーフィルム、カバーウィンドウフィルム(前面板)、飛散防止フィルム、加飾印刷フィルム等が挙げられる。
<Optical member>
Examples of the optical member include an optical film. Specifically, as an optical film applicable as the optical member of the present invention, a transparent protective film for a polarizer, a retardation film, a light diffusion film, a light collecting film, a brightness enhancement film, a lenticular film, a cover window film (front plate) ), An anti-scattering film, a decorative printing film, and the like.
 また、光学部材としては、光学フィルムに適用される粘着剤層又は接着剤層が挙げられる。これら粘着剤層又は接着剤層は、偏光フィルム、偏光子、偏光子用透明保護フィルム、位相差フィルム、光拡散フィルム、集光フィルム、輝度向上フィルム、レンチキュラーフィルム、カバーウィンドウフィルム(前面板)、飛散防止フィルム、加飾印刷フィルム等の光学フィルムに設けることで適用することができる。前記光学部材は、偏光子及び位相差フィルムを含む光学積層体として用いることができる。 Also, examples of the optical member include a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer or an adhesive layer applied to the optical film. These pressure-sensitive adhesive layers or adhesive layers are polarizing films, polarizers, transparent protective films for polarizers, retardation films, light diffusion films, light-condensing films, brightness enhancement films, lenticular films, cover window films (front plates), It can be applied by providing it on an optical film such as a scattering prevention film or a decorative printing film. The optical member can be used as an optical laminate including a polarizer and a retardation film.
 また、光学部材としては、光学フィルムに設けられる表面処理層等が挙げられる。これら表面処理層としては、ハードコート層、反射防止層、防眩処理層、反射防止層、屈折率調整層等が挙げられ、偏光フィルム、偏光子、偏光子用透明保護フィルム、位相差フィルム、光拡散フィルム、集光フィルム、輝度向上フィルム、レンチキュラーフィルム、カバーウィンドウフィルム(前面板)、飛散防止フィルム、加飾印刷フィルム等の光学フィルムに設けることで適用することができる。 Also, examples of the optical member include a surface treatment layer provided on the optical film. Examples of these surface treatment layers include hard coat layers, antireflection layers, antiglare treatment layers, antireflection layers, refractive index adjustment layers, and the like. Polarizing films, polarizers, transparent protective films for polarizers, retardation films, It can be applied by providing it on an optical film such as a light diffusion film, a light collecting film, a brightness enhancement film, a lenticular film, a cover window film (front plate), a scattering prevention film, or a decorative printing film.
 また、光学部材としては、光学フィルムに設けられる機能層等が挙げられる。これら機能層としては、易接着層、帯電防止層、ブロッキング防止層、オリゴマー防止層、バリア層等が挙げられ、偏光フィルム、偏光子、偏光子用透明保護フィルム、位相差フィルム、光拡散フィルム、集光フィルム、輝度向上フィルム、レンチキュラーフィルム、カバーウィンドウフィルム(前面板)、飛散防止フィルム、加飾印刷フィルム等の光学フィルムに設けることで適用することができる。 Also, examples of the optical member include a functional layer provided on the optical film. Examples of these functional layers include an easy-adhesion layer, an antistatic layer, an antiblocking layer, an oligomer prevention layer, a barrier layer, and the like. Polarizing film, polarizer, transparent protective film for polarizer, retardation film, light diffusion film, It can be applied by providing it on an optical film such as a light collecting film, a brightness enhancement film, a lenticular film, a cover window film (front plate), a scattering prevention film, or a decorative printing film.
 また、前記光学部材は、透明基材フィルム及び透明導電層を有する透明導電性フィルムにおいて、前記透明基材フィルム、又は前記透明基材フィルムとの間に設けられる中間層として用いることができる。前記中間層としては、屈折率調整層、易接着剤層、ハードコート層、クラック防止等を例示する事ができる。 Further, the optical member can be used as an intermediate layer provided between the transparent substrate film or the transparent substrate film in a transparent conductive film having a transparent substrate film and a transparent conductive layer. Examples of the intermediate layer include a refractive index adjusting layer, an easy adhesive layer, a hard coat layer, and crack prevention.
 <画像表示装置>
 本発明の画像表示装置は、画像表示部及び前記光学部材を備える。画像表示部を備える画像表示装置の代表例としては、液晶表示装置、有機エレクトロルミネセンス(EL)表示装置が挙げられる。前記光学部材は画像表示部よりも視認側に設けられていることが好ましい。
<Image display device>
The image display device of the present invention includes an image display unit and the optical member. Typical examples of the image display device including the image display unit include a liquid crystal display device and an organic electroluminescence (EL) display device. The optical member is preferably provided on the viewing side with respect to the image display unit.
 例えば、有機EL表示装置においては、前記画像表示部として有機ELパネルを有し、当該有機ELパネルの視認側には、視認側から、少なくとも、偏光子及び位相差フィルムをこの順に含む光学積層体を含む。本発明の光学部材は、例えば、前記光学積層体を形成する部材として使用することができる。 For example, in an organic EL display device, the optical laminate includes an organic EL panel as the image display unit, and the viewing side of the organic EL panel includes at least a polarizer and a retardation film in this order from the viewing side. including. The optical member of this invention can be used as a member which forms the said optical laminated body, for example.
 以下、本発明の一般式(1)で表される化合物を含有する光学部材を、有機EL表示装置に用いる光学積層体に用いる場合を、代表例として説明する。前記光学積層体は、偏光子及び位相差フィルムを含む。 Hereinafter, the case where the optical member containing the compound represented by the general formula (1) of the present invention is used in an optical laminate used in an organic EL display device will be described as a representative example. The optical laminate includes a polarizer and a retardation film.
 図1に示すように、光学積層体1は、視認側から、少なくとも、粘接着剤層2/透明保護フィルム3/偏光子4/位相差フィルム5/粘着剤層6がこの順に積層されたものを例示することができる。粘接着剤層2/(視認側)透明保護フィルム3/偏光子4/有機ELパネル側透明保護フィルム/層間粘着剤層(又は接着剤層)/位相差フィルム5/(有機ELパネル側)粘着剤層6がこの順に積層されたものであってもよい。また、これら以外にも、例えば、ハードコート層、防眩処理層、反射防止層等の機能層や、センサー層、またこれらを積層するための粘着剤層や接着剤層等を含むことができる。前記透明保護フィルム4/偏光子5を偏光フィルムということもある。本発明の一般式(1)で表される化合物を含有する光学部材は、前記光学積層体を形成する各種の部材または層として用いることができる。前記光学積層体としは、本発明の一般式(1)で表される化合物を含有する光学部材を含有する光学積層体(1)であることが好ましい。 As shown in FIG. 1, the optical laminate 1 has at least an adhesive layer 2 / transparent protective film 3 / polarizer 4 / retardation film 5 / adhesive layer 6 laminated in this order from the viewing side. Things can be illustrated. Adhesive layer 2 / (viewing side) transparent protective film 3 / polarizer 4 / organic EL panel side transparent protective film / interlayer adhesive layer (or adhesive layer) / retardation film 5 / (organic EL panel side) The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 6 may be laminated in this order. In addition to these, for example, functional layers such as a hard coat layer, an antiglare treatment layer, and an antireflection layer, a sensor layer, and a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and an adhesive layer for laminating them can be included. . The transparent protective film 4 / polarizer 5 may be referred to as a polarizing film. The optical member containing the compound represented by the general formula (1) of the present invention can be used as various members or layers forming the optical laminate. The optical layered body is preferably an optical layered body (1) containing an optical member containing the compound represented by the general formula (1) of the present invention.
 (1-1)粘接着剤層2
 本発明において「接着剤層」とは、粘着剤層又は接着剤層のことをいう。
(1-1) Adhesive layer 2
In the present invention, the “adhesive layer” refers to a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer or an adhesive layer.
 (1-1-1)接着剤層
 接着剤層としては、任意の適切な接着剤からなる層を採用し得る。このような接着剤としては、例えば、天然ゴム接着剤、α-オレフィン系接着剤、ウレタン樹脂系接着剤、エチレン-酢酸ビニル樹脂エマルション接着剤、エチレン-酢酸ビニル樹脂系ホットメルト接着剤、エポキシ樹脂系接着剤、塩化ビニル樹脂溶剤系接着剤、クロロプレンゴム系接着剤、シアノアクリレート系接着剤、シリコーン系接着剤、スチレン-ブタジエンゴム溶剤系接着剤、ニトリルゴム系接着剤、ニトロセルロース系接着剤、反応性ホットメルト接着剤、フェノール樹脂系接着剤、変性シリコーン系接着剤、ポリエステル系ホットメルト接着剤、ポリアミド樹脂ホットメルト接着剤、ポリイミド系接着剤、ポリウレタン樹脂ホットメルト接着剤、ポリオレフィン樹脂ホットメルト接着剤、ポリ酢酸ビニル樹脂溶剤系接着剤、ポリスチレン樹脂溶剤系接着剤、ポリビニルアルコール系接着剤、ポリビニルピロリドン樹脂系接着剤、ポリビニルブチラール系接着剤、ポリベンズイミダゾール接着剤、ポリメタクリレート樹脂溶剤系接着剤、メラミン樹脂系接着剤、ユリア樹脂系接着剤、レゾルシノール系接着剤等が挙げられる。このような接着剤は、1種単独又は2種以上を混合して使用することができる。前記接着剤の種類に応じたベースポリマーが用いられる。
(1-1-1) Adhesive Layer As the adhesive layer, a layer made of any appropriate adhesive can be adopted. Examples of such adhesives include natural rubber adhesives, α-olefin adhesives, urethane resin adhesives, ethylene-vinyl acetate resin emulsion adhesives, ethylene-vinyl acetate resin hot melt adhesives, and epoxy resins. Adhesives, vinyl chloride resin solvent adhesives, chloroprene rubber adhesives, cyanoacrylate adhesives, silicone adhesives, styrene-butadiene rubber solvent adhesives, nitrile rubber adhesives, nitrocellulose adhesives, Reactive hot melt adhesives, phenol resin adhesives, modified silicone adhesives, polyester hot melt adhesives, polyamide resin hot melt adhesives, polyimide adhesives, polyurethane resin hot melt adhesives, polyolefin resin hot melt adhesives Adhesive, polyvinyl acetate resin solvent-based adhesive, Styrene resin solvent adhesive, polyvinyl alcohol adhesive, polyvinyl pyrrolidone resin adhesive, polyvinyl butyral adhesive, polybenzimidazole adhesive, polymethacrylate resin solvent adhesive, melamine resin adhesive, urea resin adhesive Agents, resorcinol adhesives, and the like. Such an adhesive agent can be used individually by 1 type or in mixture of 2 or more types. A base polymer corresponding to the type of the adhesive is used.
 接着剤としては、接着形態で分類すると、例えば、熱硬化型接着剤、ホットメルト接着剤等が挙げられる。このような接着剤は、1種のみであっても良いし、2種以上であっても良い。 Examples of adhesives include, for example, thermosetting adhesives and hot-melt adhesives when classified according to the adhesive form. Only one kind of such an adhesive may be used, or two or more kinds thereof may be used.
 熱硬化型接着剤は、加熱により熱硬化して固化することにより接着力を発現する。熱硬化型接着剤としては、例えば、エポキシ系熱硬化型接着剤、ウレタン系熱硬化型接着剤、アクリル系熱硬化型接着剤等が挙げられる。熱硬化型接着剤の硬化温度は、例えば、100~200℃である。 A thermosetting adhesive exhibits an adhesive force when cured by heating and solidified. Examples of the thermosetting adhesive include an epoxy thermosetting adhesive, a urethane thermosetting adhesive, and an acrylic thermosetting adhesive. The curing temperature of the thermosetting adhesive is, for example, 100 to 200 ° C.
 ホットメルト接着剤は、加熱により溶融又は軟化して、被着体に熱融着し、その後の冷却によって、固化することにより、被着体に接着する。ホットメルト接着剤としては、例えば、ゴム系ホットメルト接着剤、ポリエステル系ホットメルト接着剤、ポリオレフィン系ホットメルト接着剤、エチレン-酢酸ビニル樹脂系ホットメルト接着剤、ポリアミド樹脂ホットメルト接着剤、ポリウレタン樹脂ホットメルト接着剤等が挙げられる。ホットメルト接着剤の軟化温度(環球法)は、例えば、100~200℃である。また、ホットメルト接着剤の溶融粘度は、180℃で、例えば、100~30000mPa・sである。 The hot melt adhesive is melted or softened by heating, thermally fused to the adherend, and then solidified by cooling to adhere to the adherend. Examples of hot melt adhesives include rubber hot melt adhesives, polyester hot melt adhesives, polyolefin hot melt adhesives, ethylene-vinyl acetate resin hot melt adhesives, polyamide resin hot melt adhesives, and polyurethane resins. Examples thereof include hot melt adhesives. The softening temperature (ring ball method) of the hot melt adhesive is, for example, 100 to 200 ° C. The melt viscosity of the hot melt adhesive is 180 ° C., for example, 100 to 30000 mPa · s.
 接着剤層の厚みは、特に限定されるものではないが、例えば、0.01~10μm程度であることが好ましく、0.05~8μm程度であることがより好ましい。 The thickness of the adhesive layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably about 0.01 to 10 μm, and more preferably about 0.05 to 8 μm.
 (1-1-2)粘着剤層
 粘着剤層を形成する粘着剤組成物の種類としては、特に限定されるものではなく、例えば、ゴム系粘着剤、アクリル系粘着剤、シリコーン系粘着剤、ウレタン系粘着剤、ビニルアルキルエーテル系粘着剤、ポリビニルアルコール系粘着剤、ポリビニルピロリドン系粘着剤、ポリアクリルアミド系粘着剤、セルロース系粘着剤等を挙げることができる。これら粘着剤の中でも、光学的透明性に優れ、適宜な密着性と凝集性と接着性の粘着特性を示して、耐候性や耐熱性等に優れる点から、アクリル系粘着剤が好ましく使用される。前記粘着剤の種類に応じたベースポリマーが用いられる。本発明においては、(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーをベースポリマーとして含有するアクリル系粘着剤組成物であることが好ましい。
(1-1-2) Pressure-sensitive adhesive layer The type of pressure-sensitive adhesive composition forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include rubber-based pressure-sensitive adhesives, acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesives, silicone-based pressure-sensitive adhesives, Examples thereof include urethane adhesives, vinyl alkyl ether adhesives, polyvinyl alcohol adhesives, polyvinyl pyrrolidone adhesives, polyacrylamide adhesives, and cellulose adhesives. Among these pressure-sensitive adhesives, acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesives are preferably used because they are excellent in optical transparency, exhibit appropriate adhesiveness, cohesiveness, and adhesive pressure-sensitive adhesive properties, and are excellent in weather resistance, heat resistance, and the like. . A base polymer corresponding to the type of the pressure-sensitive adhesive is used. In the present invention, an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing a (meth) acrylic polymer as a base polymer is preferable.
 前記アクリル系粘着剤組成物は、例えば、アルキル(メタ)アクリレートを含有するモノマー成分の部分重合物及び/又は前記モノマー成分から得られる(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーを含むことが好ましく、当該アクリル系粘着剤組成物に色素化合物(さらには紫外線吸収剤)を添加することができる。 The acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition preferably includes, for example, a partial polymer of a monomer component containing an alkyl (meth) acrylate and / or a (meth) acrylic polymer obtained from the monomer component. A dye compound (and also an ultraviolet absorber) can be added to the agent composition.
 (モノマー成分の部分重合物、及び(メタ)アクリル系ポリマー)
 前記アクリル系粘着剤組成物は、アルキル(メタ)アクリレートを含有するモノマー成分の部分重合物及び/又は前記モノマー成分から得られる(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーを含む。
(Partial polymer of monomer component and (meth) acrylic polymer)
The acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition includes a partially polymerized monomer component containing an alkyl (meth) acrylate and / or a (meth) acrylic polymer obtained from the monomer component.
 前記アルキル(メタ)アクリレートとしては、直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の炭素数1~24のアルキル基をエステル末端に有するものを例示できる。アルキル(メタ)アクリレートは1種を単独で又は2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。なお、「アルキル(メタ)アクリレート」は、アルキルアクリレート及び/又はアルキルメタクリレートをいい、本発明の(メタ)とは同様の意味である。 Examples of the alkyl (meth) acrylate include those having a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms at the ester end. Alkyl (meth) acrylate can be used individually by 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types. “Alkyl (meth) acrylate” refers to alkyl acrylate and / or alkyl methacrylate, and (meth) in the present invention has the same meaning.
 前記アルキル(メタ)アクリレートとしては、前述の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の炭素数1~24のアルキル(メタ)アクリレートを挙げることができ、これらの中でも、炭素数1~9のアルキル(メタ)アクリレートが好ましく、炭素数4~9の分岐を有するアルキル(メタ)アクリレートを好ましく例示することができる。当該アルキル(メタ)アクリレートは、粘着特性のバランスがとりやすい点で好ましい。炭素数4~9の分岐を有するアルキル(メタ)アクリレートとしては、具体的には、n-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、s-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、t-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソブチル(メタ)アクリレート、n-ペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソヘプチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソオクチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソノニル(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられ、これらを1種単独で又は2種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。 Examples of the alkyl (meth) acrylate include the aforementioned linear or branched alkyl (meth) acrylates having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, and among these, alkyl (meth) having 1 to 9 carbon atoms. Acrylates are preferred, and alkyl (meth) acrylates having 4 to 9 carbon atoms are preferred. The alkyl (meth) acrylate is preferable in terms of easily balancing the adhesive properties. Specific examples of the alkyl (meth) acrylate having 4 to 9 carbon atoms include n-butyl (meth) acrylate, s-butyl (meth) acrylate, t-butyl (meth) acrylate, and isobutyl (meth). Acrylate, n-pentyl (meth) acrylate, isopentyl (meth) acrylate, isohexyl (meth) acrylate, isoheptyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, isooctyl (meth) acrylate, isononyl (meth) acrylate, etc. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 本発明において、前記炭素数1~24のアルキル基をエステル末端に有するアルキル(メタ)アクリレートは、(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーを形成する単官能性モノマー成分の全量に対して40重量%以上であることが好ましく、50重量%以上がより好ましく、60重量%以上がさらに好ましい。 In the present invention, the alkyl (meth) acrylate having an alkyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms at the ester terminal is 40% by weight or more based on the total amount of the monofunctional monomer component forming the (meth) acrylic polymer. It is preferably 50% by weight or more, more preferably 60% by weight or more.
 前記モノマー成分には、単官能性モノマー成分として、前記アルキル(メタ)アクリレート以外の共重合モノマーを含有することができる。共重合モノマーは、モノマー成分における前記アルキル(メタ)アクリレートの残部として用いることができる。 The monomer component may contain a copolymerization monomer other than the alkyl (meth) acrylate as a monofunctional monomer component. A copolymerization monomer can be used as the remainder of the said alkyl (meth) acrylate in a monomer component.
 共重合モノマーとしては、例えば、環状窒素含有モノマーを含むことができる。上記環状窒素含有モノマーとしては、(メタ)アクリロイル基又はビニル基等の不飽和二重結合を有する重合性の官能基を有し、かつ環状窒素構造を有するものを特に制限なく用いることができる。環状窒素構造は、環状構造内に窒素原子を有するものが好ましい。環状窒素含有モノマーとしては、例えば、N-ビニルピロリドン、N-ビニル-ε-カプロラクタム、メチルビニルピロリドン等のラクタム系ビニルモノマー;ビニルピリジン、ビニルピペリドン、ビニルピリミジン、ビニルピペラジン、ビニルピラジン、ビニルピロール、ビニルイミダゾール、ビニルオキサゾール、ビニルモルホリン等の窒素含有複素環を有するビニル系モノマー等が挙げられる。また、モルホリン環、ピペリジン環、ピロリジン環、ピペラジン環等の複素環を含有する(メタ)アクリルモノマーが挙げられる。具体的には、N-アクリロイルモルホリン、N-アクリロイルピペリジン、N-メタクリロイルピペリジン、N-アクリロイルピロリジン等が挙げられる。前記環状窒素含有モノマーの中でも、ラクタム系ビニルモノマーが好ましい。 As the copolymerization monomer, for example, a cyclic nitrogen-containing monomer can be included. As said cyclic nitrogen containing monomer, what has a polymerizable functional group which has unsaturated double bonds, such as a (meth) acryloyl group or a vinyl group, and has a cyclic nitrogen structure can be especially used without a restriction | limiting. The cyclic nitrogen structure preferably has a nitrogen atom in the cyclic structure. Examples of cyclic nitrogen-containing monomers include lactam vinyl monomers such as N-vinyl pyrrolidone, N-vinyl-ε-caprolactam, and methyl vinyl pyrrolidone; vinyl pyridine, vinyl piperidone, vinyl pyrimidine, vinyl piperazine, vinyl pyrazine, vinyl pyrrole, vinyl Examples thereof include vinyl monomers having a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring such as imidazole, vinyl oxazole and vinyl morpholine. Moreover, the (meth) acryl monomer containing heterocyclic rings, such as a morpholine ring, a piperidine ring, a pyrrolidine ring, a piperazine ring, is mentioned. Specific examples include N-acryloylmorpholine, N-acryloylpiperidine, N-methacryloylpiperidine, N-acryloylpyrrolidine and the like. Among the cyclic nitrogen-containing monomers, lactam vinyl monomers are preferable.
 本発明において、環状窒素含有モノマーは、(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーを形成する単官能性モノマー成分の全量に対して、0.5~50重量%であるのが好ましく、0.5~40重量%がより好ましく、0.5~30重量%がさらに好ましい。 In the present invention, the cyclic nitrogen-containing monomer is preferably 0.5 to 50% by weight, and preferably 0.5 to 40% by weight, based on the total amount of the monofunctional monomer component forming the (meth) acrylic polymer. Is more preferable, and 0.5 to 30% by weight is even more preferable.
 本発明で用いるモノマー成分には、単官能性モノマー成分として、ヒドロキシル基含有モノマーを含むことができる。ヒドロキシル基含有モノマーとしては、(メタ)アクリロイル基又はビニル基等の不飽和二重結合を有する重合性の官能基を有し、かつヒドロキシル基を有するものを特に制限なく用いることができる。ヒドロキシル基含有モノマーとしては、例えば、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシブチル(メタ)アクリレート、3-ヒドロキシプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、4-ヒドロキシブチル(メタ)アクリレート、6-ヒドロキシヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、8-ヒドロキシオクチル(メタ)アクリレート、10-ヒドロキシデシル(メタ)アクリレート、12-ヒドロキシラウリル(メタ)アクリレート等のヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート;(4-ヒドロキシメチルシクロへキシル)メチル(メタ)アクリレート等のヒドロキシアルキルシクロアルカン(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。その他、ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、アリルアルコール、2-ヒドロキシエチルビニルエーテル、4-ヒドロキシブチルビニルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノビニルエーテル等が挙げられる。これらは単独で又は組み合わせて使用できる。これらの中でもヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレートが好適である。 The monomer component used in the present invention can contain a hydroxyl group-containing monomer as a monofunctional monomer component. As the hydroxyl group-containing monomer, a monomer having a polymerizable functional group having an unsaturated double bond such as a (meth) acryloyl group or a vinyl group and having a hydroxyl group can be used without particular limitation. Examples of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer include 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth) acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl ( Hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylates such as (meth) acrylate, 6-hydroxyhexyl (meth) acrylate, 8-hydroxyoctyl (meth) acrylate, 10-hydroxydecyl (meth) acrylate, 12-hydroxylauryl (meth) acrylate; -Hydroxyalkylcycloalkane (meth) acrylates such as -hydroxymethylcyclohexyl) methyl (meth) acrylate. Other examples include hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylamide, allyl alcohol, 2-hydroxyethyl vinyl ether, 4-hydroxybutyl vinyl ether, diethylene glycol monovinyl ether, and the like. These can be used alone or in combination. Of these, hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate is preferred.
 本発明において、前記ヒドロキシル基含有モノマーは、(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーを形成する単官能性モノマー成分の全量に対して、接着力、凝集力を高める点から1重量%以上であるのが好ましく、2重量%以上であるがより好ましく、3重量%以上であるのがさらに好ましい。一方、前記ヒドロキシル基含有モノマーが多くなりすぎると、粘着剤層が固くなり、接着力が低下する場合があり、また、粘着剤の粘度が高くなりすぎたり、ゲル化したりする場合があることから、前記ヒドロキシル基含有モノマーは、(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーを形成する単官能性モノマー成分の全量に対して、30重量%以下であるのが好ましく、27重量%以下がより好ましく、25重量%以下がさらに好ましい。 In the present invention, the hydroxyl group-containing monomer is preferably 1% by weight or more from the viewpoint of enhancing adhesive force and cohesive force with respect to the total amount of the monofunctional monomer component forming the (meth) acrylic polymer, It is more preferably 2% by weight or more, and further preferably 3% by weight or more. On the other hand, if the amount of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer is too large, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer becomes hard and the adhesive strength may decrease, and the viscosity of the pressure-sensitive adhesive may become too high or gel. The hydroxyl group-containing monomer is preferably 30% by weight or less, more preferably 27% by weight or less, and more preferably 25% by weight or less based on the total amount of the monofunctional monomer component forming the (meth) acrylic polymer. Is more preferable.
 また、(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーを形成するモノマー成分には、単官能性モノマーとして、その他の官能基含有モノマーを含有することができ、例えば、カルボキシル基含有モノマー、環状エーテル基を有するモノマーが挙げられる。 In addition, the monomer component that forms the (meth) acrylic polymer can contain other functional group-containing monomers as monofunctional monomers, such as carboxyl group-containing monomers and monomers having a cyclic ether group. It is done.
 カルボキシル基含有モノマーとしては、(メタ)アクリロイル基又はビニル基等の不飽和二重結合を有する重合性の官能基を有し、かつカルボキシル基を有するものを特に制限なく用いることができる。カルボキシル基含有モノマーとしては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸、カルボキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、カルボキシペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、イタコン酸、マレイン酸、フマール酸、クロトン酸、イソクロトン酸等が挙げられ、これらは単独で又は組み合わせて使用できる。イタコン酸、マレイン酸はこれらの無水物を用いることができる。これらの中でも、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸が好ましく、特にアクリル酸が好ましい。なお、本発明の(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーの製造に用いるモノマー成分にはカルボキシル基含有モノマーを任意に用いることができ、一方では、カルボキシル基含有モノマーを用いなくともよい。 As the carboxyl group-containing monomer, a monomer having a polymerizable functional group having an unsaturated double bond such as a (meth) acryloyl group or a vinyl group and having a carboxyl group can be used without particular limitation. Examples of the carboxyl group-containing monomer include (meth) acrylic acid, carboxyethyl (meth) acrylate, carboxypentyl (meth) acrylate, itaconic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, crotonic acid, and isocrotonic acid. Can be used alone or in combination. These anhydrides can be used for itaconic acid and maleic acid. Among these, acrylic acid and methacrylic acid are preferable, and acrylic acid is particularly preferable. In addition, a carboxyl group-containing monomer can be arbitrarily used for the monomer component used for manufacture of the (meth) acrylic-type polymer of this invention, On the other hand, it is not necessary to use a carboxyl group-containing monomer.
 環状エーテル基を有するモノマーとしては、(メタ)アクリロイル基又はビニル基等の不飽和二重結合を有する重合性の官能基を有し、かつエポキシ基又はオキセタン基等の環状エーテル基を有するものを特に制限なく用いることができる。エポキシ基含有モノマーとしては、例えば、グリシジル(メタ)アクリレート、3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシルメチル(メタ)アクリレート、4-ヒドロキシブチル(メタ)アクリレートグリシジルエーテル等が挙げられる。オキセタン基含有モノマーとしては、例えば、3-オキセタニルメチル(メタ)アクリレート、3-メチル-オキセタニルメチル(メタ)アクリレート、3-エチル-オキセタニルメチル(メタ)アクリレート、3-ブチル-オキセタニルメチル(メタ)アクリレート、3-ヘキシル-オキセタニルメチル(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。これらは単独で又は組み合わせて使用できる。 As a monomer having a cyclic ether group, a monomer having a polymerizable functional group having an unsaturated double bond such as a (meth) acryloyl group or a vinyl group and a cyclic ether group such as an epoxy group or an oxetane group. It can be used without particular limitation. Examples of the epoxy group-containing monomer include glycidyl (meth) acrylate, 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl (meth) acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth) acrylate glycidyl ether, and the like. Examples of the oxetane group-containing monomer include 3-oxetanylmethyl (meth) acrylate, 3-methyl-oxetanylmethyl (meth) acrylate, 3-ethyl-oxetanylmethyl (meth) acrylate, and 3-butyl-oxetanylmethyl (meth) acrylate. , 3-hexyl-oxetanylmethyl (meth) acrylate and the like. These can be used alone or in combination.
 本発明において、前記カルボキシル基含有モノマー、環状エーテル基を有するモノマーは、(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーを形成する単官能性モノマー成分の全量に対して、30重量%以下であるのが好ましく、27重量%以下がより好ましく、25重量%以下がさらに好ましい。 In the present invention, the carboxyl group-containing monomer and the monomer having a cyclic ether group are preferably 30% by weight or less based on the total amount of the monofunctional monomer component forming the (meth) acrylic polymer, and 27% by weight. % Or less is more preferable, and 25% by weight or less is more preferable.
 本発明の(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーを形成するモノマー成分には、共重合モノマーとしては、例えば、CH=C(R)COOR(前記Rは水素又はメチル基、Rは炭素数1~3の置換されたアルキル基、環状のシクロアルキル基を表す。)で表されるアルキル(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。 The monomer component forming the (meth) acrylic polymer of the present invention includes, for example, CH 2 ═C (R 1 ) COOR 2 (wherein R 1 is hydrogen or a methyl group, and R 2 is the number of carbon atoms). And an alkyl (meth) acrylate represented by 1 to 3 substituted alkyl groups and cyclic cycloalkyl groups.
 ここで、Rとしての、炭素数1~3の置換されたアルキル基の置換基としては、炭素数3~8個のアリール基又は炭素数3~8個のアリールオキシ基であることが好ましい。アリール基としては、限定はされないが、フェニル基が好ましい。 Here, the substituent of the substituted alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms as R 2 is preferably an aryl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms or an aryloxy group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms. . The aryl group is not limited, but is preferably a phenyl group.
 このようなCH=C(R)COORで表されるモノマーの例としては、フェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、3,3,5-トリメチルシクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。これらは単独で又は組み合わせて使用できる。 Examples of such a monomer represented by CH 2 ═C (R 1 ) COOR 2 include phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, 3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexyl. (Meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, etc. are mentioned. These can be used alone or in combination.
 本発明において、前記CH=C(R)COORで表される(メタ)アクリレートは、(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーを形成する単官能性モノマー成分の全量に対して、50重量%以下で用いることができ、45重量%以下が好ましく、40重量%以下がより好ましく、35重量%以下がさらに好ましい。 In the present invention, the (meth) acrylate represented by CH 2 ═C (R 1 ) COOR 2 is 50% by weight or less based on the total amount of the monofunctional monomer component forming the (meth) acrylic polymer. 45% by weight or less is preferable, 40% by weight or less is more preferable, and 35% by weight or less is more preferable.
 他の共重合モノマーとしては、酢酸ビニル、プロピオン酸ビニル、スチレン、α-メチルスチレン;(メタ)アクリル酸ポリエチレングリコール、(メタ)アクリル酸ポリプロピレングリコール、(メタ)アクリル酸メトキシエチレングリコール、(メタ)アクリル酸メトキシポリプロピレングリコール等のグリコール系アクリルエステルモノマー;(メタ)アクリル酸テトラヒドロフルフリル、フッ素(メタ)アクリレート、シリコーン(メタ)アクリレートや2-メトキシエチルアクリレート等のアクリル酸エステル系モノマー;アミド基含有モノマー、アミノ基含有モノマー、イミド基含有モノマー、N-アクリロイルモルホリン、ビニルエーテルモノマー等も使用することができる。また、共重合モノマーとしては、テルペン(メタ)アクリレート、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート等の環状構造を有するモノマーを用いることができる。 Other copolymerization monomers include vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate, styrene, α-methylstyrene; (meth) acrylic acid polyethylene glycol, (meth) acrylic acid polypropylene glycol, (meth) acrylic acid methoxyethylene glycol, (meth) Glycol acrylic ester monomers such as methoxypolypropylene glycol acrylate; Acrylic ester monomers such as tetrahydrofurfuryl (meth) acrylate, fluorine (meth) acrylate, silicone (meth) acrylate and 2-methoxyethyl acrylate; Monomers, amino group-containing monomers, imide group-containing monomers, N-acryloylmorpholine, vinyl ether monomers and the like can also be used. Moreover, as a copolymerization monomer, the monomer which has cyclic structures, such as terpene (meth) acrylate and dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, can be used.
 さらに、ケイ素原子を含有するシラン系モノマー等が挙げられる。シラン系モノマーとしては、例えば、3-アクリロキシプロピルトリエトキシシラン、ビニルトリメトキシシラン、ビニルトリエトキシシラン、4-ビニルブチルトリメトキシシラン、4-ビニルブチルトリエトキシシラン、8-ビニルオクチルトリメトキシシラン、8-ビニルオクチルトリエトキシシラン、10-メタクリロイルオキシデシルトリメトキシシラン、10-アクリロイルオキシデシルトリメトキシシラン、10-メタクリロイルオキシデシルトリエトキシシラン、10-アクリロイルオキシデシルトリエトキシシラン等が挙げられる。 Further examples include silane monomers containing silicon atoms. Examples of the silane monomer include 3-acryloxypropyltriethoxysilane, vinyltrimethoxysilane, vinyltriethoxysilane, 4-vinylbutyltrimethoxysilane, 4-vinylbutyltriethoxysilane, and 8-vinyloctyltrimethoxysilane. , 8-vinyloctyltriethoxysilane, 10-methacryloyloxydecyltrimethoxysilane, 10-acryloyloxydecyltrimethoxysilane, 10-methacryloyloxydecyltriethoxysilane, 10-acryloyloxydecyltriethoxysilane, and the like.
 本発明の(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーを形成するモノマー成分には、前記例示の単官能性モノマーの他に、粘着剤の凝集力を調整するために、必要に応じて多官能性モノマーを含有することができる。 The monomer component that forms the (meth) acrylic polymer of the present invention contains a polyfunctional monomer as necessary in order to adjust the cohesive strength of the pressure-sensitive adhesive, in addition to the monofunctional monomer exemplified above. be able to.
 多官能性モノマーは、(メタ)アクリロイル基又はビニル基等の不飽和二重結合を有する重合性の官能基を少なくとも2つ有するモノマーであり、例えば、(ポリ)エチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、(ポリ)プロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート、1,2-エチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,12-ドデカンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、テトラメチロールメタントリ(メタ)アクリレート等の多価アルコールと(メタ)アクリル酸とのエステル化合物;アリル(メタ)アクリレート、ビニル(メタ)アクリレート、ジビニルベンゼン、エポキシアクリレート、ポリエステルアクリレート、ウレタンアクリレート、ブチルジ(メタ)アクリレート、ヘキシルジ(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレートを好適に使用することができる。多官能性モノマーは、1種を単独で又は2種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。 The polyfunctional monomer is a monomer having at least two polymerizable functional groups having an unsaturated double bond such as a (meth) acryloyl group or a vinyl group, such as (poly) ethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, (Poly) propylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol di (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, 1,2-ethylene Glycol di (meth) acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,12-dodecanediol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, tetramethylol methanetri (meth) acrylate Ester compounds of polyhydric alcohols such as carbonate and (meth) acrylic acid; allyl (meth) acrylate, vinyl (meth) acrylate, divinylbenzene, epoxy acrylate, polyester acrylate, urethane acrylate, butyl di (meth) acrylate, hexyl di ( And (meth) acrylate. Among these, trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, hexanediol di (meth) acrylate, and dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate can be preferably used. A polyfunctional monomer can be used individually by 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types.
 多官能性モノマーの使用量は、その分子量や官能基数等により異なるが、単官能性モノマーの合計100重量部に対して、3重量部以下で用いることが好ましく、2重量部以下がより好ましく、1重量部以下がさらに好ましい。また、下限値としては特に限定されないが、0重量部以上であることが好ましく、0.001重量部以上であることがより好ましい。多官能性モノマーの使用量が前記範囲内であることにより、接着力を向上することができる。 The amount of the polyfunctional monomer used varies depending on the molecular weight, the number of functional groups, etc., but it is preferably used at 3 parts by weight or less, more preferably 2 parts by weight or less, with respect to a total of 100 parts by weight of monofunctional monomers 1 part by weight or less is more preferable. Moreover, it does not specifically limit as a lower limit, However It is preferable that it is 0 weight part or more, and it is more preferable that it is 0.001 weight part or more. Adhesive force can be improved when the usage-amount of a polyfunctional monomer exists in the said range.
 前記(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーの製造は、溶液重合、紫外線(UV)重合等の放射線重合、塊状重合、乳化重合等の各種ラジカル重合等の公知の製造方法を適宜選択できる。また、得られる(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーは、ランダム共重合体、ブロック共重合体、グラフト共重合体等のいずれでもよい。 The production of the (meth) acrylic polymer can be appropriately selected from known production methods such as radiation polymerization such as solution polymerization and ultraviolet (UV) polymerization, various radical polymerizations such as bulk polymerization and emulsion polymerization. Further, the (meth) acrylic polymer obtained may be any of a random copolymer, a block copolymer, a graft copolymer, and the like.
 また、本発明においては、前記モノマー成分の部分重合物も好適に用いることができる。 In the present invention, a partial polymer of the monomer component can also be suitably used.
 前記(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーをラジカル重合により製造する場合には、前記モノマー成分に、ラジカル重合に用いられる重合開始剤、連鎖移動剤、乳化剤等を適宜添加して、重合を行うことができる。前記ラジカル重合に用いられる重合開始剤、連鎖移動剤、乳化剤等は特に限定されず適宜選択して使用することができる。なお、(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーの重量平均分子量は、重合開始剤、連鎖移動剤の使用量、反応条件により制御可能であり、これらの種類に応じて適宜その使用量が調整される。 When the (meth) acrylic polymer is produced by radical polymerization, polymerization can be carried out by appropriately adding a polymerization initiator, a chain transfer agent, an emulsifier and the like used for radical polymerization to the monomer component. The polymerization initiator, chain transfer agent, emulsifier and the like used for the radical polymerization are not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected and used. In addition, the weight average molecular weight of a (meth) acrylic-type polymer can be controlled by the usage-amount of a polymerization initiator and a chain transfer agent, and reaction conditions, and the usage-amount is suitably adjusted according to these kinds.
 例えば、溶液重合等においては、重合溶媒として、例えば、酢酸エチル、トルエン等が用いられる。具体的な溶液重合例としては、反応は窒素等の不活性ガス気流下で、重合開始剤を加え、通常、50~70℃程度で、5~30時間程度の反応条件で行われる。 For example, in solution polymerization or the like, for example, ethyl acetate, toluene or the like is used as a polymerization solvent. As a specific example of solution polymerization, the reaction is carried out in an inert gas stream such as nitrogen and a polymerization initiator is added, and the reaction is usually performed at about 50 to 70 ° C. under reaction conditions for about 5 to 30 hours.
 溶液重合等に用いられる、熱重合開始剤としては、例えば、2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリル、2,2’-アゾビス-2-メチルブチロニトリル、2,2’-アゾビス(2-メチルプロピオン酸)ジメチル、4,4’-アゾビス-4-シアノバレリアン酸、アゾビスイソバレロニトリル、2,2’-アゾビス(2-アミジノプロパン)ジヒドロクロライド、2,2’-アゾビス[2-(5-メチル-2-イミダゾリン-2-イル)プロパン]ジヒドロクロライド、2,2’-アゾビス(2-メチルプロピオンアミジン)二硫酸塩、2,2’-アゾビス(N,N’-ジメチレンイソブチルアミジン)、2,2’-アゾビス[N-(2-カルボキシエチル)-2-メチルプロピオンアミジン]ハイドレート(VA-057、和光純薬工業(株)製)等のアゾ系開始剤;過硫酸カリウム、過硫酸アンモニウム等の過硫酸塩、ジ(2-エチルヘキシル)パーオキシジカーボネート、ジ(4-t-ブチルシクロヘキシル)パーオキシジカーボネート、ジ-sec-ブチルパーオキシジカーボネート、t-ブチルパーオキシネオデカノエート、t-ヘキシルパーオキシピバレート、t-ブチルパーオキシピバレート、ジラウロイルパーオキシド、ジ-n-オクタノイルパーオキシド、1,1,3,3-テトラメチルブチルパーオキシ-2-エチルヘキサノエート、ジ(4-メチルベンゾイル)パーオキシド、ジベンゾイルパーオキシド、t-ブチルパーオキシイソブチレート、1,1-ジ(t-ヘキシルパーオキシ)シクロヘキサン、t-ブチルハイドロパーオキシド、過酸化水素等の過酸化物系開始剤、過硫酸塩と亜硫酸水素ナトリウムの組み合わせ、過酸化物とアスコルビン酸ナトリウムの組み合わせ等の過酸化物と還元剤とを組み合わせたレドックス系開始剤等を挙げることができるが、これらに限定されるものではない。 Examples of thermal polymerization initiators used for solution polymerization include 2,2′-azobisisobutyronitrile, 2,2′-azobis-2-methylbutyronitrile, 2,2′-azobis (2 -Methylpropionic acid) dimethyl, 4,4'-azobis-4-cyanovaleric acid, azobisisovaleronitrile, 2,2'-azobis (2-amidinopropane) dihydrochloride, 2,2'-azobis [2- (5-Methyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl) propane] dihydrochloride, 2,2′-azobis (2-methylpropionamidine) disulfate, 2,2′-azobis (N, N′-dimethyleneisobutyl) Amidine), 2,2′-azobis [N- (2-carboxyethyl) -2-methylpropionamidine] hydrate (VA-057, Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) Azo initiators such as potassium persulfate, ammonium persulfate, di (2-ethylhexyl) peroxydicarbonate, di (4-t-butylcyclohexyl) peroxydicarbonate, di- sec-butyl peroxydicarbonate, t-butylperoxyneodecanoate, t-hexylperoxypivalate, t-butylperoxypivalate, dilauroyl peroxide, di-n-octanoyl peroxide, 1, 1,3,3-tetramethylbutylperoxy-2-ethylhexanoate, di (4-methylbenzoyl) peroxide, dibenzoyl peroxide, t-butylperoxyisobutyrate, 1,1-di (t- Hexylperoxy) cyclohexane, t-butyl hydroperoxide, hydrogen peroxide, etc. Examples include oxide initiators, redox initiators that combine a peroxide and a reducing agent, such as a combination of persulfate and sodium bisulfite, and a combination of peroxide and sodium ascorbate. It is not limited to.
 前記重合開始剤は、単独で使用してもよく、また2種以上を混合して使用してもよいが、モノマー成分の全量100重量部に対して、1重量部以下程度であることが好ましく、0.005~1重量部程度であることがより好ましく、0.02~0.5重量部程度であることがさらに好ましい。 The polymerization initiator may be used alone or in combination of two or more, but is preferably about 1 part by weight or less with respect to 100 parts by weight of the total amount of monomer components. The amount is more preferably about 0.005 to 1 part by weight, and further preferably about 0.02 to 0.5 part by weight.
 なお、重合開始剤として、2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリルを用いる場合、重合開始剤の使用量は、モノマー成分の全量100重量部に対して、0.2重量部以下程度であることが好ましく、0.06~0.2重量部程度とするのがより好ましい。 When 2,2′-azobisisobutyronitrile is used as the polymerization initiator, the amount of the polymerization initiator used is about 0.2 parts by weight or less with respect to 100 parts by weight of the total amount of monomer components. The amount is preferably about 0.06 to 0.2 parts by weight.
 連鎖移動剤としては、例えば、ラウリルメルカプタン、グリシジルメルカプタン、メルカプト酢酸、2-メルカプトエタノール、チオグリコール酸、チオグルコール酸2-エチルヘキシル、2,3-ジメルカプト-1-プロパノール等が挙げられる。連鎖移動剤は、単独で使用してもよく、また2種以上を混合して使用してもよいが、全体としての含有量はモノマー成分の全量100重量部に対して、0.3重量部程度以下である。 Examples of the chain transfer agent include lauryl mercaptan, glycidyl mercaptan, mercaptoacetic acid, 2-mercaptoethanol, thioglycolic acid, 2-ethylhexyl thioglycolate, and 2,3-dimercapto-1-propanol. The chain transfer agent may be used alone or in combination of two or more, but the total content is 0.3 parts by weight relative to 100 parts by weight of the total amount of monomer components. Less than or equal to
 また、乳化重合する場合に用いる乳化剤としては、例えば、ラウリル硫酸ナトリウム、ラウリル硫酸アンモニウム、ドデシルベンゼンスルホン酸ナトリウム、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルエーテル硫酸アンモニウム、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルフェニルエーテル硫酸ナトリウム等のアニオン系乳化剤、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルフェニルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレン脂肪酸エステル、ポリオキシエチレン-ポリオキシプロピレンブロックポリマー等のノニオン系乳化剤等が挙げられる。これらの乳化剤は、単独で用いてもよく2種以上を併用してもよい。 Examples of the emulsifier used in emulsion polymerization include anionic emulsifiers such as sodium lauryl sulfate, ammonium lauryl sulfate, sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate, ammonium polyoxyethylene alkyl ether sulfate, sodium polyoxyethylene alkylphenyl ether sulfate, and polyoxy Nonionic emulsifiers such as ethylene alkyl ether, polyoxyethylene alkyl phenyl ether, polyoxyethylene fatty acid ester, polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene block polymer and the like can be mentioned. These emulsifiers may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 さらに、反応性乳化剤として、プロペニル基、アリルエーテル基等のラジカル重合性官能基が導入された乳化剤として、具体的には、例えば、アクアロンHS-10、HS-20、KH-10、BC-05、BC-10、BC-20(以上、いずれも第一工業製薬(株)製)、アデカリアソープSE10N(ADEKA社製)等がある。乳化剤の使用量は、モノマー成分の全量100重量部に対して、5重量部以下であることが好ましい。 Further, as reactive emulsifiers, as emulsifiers into which radical polymerizable functional groups such as propenyl groups and allyl ether groups are introduced, specifically, for example, Aqualon HS-10, HS-20, KH-10, BC-05 BC-10, BC-20 (all of which are manufactured by Daiichi Kogyo Seiyaku Co., Ltd.), Adeka Soap SE10N (manufactured by ADEKA), and the like. The amount of the emulsifier used is preferably 5 parts by weight or less with respect to 100 parts by weight of the total amount of the monomer components.
 また、前記(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーを放射線重合により製造する場合には、前記モノマー成分に、電子線、紫外線(UV)等の放射線を照射することにより重合して製造することができる。これらの中でも、紫外線重合が好ましい。以下、放射線重合の中で好ましい態様である紫外線重合について説明する。 Further, when the (meth) acrylic polymer is produced by radiation polymerization, it can be produced by polymerizing the monomer component by irradiating the monomer component with radiation such as an electron beam or ultraviolet (UV). Among these, ultraviolet polymerization is preferable. Hereinafter, ultraviolet polymerization which is a preferable embodiment in radiation polymerization will be described.
 紫外線重合を行う際には、重合時間を短くすることができる利点等から、モノマー成分に光重合開始剤を含有させることが好ましい。 When performing ultraviolet polymerization, it is preferable to contain a photopolymerization initiator in the monomer component from the advantage that the polymerization time can be shortened.
 前記光重合開始剤としては、波長400nm未満に吸収帯を有する光重合開始剤(B)を挙げることができる。また、光重合開始剤(B)は、波長400nm以上に吸収帯を有さないことが好ましい。当該光重合開始剤(B)としては、紫外線によりラジカルを発生し、光重合を開始するものであって、波長400nm未満に吸収帯を有するものであれば特に制限されず、通常用いられる光重合開始剤をいずれも好適に用いることができる。例えば、ベンゾインエーテル系光重合開始剤、アセトフェノン系光重合開始剤、α-ケトール系光重合開始剤、光活性オキシム系光重合開始剤、ベンゾイン系光重合開始剤、ベンジル系光重合開始剤、ベンゾフェノン系光重合開始剤、ケタール系光重合開始剤、チオキサントン系光重合開始剤、アシルフォスフィンオキサイド系光重合開始剤等を用いることができる。 Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include a photopolymerization initiator (B) having an absorption band at a wavelength of less than 400 nm. Moreover, it is preferable that a photoinitiator (B) does not have an absorption band in wavelength 400nm or more. The photopolymerization initiator (B) is not particularly limited as long as it generates radicals by ultraviolet rays and starts photopolymerization and has an absorption band at a wavelength of less than 400 nm. Any initiator can be suitably used. For example, benzoin ether photopolymerization initiator, acetophenone photopolymerization initiator, α-ketol photopolymerization initiator, photoactive oxime photopolymerization initiator, benzoin photopolymerization initiator, benzyl photopolymerization initiator, benzophenone A photopolymerization initiator, a ketal photopolymerization initiator, a thioxanthone photopolymerization initiator, an acylphosphine oxide photopolymerization initiator, or the like can be used.
 具体的には、ベンゾインエーテル系光重合開始剤としては、例えば、ベンゾインメチルエーテル、ベンゾインエチルエーテル、ベンゾインプロピルエーテル、ベンゾインイソプロピルエーテル、ベンゾインイソブチルエーテル、2,2-ジメトキシ-1,2-ジフェニルエタン-1-オン、アニソールメチルエーテル等が挙げられる。 Specifically, examples of the benzoin ether photopolymerization initiator include benzoin methyl ether, benzoin ethyl ether, benzoin propyl ether, benzoin isopropyl ether, benzoin isobutyl ether, 2,2-dimethoxy-1,2-diphenylethane- Examples thereof include 1-one and anisole methyl ether.
 アセトフェノン系光重合開始剤としては、例えば、2,2-ジエトキシアセトフェノン、2,2-ジメトキシ-2-フェニルアセトフェノン、1-ヒドロキシシクロヘキシルフェニルケトン、4-フェノキシジクロロアセトフェノン、4-t-ブチルジクロロアセトフェノン等が挙げられる。 Examples of the acetophenone photopolymerization initiator include 2,2-diethoxyacetophenone, 2,2-dimethoxy-2-phenylacetophenone, 1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone, 4-phenoxydichloroacetophenone, and 4-t-butyldichloroacetophenone. Etc.
 α-ケトール系光重合開始剤としては例えば、2-メチル-2-ヒドロキシプロピオフェノン、1-[4-(2-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル]-2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチルプロパン-1-オン等が挙げられる。 Examples of α-ketol photopolymerization initiators include 2-methyl-2-hydroxypropiophenone, 1- [4- (2-hydroxyethyl) phenyl] -2-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-1-one, and the like. Is mentioned.
 光活性オキシム系光重合開始剤としては例えば、1-フェニル-1,2-プロパンジオン-2-(O-エトキシカルボニル)-オキシム等が挙げられる。 Examples of the photoactive oxime photopolymerization initiator include 1-phenyl-1,2-propanedione-2- (O-ethoxycarbonyl) -oxime.
 ベンゾイン系光重合開始剤としては、例えば、ベンゾイン等が挙げられる。 Examples of the benzoin photopolymerization initiator include benzoin.
 ベンジル系光重合開始剤としては、例えば、ベンジル等が含まれる。 Examples of the benzyl photopolymerization initiator include benzyl and the like.
 ベンゾフェノン系光重合開始剤には、例えば、ベンゾフェノン、ベンゾイル安息香酸、3,3’-ジメチル-4-メトキシベンゾフェノン、ポリビニルベンゾフェノン、α-ヒドロキシシクロヘキシルフェニルケトン等が含まれる。 Examples of the benzophenone photopolymerization initiator include benzophenone, benzoylbenzoic acid, 3,3′-dimethyl-4-methoxybenzophenone, polyvinylbenzophenone, α-hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone, and the like.
 ケタール系光重合開始剤には、ベンジルジメチルケタール等が含まれる。 Ketal photopolymerization initiators include benzyl dimethyl ketal and the like.
 チオキサントン系光重合開始剤には、例えば、チオキサントン、2-クロロチオキサントン、2-メチルチオキサントン、2,4-ジメチルチオキサントン、イソプロピルチオキサントン、2,4-ジクロロチオキサントン、2,4-ジエチルチオキサントン、2,4-ジイソプロピルチオキサントン、ドデシルチオキサントン等が含まれる。 Examples of the thioxanthone photopolymerization initiator include thioxanthone, 2-chlorothioxanthone, 2-methylthioxanthone, 2,4-dimethylthioxanthone, isopropylthioxanthone, 2,4-dichlorothioxanthone, 2,4-diethylthioxanthone, 2,4 -Diisopropylthioxanthone, dodecylthioxanthone and the like are included.
 アシルフォスフィンオキサイド系光重合開始剤には、例えば、2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾイル-ジフェニル-フォスフィンオキサイド、ビス(2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾイル)-フェニルフォスフィンオキサイド等が含まれる。 Examples of the acylphosphine oxide photopolymerization initiator include 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl-diphenyl-phosphine oxide, bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) -phenylphosphine oxide, and the like.
 前記波長400nm未満に吸収帯を有する光重合開始剤(B)は、単独で又は2種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。前記波長400nm未満に吸収帯を有する光重合開始剤(B)は、本発明の効果を損なわない範囲で添加することができるが、添加量としては、(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーを形成する単官能性モノマー成分100重量部に対して、0.005~0.5重量部程度であることが好ましく、0.02~0.1重量部程度であることがより好ましい。 The photopolymerization initiator (B) having an absorption band at a wavelength of less than 400 nm can be used alone or in combination of two or more. The photopolymerization initiator (B) having an absorption band at a wavelength of less than 400 nm can be added within a range that does not impair the effects of the present invention, and the addition amount is a monofunctional that forms a (meth) acrylic polymer. The amount is preferably about 0.005 to 0.5 part by weight, more preferably about 0.02 to 0.1 part by weight based on 100 parts by weight of the monomeric monomer component.
 また、前記粘着剤層に、色素化合物(さらには紫外線吸収剤)を含む場合であって、紫外線重合を行う場合、例えば、前記アルキル(メタ)アクリレートを含有するモノマー成分及び/又は前記モノマー成分の部分重合物、色素化合物(さらには紫外線吸収剤)、及び光重合開始剤を含む紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤組成物を紫外線重合することにより形成されることが好ましい。前記紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤組成物を紫外線重合することにより形成された粘着剤層は、150μm以上の厚手のものも形成が可能になり、幅広い厚みの粘着剤層を形成することができるため好ましい。 In the case where the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer contains a dye compound (further, an ultraviolet absorber) and ultraviolet polymerization is performed, for example, the monomer component containing the alkyl (meth) acrylate and / or the monomer component It is preferably formed by ultraviolet polymerization of a UV curable acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing a partial polymer, a dye compound (and UV absorber), and a photopolymerization initiator. Since the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed by ultraviolet polymerization of the ultraviolet curable acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition can be formed to have a thickness of 150 μm or more, and a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having a wide thickness can be formed. preferable.
 その際の光重合開始剤としては、波長400nm以上に吸収帯を有する光重合開始剤(A)を含むものであることが好ましい。粘着剤組成物に色素化合物(さらには紫外線吸収剤)を含む場合、紫外線重合を行うと、前記色素化合物(さらには紫外線吸収剤)により紫外線が吸収されてしまい十分に重合できない場合があった。しかしながら、波長400nm以上に吸収帯を有する光重合開始剤(A)であれば、色素化合物(さらには紫外線吸収剤)を含んでいても、十分に重合することができるため、好ましい。 In this case, the photopolymerization initiator preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator (A) having an absorption band at a wavelength of 400 nm or longer. When the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition contains a dye compound (moreover, an ultraviolet absorber), when ultraviolet polymerization is performed, the dye compound (further, the ultraviolet absorber) absorbs ultraviolet rays, and there are cases where the polymerization cannot be sufficiently performed. However, the photopolymerization initiator (A) having an absorption band at a wavelength of 400 nm or more is preferable because it can be sufficiently polymerized even if it contains a dye compound (and an ultraviolet absorber).
 波長400nm以上に吸収帯を有する光重合開始剤(A)としては、ビス(2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾイル)-フェニルフォスフィンオキサイド(Irgacure819、BASF製)、2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾイル-ジフェニル-フォスフィンオキサイド(LUCIRIN TPO、BASF製)等を挙げることができる。 As a photopolymerization initiator (A) having an absorption band at a wavelength of 400 nm or more, bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) -phenylphosphine oxide (Irgacure 819, manufactured by BASF), 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl- And diphenyl-phosphine oxide (LUCIRIN TPO, manufactured by BASF).
 前記波長400nm以上に吸収帯を有する光重合開始剤(A)は、単独で使用してもよく、また2種以上を混合して使用してもよい。 The photopolymerization initiator (A) having an absorption band at a wavelength of 400 nm or more may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 また、前記波長400nm以上に吸収帯を有する光重合開始剤(A)の添加量は、特に限定されるものではないが、色素化合物(さらには紫外線吸収剤)の添加量よりも少ないことが好ましく、(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーを形成する単官能性モノマー成分100重量部に対して、0.005~1重量部程度であることが好ましく、0.02~0.8重量部程度であることがより好ましい。光重合開始剤(A)の添加量が前記範囲であることで、紫外線重合を十分に進行することができるため好ましい。 Further, the addition amount of the photopolymerization initiator (A) having an absorption band at a wavelength of 400 nm or more is not particularly limited, but is preferably less than the addition amount of the dye compound (and also the ultraviolet absorber). The amount of the monofunctional monomer component forming the (meth) acrylic polymer is preferably about 0.005 to 1 part by weight and preferably about 0.02 to 0.8 part by weight. More preferred. It is preferable that the amount of the photopolymerization initiator (A) added is in the above range because ultraviolet polymerization can sufficiently proceed.
 また、前記粘着剤層に、色素化合物(さらには紫外線吸収剤)を含む場合であって、紫外線重合を行う場合、前記モノマー成分に波長400nm未満に吸収帯を有する光重合開始剤(B)を先に添加して、紫外線を照射して一部重合したモノマー成分の部分重合物(プレポリマー組成物)に、前記波長400nm以上に吸収帯を有する光重合開始剤(A)、色素化合物(さらには紫外線吸収剤)を添加して紫外線重合することが好ましい。紫外線照射をして一部重合したモノマー成分の部分重合物(プレポリマー組成物)に、前記波長400nm以上に吸収帯を有する光重合開始剤(A)を添加する際には、前記光重合開始剤をモノマーに溶解した後添加することが好ましい。 Further, in the case where the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer contains a dye compound (further, an ultraviolet absorber) and ultraviolet polymerization is performed, the photopolymerization initiator (B) having an absorption band at a wavelength of less than 400 nm is included in the monomer component. A photopolymerization initiator (A) having an absorption band at a wavelength of 400 nm or more, a dye compound (further added to the partial polymerization product (prepolymer composition) of the monomer component previously added and partially polymerized by irradiation with ultraviolet rays Are preferably subjected to ultraviolet polymerization by adding an ultraviolet absorber. When the photopolymerization initiator (A) having an absorption band at a wavelength of 400 nm or more is added to the partial polymerization product (prepolymer composition) of the monomer component partially polymerized by ultraviolet irradiation, the photopolymerization is started. It is preferable to add the agent after dissolving it in the monomer.
 前記アクリル系ポリマーの他に、ゴム系ポリマーがベースポリマーとして公的である。ゴム系ポリマーは、1種の共役ジエン化合物を重合することによって得られる共役ジエン系重合体、2種以上の共役ジエン化合物を重合することによって得られる共役ジエン系共重合体、共役ジエン化合物と芳香族ビニル化合物とを共重合することによって得られる共役ジエン系共重合体を含むことができる。また、これらの水添物も好適に用いることができる。ジエン系共重合体は、ランダム共重合体であってもブロック共重合体であってもよく、また、共役ジエン化合物、芳香族ビニル化合物以外の化合物を共重合してもよい。 In addition to the acrylic polymer, a rubber polymer is public as a base polymer. Rubber polymers are conjugated diene polymers obtained by polymerizing one kind of conjugated diene compound, conjugated diene copolymers obtained by polymerizing two or more kinds of conjugated diene compounds, conjugated diene compounds and aromatics. A conjugated diene copolymer obtained by copolymerizing with an aromatic vinyl compound can be included. Moreover, these hydrogenated materials can also be used suitably. The diene copolymer may be a random copolymer or a block copolymer, and may be a copolymer of a compound other than a conjugated diene compound or an aromatic vinyl compound.
 このような共役ジエン系(共)重合体としては、具体的には、ブタジエンゴム(BR)、イソプレンゴム(IR)、スチレン-ブタジエン共重合体(SBR)、ブタジエン-イソプレン-スチレンランダム共重合体、イソプレン-スチレンランダム共重合体、スチレン-イソプレンブロック共重合体(SIS)、ブタジエン-スチレン共重合体、スチレン-エチレン-ブタジエンブロック共重合体(SEBS)、アクリロニトリル-ブタジエンゴム(NBR)等を挙げることができ、これらを1種単独で、又は2種以上を混合して用いることができる。これらの中でも、イソプレン-スチレン共重合体が好ましい。また、これらの水添物も好適に用いることができる。 Specific examples of such conjugated diene (co) polymers include butadiene rubber (BR), isoprene rubber (IR), styrene-butadiene copolymer (SBR), and butadiene-isoprene-styrene random copolymer. , Isoprene-styrene random copolymer, styrene-isoprene block copolymer (SIS), butadiene-styrene copolymer, styrene-ethylene-butadiene block copolymer (SEBS), acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber (NBR), etc. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more. Of these, isoprene-styrene copolymers are preferred. Moreover, these hydrogenated materials can also be used suitably.
 (シランカップリング剤)
 さらに、本発明の粘着剤組成物にはシランカップリング剤を含有することができる。シランカップリング剤の配合量は、ベースポリマー(例えば、上記(メタ)アクリル系ポリマー)100重量部に対して1重量部以下であるのが好ましく、0.01~1重量部がより好ましく、0.02~0.6重量部がさらに好ましい。
(Silane coupling agent)
Furthermore, the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition of the present invention can contain a silane coupling agent. The amount of the silane coupling agent is preferably 1 part by weight or less, more preferably 0.01 to 1 part by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the base polymer (for example, the (meth) acrylic polymer). More preferred is 0.02 to 0.6 parts by weight.
 前記シランカップリング剤としては、例えば、3-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-グリシドキシプロピルトリエトキシシラン、3-グリシドキシプロピルメチルジエトキシシラン、2-(3,4エポキシシクロヘキシル)エチルトリメトキシシラン等のエポキシ基含有シランカップリング剤、3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、N-2-(アミノエチル)-3-アミノプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン、3-トリエトキシシリル-N-(1,3-ジメチルブチリデン)プロピルアミン、N-フェニル-γ-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン等のアミノ基含有シランカップリング剤、3-アクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-メタクリロキシプロピルトリエトキシシラン等の(メタ)アクリル基含有シランカップリング剤、3-イソシアネートプロピルトリエトキシシラン等のイソシアネート基含有シランカップリング剤等が挙げられる。 Examples of the silane coupling agent include 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropyltriethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, 2- (3,4 epoxy cyclohexyl). Epoxy group-containing silane coupling agents such as ethyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, N-2- (aminoethyl) -3-aminopropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-triethoxysilyl-N- (1, (3-dimethylbutylidene) propylamine, amino group-containing silane coupling agents such as N-phenyl-γ-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-acryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropyltriethoxysilane ( (Meth) acrylic group-containing sila Coupling agents, such as isocyanate group-containing silane coupling agents such as 3-isocyanate propyl triethoxysilane and the like.
 (架橋剤)
 本発明の粘着剤組成物は、架橋剤を含有することができる。架橋剤としては、イソシアネート系架橋剤、エポキシ系架橋剤、シリコーン系架橋剤、オキサゾリン系架橋剤、アジリジン系架橋剤、シラン系架橋剤、アルキルエーテル化メラミン系架橋剤、金属キレート系架橋剤、過酸化物等の架橋剤が含まれる。架橋剤は1種を単独で又は2種以上を組み合わせることができる。これらの中でも、イソシアネート系架橋剤が好ましく用いられる。
(Crosslinking agent)
The pressure-sensitive adhesive composition of the present invention can contain a crosslinking agent. Examples of crosslinking agents include isocyanate crosslinking agents, epoxy crosslinking agents, silicone crosslinking agents, oxazoline crosslinking agents, aziridine crosslinking agents, silane crosslinking agents, alkyletherified melamine crosslinking agents, metal chelate crosslinking agents, Crosslinkers such as oxides are included. A crosslinking agent can be used alone or in combination of two or more. Among these, an isocyanate type crosslinking agent is preferably used.
 上記架橋剤は1種を単独で使用してもよく、また2種以上を混合して使用してもよいが、全体としての含有量は、(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーを形成する単官能性モノマー成分100重量部に対し、5重量部以下であることが好ましく、0.01~5重量部であることがより好ましく、0.01~4重量部がさらに好ましく、0.02~3重量部が特に好ましい。 The crosslinking agent may be used alone or in combination of two or more, but the total content is a monofunctional monomer that forms a (meth) acrylic polymer. The amount is preferably 5 parts by weight or less, more preferably 0.01 to 5 parts by weight, still more preferably 0.01 to 4 parts by weight, and 0.02 to 3 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the component. Particularly preferred.
 イソシアネート系架橋剤は、イソシアネート基(イソシアネート基をブロック剤又は数量体化等により一時的に保護したイソシアネート再生型官能基を含む)を1分子中に2つ以上有する化合物をいう。イソシアネート系架橋剤としては、トリレンジイソシアネート、キシレンジイソシアネート等の芳香族イソシアネート、イソホロンジイソシアネート等の脂環族イソシアネート、ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート等の脂肪族イソシアネート等が挙げられる。 The isocyanate-based cross-linking agent refers to a compound having two or more isocyanate groups (including an isocyanate-regenerating functional group in which the isocyanate group is temporarily protected by a blocking agent or quantification) in one molecule. Examples of the isocyanate-based crosslinking agent include aromatic isocyanates such as tolylene diisocyanate and xylene diisocyanate, alicyclic isocyanates such as isophorone diisocyanate, and aliphatic isocyanates such as hexamethylene diisocyanate.
 より具体的には、例えば、ブチレンジイソシアネート、ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート等の低級脂肪族ポリイソシアネート類、シクロペンチレンジイソシアネート、シクロヘキシレンジイソシアネート、イソホロンジイソシアネート等の脂環族イソシアネート類、2,4-トリレンジイソシアネート、4,4’-ジフェニルメタンジイソシアネート、キシリレンジイソシアネート、ポリメチレンポリフェニルイソシアネート等の芳香族ジイソシアネート類、トリメチロールプロパン/トリレンジイソシアネート3量体付加物(商品名:コロネートL、日本ポリウレタン工業(株)製)、トリメチロールプロパン/ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート3量体付加物(商品名:コロネートHL、日本ポリウレタン工業(株)製)、ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネートのイソシアヌレート体(商品名:コロネートHX、日本ポリウレタン工業(株)製)等のイソシアネート付加物、キシリレンジイソシアネートのトリメチロールプロパン付加物(商品名:D110N、三井化学(株)製)、ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネートのトリメチロールプロパン付加物(商品名:D160N、三井化学(株)製);ポリエーテルポリイソシアネート、ポリエステルポリイソシアネート、ならびにこれらと各種のポリオールとの付加物、イソシアヌレート結合、ビューレット結合、アロファネート結合等で多官能化したポリイソシアネート等を挙げることができる。 More specifically, for example, lower aliphatic polyisocyanates such as butylene diisocyanate and hexamethylene diisocyanate, alicyclic isocyanates such as cyclopentylene diisocyanate, cyclohexylene diisocyanate and isophorone diisocyanate, 2,4-tolylene diisocyanate, Aromatic diisocyanates such as 4,4'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, xylylene diisocyanate, polymethylene polyphenyl isocyanate, trimethylolpropane / tolylene diisocyanate trimer adduct (trade name: Coronate L, manufactured by Nippon Polyurethane Industry Co., Ltd.) ), Trimethylolpropane / hexamethylene diisocyanate trimer adduct (trade name: Coronate HL, manufactured by Nippon Polyurethane Industry Co., Ltd.), hexamethyle Isocyanurate of diisocyanate (trade name: Coronate HX, manufactured by Nippon Polyurethane Industry Co., Ltd.) and the like, trimethylolpropane adduct of xylylene diisocyanate (trade name: D110N, manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals, Inc.), hexa Trimethylolpropane adduct of methylene diisocyanate (trade name: D160N, manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals); polyether polyisocyanate, polyester polyisocyanate, and adducts of these with various polyols, isocyanurate bond, burette bond, Examples thereof include polyisocyanates polyfunctionalized with allophanate bonds.
 (その他の添加剤)
 本発明の粘着剤組成物には、前記成分の他に、用途に応じて、適宜な添加剤が含まれていてもよい。例えば、粘着付与剤(例えば、ロジン誘導体樹脂、ポリテルペン樹脂、石油樹脂、油溶性フェノール樹脂等からなる常温で固体、半固体、あるいは液状のもの);中空ガラスバルーン等の充填剤;可塑剤;老化防止剤;酸化防止剤;光安定剤(HALS)等が挙げられる。
(Other additives)
The pressure-sensitive adhesive composition of the present invention may contain appropriate additives in addition to the above components depending on the application. For example, tackifiers (for example, rosin derivative resins, polyterpene resins, petroleum resins, oil-soluble phenol resins, etc., solid, semi-solid, or liquid at room temperature); fillers such as hollow glass balloons; plasticizers; aging An antioxidant; an antioxidant; a light stabilizer (HALS) and the like.
 本発明において、前記粘着剤組成物は、基材上に塗布等する作業に適した粘度に調整するのが好ましい。粘着剤組成物の粘度の調整は、例えば、増粘性添加剤等の各種ポリマーや多官能性モノマー等の添加や、粘着剤組成物中のモノマー成分を部分重合させることにより行う。なお、当該部分重合は、増粘性添加剤等の各種ポリマーや多官能性モノマー等を添加する前に行っても良く、その後に行っても良い。上記粘着剤組成物の粘度は添加剤の量等によって変わるため、粘着剤組成物中のモノマー成分を部分重合させる場合の重合率は、一意に決めることはできないが、目安としては20%以下程度であることが好ましく、3~20%程度がより好ましく、5~15%程度がさらに好ましい。20%を超えると粘度が高くなりすぎるため、基材へ塗布が難しくなる。 In the present invention, it is preferable that the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is adjusted to a viscosity suitable for work such as coating on a substrate. Adjustment of the viscosity of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is performed, for example, by adding various polymers such as thickening additives, polyfunctional monomers, or the like, or by partially polymerizing the monomer components in the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition. The partial polymerization may be performed before or after adding various polymers such as thickening additives, polyfunctional monomers, and the like. Since the viscosity of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition varies depending on the amount of the additive and the like, the polymerization rate when the monomer component in the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is partially polymerized cannot be uniquely determined, but as a guideline, it is about 20% or less. It is preferably about 3 to 20%, more preferably about 5 to 15%. If it exceeds 20%, the viscosity becomes too high, so that it is difficult to apply to the substrate.
 (粘着剤層の形成方法)
 粘着剤層の形成方法としては、特に限定されるものではなく、通常本分野において用いられる方法により形成することができる。具体的には、前記粘着剤組成物を基材の少なくとも片面に塗工し、当該粘着剤組成物から形成される塗布膜を乾燥して形成するか、又は、紫外線等の活性エネルギー線を照射して形成することができる。また、前記基材に形成した粘着剤層を、偏光フィルム等に転写することもできる。
(Method for forming pressure-sensitive adhesive layer)
The method for forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is not particularly limited, and can be formed by a method usually used in this field. Specifically, the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is applied to at least one surface of the substrate, and a coating film formed from the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is formed by drying, or irradiated with active energy rays such as ultraviolet rays. Can be formed. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed on the substrate can be transferred to a polarizing film or the like.
 前記基材としては、特に限定されるものではなく、例えば、離型フィルム、透明樹脂フィルム基材等の各種基材や、後述する偏光フィルムも基材として好適に用いることができる。 The substrate is not particularly limited, and for example, various substrates such as a release film and a transparent resin film substrate, and a polarizing film described later can also be suitably used as the substrate.
 前記離型フィルムの構成材料としては、例えば、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリエステルフィルム等の樹脂フィルム、紙、布、不織布等の多孔質材料、ネット、発泡シート、金属箔、及びこれらのラミネート体等の適宜な薄葉体等を挙げることができるが、表面平滑性に優れる点から樹脂フィルムが好適に用いられる。 Examples of the constituent material of the release film include resin films such as polyethylene, polypropylene, polyethylene terephthalate, and polyester films, porous materials such as paper, cloth, and nonwoven fabric, nets, foam sheets, metal foils, and laminates thereof. Suitable thin leaf bodies and the like can be mentioned, but a resin film is suitably used from the viewpoint of excellent surface smoothness.
 その樹脂フィルムとしては、例えば、ポリエチレンフィルム、ポリプロピレンフィルム、ポリブテンフィルム、ポリブタジエンフィルム、ポリメチルペンテンフィルム、ポリ塩化ビニルフィルム、塩化ビニル共重合体フィルム、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、ポリブチレンテレフタレートフィルム、ポリウレタンフィルム、エチレン-酢酸ビニル共重合体フィルム等が挙げられる。 Examples of the resin film include polyethylene film, polypropylene film, polybutene film, polybutadiene film, polymethylpentene film, polyvinyl chloride film, vinyl chloride copolymer film, polyethylene terephthalate film, polybutylene terephthalate film, polyurethane film, and ethylene. -Vinyl acetate copolymer film and the like.
 前記離型フィルムの厚さは、通常5~200μmであり、好ましくは5~100μm程度である。前記離型フィルムには、必要に応じて、シリコーン系、フッ素系、長鎖アルキル系もしくは脂肪酸アミド系の離型剤、シリカ粉等による離型及び防汚処理や、塗布型、練り込み型、蒸着型等の帯電防止処理をすることもできる。特に、前記離型フィルムの表面にシリコーン処理、長鎖アルキル処理、フッ素処理等の剥離処理を適宜行うことにより、前記粘着剤層からの剥離性をより高めることができる。 The thickness of the release film is usually 5 to 200 μm, preferably about 5 to 100 μm. For the release film, if necessary, release agent and antifouling treatment with silicone-based, fluorine-based, long-chain alkyl-based or fatty acid amide-based release agent, silica powder, etc., coating type, kneading type, An antistatic treatment such as a vapor deposition type can also be performed. In particular, the release property from the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be further improved by appropriately performing a release treatment such as silicone treatment, long-chain alkyl treatment, or fluorine treatment on the surface of the release film.
 前記透明樹脂フィルム基材としては、特に制限されないが、透明性を有する各種の樹脂フィルムが用いられる。当該樹脂フィルムは1層のフィルムにより形成されている。例えば、その材料として、ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリエチレンナフタレート等のポリエステル系樹脂、アセテート系樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン系樹脂、ポリカーボネート系樹脂、ポリアミド系樹脂、ポリイミド系樹脂、ポリオレフィン系樹脂、(メタ)アクリル系樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニル系樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニリデン系樹脂、ポリスチレン系樹脂、ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂、ポリアリレート系樹脂、ポリフェニレンサルファイド系樹脂等が挙げられる。これらの中で特に好ましいのは、ポリエステル系樹脂、ポリイミド系樹脂及びポリエーテルスルホン系樹脂である。 The transparent resin film substrate is not particularly limited, and various resin films having transparency are used. The resin film is formed of a single layer film. For example, the materials include polyester resins such as polyethylene terephthalate and polyethylene naphthalate, acetate resins, polyethersulfone resins, polycarbonate resins, polyamide resins, polyimide resins, polyolefin resins, (meth) acrylic resins. , Polyvinyl chloride resin, polyvinylidene chloride resin, polystyrene resin, polyvinyl alcohol resin, polyarylate resin, polyphenylene sulfide resin, and the like. Of these, polyester resins, polyimide resins and polyethersulfone resins are particularly preferable.
 前記フィルム基材の厚さは、15~200μmであることが好ましく、25~188μmであることがより好ましい。 The thickness of the film substrate is preferably 15 to 200 μm, and more preferably 25 to 188 μm.
 上記粘着剤組成物を上記基材上に塗布する方法は、ロールコート、キスロールコート、グラビアコート、リバースコート、ロールブラッシュ、スプレーコート、ディップロールコート、バーコート、ナイフコート、エアーナイフコート、カーテンコート、リップコート、ダイコーター等公知適宜な方法を用いることができ、特に制限されない。 The pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is applied onto the substrate by roll coating, kiss roll coating, gravure coating, reverse coating, roll brushing, spray coating, dip roll coating, bar coating, knife coating, air knife coating, curtain. A known and appropriate method such as a coat, a lip coat, or a die coater can be used and is not particularly limited.
 前記粘着剤層は、前記粘着剤組成物から形成される塗布膜を乾燥して形成する場合、その乾燥条件(温度、時間)は、特に限定されるものではなく、粘着剤組成物の組成、濃度等により適宜設定することができるが、例えば、60~170℃程度、好ましくは60~150℃で、1~60分間、好ましくは2~30分間である。 When the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is formed by drying a coating film formed from the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, the drying conditions (temperature, time) are not particularly limited, and the composition of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, The concentration can be appropriately set depending on the concentration or the like, and is, for example, about 60 to 170 ° C., preferably 60 to 150 ° C., for 1 to 60 minutes, preferably 2 to 30 minutes.
 前記粘着剤組成物が紫外線硬化型粘着剤組成物であって、当該紫外線硬化型粘着剤組成物から形成される塗布膜に紫外線を照射して形成する場合、照射する紫外線の照度は、5mW/cm以上が好ましい。当該紫外線の照度が5mW/cm未満であると、重合反応時間が長くなり、生産性に劣ることがある。なお、当該紫外線の照度は200mW/cm以下が好ましい。当該紫外線の照度が200mW/cmを超えると、光重合開始剤が急激に消費されるため、重合体の低分子量化が起こり、特に高温での保持力が低下することがある。また、紫外線の積算光量は、100mJ/cm~5000mJ/cmであることが好ましい。 When the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is an ultraviolet curable pressure-sensitive adhesive composition and is formed by irradiating a coating film formed from the ultraviolet-curable pressure-sensitive adhesive composition with ultraviolet rays, the illuminance of the irradiated ultraviolet rays is 5 mW / cm 2 or more is preferable. When the illuminance of the ultraviolet light is less than 5 mW / cm 2 , the polymerization reaction time becomes long and the productivity may be inferior. The illuminance of the ultraviolet light is preferably 200 mW / cm 2 or less. When the illuminance of the ultraviolet rays exceeds 200 mW / cm 2 , the photopolymerization initiator is consumed rapidly, so that the polymer has a low molecular weight, and the holding power particularly at high temperatures may be reduced. Further, the integrated quantity of ultraviolet light is preferably 100mJ / cm 2 ~ 5000mJ / cm 2.
 本発明に用いられる紫外線ランプは、特に限定されるものではないが、LEDランプが好ましい。LEDランプは他の紫外線ランプに比べて放出熱が低いランプであるため、粘着剤層の重合中の温度を抑えることができる。そのため、重合体の低分子量化を防ぐことができ、粘着剤層の凝集力の低下を防ぐとともに粘着シートとした場合の高温における保持力を高めることができる。また、複数の紫外線ランプを組み合わせることも可能である。また、紫外線を間欠的に照射し、紫外線を照射する明期と紫外線を照射しない暗期とを設けることもできる。 The ultraviolet lamp used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but an LED lamp is preferable. Since the LED lamp has a lower emission heat than other ultraviolet lamps, the temperature during polymerization of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be suppressed. Therefore, the molecular weight reduction of the polymer can be prevented, the cohesive strength of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be prevented from being lowered, and the holding power at a high temperature when the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is used can be increased. It is also possible to combine a plurality of ultraviolet lamps. Further, it is possible to intermittently irradiate ultraviolet rays, and to provide a light period in which ultraviolet rays are irradiated and a dark period in which ultraviolet rays are not irradiated.
 本発明において、紫外線硬化型粘着剤組成物中のモノマー成分の最終的な重合率は90%以上が好ましく、95%以上がより好ましく、98%以上が更に好ましい。 In the present invention, the final polymerization rate of the monomer component in the ultraviolet curable pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is preferably 90% or more, more preferably 95% or more, and still more preferably 98% or more.
 本発明において、上記紫外線硬化型粘着剤組成物に照射する紫外線のピーク波長は、200~500nmの範囲内にあることが好ましく、300~450nmの範囲内にあることがより好ましい。紫外線のピーク波長が500nmを超えると、光重合開始剤が分解せず、重合反応が開始しないことがある。また、紫外線のピーク波長が200nm未満であると、ポリマー鎖が切断され、接着特性が低下することがある。 In the present invention, the peak wavelength of ultraviolet rays irradiated to the ultraviolet curable pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is preferably in the range of 200 to 500 nm, and more preferably in the range of 300 to 450 nm. When the peak wavelength of ultraviolet rays exceeds 500 nm, the photopolymerization initiator may not be decomposed and the polymerization reaction may not start. On the other hand, if the peak wavelength of the ultraviolet light is less than 200 nm, the polymer chain may be cut and the adhesive properties may be deteriorated.
 反応は空気中の酸素に阻害されるため、酸素を遮断するために、紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤組成物から形成される塗布膜上に離型フィルム等を形成したり、光重合反応を窒素雰囲気下で行ったりすることが好ましい。離型フィルムとしては、前述のものを挙げることができる。なお、離型フィルムを用いた場合、当該離型フィルムはそのまま粘着剤層付き偏光フィルムのセパレータとして用いることができる。 Since the reaction is inhibited by oxygen in the air, a release film or the like is formed on the coating film formed from the ultraviolet curable acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition to block oxygen, or the photopolymerization reaction is performed by nitrogen. It is preferable to carry out in an atmosphere. The above-mentioned thing can be mentioned as a release film. In addition, when a release film is used, the said release film can be used as a separator of a polarizing film with an adhesive layer as it is.
 また、本発明で用いる紫外線硬化型粘着剤組成物が、色素化合物(さらには紫外線吸収剤)を含む場合、アルキル(メタ)アクリレートを含有するモノマー成分と前記光重合開始剤(B)(「前添加重合開始剤」ということもある)を含む組成物に紫外線を照射して、前記モノマー成分の部分重合物を形成し、前記モノマー成分の部分重合物に、色素化合物(さらには紫外線吸収剤)、並びに波長400nm以上に吸収帯を有する光重合開始剤(A)(「後添加重合開始剤」ということもある)を添加して、紫外線硬化型粘着剤組成物を作製することが好ましい。部分重合物の重合率は、20%以下程度であることが好ましく、3~20%程度がより好ましく、5~15%程度がさらに好ましい。紫外線の照射条件は前述の通りである。 Moreover, when the ultraviolet curable adhesive composition used by this invention contains a pigment | dye compound (further ultraviolet absorber), the monomer component containing alkyl (meth) acrylate and the said photoinitiator (B) ("Previous The composition containing the “addition polymerization initiator” may be irradiated with ultraviolet rays to form a partial polymer of the monomer component, and the partial polymer of the monomer component is converted into a dye compound (and an ultraviolet absorber). In addition, it is preferable to add a photopolymerization initiator (A) having an absorption band at a wavelength of 400 nm or more (sometimes referred to as “post-addition polymerization initiator”) to prepare an ultraviolet curable pressure-sensitive adhesive composition. The polymerization rate of the partially polymerized product is preferably about 20% or less, more preferably about 3 to 20%, and further preferably about 5 to 15%. The ultraviolet irradiation conditions are as described above.
 前述の通り、色素化合物(さらには紫外線吸収剤)を含有する紫外線硬化型粘着剤組成物から粘着剤層を形成する場合、前述のような2段階で重合することにより、モノマー成分の重合率を上げることができ、かつ、最終的に作製された粘着剤層の紫外線吸収機能を向上することができる。 As described above, when the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is formed from the ultraviolet curable pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing the dye compound (and also the ultraviolet absorber), the polymerization rate of the monomer component is increased by polymerizing in two steps as described above. In addition, the ultraviolet absorbing function of the finally produced pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be improved.
 粘着剤層の厚さは、12μm以上であることが好ましく、50μm以上であることがより好ましく、100μm以上であることがさらに好ましく、150μm以上であることが特に好ましい。粘着剤層の厚さの上限値は特に限定されないが、1mm以下であることが好ましい。粘着剤層の厚さが1mmを超えると紫外線の透過が困難になり、モノマー成分の重合に時間がかかる他、加工性や工程での巻き取り、搬送性に問題を生じ、生産性が劣る場合があるため、好ましくない。 The thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is preferably 12 μm or more, more preferably 50 μm or more, further preferably 100 μm or more, and particularly preferably 150 μm or more. Although the upper limit of the thickness of an adhesive layer is not specifically limited, It is preferable that it is 1 mm or less. When the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer exceeds 1 mm, it becomes difficult to transmit ultraviolet rays, and it takes time to polymerize the monomer component, and causes problems in workability, winding in the process, and transportability, resulting in poor productivity. This is not preferable.
 本発明の粘着剤層のゲル分率は、特に限定されるものではないが、35%以上であることが好ましく、50%以上であることがより好ましく、75%以上であることがさらに好ましく、85%以上であることが特に好ましい。粘着剤層のゲル分率が小さい場合には、加工性やハンドリング性に問題が出る場合がある。 The gel fraction of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer of the present invention is not particularly limited, but is preferably 35% or more, more preferably 50% or more, and further preferably 75% or more, It is particularly preferably 85% or more. When the gel fraction of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is small, there may be a problem in workability and handling properties.
 前記粘着剤層は、厚さ25μmで測定したヘイズ値が2%以下であることが好ましく、0~1.5%であることがより好ましく、0~1.0%であることがさらに好ましい。ヘイズが前記範囲にあることで、粘着剤層が高い透明性を有するため好ましい。 The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer preferably has a haze value measured at a thickness of 25 μm of 2% or less, more preferably from 0 to 1.5%, and even more preferably from 0 to 1.0%. It is preferable that the haze is in the above range because the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer has high transparency.
 前記粘着剤層が露出する場合には、実用に供されるまで離型フィルムで粘着剤層を保護してもよい。 When the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is exposed, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be protected with a release film until practical use.
 (1-2)偏光フィルム
 前記偏光フィルムは、偏光子の少なくとも一方の面に透明保護フィルムを有するものを挙げることができる。
(1-2) Polarizing film Examples of the polarizing film include those having a transparent protective film on at least one surface of a polarizer.
 (1-2-1)偏光子4
 偏光子は、特に限定されず、各種のものを使用できる。偏光子としては、例えば、ポリビニルアルコール系フィルム、部分ホルマール化ポリビニルアルコール系フィルム、エチレン・酢酸ビニル共重合体系部分ケン化フィルム等の親水性高分子フィルムに、ヨウ素や二色性染料の二色性物質を吸着させて一軸延伸したもの、ポリビニルアルコールの脱水処理物やポリ塩化ビニルの脱塩酸処理物等ポリエン系配向フィルム等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、ポリビニルアルコール系フィルムとヨウ素等の二色性物質からなる偏光子が好適である。これらの偏光子の厚さは特に制限されないが、一般的に5~80μm程度である。
(1-2-1) Polarizer 4
The polarizer is not particularly limited, and various types can be used. Examples of polarizers include dichroic iodine and dichroic dyes on hydrophilic polymer films such as polyvinyl alcohol films, partially formalized polyvinyl alcohol films, and ethylene / vinyl acetate copolymer partially saponified films. Examples thereof include polyene-based oriented films such as those obtained by adsorbing substances and uniaxially stretched, polyvinyl alcohol dehydrated products and polyvinyl chloride dehydrochlorinated products. Among these, a polarizer composed of a polyvinyl alcohol film and a dichroic substance such as iodine is preferable. The thickness of these polarizers is not particularly limited, but is generally about 5 to 80 μm.
 ポリビニルアルコール系フィルムをヨウ素で染色し一軸延伸した偏光子は、例えば、ポリビニルアルコールをヨウ素の水溶液に浸漬することによって染色し、元長の3~7倍に延伸することで作製することができる。必要に応じてホウ酸や硫酸亜鉛、塩化亜鉛等を含んでいても良いヨウ化カリウム等の水溶液に浸漬することもできる。さらに必要に応じて染色前にポリビニルアルコール系フィルムを水に浸漬して水洗してもよい。ポリビニルアルコール系フィルムを水洗することでポリビニルアルコール系フィルム表面の汚れやブロッキング防止剤を洗浄することができるほかに、ポリビニルアルコール系フィルムを膨潤させることで染色のムラ等の不均一を防止する効果もある。延伸はヨウ素で染色した後に行っても良いし、染色しながら延伸しても良いし、また延伸してからヨウ素で染色しても良い。ホウ酸やヨウ化カリウム等の水溶液や水浴中でも延伸することができる。 A polarizer obtained by dyeing a polyvinyl alcohol film with iodine and uniaxially stretching it can be produced, for example, by dyeing polyvinyl alcohol in an aqueous iodine solution and stretching it 3 to 7 times the original length. If necessary, it can be immersed in an aqueous solution of potassium iodide or the like which may contain boric acid, zinc sulfate, zinc chloride or the like. Further, if necessary, the polyvinyl alcohol film may be immersed in water and washed before dyeing. In addition to washing the polyvinyl alcohol film surface with stains and antiblocking agents by washing the polyvinyl alcohol film with water, the polyvinyl alcohol film is also swollen to prevent unevenness such as uneven coloring. is there. Stretching may be performed after dyeing with iodine, may be performed while dyeing, or may be dyed with iodine after stretching. The film can be stretched even in an aqueous solution of boric acid or potassium iodide or in a water bath.
 また、本発明においては、厚さが10μm以下の薄型偏光子も用いることができる。薄型化の観点から言えば当該厚さは1~7μmであるのが好ましい。このような薄型の偏光子は、厚みムラが少なく、視認性が優れており、また寸法変化が少ないため耐久性に優れ、さらには偏光フィルムとしての厚さも薄型化が図れる点が好ましい。 In the present invention, a thin polarizer having a thickness of 10 μm or less can also be used. From the viewpoint of thinning, the thickness is preferably 1 to 7 μm. Such a thin polarizer is preferable in that the thickness unevenness is small, the visibility is excellent, the dimensional change is small, the durability is excellent, and the thickness of the polarizing film can be reduced.
 薄型の偏光子としては、代表的には、特開昭51-069644号公報や特開2000-338329号公報や、国際公開第2010/100917号パンフレット、国際公開第2010/100917号パンフレット、又は特許4751481号明細書や特開2012-073563号公報に記載されている薄型偏光膜を挙げることができる。これら薄型偏光膜は、ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂(以下、PVA系樹脂ともいう)層と延伸用樹脂基材を積層体の状態で延伸する工程と染色する工程を含む製法により得ることができる。この製法であれば、PVA系樹脂層が薄くても、延伸用樹脂基材に支持されていることにより延伸による破断等の不具合なく延伸することが可能となる。 As the thin polarizer, typically, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 51-069644, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-338329, International Publication No. 2010/100917, International Publication No. 2010/100917, or a patent. The thin polarizing film described in the specification of 4751481 and Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-0753563 can be mentioned. These thin polarizing films can be obtained by a production method including a step of stretching and dyeing a polyvinyl alcohol-based resin (hereinafter also referred to as PVA-based resin) layer and a stretching resin substrate in the state of a laminate. With this production method, even if the PVA-based resin layer is thin, it can be stretched without problems such as breakage due to stretching by being supported by the stretching resin substrate.
 前記薄型偏光膜としては、積層体の状態で延伸する工程と染色する工程を含む製法の中でも、高倍率に延伸できて偏光性能を向上させることのできる点で、国際公開第2010/100917号パンフレット、国際公開第2010/100917号パンフレット、又は特許4751481号明細書や特開2012-073563号公報に記載のあるようなホウ酸水溶液中で延伸する工程を含む製法で得られるものが好ましく、特に特許4751481号明細書や特開2012-073563号公報に記載のあるホウ酸水溶液中で延伸する前に補助的に空中延伸する工程を含む製法により得られるものが好ましい。 As the thin polarizing film, International Publication No. 2010/100917 pamphlet in that it can be stretched at a high magnification and the polarization performance can be improved among the production methods including the step of stretching in the state of a laminate and the step of dyeing. In particular, those obtained by a production method including a step of stretching in an aqueous boric acid solution as described in International Publication No. 2010/100917 pamphlet or Japanese Patent No. 47514881 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-0753563 are preferable. Those obtained by a production method including a step of stretching in the air before stretching in a boric acid aqueous solution described in the specification of 4751481 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-0753563 are preferable.
 (1-2-2)透明保護フィルム3
 本発明で用いる透明保護フィルム3は、偏光子4の視認側に配置されるものであるが、偏光子4の有機ELパネル側にも透明保護フィルムを配置することができる。
(1-2-2) Transparent protective film 3
Although the transparent protective film 3 used by this invention is arrange | positioned at the visual recognition side of the polarizer 4, a transparent protective film can also be arrange | positioned also at the organic EL panel side of the polarizer 4. FIG.
 透明保護フィルムについては、従来から用いられているものを適宜用いることができる。具体的には、透明性、機械的強度、熱安定性、水分遮断性、等方性等に優れる材料(ベースポリマー)から形成される透明保護フィルムが好ましく、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレートやポリエチレンナフタレート等のポリエステル系ポリマー、ジアセチルセルロースやトリアセチルセルロース等のセルロース系ポリマー、ポリメチルメタクリレート等のアクリル系ポリマー、ポリスチレンやアクリロニトリル・スチレン共重合体(AS樹脂)等のスチレン系ポリマー、ポリカーボネート系ポリマー等が挙げられる。また、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、シクロ系ないしはノルボルネン構造を有するポリオレフィン、エチレン・プロピレン共重合体等のポリオレフィン系ポリマー、塩化ビニル系ポリマー、ナイロンや芳香族ポリアミド等のアミド系ポリマー、イミド系ポリマー、スルホン系ポリマー、ポリエーテルスルホン系ポリマー、ポリエーテルエーテルケトン系ポリマー、ポリフェニレンスルフィド系ポリマー、ビニルアルコール系ポリマー、塩化ビニリデン系ポリマー、ビニルブチラール系ポリマー、アリレート系ポリマー、ポリオキシメチレン系ポリマー、エポキシ系ポリマー、又は、前記ポリマーのブレンド物等も前記透明保護フィルムを形成するポリマーの例として挙げられる。透明保護フィルムは、アクリル系、ウレタン系、アクリルウレタン系、エポキシ系、シリコーン系等の熱硬化型、紫外線硬化型の樹脂の硬化層として形成することもできる。 As the transparent protective film, those conventionally used can be appropriately used. Specifically, a transparent protective film formed from a material (base polymer) excellent in transparency, mechanical strength, thermal stability, moisture barrier property, isotropy, etc. is preferable. For example, polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, etc. Polyester polymers, cellulose polymers such as diacetyl cellulose and triacetyl cellulose, acrylic polymers such as polymethyl methacrylate, styrene polymers such as polystyrene and acrylonitrile / styrene copolymer (AS resin), polycarbonate polymers, etc. It is done. In addition, polyethylene, polypropylene, polyolefins having a cyclo or norbornene structure, polyolefin polymers such as ethylene / propylene copolymers, vinyl chloride polymers, amide polymers such as nylon and aromatic polyamide, imide polymers, sulfone polymers , Polyether sulfone polymer, polyether ether ketone polymer, polyphenylene sulfide polymer, vinyl alcohol polymer, vinylidene chloride polymer, vinyl butyral polymer, arylate polymer, polyoxymethylene polymer, epoxy polymer, or Examples of the polymer that forms the transparent protective film include polymer blends. The transparent protective film can also be formed as a cured layer of thermosetting or ultraviolet curable resin such as acrylic, urethane, acrylurethane, epoxy, and silicone.
 透明保護フィルムの厚さは、適宜に決定しうるが、一般には強度や取扱性等の作業性、薄膜性等の点より1~500μm程度である。 The thickness of the transparent protective film can be appropriately determined, but is generally about 1 to 500 μm from the viewpoints of workability such as strength and handleability, and thin film properties.
 (1-2-3)接着剤層
 前記偏光子と透明保護フィルムとは、水系接着剤等を介して密着することが好ましい。水系接着剤としては、イソシアネート系接着剤、ポリビニルアルコール系接着剤、ゼラチン系接着剤、ビニル系ラテックス系、水系ポリウレタン、水系ポリエステル等を例示できる。上記の他、偏光子と透明保護フィルムとの接着剤としては、紫外硬化型接着剤、電子線硬化型接着剤等が挙げられる。電子線硬化型偏光フィルム用接着剤は、上記各種の視認側透明保護フィルムに対して、好適な接着性を示す。また本発明で用いる接着剤には、金属化合物フィラーを含有させることができる。
(1-2-3) Adhesive Layer The polarizer and the transparent protective film are preferably in close contact with each other through an aqueous adhesive or the like. Examples of the water-based adhesive include an isocyanate-based adhesive, a polyvinyl alcohol-based adhesive, a gelatin-based adhesive, a vinyl-based latex, a water-based polyurethane, and a water-based polyester. In addition to the above, examples of the adhesive between the polarizer and the transparent protective film include an ultraviolet curable adhesive and an electron beam curable adhesive. The electron beam curable polarizing film adhesive exhibits suitable adhesiveness with respect to the various viewing-side transparent protective films. The adhesive used in the present invention can contain a metal compound filler.
 (1-2-4)表面処理層:機能層
 前記透明保護フィルムの偏光子を接着させない面には、ハードコート層や反射防止層、スティッキング防止層等の機能層を形成することができ、また、拡散ないしアンチグレアを目的とした処理を施したものであっても良い。
(1-2-4) Surface treatment layer: functional layer A functional layer such as a hard coat layer, an antireflection layer, or an antisticking layer can be formed on the surface of the transparent protective film to which the polarizer is not adhered. It may be subjected to a treatment for diffusion or anti-glare.
 前記ハードコート層としては、例えば、メラミン系樹脂、ウレタン系樹脂、アルキド系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、シリコーン系樹脂等をベースポリマーとする硬化型樹脂からなる硬化被膜が、好ましく用いられる。前記硬化型樹脂は、分子中に少なくとも一つの重合性二重結合を有する官能基を有する活性エネルギー線硬化型化合物として用いることができる。前記ハードコート層の厚みとしては、0.1~30μmが好ましい。 As the hard coat layer, for example, a cured film made of a curable resin having a base polymer of melamine resin, urethane resin, alkyd resin, acrylic resin, silicone resin, or the like is preferably used. The curable resin can be used as an active energy ray-curable compound having a functional group having at least one polymerizable double bond in the molecule. The thickness of the hard coat layer is preferably 0.1 to 30 μm.
 前記機能層に光安定剤(HALS)、酸化防止剤等を添加することもできる。 It is also possible to add a light stabilizer (HALS), an antioxidant or the like to the functional layer.
 (1-3)位相差フィルム5
 前記位相差フィルムは、遅相軸方向の屈折率をnx、面内の進相軸方向の屈折率をny、厚み方向の屈折率をnzとした場合に、nx=ny>nz、nx>ny>nz、nx>ny=nz、nx>nz>ny、nz=nx>ny、nz>nx>ny、nz>nx=ny、の関係を満足するものが、各種用途に応じて選択して用いられる。なお、nx=nyとは、nxとnyが完全に同一である場合だけでなく、実質的にnxとnyが同じ場合も含む。また、ny=nzとは、nyとnzが完全に同一である場合だけでなく、実質的にnyとnzが同じ場合も含む。
(1-3) Retardation film 5
When the refractive index in the slow axis direction is nx, the in-plane fast axis direction refractive index is ny, and the thickness direction refractive index is nz, nx = ny> nz, nx> ny. > Nz, nx> ny = nz, nx>nz> ny, nz = nx> ny, nz>nx> ny, nz> nx = ny, satisfying the relationship of various types are selected and used. It is done. Note that nx = ny includes not only the case where nx and ny are completely the same, but also the case where nx and ny are substantially the same. Moreover, ny = nz includes not only the case where ny and nz are completely the same, but also the case where ny and nz are substantially the same.
 本発明においては、有機EL表示装置に用いるため、前記位相差フィルムは、正面レターデーションを1/4波長(約100~170nm)とした1/4波長板であることが好ましい。前記偏光フィルムと1/4波長板を積層することで、有機EL表示装置の反射防止用の円偏光フィルムとして機能するため好ましい。 In the present invention, for use in an organic EL display device, the retardation film is preferably a ¼ wavelength plate with a front retardation of ¼ wavelength (about 100 to 170 nm). Lamination of the polarizing film and the quarter wave plate is preferable because it functions as a circularly polarizing film for preventing reflection of an organic EL display device.
 すなわち、この有機EL表示装置に入射する外部光は、偏光フィルムにより直線偏光成分のみが透過する。この直線偏光は位相差フィルムにより一般に楕円偏光となるが、とくに位相差板が1/4波長板で、しかも位相差フィルムとの偏光方向のなす角がπ/4のときには円偏光となる。 That is, only the linearly polarized light component of the external light incident on the organic EL display device is transmitted through the polarizing film. This linearly polarized light is generally elliptically polarized light by the retardation film, but becomes circularly polarized light particularly when the retardation film is a quarter wavelength plate and the angle formed by the polarization direction with the retardation film is π / 4.
 この円偏光は、有機ELパネル中の透明基板、透明電極、有機薄膜を透過し、金属電極で反射して、再び有機薄膜、透明電極、透明基板を透過して、位相差フィルムで再び直線偏光となる。そして、この直線偏光は、偏光フィルムの偏光方向と直交しているので、偏光板を透過できない。その結果、金属電極の鏡面を完全に遮蔽することができる。 This circularly polarized light is transmitted through the transparent substrate, transparent electrode and organic thin film in the organic EL panel, reflected by the metal electrode, again transmitted through the organic thin film, transparent electrode and transparent substrate, and again linearly polarized by the retardation film. It becomes. And since this linearly polarized light is orthogonal to the polarization direction of a polarizing film, it cannot permeate | transmit a polarizing plate. As a result, the mirror surface of the metal electrode can be completely shielded.
 位相差フィルムとしては、高分子素材を一軸または二軸延伸処理してなる複屈折性フィルム、液晶ポリマーの配向フィルム、液晶ポリマーの配向層をフィルムにて支持したものなどが挙げられる。 Examples of the retardation film include a birefringent film obtained by uniaxially or biaxially stretching a polymer material, a liquid crystal polymer alignment film, and a liquid crystal polymer alignment layer supported by the film.
 高分子素材(ベースポリマー)としては、例えば、ポリビニルアルコール、ポリビニルブチラール、ポリメチルビニルエーテル、ポリヒドロキシエチルアクリレート、ヒドロキシエチルセルロース、ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース、メチルセルロース、ポリカーボネート、ポリアリレート、ポリスルホン、ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリエチレンナフタレート、ポリエーテルスルホン、ポリフェニレンスルファイド、ポリフェニレンオキサイド、ポリアリルスルホン、ポリアミド、ポリイミド、ポリオレフィン、ポリ塩化ビニル、セルロース系重合体、シクロオレフィン系樹脂、またはこれらの二元系、三元系各種共重合体、グラフト共重合体、ブレンド物などが挙げられる。これらの高分子素材は延伸等により配向物(延伸フィルム)となる。 Examples of the polymer material (base polymer) include polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl butyral, polymethyl vinyl ether, polyhydroxyethyl acrylate, hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, methyl cellulose, polycarbonate, polyarylate, polysulfone, polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, Polyethersulfone, polyphenylene sulfide, polyphenylene oxide, polyallylsulfone, polyamide, polyimide, polyolefin, polyvinyl chloride, cellulose polymer, cycloolefin resin, or a binary or ternary copolymer thereof, Examples include graft copolymers and blends. These polymer materials become an oriented product (stretched film) by stretching or the like.
 液晶ポリマー(ベースポリマー)としては、例えば、液晶配向性を付与する共役性の直線状原子団(メソゲン)がポリマーの主鎖や側鎖に導入された主鎖型や側鎖型の各種のものなどが挙げられる。主鎖型の液晶ポリマーの具体例としては、屈曲性を付与するスペーサ部でメソゲン基を結合した構造の、例えばネマチック配向性のポリエステル系液晶性ポリマー、ディスコティックポリマーやコレステリックポリマーなどが挙げられる。側鎖型の液晶ポリマーの具体例としては、ポリシロキサン、ポリアクリレート、ポリメタクリレート又はポリマロネートを主鎖骨格とし、側鎖として共役性の原子団からなるスペーサ部を介してネマチック配向付与性のパラ置換環状化合物単位からなるメソゲン部を有するものなどが挙げられる。これらの液晶ポリマーは、例えば、ガラス板上に形成したポリイミドやポリビニルアルコール等の薄膜の表面をラビング処理したもの、酸化ケイ素を斜方蒸着したものなどの配向処理面上に液晶性ポリマーの溶液を展開して熱処理することにより行われる。 Examples of the liquid crystal polymer (base polymer) include various main chain types and side chain types in which a conjugated linear atomic group (mesogen) imparting liquid crystal alignment is introduced into the main chain or side chain of the polymer. Etc. Specific examples of the main chain type liquid crystal polymer include a nematic alignment polyester liquid crystal polymer, a discotic polymer, and a cholesteric polymer having a structure in which a mesogenic group is bonded to a spacer portion that imparts flexibility. Specific examples of the side chain type liquid crystal polymer include polysiloxane, polyacrylate, polymethacrylate, or polymalonate as a main chain skeleton, and a nematic alignment-providing para-substitution through a spacer portion composed of a conjugated atomic group as a side chain. Examples thereof include those having a mesogenic part composed of a cyclic compound unit. These liquid crystal polymers are prepared by, for example, applying a solution of a liquid crystalline polymer on an alignment treatment surface such as a surface of a thin film such as polyimide or polyvinyl alcohol formed on a glass plate or an oblique deposition of silicon oxide. This is done by developing and heat treatment.
 (1-4)粘着剤層6、層間粘着剤層(又は接着剤層)
 本発明で用いる粘着剤層6(有機ELパネル側の粘着剤層)としては、層間粘着剤層(又は接着剤層)、前記粘接着剤層の粘着剤層と同様のものを挙げることができるが、その中でも、(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーをベースポリマーとする(メタ)アクリル系粘着剤組成物から形成されるアクリル系粘着剤層が好ましい。また、ゴム系ポリマーをベースポリマーとするゴム系粘着剤組成物から形成されるゴム粘着剤層を好ましく適用できる。また、粘着剤層の製造方法や好ましい態様等も同様のものを挙げることができる。
(1-4) Adhesive layer 6, interlayer adhesive layer (or adhesive layer)
Examples of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 6 (pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on the organic EL panel side) used in the present invention include an interlayer pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (or adhesive layer) and the same pressure-sensitive adhesive layer as the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. Among them, an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed from a (meth) acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition having a (meth) acrylic polymer as a base polymer is preferable. A rubber pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed from a rubber-based pressure-sensitive adhesive composition having a rubber-based polymer as a base polymer can be preferably applied. Moreover, the manufacturing method of a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, a preferable aspect, and the like can be exemplified.
 粘着剤層の厚みとしては、特に限定されるものではないが、10~75μm程度であることが好ましく、12~50μm程度であることがより好ましい。 The thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably about 10 to 75 μm, and more preferably about 12 to 50 μm.
 (1-5)その他の層
 前記(有機ELパネル側)透明保護フィルムとしては、透明保護フィルム3と同様のものを例示することができ、前記有機ELパネル側第1粘着剤層(又は接着剤層)としては、本明細書中のいかなる粘着剤層、接着剤層も好適に使用することができる。
(1-5) Other layers Examples of the (organic EL panel side) transparent protective film include those similar to the transparent protective film 3, and the organic EL panel side first pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (or adhesive) As the layer), any pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and adhesive layer in the present specification can be suitably used.
 ≪光学部材の透過率≫
 本発明の組成物から形成される光学部材(各層)の波長380nmにおける透過率は、15%以下であることが好ましく、10%以下であることがより好ましく、7%以下であることがさらに好ましく、3%以下であることが特に好ましい。波長380nmにおける透過率が前記範囲であることにより、入射する紫外線をより高度に遮断することができるため、有機EL素子の劣化を著しく抑制することができる。
≪Transmissivity of optical member≫
The transmittance at a wavelength of 380 nm of the optical member (each layer) formed from the composition of the present invention is preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less, and further preferably 7% or less. 3% or less is particularly preferable. Since the transmittance at a wavelength of 380 nm is in the above range, incident ultraviolet rays can be blocked to a higher degree, and thus the deterioration of the organic EL element can be remarkably suppressed.
 また本発明の組成物から形成される光学部材(各層)の波長400nmにおける透過率は、15%以下であることが好ましく、10%以下であることがより好ましく、7%以下であることがさらに好ましく、3%以下であることが特に好ましい。波長400nmにおける透過率が前記範囲であることにより、入射する紫外線をより高度に遮断することができるため、有機EL素子の劣化を著しく抑制することができる。 The transmittance at a wavelength of 400 nm of the optical member (each layer) formed from the composition of the present invention is preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less, and further preferably 7% or less. Preferably, it is particularly preferably 3% or less. Since the transmittance at a wavelength of 400 nm is in the above range, incident ultraviolet rays can be blocked to a higher degree, and thus the deterioration of the organic EL element can be remarkably suppressed.
 一方、本発明の組成物から形成される光学部材(各層)の波長440nmにおける透過率は、60%以上であることが好ましく、75%以上であることが好ましく、85%以上であることがより好ましい。波長440nmにおける透過率が前記範囲であることにより、有機EL素子の発光を十分に透過することができ、有機EL表示装置において十分な表示性能を確保できるため好ましい。 On the other hand, the transmittance at a wavelength of 440 nm of the optical member (each layer) formed from the composition of the present invention is preferably 60% or more, more preferably 75% or more, and more preferably 85% or more. preferable. When the transmittance at a wavelength of 440 nm is within the above range, it is preferable because the light emission of the organic EL element can be sufficiently transmitted and sufficient display performance can be secured in the organic EL display device.
 ≪光学積層体の透過率≫
 前記光学積層体の波長380nmにおける透過率が、9%以下であることが好ましく、7%以下であることがより好ましく、5%以下であることがさらに好ましく、3%以下であることが特に好ましい。波長380nmにおける透過率が前記範囲であることにより、入射する紫外線をより高度に遮断することができるため、有機EL素子の劣化を著しく抑制することができるため、好ましい。
≪Transmissivity of optical layered body≫
The transmittance at a wavelength of 380 nm of the optical layered body is preferably 9% or less, more preferably 7% or less, further preferably 5% or less, and particularly preferably 3% or less. . Since the transmittance at a wavelength of 380 nm is within the above range, it is preferable because incident ultraviolet rays can be blocked to a higher degree and deterioration of the organic EL element can be remarkably suppressed.
 また、前記光学積層体の波長400nmにおける透過率は、20%以下であることが好ましく、15%以下であることが好ましく、10%以下であることがより好ましい。波長400nmにおける透過率が前記範囲であることにより、入射する紫外線をより高度に遮断することができるため、有機EL素子の劣化を著しく抑制することができるため、好ましい。 The transmittance of the optical layered body at a wavelength of 400 nm is preferably 20% or less, preferably 15% or less, and more preferably 10% or less. When the transmittance at a wavelength of 400 nm is in the above range, it is preferable because incident ultraviolet rays can be blocked to a higher degree and deterioration of the organic EL element can be remarkably suppressed.
 また、前記光学積層体の波長440nmにおける透過率は、25%以上であることが好ましく、30%以上であることが好ましく、33%以上であることがより好ましい。波長440nmにおける透過率が前記範囲であることにより、有機EL素子の発光を十分に透過することができ、有機EL表示装置において十分な表示性能を確保できるため好ましい。 The transmittance of the optical laminate at a wavelength of 440 nm is preferably 25% or more, preferably 30% or more, and more preferably 33% or more. When the transmittance at a wavelength of 440 nm is within the above range, it is preferable because the light emission of the organic EL element can be sufficiently transmitted and sufficient display performance can be secured in the organic EL display device.
 ≪有機EL表示装置≫
 本発明の有機EL表示装置は、前記光学積層体1と、有機ELパネルを含むものであって、その他の層を含むこともできる。具体的には、図2に示すように、視認側から、カバー部材7/粘接着剤層2/保護フィルム3/偏光子4/位相差フィルム5/粘着剤層6/有機ELパネル8がこの順に積層された有機EL表示装置10が好ましく、カバー部材7/粘接着剤層2/(視認側)保護フィルム3/偏光子4/有機ELパネル側保護フィルム/有機ELパネル側第1粘着剤層(又は接着剤層)/位相差フィルム5/(有機ELパネル側第2)粘着剤層6/有機ELパネル8がこの順に積層された有機EL表示装置等も挙げることができる。また、これら以外にも、ハードコート層、防眩処理層、反射防止層等の機能層や、センサー層、またこれらを積層するための粘着剤層や接着剤層等を含む構成を挙げることができる。
≪Organic EL display device≫
The organic EL display device of the present invention includes the optical laminate 1 and an organic EL panel, and can also include other layers. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, from the viewing side, cover member 7 / adhesive layer 2 / protective film 3 / polarizer 4 / retardation film 5 / adhesive layer 6 / organic EL panel 8 The organic EL display device 10 laminated in this order is preferable, and cover member 7 / adhesive layer 2 / (viewing side) protective film 3 / polarizer 4 / organic EL panel side protective film / organic EL panel side first adhesive. An organic EL display device in which an agent layer (or adhesive layer) / retardation film 5 / (organic EL panel side second) pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 6 / organic EL panel 8 are laminated in this order can also be exemplified. In addition to these, functional layers such as a hard coat layer, an antiglare treatment layer, an antireflection layer, a sensor layer, a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer or an adhesive layer for laminating them, and the like can be mentioned. it can.

 前記カバー部材は、特に限定されるものではなく、本分野において通常用いられているものを好適に用いることができ、カバーガラス、カバープラスチック等を挙げることができる。また、有機ELパネルは、特に限定されるものではなく、本分野において通常用いられているものを好適に用いることができ、例えば、基材と、前記基材の上に並んで設けられた複数の有機EL素子と、前記有機EL素子の上に設けられた保護層と、前記保護層の上に設けられた封止フィルムと、を有するパネルを挙げることができる。 

The cover member is not particularly limited, and those normally used in this field can be suitably used, and examples thereof include cover glass and cover plastic. In addition, the organic EL panel is not particularly limited, and those normally used in this field can be suitably used. For example, a plurality of base materials and a plurality of side by side provided on the base material can be used. The panel which has the organic EL element of this, the protective layer provided on the said organic EL element, and the sealing film provided on the said protective layer can be mentioned.
 以下では、本発明の一般式(1)で表される化合物を含有する光学部材を、透明導電性フィルムに用いる場合を説明する。前記透明導電性フィルムは、透明基材フィルム及び透明導電層を含む。 Below, the case where the optical member containing the compound represented by General formula (1) of this invention is used for a transparent conductive film is demonstrated. The transparent conductive film includes a transparent base film and a transparent conductive layer.
 図3に示すように、透明導電性フィルム20として、例えば、透明導電層22/中間層23/透明基材フィルム21、がこの順に積層されたものを例示することができる。中間層23は任意に設けることができる。前記中間層としては、屈折率調整層、易接着剤層、ハードコート層、クラッキング防止層等が挙げられ、これらから選ばれるいずれか少なくとも1つを用いることができる。本発明の一般式(1)で表される化合物を含有する光学部材は、前記透明導電性フィルムを形成する透明基材フィルム、又は中間層として用いることができる。また、透明導電性フィルム20には、透明基材フィルム21において、透明導電層22を設けていない側に、アンチブロッキング層24を設けることができる。アンチブロッキング層を本発明の一般式(1)で表される化合物を含有する光学部材として用いることができる。 As shown in FIG. 3, as the transparent conductive film 20, for example, a transparent conductive layer 22 / intermediate layer 23 / transparent substrate film 21 laminated in this order can be exemplified. The intermediate layer 23 can be arbitrarily provided. Examples of the intermediate layer include a refractive index adjusting layer, an easy-adhesive layer, a hard coat layer, a cracking prevention layer, and the like, and at least one selected from these can be used. The optical member containing the compound represented by the general formula (1) of the present invention can be used as a transparent substrate film or an intermediate layer forming the transparent conductive film. Moreover, the anti-blocking layer 24 can be provided in the transparent conductive film 20 in the transparent base film 21 in the side in which the transparent conductive layer 22 is not provided. The anti-blocking layer can be used as an optical member containing the compound represented by the general formula (1) of the present invention.
 透明導電性フィルム20が、中間層23、アンチブロッキング層24を有する場合には、例えば、下記態様を例示できる。
 態様1:透明導電層22/中間層23(屈折率調整層)/透明基材フィルム21/アンチブロッキング層24。
 態様2:透明導電層22/中間層23(屈折率調整層/ハードコート層)/透明基材フィルム21/アンチブロッキング層24。
 態様3:透明導電層22/中間層23(クラック防止層)/透明基材フィルム21/アンチブロッキング層24。
 態様4:透明導電層22/中間層23(クラック防止層/易接着剤層)/透明基材フィルム21/アンチブロッキング層24。
 態様5:透明導電層22/中間層23(屈折率調整層/ハードコート層/易接着剤層)/透明基材フィルム21/アンチブロッキング層24。
In the case where the transparent conductive film 20 has the intermediate layer 23 and the anti-blocking layer 24, for example, the following embodiments can be exemplified.
Aspect 1: Transparent conductive layer 22 / intermediate layer 23 (refractive index adjusting layer) / transparent substrate film 21 / anti-blocking layer 24.
Aspect 2: Transparent conductive layer 22 / intermediate layer 23 (refractive index adjusting layer / hard coat layer) / transparent substrate film 21 / anti-blocking layer 24
Aspect 3: Transparent conductive layer 22 / intermediate layer 23 (crack prevention layer) / transparent substrate film 21 / anti-blocking layer 24
Aspect 4: Transparent conductive layer 22 / intermediate layer 23 (crack prevention layer / adhesive layer) / transparent substrate film 21 / anti-blocking layer 24
Aspect 5: Transparent conductive layer 22 / intermediate layer 23 (refractive index adjusting layer / hard coat layer / adhesive layer) / transparent substrate film 21 / anti-blocking layer 24.
 前記透明導電性フィルムにおいて、本発明の一般式(1)で表される化合物を含有する光学部材は、前記透明導電性フィルムを形成する透明基材フィルム、又は中間層として用いることが好ましい。本発明の一般式(1)で表される化合物を含有する光学部材を、アンチブロッキング層に適用した場合には、アンチブロッキング層中のアンチブロッキング粒子の密着性への不具合により、耐擦傷性の確保が困難になるおそれがある。 In the transparent conductive film, the optical member containing the compound represented by the general formula (1) of the present invention is preferably used as a transparent base film or an intermediate layer forming the transparent conductive film. When the optical member containing the compound represented by the general formula (1) of the present invention is applied to the anti-blocking layer, scratch resistance is caused by a problem with the adhesion of the anti-blocking particles in the anti-blocking layer. It may be difficult to secure.
 (2-1)透明基材フィルム21
 透明基材フィルムの材料(ベースポリマー)としては、特に制限されないが、透明性を有する各種のプラスチック材料があげられる。例えば、その材料(ベースポリマー)として、ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリエチレンナフタレート等のポリエステル系樹脂、アセテート系樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン系樹脂、ポリカーボネート系樹脂、ポリアミド系樹脂、ポリイミド系樹脂、ポリオレフィン系樹脂、ポリノルボルネン系樹脂などのポリシクロオレフィン系樹脂、(メタ)アクリル系樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニル系樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニリデン系樹脂、ポリスチレン系樹脂、ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂、ポリアリレート系樹脂、ポリフェニレンサルファイド系樹脂等が挙げられる。これらの中で特に好ましいのは、ポリシクロオレフィン系樹脂、ポリエステル系樹脂、ポリカーボネート系樹脂、ポリオレフィン系樹脂である。
(2-1) Transparent base film 21
Although it does not restrict | limit especially as a material (base polymer) of a transparent base film, Various plastic materials which have transparency are mention | raise | lifted. For example, as the material (base polymer), polyester resins such as polyethylene terephthalate and polyethylene naphthalate, acetate resins, polyethersulfone resins, polycarbonate resins, polyamide resins, polyimide resins, polyolefin resins, polynorbornene Polycycloolefin resins such as resin, (meth) acrylic resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, polyvinylidene chloride resin, polystyrene resin, polyvinyl alcohol resin, polyarylate resin, polyphenylene sulfide resin, etc. It is done. Among these, polycycloolefin resins, polyester resins, polycarbonate resins, and polyolefin resins are particularly preferable.
 前記透明基材フィルムの厚さは、通常、30~250μmであるのが好ましく、より好ましくは45~200μmである。 The thickness of the transparent base film is usually preferably 30 to 250 μm, more preferably 45 to 200 μm.
 (2-2)透明導電層22
 透明導電層の構成材料としては特に限定されず、インジウム、スズ、亜鉛、ガリウム、アンチモン、チタン、珪素、ジルコニウム、マグネシウム、アルミニウム、金、銀、銅、パラジウム、タングステンからなる群より選択される少なくとも1種の金属の金属酸化物が用いられる。当該金属酸化物には、必要に応じて、さらに上記群に示された金属原子を含んでいてもよい。例えば酸化スズを含有する酸化インジウム(ITO)、アンチモンを含有する酸化スズ(ATO)などが好ましく用いられる。
(2-2) Transparent conductive layer 22
The constituent material of the transparent conductive layer is not particularly limited and is at least selected from the group consisting of indium, tin, zinc, gallium, antimony, titanium, silicon, zirconium, magnesium, aluminum, gold, silver, copper, palladium, tungsten. One metal metal oxide is used. The metal oxide may further contain a metal atom shown in the above group, if necessary. For example, indium oxide (ITO) containing tin oxide and tin oxide (ATO) containing antimony are preferably used.
 透明導電層の厚さは特に制限されないが、その表面抵抗を1×10Ω/□以下の良好な導電性を有する連続被膜とするには、厚さ10nm以上とするのが好ましい。膜厚が、厚くなりすぎると透明性の低下などをきたすため、15~35nmであることが好ましく、より好ましくは20~30nmの範囲内である。 The thickness of the transparent conductive layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 nm or more in order to obtain a continuous film having a good electrical resistance of 1 × 10 3 Ω / □ or less. The film thickness is preferably 15 to 35 nm, more preferably in the range of 20 to 30 nm, since transparency is lowered when the film thickness becomes too thick.
 透明導電層の形成方法としては特に限定されず、従来公知の方法を採用することができる。具体的には、例えば真空蒸着法、スパッタリング法、イオンプレーティング法を例示できる。また、必要とする膜厚に応じて適宜の方法を採用することもできる。なお、透明導電層を形成した後、必要に応じて、100~150℃の範囲内でアニール処理を施して結晶化することができる。 The method for forming the transparent conductive layer is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known method can be employed. Specifically, for example, a vacuum deposition method, a sputtering method, and an ion plating method can be exemplified. In addition, an appropriate method can be adopted depending on the required film thickness. In addition, after forming the transparent conductive layer, it can be crystallized by performing an annealing treatment within a range of 100 to 150 ° C., if necessary.
 (2-3-1)中間層23:屈折率調整層
 屈折率調整層は、無機物、有機物または無機物と有機物との混合物により形成することができる。例えば、無機物として、NaF(1.3)、NaAlF(1.35)、LiF(1.36)、MgF(1.38)、CaF(1.4)、BaF(1.3)、SiO(1.46)、LaF(1.55)、CeF(1.63)、Al(1.63)などの無機物〔上記各材料の( )内の数値は光の屈折率である〕があげられる。また有機物としてはアクリル樹脂、ウレタン樹脂、メラミン樹脂、アルキド樹脂、シロキサン系ポリマー、有機シラン縮合物などがあげられ、これら有機物をベースポリマーとして用いることができる。これらベースポリマーは、少なくとも1種が用いられる。
(2-3-1) Intermediate Layer 23: Refractive Index Adjusting Layer The refractive index adjusting layer can be formed of an inorganic material, an organic material, or a mixture of an inorganic material and an organic material. For example, NaF (1.3), Na 3 AlF 6 (1.35), LiF (1.36), MgF 2 (1.38), CaF 2 (1.4), BaF 2 (1. 3), inorganic materials such as SiO 2 (1.46), LaF 3 (1.55), CeF 3 (1.63), Al 2 O 3 (1.63) [the numerical values in parentheses for the above materials are It is the refractive index of light]. Examples of organic substances include acrylic resins, urethane resins, melamine resins, alkyd resins, siloxane polymers, and organic silane condensates, and these organic substances can be used as a base polymer. At least one of these base polymers is used.
 屈折率調整層は、平均粒径が1nm~500nm、好ましくは、5nm~300nmのナノ微粒子を有していてもよい。屈折率調整層中のナノ微粒子の含有量は好ましくは0.1重量%~90重量%、より好ましくは10重量%~80重量%が、さらに好ましくは20重量%~70重量%である。屈折率調整層中にナノ微粒子を含有することによって、屈折率調整層自体の屈折率の調整を容易に行うことができる。 The refractive index adjusting layer may have nanoparticles having an average particle diameter of 1 nm to 500 nm, preferably 5 nm to 300 nm. The content of the nanoparticles in the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably 0.1% to 90% by weight, more preferably 10% to 80% by weight, and still more preferably 20% to 70% by weight. By containing nanoparticles in the refractive index adjusting layer, the refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer itself can be easily adjusted.
 ナノ微粒子を形成する無機酸化物としては、例えば、酸化ケイ素(シリカ)、中空ナノシリカ、酸化チタン、酸化アルミニウム、酸化亜鉛、酸化錫、酸化ジルコニウム等の微粒子があげられる。これらの中でも、酸化ケイ素(シリカ)、酸化チタン、酸化アルミニウム、酸化亜鉛、酸化錫、酸化ジルコニウムの微粒子が好ましい。これらは1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。 Examples of the inorganic oxide forming the nano fine particles include fine particles such as silicon oxide (silica), hollow nano silica, titanium oxide, aluminum oxide, zinc oxide, tin oxide, and zirconium oxide. Among these, fine particles of silicon oxide (silica), titanium oxide, aluminum oxide, zinc oxide, tin oxide, and zirconium oxide are preferable. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 前記屈折率調整層の厚さは、特に制限されるものではないが、光学設計、前記透明基材フィルムからのオリゴマー発生防止効果の点から、通常、10nm~200nmであることが好ましく、20nm~150nmであることがより好ましく、20nm~130nmであることがさらに好ましい。 The thickness of the refractive index adjusting layer is not particularly limited, but it is usually preferably 10 nm to 200 nm, preferably 20 nm to 200 nm, from the viewpoint of optical design and the effect of preventing oligomer generation from the transparent substrate film. It is more preferably 150 nm, and further preferably 20 nm to 130 nm.
 (2-3-2)中間層23:ハードコート層
 ハードコート層は、有機成分(ベースポリマー)等を含む塗工液により形成され、ハードコート層は、有機成分(ベースポリマー)等を含む塗工液により形成され、ハードコート層を形成することにより局所的に過大な凹凸が埋められ、これにより透明導電層の表面一様性を高めることができ、透明導電性フィルムの耐屈曲性を高めることができる。
(2-3-2) Intermediate layer 23: hard coat layer The hard coat layer is formed of a coating liquid containing an organic component (base polymer) or the like, and the hard coat layer is a coating containing an organic component (base polymer) or the like. By forming a hard coat layer, it is formed with a working solution, and excessive unevenness is locally filled. This can improve the surface uniformity of the transparent conductive layer and increase the bending resistance of the transparent conductive film. be able to.
 前記ハードコート層の厚みは特に限定されないものの、0.5μm以上3μm以下であることが好ましく、0.8μm以上2μm以下であることがより好ましい。 Although the thickness of the hard coat layer is not particularly limited, it is preferably 0.5 μm or more and 3 μm or less, and more preferably 0.8 μm or more and 2 μm or less.
 前記有機成分としては特に限定されず、紫外線硬化型樹脂、熱硬化型樹脂、熱可塑性樹脂等が用いられる。加工速度の早さや透明基材フィルムへの熱ダメージを抑制する観点からは、紫外線硬化型樹脂を用いることが特に好ましい。このような紫外線硬化型樹脂としては、例えば、光(紫外線)により硬化するアクリレート基およびメタクリレート基の少なくとも一方の基を有する硬化型化合物を用いることができる。硬化型化合物としては、例えば、シリコーン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、ウレタン樹脂、アルキド樹脂、スピロアセタール樹脂、ポリブタジエン樹脂、ポリチオールポリエン樹脂、多価アルコール等の多官能化合物のアクリレートやメタクリレート等のオリゴマーまたはプレポリマー等が挙げられる。これらは、1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。 The organic component is not particularly limited, and an ultraviolet curable resin, a thermosetting resin, a thermoplastic resin, or the like is used. From the viewpoint of suppressing the processing speed and thermal damage to the transparent substrate film, it is particularly preferable to use an ultraviolet curable resin. As such an ultraviolet curable resin, for example, a curable compound having at least one of an acrylate group and a methacrylate group that is cured by light (ultraviolet rays) can be used. Examples of the curable compound include acrylates and methacrylates of polyfunctional compounds such as silicone resins, polyester resins, polyether resins, epoxy resins, urethane resins, alkyd resins, spiroacetal resins, polybutadiene resins, polythiol polyene resins, and polyhydric alcohols. Oligomers or prepolymers. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 ハードコート層には、無機成分を含有することができる。無機成分としては、例えば、酸化ケイ素(シリカ)、酸化チタン、酸化アルミニウム、酸化亜鉛、酸化錫、酸化ジルコニウム等の無機酸化物の微粒子ないし微粉末があげられる。無機成分は、ハードコート層の着色防止及び透明性の点等から、最頻粒子径が1nm~100nmのナノ粒子であることが好ましく、5nm~80nmの範囲のナノ粒子であることがより好ましく、10nm~60nmの範囲のナノ粒子であることがさらに好ましい。このように、ナノ粒子の最頻粒子径が小さければ、可視光の散乱が生じ難く、有機成分とナノ粒子の屈折率が異なる場合であっても、ハードコート層のヘイズが大幅に増大することが抑制される。 The hard coat layer can contain an inorganic component. Examples of the inorganic component include fine particles or fine powders of inorganic oxides such as silicon oxide (silica), titanium oxide, aluminum oxide, zinc oxide, tin oxide, and zirconium oxide. The inorganic component is preferably a nanoparticle having a mode particle diameter of 1 nm to 100 nm, more preferably a nanoparticle in the range of 5 nm to 80 nm, from the viewpoint of coloring prevention and transparency of the hard coat layer. More preferred are nanoparticles in the range of 10 nm to 60 nm. Thus, if the mode particle size of the nanoparticles is small, it is difficult for visible light to scatter, and even if the refractive index of the organic component and the nanoparticles is different, the haze of the hard coat layer is greatly increased. Is suppressed.
 ハードコート層は、上記ナノ粒子に加え、又はナノ粒子に代えて、表面凹凸や光学特性の制御等を目的として、ナノ粒子より粒径の大きい粗粒子を含んでいてもよい。粗粒子の最頻粒子径は、ハードコート層の厚みとの関係を考慮する必要があるものの、0.5μm~3.0μmの範囲であることが好ましく、1.0μm~2.5μmであることがより好ましく、1.5μm~2.0μmであることがさらに好ましい。 The hard coat layer may contain coarse particles having a particle size larger than that of the nanoparticles for the purpose of controlling surface irregularities and optical properties in addition to or in place of the nanoparticles. Although the mode particle diameter of the coarse particles needs to consider the relationship with the thickness of the hard coat layer, it is preferably in the range of 0.5 μm to 3.0 μm, and preferably 1.0 μm to 2.5 μm. Is more preferably 1.5 μm to 2.0 μm.
 ハードコート層の形成材料には、有機成分、無機成分及び粗粒子に加えて、さらに各種の添加剤を加えることもできる。添加剤としては、例えば有機成分を硬化してハードコート層を形成するための重合開始剤や、レベリング剤、顔料、充填剤、分散剤、可塑剤、紫外線吸収剤、界面活性剤、酸化防止剤、チクソトロピー化剤等を使用することができる。ハードコート層の形成材料は、適宜に溶媒を含むことができる。 In addition to the organic component, inorganic component and coarse particles, various additives can be added to the hard coat layer forming material. Examples of the additive include a polymerization initiator for curing an organic component to form a hard coat layer, a leveling agent, a pigment, a filler, a dispersant, a plasticizer, an ultraviolet absorber, a surfactant, and an antioxidant. , Thixotropic agents and the like can be used. The material for forming the hard coat layer can appropriately contain a solvent.
 (2-3-3)中間層23:クラック防止層
 クラック防止層は、例えば、特開2017-224269号公報において硬化樹脂層として記載されているものを用いることができる。クラック防止層は、上記透明基材フィルムの厚みが大きい場合にも透明導電層のクラックを防止して所期の電気特性を発揮することができる。
(2-3-3) Intermediate Layer 23: Crack Prevention Layer As the crack prevention layer, for example, those described as a cured resin layer in JP-A-2017-224269 can be used. Even when the thickness of the transparent base film is large, the crack preventing layer can prevent cracks in the transparent conductive layer and exhibit the desired electrical characteristics.
 クラック防止層の厚みは特に制限されるものではないが、耐湿熱性、前記透明樹脂フィルム1からのオリゴマー発生防止効果、及び光学特性の点から、150nm以下であり、好ましくは20~100nm程度であり、より好ましくは30~50nmである。なお、クラック防止層2を2層以上設ける場合、各層の厚みは、20~60nm程度であり、好ましくは25~55nmである。 The thickness of the crack prevention layer is not particularly limited, but is 150 nm or less, preferably about 20 to 100 nm, from the viewpoints of heat and humidity resistance, the effect of preventing oligomer generation from the transparent resin film 1 and optical characteristics. More preferably, the thickness is 30 to 50 nm. When two or more crack prevention layers 2 are provided, the thickness of each layer is about 20 to 60 nm, preferably 25 to 55 nm.
 クラック防止層は、例えば、重量平均分子量が1500以上のエポキシ樹脂を含む樹脂組成物を硬化したクラック防止層を用いることができる。前記エポキシ樹脂は、ゴム変性エポキシ樹脂であることが好ましい。これによりクラック防止層に靭性や耐衝撃性を好適に付与することができる。エポキシ樹脂を変性するためのゴム成分としては特に限定されず、ブタジエンゴム、アクリロニトリルブタジエンゴム、スチレンブタジエンゴム、ブチルゴム、ニトリルゴム、天然ゴム、イソプレンゴム、クロロプレンゴム、エチレン-プロピレンゴム、ウレタンゴム、シリコーンゴム、フッ素ゴム、エチレン-酢酸ビニルゴム、エピクロルヒドリンゴム等が挙げられる。中でも、靭性や耐薬品性の点で、ブタジエンゴムが好ましい。ゴム変性エポキシ樹脂は単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。 As the crack preventing layer, for example, a crack preventing layer obtained by curing a resin composition containing an epoxy resin having a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or more can be used. The epoxy resin is preferably a rubber-modified epoxy resin. Thereby, toughness and impact resistance can be suitably imparted to the crack prevention layer. The rubber component for modifying the epoxy resin is not particularly limited. Butadiene rubber, acrylonitrile butadiene rubber, styrene butadiene rubber, butyl rubber, nitrile rubber, natural rubber, isoprene rubber, chloroprene rubber, ethylene-propylene rubber, urethane rubber, silicone Examples thereof include rubber, fluororubber, ethylene-vinyl acetate rubber, epichlorohydrin rubber and the like. Of these, butadiene rubber is preferable in terms of toughness and chemical resistance. The rubber-modified epoxy resin may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 上記樹脂組成物は、硬化促進剤を含むことが好ましい。これによりエポキシ樹脂の硬化反応を迅速かつ十分に進行させることができ、膜強度の高い硬化物膜を形成することができる。硬化促進剤としては特に限定されず、例えば、オクタン酸,ステアリン酸,アセチルアセトネート,ナフテン酸,サリチル酸等の有機酸の亜鉛,銅,鉄、アンチモン等の有機金属塩;金属キレート等が挙げられる。中でも、硬化促進剤はアンチモンを含むことが好ましい。アンチモン含有硬化促進剤は、樹脂組成物の硬化反応を迅速かつ十分に進行させることができ、より強固な硬化物膜を効率的に形成することができる。なお、硬化促進剤は単独で、又は2種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。 The resin composition preferably contains a curing accelerator. Thereby, the hardening reaction of an epoxy resin can be advanced rapidly and fully, and a hardened | cured material film | membrane with high film | membrane intensity | strength can be formed. The curing accelerator is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include organic metal salts of organic acids such as octanoic acid, stearic acid, acetylacetonate, naphthenic acid and salicylic acid, such as zinc, copper, iron and antimony; metal chelates and the like. . Especially, it is preferable that a hardening accelerator contains antimony. The antimony-containing curing accelerator can rapidly and sufficiently advance the curing reaction of the resin composition and can efficiently form a stronger cured product film. In addition, a hardening accelerator can be used individually or in combination of 2 or more types.
 硬化促進剤の含有量は、特に限定されないが、樹脂組成物中に含まれるエポキシ基を有する化合物の全量(100重量部)に対して、0.005~5重量部が好ましく、より好ましくは0.01~4重量部、さらに好ましくは0.01~1重量部である。硬化促進剤の含有量が上記下限を下回ると、硬化促進効果が不十分となる場合がある。 The content of the curing accelerator is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.005 to 5 parts by weight, more preferably 0 with respect to the total amount (100 parts by weight) of the epoxy group-containing compound contained in the resin composition. 0.01 to 4 parts by weight, more preferably 0.01 to 1 part by weight. If the content of the curing accelerator is below the lower limit, the curing acceleration effect may be insufficient.
 前記樹脂組成物には、エポキシ樹脂のほか、アクリル樹脂、ウレタン樹脂、アミド樹脂、シリコーン樹脂等を適宜配合してもよい。さらに樹脂組成物には各種の添加剤を加えることもできる。添加剤としては、例えばレベリング剤、顔料、充填剤、分散剤、可塑剤、紫外線吸収剤、界面活性剤、酸化防止剤、チクソトロピー化剤等を使用することができる。 In addition to the epoxy resin, an acrylic resin, a urethane resin, an amide resin, a silicone resin, or the like may be appropriately added to the resin composition. Furthermore, various additives can also be added to the resin composition. As the additive, for example, a leveling agent, a pigment, a filler, a dispersant, a plasticizer, an ultraviolet absorber, a surfactant, an antioxidant, a thixotropic agent, and the like can be used.
 (2-3-4)中間層23:易接着剤層
 前記易接着層を形成するベースポリマーとしては、例えば、ポリエステル骨格、ポリエーテル骨格、ポリカーボネート骨格、ポリウレタン骨格、シリコーン系、ポリアミド骨格、ポリイミド骨格、ポリビニルアルコール骨格等を有する各種樹脂を用いることができる。これらポリマー樹脂は1種を単独で、または2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。
(2-3-4) Intermediate layer 23: Easy adhesive layer Examples of the base polymer that forms the easy adhesive layer include, for example, a polyester skeleton, a polyether skeleton, a polycarbonate skeleton, a polyurethane skeleton, a silicone-based, a polyamide skeleton, and a polyimide skeleton. Various resins having a polyvinyl alcohol skeleton or the like can be used. These polymer resins can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 また易接着層の形成にあたっては、前記ベースポリマーには添加剤を加えてもよい。具体的にはさらには粘着付与剤、紫外線吸収剤、耐熱安定剤などの安定剤等を用いてもよい。易接着層の膜厚は0.01~20μmであることが好ましい。 In forming the easy-adhesion layer, an additive may be added to the base polymer. Specifically, a stabilizer such as a tackifier, an ultraviolet absorber, and a heat stabilizer may be used. The film thickness of the easy adhesion layer is preferably 0.01 to 20 μm.
 (2-4)アンチブロッキング層24
 アンチブロッキング層は、バインダー樹脂(ベースポリマー)及び粒子を含む樹脂組成物の硬化物層であり、表面に平坦部及び隆起部を有しており、これらによりハンドリング性と低反射特性とを高いレベルで発揮することができる。アンチブロッキング層の平坦部の厚みは、特に限定されないものの、200nm以上30μm以下であることが好ましく、500nm以上10μm以下であることがより好ましく、800nm以上5μm以下であることがさらに好ましい。
(2-4) Anti-blocking layer 24
The anti-blocking layer is a cured product layer of a resin composition containing a binder resin (base polymer) and particles, and has a flat portion and a raised portion on the surface, thereby providing a high level of handling properties and low reflection characteristics. Can demonstrate. The thickness of the flat part of the anti-blocking layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 200 nm or more and 30 μm or less, more preferably 500 nm or more and 10 μm or less, and further preferably 800 nm or more and 5 μm or less.
 粒子の最頻粒子径は、最表面層の隆起部のサイズやアンチブロッキング層の平坦部の厚みとの関係などを考慮して適宜設定することができ、特に限定されない。なお、透明導電性フィルムに耐ブロッキング性を十分に付与し、かつ光散乱等を十分に抑制するという観点から、粒子の最頻粒子径は500nm以上30μm以下であることが好ましく、800nm以上20μm以下であることがより好ましく、1μm以上10μm以下であることがより好ましい。なお、本明細書において、「最頻粒子径」とは、粒子分布の極大値を示す粒径をいい、フロー式粒子像分析装置(Sysmex社製、製品名「FPIA-3000S」)を用いて、所定条件下(Sheath液:酢酸エチル、測定モード:HPF測定、測定方式:トータルカウント)で測定することによって求められる。測定試料は、粒子を酢酸エチルで1.0重量%に希釈し、超音波洗浄機を用いて均一に分散させたものを用いる。 The mode particle diameter of the particles can be appropriately set in consideration of the relationship between the size of the protruding portion of the outermost surface layer and the thickness of the flat portion of the anti-blocking layer, and is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of sufficiently imparting blocking resistance to the transparent conductive film and sufficiently suppressing light scattering and the like, the mode particle diameter of the particles is preferably 500 nm to 30 μm, and more preferably 800 nm to 20 μm. It is more preferable that it is 1 μm or more and 10 μm or less. In the present specification, the “mode particle diameter” means a particle diameter showing the maximum value of the particle distribution, using a flow type particle image analyzer (product name “FPIA-3000S” manufactured by Sysmex). , By measuring under predetermined conditions (Sheath solution: ethyl acetate, measurement mode: HPF measurement, measurement method: total count). The measurement sample is prepared by diluting the particles to 1.0% by weight with ethyl acetate and uniformly dispersing the particles using an ultrasonic cleaner.
 隆起部の高さは、要求される滑り性等を考慮して設定される。隆起部、すなわちアンチブロッキング層の平坦部から上に突出する部分の高さは、アンチブロッキング層の平坦部の厚みや粒子の最頻粒子径等によって制御することができる。隆起部の高さは、好ましくは100nm以上3μm以下であり、より好ましくは200nm以上2μm以下であり、さらに好ましくは300nm以上1.5μm以下である。隆起部の高さを上記範囲に設定することで、透明導電性フィルムの耐ブロッキング性を満足すると同時に、光散乱や偏光解消を十分に抑えることができる。 The height of the raised part is set in consideration of the required slipping property. The height of the protruding portion, that is, the portion protruding upward from the flat portion of the anti-blocking layer can be controlled by the thickness of the flat portion of the anti-blocking layer, the mode particle diameter of the particles, and the like. The height of the raised portion is preferably 100 nm or more and 3 μm or less, more preferably 200 nm or more and 2 μm or less, and further preferably 300 nm or more and 1.5 μm or less. By setting the height of the raised portion within the above range, it is possible to satisfy the blocking resistance of the transparent conductive film and to sufficiently suppress light scattering and depolarization.
 粒子は多分散粒子及び単分散粒子のいずれでもよいが、隆起部の付与の容易性や光散乱防止性等を考慮すると単分散粒子が好ましい。単分散粒子の場合は、粒子の粒径と最頻粒子径とが実質的に同一と見なすことができる。 The particles may be either polydisperse particles or monodisperse particles, but monodisperse particles are preferred in view of ease of providing the raised portions and light scattering prevention. In the case of monodisperse particles, the particle size and mode particle size can be regarded as substantially the same.
 アンチブロッキング層中の粒子の含有量は、樹脂組成物の固形分100重量部に対して0.01~5重量部であることが好ましく、0.02~1重量部であることがより好ましく、0.05~0.5重量部であることがさらに好ましい。 The content of the particles in the anti-blocking layer is preferably 0.01 to 5 parts by weight, more preferably 0.02 to 1 part by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the solid content of the resin composition. More preferably, it is 0.05 to 0.5 parts by weight.
 アンチブロッキング層を形成する樹脂組成物におけるバインダー樹脂としては粒子の分散が可能で、アンチブロッキング層形成後の皮膜として十分な強度を持ち、透明性のあるものを特に制限なく使用できる。用いるバインダー樹脂としては熱硬化型樹脂、熱可塑型樹脂、紫外線硬化型樹脂、電子線硬化型樹脂、二液混合型樹脂などがあげられるが、これらのなかでも紫外線照射による硬化処理にて、簡単な加工操作にて効率よく皮膜を形成することができる紫外線硬化型樹脂が好適である。 As the binder resin in the resin composition for forming the anti-blocking layer, it is possible to disperse particles, and it is possible to use a transparent material having sufficient strength and transparency as a film after the anti-blocking layer is formed. Examples of binder resins to be used include thermosetting resins, thermoplastic resins, ultraviolet curable resins, electron beam curable resins, and two-component mixed resins. Among these, curing treatment by ultraviolet irradiation is simple. An ultraviolet curable resin capable of efficiently forming a film by a simple processing operation is preferable.
 紫外線硬化型樹脂としては、ポリエステル系、アクリル系、ウレタン系、アミド系、シリコーン系、エポキシ系等の各種のものがあげられ、紫外線硬化型のモノマー、オリゴマー、ポリマー等が含まれる。好ましく用いられる紫外線硬化型樹脂は、例えば紫外線重合性の官能基を有するもの、なかでも当該官能基を2個以上、特に3~6個有するアクリル系のモノマーやオリゴマー成分を含むものがあげられる。また、紫外線硬化型樹脂には、紫外線重合開始剤が配合されている。 Examples of the ultraviolet curable resin include polyesters, acrylics, urethanes, amides, silicones, epoxies, and the like, and ultraviolet curable monomers, oligomers, polymers, and the like are included. Examples of the ultraviolet curable resin preferably used include those having an ultraviolet polymerizable functional group, and among them, those containing an acrylic monomer or oligomer component having 2 or more, particularly 3 to 6 functional groups. Further, an ultraviolet polymerization initiator is blended in the ultraviolet curable resin.
 樹脂組成物には、前記材料に加えて、レベリング剤、チクソトロピー剤、帯電防止剤、可塑剤、界面活性剤、酸化防止剤、硬化触媒、及び紫外線吸収剤等の添加剤を用いることができる。チクソトロピー剤を用いると、微細凹凸形状表面における突出粒子の形成に有利であるこれら添加剤の含有量は、通常、紫外線硬化型樹脂100重量部に対して、15重量部以下程度、好ましくは0.01~15重量部、とするのが好適である。アンチブロッキング層を形成する樹脂組成物は、適宜に溶媒を含むことができる。 In addition to the above materials, additives such as leveling agents, thixotropic agents, antistatic agents, plasticizers, surfactants, antioxidants, curing catalysts, and ultraviolet absorbers can be used for the resin composition. When a thixotropic agent is used, the content of these additives, which is advantageous for the formation of protruding particles on the surface with fine irregularities, is usually about 15 parts by weight or less, preferably about 0.1 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the ultraviolet curable resin. It is preferable that the content be 01 to 15 parts by weight. The resin composition forming the anti-blocking layer can appropriately contain a solvent.
 アンチブロッキング層2に含有される粒子としては、各種金属酸化物、ガラス、プラスチックなどの透明性を有するものを特に制限なく使用することができる。例えばシリカ、アルミナ、チタニア、ジルコニア、酸化カルシウム等の無機系粒子、ポリメチルメタクリレート、ポリスチレン、ポリウレタン、アクリル系樹脂、アクリル-スチレン共重合体、ベンゾグアナミン、メラミン、ポリカーボネート等の各種ポリマーからなる架橋又は未架橋の有機系粒子やシリコーン系粒子などがあげられる。前記粒子は、1種または2種以上を適宜に選択して用いることができるが、有機系粒子が好ましい。有機系粒子としては、屈折率の観点から、アクリル系樹脂が好ましい。 As the particles contained in the anti-blocking layer 2, those having transparency such as various metal oxides, glass, and plastic can be used without particular limitation. For example, inorganic particles such as silica, alumina, titania, zirconia, calcium oxide, cross-linked or unpolymerized polymers such as polymethyl methacrylate, polystyrene, polyurethane, acrylic resin, acrylic-styrene copolymer, benzoguanamine, melamine, and polycarbonate. Examples include crosslinked organic particles and silicone particles. The particles can be used by appropriately selecting one type or two or more types, but organic particles are preferable. The organic particles are preferably acrylic resins from the viewpoint of refractive index.
 以下に、実施例によって本発明を具体的に説明するが、本発明はこれら実施例によって限定されるものではない。なお、各例中の部及び%はいずれも特記を除き重量基準である。 Hereinafter, the present invention will be specifically described by way of examples, but the present invention is not limited to these examples. In addition, all parts and% in each example are based on weight unless otherwise specified.
 以下で、得られた化合物の物性を測定する際に使用した機器及び測定条件は次の通りである。
(GC-MS) (株)島津製作所製 ガスクロマトグラフ質量分析計GCMS-QP2010Plus(EI法)
(LC/MS) (株)島津製作所製 高速液体クロマトグラフ質量分析計LCMS-2010EV(ESI法)
Below, the apparatus and measurement conditions used when measuring the physical property of the obtained compound are as follows.
(GC-MS) Gas chromatograph mass spectrometer GCMS-QP2010Plus (EI method) manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation
(LC / MS) Shimadzu Corporation high performance liquid chromatograph mass spectrometer LCMS-2010EV (ESI method)
 <製造例1>
 化合物IM3、化合物IM5及び化合物IM6の合成
 化合物IM3は、以下の方法で合成した。反応式を以下に示す。
<Production Example 1>
Synthesis of Compound IM3, Compound IM5, and Compound IM6 Compound IM3 was synthesized by the following method. The reaction formula is shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 (化合物IM2の合成)
 冷却管及び温度計を付した1L四つ口フラスコに、Journal of American Chemical Society 1954,76,1879に記載の2-ジメチルアミノ-4-ヒドロキシ-6-メチルピリミジンの合成において、N,N-ジメチルグアニジン硫酸塩を、BE639386に記載の方法と同様にして得た1,1-ジブチルグアニジン塩酸塩に代えた以外は同様にして、化合物IM1を得た。化合物IM1を用い、Journal of the Chemical Society 1957,4845 に記載の方法と同様の手順で、ライマー・チーマン(Reimer-Tiemann)反応によってホルミル化し、化合物IM2(18.4g,収率69%)を得た。
 GC-MS:m/z=265([M]
(Synthesis of Compound IM2)
In the synthesis of 2-dimethylamino-4-hydroxy-6-methylpyrimidine described in Journal of American Chemical Society 1954, 76, 1879, a 1 L four-necked flask equipped with a condenser and a thermometer was used. Compound IM1 was obtained in the same manner except that guanidine sulfate was replaced with 1,1-dibutylguanidine hydrochloride obtained in the same manner as described in BE69386. Compound IM2 (18.4 g, yield 69%) was obtained by formylation by the Reimer-Tiemann reaction using Compound IM1 in the same manner as described in Journal of the Chemical Society 1957, 4845. It was.
GC-MS: m / z = 265 ([M] + )
 (化合物IM3の合成)
 冷却管及び温度計を付した100mL四つ口フラスコ中で、化合物IM2(15.8g)、ヨウ化エチル(14g)(東京化成工業株式会社製)、炭酸カリウム(14g)、ジメチルホルムアミド(DMF)(60mL)の混合液を70℃で3時間撹拌した後、室温まで放冷させた。反応液を水(300mL)に排出し、トルエン(300mL)で抽出した。有機層を減圧濃縮することで化合物IM3(17.3g,収率99%)を得た。
GC-MS:m/z=293([M]
(Synthesis of Compound IM3)
In a 100 mL four-necked flask equipped with a condenser and a thermometer, compound IM2 (15.8 g), ethyl iodide (14 g) (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), potassium carbonate (14 g), dimethylformamide (DMF) (60 mL) was stirred at 70 ° C. for 3 hours, and then allowed to cool to room temperature. The reaction solution was discharged into water (300 mL) and extracted with toluene (300 mL). The organic layer was concentrated under reduced pressure to obtain Compound IM3 (17.3 g, yield 99%).
GC-MS: m / z = 293 ([M] + )
 化合物IM5及び化合物IM6は、以下の方法で合成した。反応式を以下に示す。下記式中のpが5の化合物が、化合物IM5であり、pが6の化合物が、化合物IM6である。 Compound IM5 and Compound IM6 were synthesized by the following method. The reaction formula is shown below. The compound in which p is 5 in the following formula is Compound IM5, and the compound in which p is 6 is Compound IM6.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 (化合物IM5の合成)
 冷却管及び温度計を付した50mL四つ口フラスコ中に、化合物IM2(2.7g)、1,5-ジブロモペンタン(1.1g)(東京化成工業株式会社製)、炭酸カリウム(1.7g)、DMF(20mL)を仕込み、80℃で2.5時間撹拌した。反応液を水に排出し、析出した結晶を濾過して取り出した。この結晶をメタノールで洗浄し、化合物IM5を2.1g得た(収率71%)。
(Synthesis of Compound IM5)
In a 50 mL four-necked flask equipped with a condenser and a thermometer, Compound IM2 (2.7 g), 1,5-dibromopentane (1.1 g) (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), potassium carbonate (1.7 g) ) And DMF (20 mL) were added, and the mixture was stirred at 80 ° C. for 2.5 hours. The reaction solution was discharged into water, and the precipitated crystals were filtered out. The crystals were washed with methanol to obtain 2.1 g of Compound IM5 (yield 71%).
 (化合物IM6の合成)
 化合物IM5の合成における1,5-ジブロモペンタンを1,6-ジブロモヘキサン(東京化成工業株式会社製)に代えた以外は同様の手順で、化合物IM6を得た(収率82%)。
(Synthesis of Compound IM6)
Compound IM6 was obtained in the same procedure except that 1,5-dibromopentane in the synthesis of compound IM5 was replaced with 1,6-dibromohexane (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) (yield 82%).
 <製造例2>
 化合物C1~C5を合成した。化合物C1は、下記式で表される化合物である。
<Production Example 2>
Compounds C1 to C5 were synthesized. Compound C1 is a compound represented by the following formula.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
 化合物C2~C4は、下記式で表される化合物である。化合物C2は、下記式中のRが2,6-ジ-t-ブチル-4-メチルシクロヘキシル基である。化合物C3は、下記式中のRが4-t-ブチルシクロヘキシル基である。化合物C4は、下記式中のRがt-ブチル基である。 Compounds C2 to C4 are compounds represented by the following formula. In the compound C2, R in the following formula is a 2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methylcyclohexyl group. In the compound C3, R in the following formula is a 4-t-butylcyclohexyl group. In the compound C4, R in the following formula is a t-butyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 化合物C5は、下記式で表される化合物である。 Compound C5 is a compound represented by the following formula.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
 化合物C1~C4を得た反応式を以下に示す。式中のp及び対応する化合物を、表1に示す。合成に使用した化合物IM12、化合物IM13及び化合物IM14の構造を以下に示す。 The reaction formula for obtaining the compounds C1 to C4 is shown below. Table 1 shows p and the corresponding compounds in the formula. The structures of Compound IM12, Compound IM13, and Compound IM14 used for the synthesis are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
 (化合物C1の合成)
 冷却管及び温度計を付した50mL四つ口フラスコ中に、化合物IM6(2.0g)、特開2000-310841号公報に記載の方法と同様にして合成した化合物IM12(2.0g)、ピペリジン(0.06g)、エタノール(13mL)を混合し、75℃で18時間撹拌した。室温まで放冷し、析出した結晶を濾過して取り出し、エタノールで洗浄して、化合物C1(3.5g,収率93%)を得た。
 LC-MS:m/z=1164([M+H]
(Synthesis of Compound C1)
In a 50 mL four-necked flask equipped with a condenser and a thermometer, compound IM6 (2.0 g), compound IM12 (2.0 g) synthesized in the same manner as described in JP 2000-310841 A, piperidine (0.06 g) and ethanol (13 mL) were mixed and stirred at 75 ° C. for 18 hours. The mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature, and the precipitated crystals were filtered out and washed with ethanol to obtain Compound C1 (3.5 g, yield 93%).
LC-MS: m / z = 1164 ([M + H] + )
 (化合物C2の合成)
 化合物C1の合成における化合物IM6を化合物IM5に代えた以外は同様の手順で、化合物C2を得た(収率81%)。
LC-MS:m/z1150([M+H]
(Synthesis of Compound C2)
Compound C2 was obtained in the same procedure except that Compound IM6 in the synthesis of Compound C1 was replaced with Compound IM5 (yield 81%).
LC-MS: m / z 1150 ([M + H] + )
 (化合物C3の合成)
 化合物C1の合成における化合物IM6を化合物IM5に代え、化合物IM12を、化合物IM12の合成と同様にして得た化合物IM13に代えた以外は同様の手順で、化合物C3を得た(収率61%)。
 LC-MS:m/z=1010([M+H]
(Synthesis of Compound C3)
Compound C3 was obtained in the same procedure except that Compound IM6 in the synthesis of Compound C1 was replaced with Compound IM5 and Compound IM12 was replaced with Compound IM13 obtained in the same manner as the synthesis of Compound IM12 (yield 61%) .
LC-MS: m / z = 1010 ([M + H] + )
 (化合物C4の合成)
 化合物C1の合成における化合物IM6を化合物IM5に代え、化合物IM12を化合物IM14(東京化成工業株式会社製)に代えた以外は同様の手順で、化合物C4を得た(収率80%)。
 LC-MS:m/z=846([M+H]
(Synthesis of Compound C4)
Compound C4 was obtained in the same procedure except that Compound IM6 in the synthesis of Compound C1 was replaced with Compound IM5 and Compound IM12 was replaced with Compound IM14 (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) (yield 80%).
LC-MS: m / z = 846 ([M + H] + )
 (化合物C5の合成)
 冷却管及び温度計を付した25mL四つ口フラスコ中で、化合物IM3(1.2g)、IM12(1.5g)、ピペリジン(0.02g)、エタノール(4mL)の混合液を75℃で1時間撹拌した。室温まで放冷し、析出している結晶を濾過して取り出した。得られた結晶をエタノールで洗浄し、化合物C5を1.9g得た(収率80%)。以下に反応式を示す。
LC-MS:m/z=569([M+H]
(Synthesis of Compound C5)
In a 25 mL four-necked flask equipped with a condenser and a thermometer, a mixture of compound IM3 (1.2 g), IM12 (1.5 g), piperidine (0.02 g), and ethanol (4 mL) was mixed at 75 ° C. with 1 Stir for hours. The mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature, and the precipitated crystals were filtered out. The obtained crystals were washed with ethanol to obtain 1.9 g of Compound C5 (yield 80%). The reaction formula is shown below.
LC-MS: m / z = 569 ([M + H] + )
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
<比較製造例(比較例化合物)> <Comparative Production Example (Comparative Example Compound)>
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
(比較例化合物Z1の合成)
 特開2011-184414号公報に記載の方法と同様にして、比較例化合物Z1を得た。
(Synthesis of Comparative Compound Z1)
Comparative Example Compound Z1 was obtained in the same manner as described in JP2011-184414A.
(比較例化合物Z2の合成)
 特開2014-194508号公報に記載の方法と同様にして、比較例化合物Z2を得た。
(Synthesis of Comparative Compound Z2)
Comparative Example Compound Z2 was obtained in the same manner as described in JP-A-2014-194508.
(比較例化合物Z3の合成) (Synthesis of Comparative Compound Z3)
 特開2009-067973号公報に記載の方法と同様にして、比較例化合物Z3を得た。
(比較例化合物Z4の合成)
 US2986528号公報に記載の方法と同様にして、比較例化合物Z4を得た。
Comparative Example Compound Z3 was obtained in the same manner as described in JP-A-2009-069773.
(Synthesis of Comparative Compound Z4)
Comparative Example Z4 was obtained in the same manner as in the method described in US2986528.
 各製造例で得られた化合物について、以下の評価を行った。結果を表2に示す。
 <分光特性試験>
 各化合物のクロロホルム中での吸収スペクトルを測定し、吸収極大波長(λmax)及び400nmにおけるグラム吸光係数を測定し下記基準により評価した。
測定機器:日本分光社製紫外可視分光光度計V-560
 A:グラム吸光係数が30以上
 B:グラム吸光係数が20以上、30未満
 C:グラム吸光係数が10以上、20未満
 D:グラム吸光係数が10未満
The following evaluation was performed about the compound obtained by each manufacture example. The results are shown in Table 2.
<Spectral characteristic test>
The absorption spectrum of each compound in chloroform was measured, the absorption maximum wavelength (λmax) and the Gram extinction coefficient at 400 nm were measured and evaluated according to the following criteria.
Measuring instrument: UV-Vis spectrophotometer V-560 manufactured by JASCO Corporation
A: Gram extinction coefficient of 30 or more B: Gram extinction coefficient of 20 or more and less than 30 C: Gram extinction coefficient of 10 or more and less than 20 D: Gram extinction coefficient of less than 10
 <耐光性試験>
 製造例及び比較製造例で得た一部の化合物について、耐光性試験を行った。各化合物10mgを、ポリメタクリレート8重量%トルエン溶液5mLに溶融し、ガラス基板上にスピンコート法により塗布し、乾燥させることで膜厚1.5μmの薄膜を作製した。
作製した薄膜にキセノンランプ(142klux)の光を連続的に96時間照射し、照射前(0時間)、照射後の薄膜の透過率を分光光度計で測定し、下記式(1)に従って色素残存率を測定した。
 色素残存率(%)={(1-T)/(1-T)}×100   (1)
[ただし、Tはキセノンランプ照射前の透過率、Tはキセノンランプ照射後の透過率であり、T及びTは0~1である。]
なお、「透過率」とは、各化合物の吸収極大波長における透過率を表しており、色素残存率が高い程、化合物が光によって分解されにくく、耐光性が高いことを示す。
耐光性は、下記基準により評価した。
A:色素残存率が65%以上
B:色素残存率が40%以上、65%未満
C:色素残存率が10%以上、40%未満
D:色素残存率が10%未満
<Light resistance test>
A light resistance test was performed on some of the compounds obtained in Production Examples and Comparative Production Examples. 10 mg of each compound was melted in 5 mL of a polymethacrylate 8 wt% toluene solution, applied onto a glass substrate by a spin coat method, and dried to prepare a thin film having a thickness of 1.5 μm.
The prepared thin film was continuously irradiated with light from a xenon lamp (142 klux) for 96 hours, the transmittance of the thin film before and after irradiation (0 hour) was measured with a spectrophotometer, and the dye remaining according to the following formula (1) The rate was measured.
Dye residual ratio (%) = {(1-T 1 ) / (1-T 0 )} × 100 (1)
[However, T 0 is transmittance before xenon lamp irradiation, T 1 is the transmittance after xenon lamp irradiation, T 0 and T 1 is 0-1. ]
“Transmittance” represents the transmittance of each compound at the absorption maximum wavelength, and the higher the dye residual ratio, the less the compound is decomposed by light and the higher the light resistance.
Light resistance was evaluated according to the following criteria.
A: Dye remaining ratio is 65% or more B: Dye remaining ratio is 40% or more and less than 65% C: Dye remaining ratio is 10% or more and less than 40% D: Dye remaining ratio is less than 10%
 <耐熱性>
 製造例及び比較製造例で得た一部の化合物について、(株)島津製作所製の熱重量測定装置TGA-50を使用して下記の測定条件で熱分解による重量減少を測定し、初期重量から1%減量した温度を分解開始温度として測定した。
(測定条件)
試料量5mg、昇温速度10℃/分(最高到達温度400℃)、窒素雰囲気中、流量10mL/分の条件で測定した。
耐熱性は、分解開始温度から下記基準により評価した。
A:250℃以上
B:210℃以上250℃未満
C:210℃未満
<Heat resistance>
For some of the compounds obtained in the production examples and comparative production examples, the weight loss due to thermal decomposition was measured under the following measurement conditions using a thermogravimetry apparatus TGA-50 manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation. The temperature reduced by 1% was measured as the decomposition start temperature.
(Measurement condition)
The measurement was performed under the conditions of a sample amount of 5 mg, a heating rate of 10 ° C./min (maximum temperature reached 400 ° C.), and a flow rate of 10 mL / min in a nitrogen atmosphere.
The heat resistance was evaluated from the decomposition start temperature according to the following criteria.
A: 250 ° C. or higher B: 210 ° C. or higher and lower than 250 ° C. C: less than 210 ° C.
 <溶解度試験>
 製造例で得た化合物及び比較製造例で得た一部の化合物について、それぞれ20℃におけるトルエン、メチルエチルケトン(MEK)及びプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)に対する溶解度(重量%)を、以下の方法により測定した。
各化合物をガラス製試験管に秤り取り、溶媒を混合し20℃で撹拌して溶解させ、その溶液の状態を目視観察し、溶解可能な重量濃度を評価した。
 A:3重量%以上溶解する
 B:1重量%以上3重量%未満溶解する
 C:1重量%未満しか溶解しない
<Solubility test>
About the compound obtained by the manufacture example, and the one part compound obtained by the comparative manufacture example, the solubility (weight%) with respect to toluene, methyl ethyl ketone (MEK), and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) in 20 degreeC, respectively was performed with the following method. It was measured.
Each compound was weighed into a glass test tube, mixed with a solvent, stirred and dissolved at 20 ° C., and the state of the solution was visually observed to evaluate the soluble weight concentration.
A: Dissolves 3% by weight or more B: Dissolves 1% by weight or more and less than 3% by weight C: Dissolves less than 1% by weight
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000031
 上記結果から、各製造例で製造した化合物C1~C5は、400nm付近に吸収極大波長を持ち、400nmにおいて高いグラム吸光係数を持つことが分かった。これらの化合物は、400nm付近の光を効果的に吸収できるものである。化合物C1~C5は、有機溶媒への溶解性が良好であった。また、これらの化合物は、耐久性も良好であった。例えば、化合物C1~C2は、耐光性、溶解度、耐熱性にともに優れる。 From the above results, it was found that the compounds C1 to C5 produced in each production example had an absorption maximum wavelength near 400 nm and a high gram extinction coefficient at 400 nm. These compounds can effectively absorb light around 400 nm. Compounds C1 to C5 had good solubility in organic solvents. These compounds also had good durability. For example, the compounds C1 and C2 are excellent in light resistance, solubility, and heat resistance.
 製造例3(アクリル系粘着剤組成物(a)の調製)
 アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル(2EHA)76重量部、N-ビニル-2-ピロリドン(NVP)18重量部、及びアクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル(HEA)16重量部から構成されるモノマー混合物に、光重合開始剤として、1-ヒドロキシシクロヘキシルフェニルケトン(商品名:イルガキュア184,波長200~370nmに吸収帯を有する,BASF社製)0.035重量部、2,2-ジメトキシ-1,2-ジフェニルエタン-1-オン(商品名:イルガキュア651,波長200~380nmに吸収帯を有する,BASF社製)0.035重量部を配合した後、粘度(計測条件:BH粘度計No.5ローター,10rpm,測定温度30℃)が約20Pa・sになるまで紫外線を照射して、上記モノマー成分の一部が重合したプレポリマー組成物(重合率:9%)を得た。次に、該プレポリマー組成物に、ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート(HDDA)0.080重量部、シランカップリング剤(商品名:KBM-403,信越化学工業(株)製)0.3重量部を添加して混合し、アクリル系粘着剤組成物(a)を得た。
Production Example 3 (Preparation of acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (a))
Photopolymerization started on a monomer mixture composed of 76 parts by weight of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA), 18 parts by weight of N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone (NVP), and 16 parts by weight of 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate (HEA). As an agent, 0.035 parts by weight of 1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone (trade name: Irgacure 184, having an absorption band at a wavelength of 200 to 370 nm, manufactured by BASF), 2,2-dimethoxy-1,2-diphenylethane-1 -ON (trade name: Irgacure 651, having an absorption band at a wavelength of 200 to 380 nm, manufactured by BASF) 0.035 parts by weight and then viscosity (measurement conditions: BH viscometer No. 5 rotor, 10 rpm, measurement temperature) (30 ° C) is irradiated with ultraviolet rays until it reaches about 20 Pa · s, and a part of the monomer component is polymerized. A repolymer composition (polymerization rate: 9%) was obtained. Next, 0.080 parts by weight of hexanediol diacrylate (HDDA) and 0.3 parts by weight of a silane coupling agent (trade name: KBM-403, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) are added to the prepolymer composition. And mixed to obtain an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (a).
 (粘着剤組成物(A1)の製造)
 製造例3で得られたアクリル系粘着剤組成物(a)に対して(アクリル系ポリマーを形成するモノマー成分を100重量部とする)、ブチルアクリレートに固形分15%となるように溶解させた2,4-ビス-[{4-(4-エチルヘキシルオキシ)-4-ヒドロキシ}-フェニル]-6-(4-メトキシフェニル)-1,3,5-トリアジン(商品名:Tinosorb S,表3中の「紫外線吸収剤(b1)」,吸収スペクトルの吸収極大波長:346nm,BASFジャパン社製)0.8重量部(固形分重量)と、ビス(2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾイル)-フェニルフォスフィンオキサイド(商品名:イルガキュア819、波長200~450nmに吸収帯域を有する、BASFジャパン社製)0.3重量部を添加し撹拌することにより粘着剤組成物(A1)を得た。
(Production of pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (A1))
With respect to the acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (a) obtained in Production Example 3 (the monomer component forming the acrylic polymer is 100 parts by weight), it was dissolved in butyl acrylate so as to have a solid content of 15%. 2,4-Bis-[{4- (4-ethylhexyloxy) -4-hydroxy} -phenyl] -6- (4-methoxyphenyl) -1,3,5-triazine (trade name: Tinosorb S, Table 3) “UV absorber (b1)”, absorption maximum wavelength of absorption spectrum: 346 nm, manufactured by BASF Japan Ltd.) 0.8 parts by weight (solid content weight) and bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) -phenyl Phosphine oxide (trade name: Irgacure 819, having an absorption band at a wavelength of 200 to 450 nm, manufactured by BASF Japan Ltd.) 0.3 parts by weight was added and stirred to add viscosity. Agent to give the composition a (A1).
 (粘着剤層(A1)の製造)
 前記粘着剤組成物(A1)を、離型フィルムの剥離処理されたフィルム上に、粘着剤層形成後の厚さが100μmとなるように塗布し、次いで、該粘着剤組成物層の表面に、離型フィルムを貼り合わせた。その後、照度:6.5mW/cm、光量:2000mJ/cm、ピーク波長:350nmの条件で紫外線照射を行い、粘着剤組成物層を光硬化させて、粘着剤層(A1)を形成した。粘着剤層(A1)中のアクリル系ポリマー重量(100重量%)に対して、紫外線吸収剤の添加量は、0.8重量%であった。
(Manufacture of adhesive layer (A1))
The pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (A1) is applied on the release film of the release film so that the thickness after forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is 100 μm, and then on the surface of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition layer. The release film was bonded together. Thereafter, the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition layer was photocured by irradiating with ultraviolet rays under the conditions of illuminance: 6.5 mW / cm 2 , light amount: 2000 mJ / cm 2 , and peak wavelength: 350 nm to form a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1). . The addition amount of the ultraviolet absorber was 0.8% by weight with respect to the acrylic polymer weight (100% by weight) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1).
 製造例4
 (粘着剤組成物(B1)の製造)
 温度計、攪拌機、還流冷却管及び窒素ガス導入管を備えたセパラブルフラスコに、ブチルアクリレート95重量部、アクリル酸5重量部、重合開始剤としてアゾビスイソブチロニトリル0.2重量部、及び酢酸エチル233重量部を投入した後、窒素ガスを流し、攪拌しながら約1時間窒素置換を行った。その後、60℃にフラスコを加熱し、7時間反応させて、重量平均分子量(Mw)110万のアクリル系ポリマーを得た。上記アクリル系ポリマー溶液(固形分を100重量部とする)に、イソシアネート系架橋剤として、トリメチロールプロパントリレンジイソシアネート(商品名:コロネートL,日本ポリウレタン工業(株)製)0.8重量部、シランカップリング剤(商品名:KBM-403、信越化学工業(株)製)0.1重量部を加えて粘着剤組成物(溶液)を調製した。
Production Example 4
(Production of pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B1))
In a separable flask equipped with a thermometer, a stirrer, a reflux condenser and a nitrogen gas introduction tube, 95 parts by weight of butyl acrylate, 5 parts by weight of acrylic acid, 0.2 part by weight of azobisisobutyronitrile as a polymerization initiator, and After 233 parts by weight of ethyl acetate was added, nitrogen gas was passed, and nitrogen substitution was performed for about 1 hour while stirring. Thereafter, the flask was heated to 60 ° C. and reacted for 7 hours to obtain an acrylic polymer having a weight average molecular weight (Mw) of 1.1 million. To the acrylic polymer solution (with a solid content of 100 parts by weight), 0.8 parts by weight of trimethylolpropane tolylene diisocyanate (trade name: Coronate L, manufactured by Nippon Polyurethane Industry Co., Ltd.) as an isocyanate crosslinking agent, A pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (solution) was prepared by adding 0.1 part by weight of a silane coupling agent (trade name: KBM-403, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.).
 (粘着剤層(B1)の製造)
 前記粘着剤組成物(B1:溶液)を、厚さ38μmのセパレータ(表面が剥離処理されたポリエチレンテレフタレート系フィルム:離型フィルム)上に、乾燥後の厚さが15μmとなるように塗布し、100℃で3分間乾燥層させて溶媒を除去し、粘着剤層を得た。その後、50℃で48時間加熱して架橋処理を行った。以下、この粘着剤層を「粘着剤層(B1)」と言う。なお、粘着剤層の露出面に、他の離型フィルムを貼り合わせた。
(Manufacture of adhesive layer (B1))
The pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B1: solution) was applied on a 38 μm-thick separator (polyethylene terephthalate film having a release treatment on the surface: release film) so that the thickness after drying was 15 μm, The solvent was removed by drying at 100 ° C. for 3 minutes to obtain an adhesive layer. Then, the crosslinking process was performed by heating at 50 degreeC for 48 hours. Hereinafter, this pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is referred to as “pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1)”. In addition, another release film was bonded to the exposed surface of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
 製造例5
 (粘着剤層(B2)の製造)
 製造例4の粘着剤層(B1)の製造において、乾燥後の厚さが20μmとなるように塗布したこと以外は、製造例4と同様にして粘着剤層を形成した。その後、50℃で48時間加熱して架橋処理を行った。以下、この粘着剤層を「粘着剤層(B2)」と言う。
Production Example 5
(Manufacture of adhesive layer (B2))
In the production of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1) of Production Example 4, a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer was formed in the same manner as in Production Example 4 except that the thickness after drying was 20 μm. Then, the crosslinking process was performed by heating at 50 degreeC for 48 hours. Hereinafter, this pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is referred to as “pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B2)”.
 実施例1
 (粘着剤組成物(A1‐1)の製造)
 製造例3の粘着剤組成物(A1)の製造において、ビス(2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾイル)-フェニルフォスフィンオキサイド(商品名:イルガキュア819、BASFジャパン社製)の添加量を0.6重量部に変え、さらに製造例2で得られた色素化合物(C5)「吸収スペクトルの吸収極大波長:394nm,半値全幅48.5nm」0.48重量部(固形分重量)を直接添加し撹拌したこと以外は、製造例3と同様にして粘着剤組成物(A1‐1)を得た。
Example 1
(Production of pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (A1-1))
In the production of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (A1) of Production Example 3, the addition amount of bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) -phenylphosphine oxide (trade name: Irgacure 819, manufactured by BASF Japan) was 0.6. In addition to the parts by weight, 0.48 parts by weight (solid content weight) of the dye compound (C5) “absorption maximum wavelength of absorption spectrum: 394 nm, full width at half maximum of 48.5 nm” obtained in Production Example 2 was directly added and stirred. Except for this, a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (A1-1) was obtained in the same manner as in Production Example 3.
 (粘着剤層(A1‐1)の製造)
 前記粘着剤組成物(A1‐1)を、離型フィルムの剥離処理されたフィルム上に、粘着剤層形成後の厚さが100μmとなるように塗布した以外は製造例1と同様にして粘着剤層(A1‐1)を形成した。粘着剤層(A1‐1)中のアクリル系ポリマー重量(100重量%)に対して、紫外線吸収剤の添加量は、0.8重量%、色素化合物(C5)の添加量は、0.48重量%であった。
(Manufacture of adhesive layer (A1-1))
Adhesive in the same manner as in Production Example 1 except that the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (A1-1) was coated on the release-treated film so that the thickness after forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer was 100 μm. An agent layer (A1-1) was formed. The addition amount of the UV absorber is 0.8% by weight and the addition amount of the dye compound (C5) is 0.48 with respect to the acrylic polymer weight (100% by weight) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1-1). % By weight.
 実施例2
 (粘着剤組成物(A1‐2)の製造)
 製造例3の粘着剤組成物(A1)の製造において、紫外線吸収剤を、2‐(2H‐ベンゾトリアゾール‐2‐イル)‐6‐(1‐メチル‐1‐フェニルエチル)‐4‐(1,1,3,3‐テトラメチルブチル)フェノール(商品名:Tinuvin 928、表3中の「紫外線吸収剤b2」、吸収スペクトルの吸収極大波長:349nm,BASFジャパン社製)1.0重量部(固形分重量)に変え、ビス(2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾイル)-フェニルフォスフィンオキサイド(商品名:イルガキュア819、BASFジャパン社製)の添加量を0.6重量部に変え、さらに製造例2で得られた色素化合物(C5)0.5重量部(固形分重量)を直接添加し撹拌したこと以外は、製造例3と同様にして粘着剤組成物(A1‐2)を得た。
Example 2
(Production of pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (A1-2))
In the production of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (A1) of Production Example 3, the ultraviolet absorber was 2- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) -6- (1-methyl-1-phenylethyl) -4- (1 , 1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl) phenol (trade name: Tinuvin 928, “UV absorber b2” in Table 3, absorption maximum wavelength of absorption spectrum: 349 nm, manufactured by BASF Japan Ltd.) 1.0 part by weight ( The amount of bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) -phenylphosphine oxide (trade name: Irgacure 819, manufactured by BASF Japan) was changed to 0.6 parts by weight. A pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (A1-2) was obtained in the same manner as in Production Example 3, except that 0.5 part by weight (solid content weight) of the dye compound (C5) obtained in 2 was directly added and stirred.
 (粘着剤層(A1‐2)の製造)
 前記粘着剤組成物(A1‐2)を、離型フィルムの剥離処理されたフィルム上に、粘着剤層形成後の厚さが175μmとなるように塗布した以外は製造例1と同様にして粘着剤層(A1‐2)を形成した。粘着剤層(A1‐2)中のアクリル系ポリマー重量(100重量%)に対して、紫外線吸収剤の添加量は、1.0重量%、色素化合物(C5)の添加量は、0.50重量%であった。
(Manufacture of adhesive layer (A1-2))
Adhesive in the same manner as in Production Example 1 except that the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (A1-2) was coated on the release-treated film so that the thickness after forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer was 175 μm. An agent layer (A1-2) was formed. The addition amount of the UV absorber is 1.0% by weight and the addition amount of the dye compound (C5) is 0.50 with respect to the acrylic polymer weight (100% by weight) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1-2). % By weight.
 実施例3
 (粘着剤組成物(B1‐1)の製造)
 製造例4の粘着剤組成物(B1)の製造において、上記アクリル系ポリマー溶液(固形分を100重量部とする)に、イソシアネート系架橋剤、シランカップリング剤と共に、紫外線吸収剤として、2,2’,4,4’-テトラヒドロキシベンゾフェノン(商品名:Seesorb 106,表3中の「紫外線吸収剤b3」,吸収スペクトルの吸収極大波長:348nm、シプロ化成株式会社製)3.0重量部(固形分重量)を加え、さらに製造例2で得られた色素化合物(C1)「吸収極大波長:393nm,半値全幅49.5nm)」3.0重量部(固形分重量)を加えたこと以外は製造例4と同様にして粘着剤組成物(溶液)を調製した。
Example 3
(Production of pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B1-1))
In the production of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B1) of Production Example 4, the acrylic polymer solution (with a solid content of 100 parts by weight) was combined with an isocyanate crosslinking agent and a silane coupling agent, 2 ′, 4,4′-tetrahydroxybenzophenone (trade name: Seesorb 106, “UV absorber b3” in Table 3, absorption maximum wavelength of absorption spectrum: 348 nm, manufactured by Sipro Kasei Co., Ltd.) 3.0 parts by weight ( Except that the pigment compound (C1) “absorption maximum wavelength: 393 nm, full width at half maximum 49.5 nm)” 3.0 parts by weight (solid content weight) obtained in Production Example 2 was added. A pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (solution) was prepared in the same manner as in Production Example 4.
 (粘着剤層(B1‐1)の製造)
 前記粘着剤組成物(B1‐1:溶液)を、厚さ38μmのセパレータ(表面が剥離処理されたポリエチレンテレフタレート系フィルム)上に、乾燥後の厚さが15μmとなるように塗布し、100℃で3分間乾燥層させて溶媒を除去し、粘着剤層を得た。その後、50℃で48時間加熱して架橋処理を行った。以下、この粘着剤層を「粘着剤層(B1-1)」と言う。粘着剤層(B1-1)中のアクリル系ポリマー重量(100重量%)に対して、紫外線吸収剤の添加量は、3.0重量%、色素化合物(C1)の添加量は、3.0重量%であった。
(Manufacture of adhesive layer (B1-1))
The pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B1-1: solution) was applied on a 38 μm-thick separator (polyethylene terephthalate film whose surface was peeled) so that the thickness after drying was 15 μm, and 100 ° C. And dried for 3 minutes to remove the solvent to obtain a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. Then, the crosslinking process was performed by heating at 50 degreeC for 48 hours. Hereinafter, this pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is referred to as “pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1-1)”. The added amount of the UV absorber is 3.0% by weight and the added amount of the dye compound (C1) is 3.0% with respect to the acrylic polymer weight (100% by weight) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1-1). % By weight.
 実施例4
 (粘着剤組成物(B1‐2)の製造)
 実施例3の粘着剤組成物(B1-1)の製造において、製造例2で得られた色素化合物(C1)の代わりに、製造例2で得られた色素化合物(C2)「吸収スペクトルの吸収極大波長393nm、半値全幅49.5nm)を3.0重量部(固形分重量)用いたこと以外は、実施例3と同様にして粘着剤組成物(溶液)を調製した。
Example 4
(Production of pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B1-2))
In the production of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B1-1) of Example 3, instead of the dye compound (C1) obtained in Production Example 2, the dye compound (C2) “absorption of absorption spectrum” obtained in Production Example 2 was used. A pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (solution) was prepared in the same manner as in Example 3 except that 3.0 parts by weight (solid content weight) of a maximum wavelength of 393 nm and a full width at half maximum of 49.5 nm were used.
 (粘着剤層(B1‐2)の製造)
 また、当該粘着剤組成物(溶液)を用いて、乾燥後の厚さを20μmとした以外は、実施例3と同様にして粘着剤層を形成した。その後、50℃で48時間加熱して架橋処理を行った。以下、この粘着剤層を「粘着剤層(B1‐2)」と言う。粘着剤層(B1‐2)中のアクリル系ポリマー重量(100重量%)に対して、紫外線吸収剤の添加量は、3.0重量%、色素化合物(C2)の添加量は、3.0重量%であった。
(Manufacture of adhesive layer (B1-2))
Moreover, the adhesive layer was formed like Example 3 except the thickness after drying having been 20 micrometers using the said adhesive composition (solution). Then, the crosslinking process was performed by heating at 50 degreeC for 48 hours. Hereinafter, this pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is referred to as “pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1-2)”. The addition amount of the UV absorber is 3.0% by weight and the addition amount of the dye compound (C2) is 3.0% with respect to the acrylic polymer weight (100% by weight) in the adhesive layer (B1-2). % By weight.
 実施例5
 (粘着剤組成物(B1‐3)の製造)
 実施例3の粘着剤組成物(B1-1)の製造において、紫外線吸収剤(b3)を添加しなかったこと以外は、実施例3と同様にして粘着剤組成物(溶液)を調製した。
Example 5
(Production of pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B1-3))
A pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (solution) was prepared in the same manner as in Example 3 except that the ultraviolet absorber (b3) was not added in the production of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B1-1) of Example 3.
 (粘着剤層(B1‐3)の製造)
 また、当該粘着剤組成物(溶液)を用いて、乾燥後の厚さを20μmとした以外は、実施例3と同様にして粘着剤層を形成した。その後、50℃で48時間加熱して架橋処理を行った。以下、この粘着剤層を「粘着剤層(B2-2)」と言う。粘着剤層(B1‐3)中のアクリル系ポリマー重量(100重量%)に対して、色素化合物(C2)の添加量は、3.0重量%であった。
(Manufacture of adhesive layer (B1-3))
Moreover, the adhesive layer was formed like Example 3 except the thickness after drying having been 20 micrometers using the said adhesive composition (solution). Then, the crosslinking process was performed by heating at 50 degreeC for 48 hours. Hereinafter, this pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is referred to as “pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B2-2)”. The amount of the dye compound (C2) added was 3.0% by weight relative to the weight of the acrylic polymer (100% by weight) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1-3).
 比較例2
 (粘着剤組成物(A1‐3)の製造)
 実施例1の粘着剤組成物(A1-1)の製造において、紫外線吸収剤b1の使用量を1.0重量部に変え、製造例2で得られた色素化合物(C5)の代わりに、色素化合物(C6)(「BONASORB UA3911」、クロロホルム溶媒中での吸収スペクトルの吸収極大波長:395nm,半値全幅48nm,オリエント工業株式会社製)0.45重量部をN-ビニル-2-ピロリドン(NVP)で6重量%になるよう溶解して添加したこと以外は、実施例1と同様にして粘着剤組成物を調製した。
Comparative Example 2
(Production of pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (A1-3))
In the production of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (A1-1) of Example 1, the amount of the ultraviolet absorber b1 used was changed to 1.0 part by weight, and instead of the pigment compound (C5) obtained in Production Example 2, a pigment was used. Compound (C6) (“BONASORB UA3911”, absorption maximum wavelength of absorption spectrum in chloroform solvent: 395 nm, full width at half maximum of 48 nm, manufactured by Orient Kogyo Co., Ltd.) 0.45 parts by weight of N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone (NVP) A pressure-sensitive adhesive composition was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that it was dissolved and added so as to be 6% by weight.
 (粘着剤層(A1‐3)の製造)
 また、当該粘着剤組成物を用いて、実施例1と同様にして粘着剤層(A1-3)を形成した。
粘着剤層(A1-3)中のアクリル系ポリマー重量(100重量%)に対して、紫外線吸収剤の添加量は、1.0重量%、色素化合物(C6)の添加量は、0.45重量%であった。
(Manufacture of adhesive layer (A1-3))
Further, using the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1-3) was formed in the same manner as in Example 1.
The addition amount of the UV absorber is 1.0% by weight and the addition amount of the dye compound (C6) is 0.45% with respect to the acrylic polymer weight (100% by weight) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1-3). % By weight.
 比較例3
 (粘着剤組成物(B1‐4)の製造)
 実施例3の(粘着剤組成物(B1-1)の製造において、紫外線吸収剤b3の使用量を2.0重量部に変え、製造例2で得られた色素化合物(C1)の代わりに、色素化合物(C6)(「BONASORB UA3911」、クロロホルム溶媒中での吸収スペクトルの吸収極大波長:395nm、半値全幅48nm、オリエント工業株式会社製)2.5重量部をN,N-ジメチルホルムアミドに10重量%になるよう溶解して添加し、乾燥温度を100℃で3分間、155℃で5分間としたこと以外は、実施例3と同様にして粘着剤組成物を調製した。
Comparative Example 3
(Production of pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B1-4))
In the production of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B1-1) of Example 3, the amount of the ultraviolet absorber b3 was changed to 2.0 parts by weight, and instead of the dye compound (C1) obtained in Production Example 2, Dye compound (C6) ("BONASORB UA3911", absorption maximum wavelength of absorption spectrum in chloroform solvent: 395 nm, full width at half maximum 48 nm, manufactured by Orient Kogyo Co., Ltd.) 2.5 parts by weight in N, N-dimethylformamide A pressure-sensitive adhesive composition was prepared in the same manner as in Example 3 except that the composition was dissolved and added so that the drying temperature was 100 ° C. for 3 minutes and 155 ° C. for 5 minutes.
 (粘着剤層(B1‐4)の製造)
 また、当該粘着剤組成物(溶液)を用いて、乾燥後の厚さを20μmとした以外は、実施例3と同様にして粘着剤層を形成した。その後、50℃で48時間加熱して架橋処理を行った。以下、この粘着剤層を「粘着剤層(B1‐4)」と言う。粘着剤層(B1‐4)中のアクリル系ポリマー重量(100重量%)に対して、紫外線吸収剤の添加量は、2.0重量%、色素化合物(C6)の添加量は、2.5重量%であった。
(Manufacture of adhesive layer (B1-4))
Moreover, the adhesive layer was formed like Example 3 except the thickness after drying having been 20 micrometers using the said adhesive composition (solution). Then, the crosslinking process was performed by heating at 50 degreeC for 48 hours. Hereinafter, this pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is referred to as “pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1-4)”. The addition amount of the UV absorber is 2.0% by weight and the addition amount of the dye compound (C6) is 2.5% with respect to the acrylic polymer weight (100% by weight) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1-4). % By weight.
 (評価)
 実施例1~5及び比較例2~3で得られて粘着剤層について、以下の評価を行った。結果を表3、表4に示す。なお、比較例1には、製造例3で得られた粘着剤層(A1)を用いた評価した。
(Evaluation)
The pressure-sensitive adhesive layers obtained in Examples 1 to 5 and Comparative Examples 2 to 3 were evaluated as follows. The results are shown in Tables 3 and 4. In Comparative Example 1, evaluation was performed using the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1) obtained in Production Example 3.
 <透過率、色相の測定:初期値>
 実施例及び比較例で得られた粘着剤層の離型フィルムを剥離して、スライドガラス(商品名:白研磨 No.1、厚さ:0.8~1.0mm、全光線透過率:92%、ヘイズ:0.2%、松浪硝子工業(株)製)に貼り合わせた。さらに他方の離型フィルムを剥離して、同じスライドガラスを貼り合せ、オートクレーブ処理(50℃、0.5MPa、15分)を経て、スライドガラス/粘着剤層/スライドガラスの層構成を有する試験片を作製した。作成した試験片を、分光光度計(製品名:U4100、(株)日立ハイテクノロジーズ製)で測定した。波長350nm~780nmの範囲における透過率(表3には、380nm、400nm、420nm、440nmの測定値を示す)を測定し、透過Y値、透過色相(L, a*, b)はD65光源、視野2度での色相を測定した。
<Measurement of transmittance and hue: initial values>
The release film of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer obtained in the examples and comparative examples was peeled off, and a slide glass (trade name: white polishing No. 1, thickness: 0.8 to 1.0 mm, total light transmittance: 92 %, Haze: 0.2%, Matsunami Glass Industrial Co., Ltd.). Further, the other release film was peeled off, the same slide glass was bonded, and after autoclave treatment (50 ° C., 0.5 MPa, 15 minutes), a test piece having a layer configuration of slide glass / adhesive layer / slide glass Was made. The prepared test piece was measured with a spectrophotometer (product name: U4100, manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation). The transmittance in the wavelength range of 350 nm to 780 nm (measured values of 380 nm, 400 nm, 420 nm, and 440 nm are shown in Table 3), and the transmission Y value and transmission hue (L * , a * , b * ) are D65. Hue was measured with a light source and a field of view of 2 degrees.
 <信頼性の評価>
 前述の手法で初期測定を行った試験片を85℃、85%RHのオーブン中に500時間投入し、耐熱性試験を実施した。また同様にして紫外線フェード試験機(装置名;紫外線フェードメーター試験機U48、スガ試験機株式会社製)に試験片を投入し、100時間連続照射して耐光性試験を実施した。試験後の試験片を、初期測定と同様にして、透過Y値、透過色相(L, a*, b)の測定を実施した。試験前後のY値の変化ΔY,色相変化ΔEを計算で求め、ΔY≦0.3、ΔE≦1.0の場合を合格(OK)、それ以外を不合格(NG)とした。
<Reliability evaluation>
The test piece subjected to the initial measurement by the above-described method was put in an oven at 85 ° C. and 85% RH for 500 hours to perform a heat resistance test. Similarly, a test piece was placed in an ultraviolet fade tester (device name; ultraviolet fademeter tester U48, manufactured by Suga Test Instruments Co., Ltd.), and a light resistance test was performed by continuously irradiating for 100 hours. The test piece after the test was measured for the transmission Y value and the transmission hue (L * , a * , b * ) in the same manner as the initial measurement. The Y value change ΔY and the hue change ΔE * before and after the test were calculated, and the case of ΔY ≦ 0.3 and ΔE * ≦ 1.0 was accepted (OK), and the others were rejected (NG).
 <接着性>
 実施例及び比較例で得られた粘着剤層から、長さ100mm、幅20mmのシート片を切り出した。次いで、粘着剤層の一方の離型フィルムを剥離して、PETフィルム(商品名:ルミラー S-10、厚さ:25μm、東レ(株)製)を貼付(裏打ち)した。次に、他方の離型フィルムを剥離して、試験板としてガラス板(商品名:ソーダライムガラス♯0050、松浪硝子工業(株)製)に、2kgローラー、1往復の圧着条件で圧着し、試験板/粘着剤層/PETフィルムから構成されるサンプルを作製した。得られたサンプルについて、オートクレーブ処理(50℃、0.5MPa、15分)し、その後、23℃、50%R.H.の雰囲気下で30分間放冷した。放冷後、引張試験機(装置名:オートグラフ AG-IS、(株)島津製作所製)を用い、JIS Z0237に準拠して、23℃、50%R.H.の雰囲気下、引張速度300mm/分、剥離角度180°の条件で、試験板から粘着シート(粘着剤層/PETフィルム)を引きはがし、180°引き剥がし接着力(N/20mm)を測定した。
<Adhesiveness>
A sheet piece having a length of 100 mm and a width of 20 mm was cut out from the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer obtained in Examples and Comparative Examples. Next, one release film of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer was peeled off, and a PET film (trade name: Lumirror S-10, thickness: 25 μm, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.) was attached (backed). Next, the other release film is peeled off, and a glass plate (trade name: soda lime glass # 0050, manufactured by Matsunami Glass Industry Co., Ltd.) is used as a test plate, and is crimped with a 2 kg roller and one reciprocating pressure condition. A sample composed of a test plate / adhesive layer / PET film was prepared. The obtained sample was autoclaved (50 ° C., 0.5 MPa, 15 minutes), and then 23 ° C., 50% R.D. H. And allowed to cool for 30 minutes. After allowing to cool, a tensile tester (device name: Autograph AG-IS, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) was used, and the temperature was 23 ° C. and 50% R.D. according to JIS Z0237. H. Under the above conditions, the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet (pressure-sensitive adhesive layer / PET film) was peeled off from the test plate under the conditions of a tensile speed of 300 mm / min and a peeling angle of 180 °, and the 180 ° peel-off adhesive strength (N / 20 mm) was measured.
 <全光線透過率、ヘイズ>
 実施例及び比較例で得られた粘着剤層から、一方の離型フィルムを剥離して、スライドガラス(商品名:白研磨 No.1、厚さ:0.8~1.0mm、全光線透過率:92%、ヘイズ:0.2%、松浪硝子工業(株)製)に貼り合わせた。さらに他方の離型フィルムを剥離して、粘着剤層(A)/スライドガラスの層構成を有する試験片を作製した。上記試験片の可視光領域における全光線透過率、ヘイズ値を、ヘイズメーター(装置名:HM-150、(株)村上色彩研究所製)を用いて測定した。
<Total light transmittance, haze>
One release film was peeled off from the pressure-sensitive adhesive layers obtained in Examples and Comparative Examples, and a slide glass (trade name: white polishing No. 1, thickness: 0.8 to 1.0 mm, total light transmission) Rate: 92%, haze: 0.2%, manufactured by Matsunami Glass Industrial Co., Ltd.). Further, the other release film was peeled off to prepare a test piece having a layer structure of pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A) / slide glass. The total light transmittance and haze value in the visible light region of the test piece were measured using a haze meter (device name: HM-150, manufactured by Murakami Color Research Laboratory).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000033
 以下では、粘着剤層付き偏光フィルムを作製して評価した。 Hereinafter, a polarizing film with an adhesive layer was produced and evaluated.
 (シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(G))
 厚さ25μmのシクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(商品名ゼオノアフィルム,日本ゼオン株式会社製)を用いた。
(Cycloolefin polymer film (G))
A cycloolefin polymer film (trade name: ZEONOR FILM, manufactured by Nippon Zeon Co., Ltd.) having a thickness of 25 μm was used.
 (偏光子(P1)の製造)
 ヨウ素が含浸された厚さ5μmの延伸ポリビニルアルコールフィルムからなる偏光子を用いた。偏光子(又は保護フィルムを貼り合わせた偏光フィルム)の単体透過率Y値は、42.4%、偏光度は99.995であった。
(Manufacture of polarizer (P1))
A polarizer made of a stretched polyvinyl alcohol film having a thickness of 5 μm impregnated with iodine was used. The single transmittance Y value of the polarizer (or the polarizing film with the protective film bonded) was 42.4%, and the degree of polarization was 99.995.
 (アクリル系樹脂フィルム(E))
 特開2010-284840号公報の製造例1に記載のイミド化MS樹脂100重量部からなる樹脂ペレットを、100.5kPa、100℃で12時間乾燥させ、単軸の押出機にてダイス温度270℃でTダイから押出してフィルム状に成形した(厚さ80μm)。さらに当該フィルムを、その搬送方向に150℃の雰囲気下に延伸し(厚さ40μm)、次いでフィルム搬送方向と直交する方向に150℃の雰囲気下に延伸して、厚さ20μmのアクリル系樹脂フィルムを得た。
(Acrylic resin film (E))
Resin pellets consisting of 100 parts by weight of imidized MS resin described in Production Example 1 of JP 2010-284840 A are dried at 100.5 kPa at 100 ° C. for 12 hours, and a die temperature of 270 ° C. in a single screw extruder. And extruded from a T-die to form a film (thickness 80 μm). Further, the film is stretched in an atmosphere of 150 ° C. in the transport direction (thickness 40 μm), and then stretched in an atmosphere of 150 ° C. in a direction orthogonal to the film transport direction, and an acrylic resin film having a thickness of 20 μm. Got.
 (位相差フィルム(H))
 厚み56μmのポリカーボネートフィルム(日東電工株式会社製「NRF」、面内位相差Re(550):135nm)を用いた。
(Phase difference film (H))
A polycarbonate film having a thickness of 56 μm (“NRF” manufactured by Nitto Denko Corporation, in-plane retardation Re (550): 135 nm) was used.
 比較例4
 粘着剤層(A1)/シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(G)/偏光子(P1)/アクリル系樹脂フィルム(E)/粘着剤層(B1:層間接着剤層)/位相差フィルム(H)/粘着剤層(B2)の構成を有する粘着剤層付き偏光フィルムを作製した。
 粘着剤層(A1)は、製造例3で製造したものを用いた。
 粘着剤層(B1)は、製造例4で製造したものを用いた。
 粘着剤層(B2)は、製造例5で製造したものを用いた。
 粘着剤層付き偏光フィルムを作製にあたっては、各粘着剤層を介して、各フィルムを貼り合わせた。なお、偏光子(P1)の両側のシクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(G)及びアクリル系樹脂フィルム(E)は、ポリビニルアルコール系接着剤を用いて貼り合せた。
 得られた、粘着剤層付き偏光フィルムは、有機EL表示装置に用いる光学積層体とし用いることができ、粘着剤層(A1)が視認側、粘着剤層(B2)が有機ELパネル側に対応する。
Comparative Example 4
Adhesive layer (A1) / cycloolefin polymer film (G) / polarizer (P1) / acrylic resin film (E) / adhesive layer (B1: interlayer adhesive layer) / retardation film (H) / adhesive The polarizing film with an adhesive layer which has a structure of a layer (B2) was produced.
The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1) used was manufactured in Production Example 3.
The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1) used was manufactured in Production Example 4.
The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B2) used was manufactured in Production Example 5.
In producing the polarizing film with the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, the films were bonded together via the pressure-sensitive adhesive layers. The cycloolefin polymer film (G) and the acrylic resin film (E) on both sides of the polarizer (P1) were bonded using a polyvinyl alcohol adhesive.
The obtained polarizing film with an adhesive layer can be used as an optical laminate used for an organic EL display device, and the adhesive layer (A1) corresponds to the viewing side, and the adhesive layer (B2) corresponds to the organic EL panel side. To do.
 実施例6
 比較例4において、粘着剤層(A1)の代わりに、実施例1で製造した粘着剤層(A1-1)を用いたこと以外は比較例4と同様にして、粘着剤層(A1-1)/シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(G)/偏光子/アクリル系樹脂フィルム(E)/粘着剤層(B1)/位相差フィルム(H)/粘着剤層(B2)の構成を有する粘着剤層付き偏光フィルムを作製した。
Example 6
In Comparative Example 4, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1-1) was obtained in the same manner as in Comparative Example 4 except that the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1-1) produced in Example 1 was used instead of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1). ) / Cycloolefin polymer film (G) / polarizer / acrylic resin film (E) / adhesive layer (B1) / retardation film (H) / adhesive layer (B2) polarized light with an adhesive layer A film was prepared.
 実施例7
 比較例4において、粘着剤層(B2)の代わりに、実施例4で製造した粘着剤層(B1-2)を用いたこと以外は比較例4と同様にして、粘着剤層(A1)/シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(G)/偏光子/アクリル系樹脂フィルム(E)/粘着剤層(B1)/位相差フィルム(H)/粘着剤層(B1-2)の構成を有する粘着剤層付き偏光フィルムを作製した。
Example 7
In Comparative Example 4, in the same manner as in Comparative Example 4 except that the adhesive layer (B1-2) produced in Example 4 was used instead of the adhesive layer (B2), the adhesive layer (A1) / Polarized light with pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having the structure of cycloolefin polymer film (G) / polarizer / acrylic resin film (E) / pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1) / retardation film (H) / pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1-2) A film was prepared.
 実施例8
 比較例4において、粘着剤層(A1)の代わりに、実施例1で製造した粘着剤層(A1-1)を用いたこと、シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(G)の代わりに、表面処理層付保護フィルム(D-1)を用いたこと以外は比較例4と同様にして、粘着剤層(A1-1)/表面処理層付保護フィルム(D-1)/偏光子(P1)/アクリル系樹脂フィルム(E)/粘着剤層(B1)/位相差フィルム(H)/粘着剤層(B2)の構成を有する粘着剤層付き偏光フィルムを作製した。
Example 8
In Comparative Example 4, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1-1) produced in Example 1 was used instead of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1), and the protection with a surface treatment layer was used instead of the cycloolefin polymer film (G). Adhesive layer (A1-1) / Protective film with surface treatment layer (D-1) / Polarizer (P1) / Acrylic resin as in Comparative Example 4 except that the film (D-1) was used A polarizing film with a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having a configuration of film (E) / pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1) / retardation film (H) / pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B2) was produced.
 なお、表面処理層付保護フィルム(D-1)は下記に示す。表面処理層付保護フィルム(D-1)は下記基材フィルムA側が偏光子(P1)と接するように、ポリビニルアルコール系接着剤を用いて、貼り合せた。 The protective film with a surface treatment layer (D-1) is shown below. The protective film with surface treatment layer (D-1) was bonded using a polyvinyl alcohol-based adhesive so that the following base film A side was in contact with the polarizer (P1).
 (基材フィルムAの作製)
 特開2010-284840号公報の製造例1に記載のイミド化MS樹脂100重量部、及び6,6’,6’’-(1,3,5-トリアジン-2,4,6-トリイル)トリス(3-ヘキシルオキシ-2-メチルフェノール)(商品名:LA-F70、表1中の「紫外線吸収剤(b4)」、吸収スペクトルの最大吸収波長:357nm、(株)ADEKA製)0.65重量部を、2軸混練機にて220℃にて混合し、樹脂ペレットを作製した。得られた樹脂ペレットを、100.5kPa、100℃で12時間乾燥させ、単軸の押出機にてダイス温度270℃でTダイから押出してフィルム状に成形した(厚み160μm)。さらに当該フィルムを、その搬送方向に150℃の雰囲気下に延伸し(厚み80μm)、次いでフィルム搬送方向と直交する方向に150℃の雰囲気下に延伸して、厚み40μmの基材フィルムA((メタ)アクリル系樹脂フィルム)を得た。得られた基材フィルムAの波長380nmの光の透過率は7%、波長400nmの光の透過率は68%、420nmの光の透過率は90%、440nmの光の透過率は91%であった。
(Preparation of base film A)
100 parts by weight of imidized MS resin described in Production Example 1 of JP 2010-284840 A and 6,6 ′, 6 ″-(1,3,5-triazine-2,4,6-triyl) tris (3-Hexyloxy-2-methylphenol) (trade name: LA-F70, “UV absorber (b4)” in Table 1, maximum absorption wavelength of absorption spectrum: 357 nm, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) 0.65 Weight parts were mixed at 220 ° C. with a twin-screw kneader to produce resin pellets. The obtained resin pellets were dried at 100.5 kPa and 100 ° C. for 12 hours, extruded from a T-die at a die temperature of 270 ° C. with a single screw extruder, and formed into a film (thickness: 160 μm). Further, the film is stretched in an atmosphere of 150 ° C. in the transport direction (thickness 80 μm), and then stretched in an atmosphere of 150 ° C. in a direction orthogonal to the film transport direction to form a base film A (( (Meth) acrylic resin film). The base film A thus obtained has a light transmittance of 380 nm at a wavelength of 7%, a light transmittance at a wavelength of 400 nm of 68%, a light transmittance of 420 nm of 90%, and a light transmittance of 440 nm of 91%. there were.
 (表面処理層付保護フィルム(D-1)の作成)
 イソシアヌル酸トリアクリレート13部、ペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート16部、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート62部、及びイソホロンジイソシアネートポリウレタン9部を含む紫外線硬化型樹脂(商品名:ユニディック17-806、固形分:80%、溶媒:酢酸ブチル、DIC(株)製)100部に、製造例2で得られた色素化合物(C2)3.0重量部と、レベリング剤(商品名:GRANDIC PC-4100、DIC(株)製)5部、光重合開始剤として、ビス(2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾイル)-フェニルフォスフィンオキサイド(商品名:イルガキュア819、波長200~450nmに吸収帯域を有する、BASFジャパン社製)5重量部を混合し、固形分濃度が50%となるように、メチルイソブチルケトンで希釈して、ハードコート層形成用組成物を調製した。得られた基材フィルムA上に、前記ハードコート層形成用組成物を塗布して塗布層を形成し、当該塗布層を120℃で1分間加熱した。加熱後の塗布層に窒素雰囲気化で高圧水銀ランプにて積算光量2000mJ/cmの紫外線を照射して塗布層を硬化させて、8μmのハードコート層を形成した。得られた表面処理層付保護フィルム(D-1)の波長380nmの光の透過率は、0.2%、波長400nmの光の透過率は3.0%、420nmの光の透過率は65%、440nmの光の透過率は89%であり、表面処理層付保護フィルム(D-1)全重量(100重量%)に対して、色素化合物(C2)の添加量は、0.5重量%であった。
(Preparation of protective film with surface treatment layer (D-1))
UV curable resin containing 13 parts isocyanuric acid triacrylate, 16 parts pentaerythritol triacrylate, 62 parts dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, and 9 parts isophorone diisocyanate polyurethane (trade name: Unidic 17-806, solid content: 80%, Solvent: butyl acetate, manufactured by DIC Corporation), 100 parts by weight of the dye compound (C2) obtained in Production Example 2, and a leveling agent (trade name: GRANDIC PC-4100, manufactured by DIC Corporation) ) 5 parts, bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) -phenylphosphine oxide (trade name: Irgacure 819, having an absorption band at a wavelength of 200 to 450 nm, manufactured by BASF Japan) as a photopolymerization initiator, 5 weight The parts so that the solids concentration is 50%. Diluted with ethyl ketone, to prepare a hard coat layer forming composition. On the obtained base film A, the said composition for hard-coat layer formation was apply | coated, the application layer was formed, and the said application layer was heated at 120 degreeC for 1 minute. The heated coating layer was irradiated with ultraviolet rays having an integrated light quantity of 2000 mJ / cm 2 with a high-pressure mercury lamp in a nitrogen atmosphere to cure the coating layer to form an 8 μm hard coat layer. The obtained protective film with a surface treatment layer (D-1) has a light transmittance of 0.2%, a light transmittance of 400%, a light transmittance of 3.0%, and a light transmittance of 420 nm of 65%. %, The transmittance of light at 440 nm is 89%, and the addition amount of the dye compound (C2) is 0.5% with respect to the total weight (100% by weight) of the protective film with surface treatment layer (D-1). %Met.
 実施例9
 比較例4において、アクリル系樹脂フィルム(E)の代わりに、下記に示すアクリル系樹脂フィルム(E-1)を用いたこと、粘着剤層(B1)の代わりに、実施例3で製造した粘着剤層(B1-1)を用いたこと以外は比較例4と同様にして、粘着剤層(A1)/シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(G)/偏光子(P1)/アクリル系樹脂フィルム(E-1)/粘着剤層(B1-1)/位相差フィルム(H)/粘着剤層(B2)の構成を有する粘着剤層付き偏光フィルムを作製した。
Example 9
In Comparative Example 4, the acrylic resin film (E-1) shown below was used instead of the acrylic resin film (E), and the adhesive produced in Example 3 was used instead of the adhesive layer (B1). Adhesive layer (A1) / cycloolefin polymer film (G) / polarizer (P1) / acrylic resin film (E-1) in the same manner as Comparative Example 4 except that the adhesive layer (B1-1) was used. ) / Pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1-1) / Phase difference film (H) / Pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B2) A polarizing film with a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer was produced.
 なお、アクリル系樹脂フィルム(E-1)は下記に示す。 The acrylic resin film (E-1) is shown below.
 (アクリル系樹脂フィルム(E-1)の作製)
 特開2010-284840号公報の製造例1に記載のイミド化MS樹脂100重量部を塩化メチレンに溶解させて12重量%のドープ溶液を作製した。製造例2で得られた色素化合物(C1)1.2重量部を添加してアクリル系樹脂溶液を調製した。その後、離型処理を施したガラス板上に、前記アクリル系樹脂溶液を、乾燥後の厚さが40μmとなるように塗布し、60℃で2分間、さらに100℃で3分間乾燥させて溶媒を除去し、厚み40μmのアクリル系樹脂フィルム(E-1)を得た。得られたアクリル系樹脂フィルム(E-1)の波長380nmの光の透過率は、0.2%、波長400nmの光の透過率は1.2%、420nmの光の透過率は59%、440nmの光の透過率は89%であった。アクリル系樹脂フィルム(E-1)中のべースポリマー重量(100重量%)に対して、色素化合物(C1)の添加量は、1.2重量%であった。
(Preparation of acrylic resin film (E-1))
100 parts by weight of imidized MS resin described in Production Example 1 of JP 2010-284840 A was dissolved in methylene chloride to prepare a 12 wt% dope solution. An acrylic resin solution was prepared by adding 1.2 parts by weight of the dye compound (C1) obtained in Production Example 2. Thereafter, the acrylic resin solution is applied onto a glass plate that has been subjected to a mold release treatment so that the thickness after drying is 40 μm, and dried at 60 ° C. for 2 minutes, and further at 100 ° C. for 3 minutes. Then, an acrylic resin film (E-1) having a thickness of 40 μm was obtained. The acrylic resin film (E-1) thus obtained has a light transmittance of 380 nm at a wavelength of 0.2%, a light transmittance at a wavelength of 400 nm of 1.2%, a light transmittance of 420 nm of 59%, The transmittance of light at 440 nm was 89%. The amount of the dye compound (C1) added was 1.2% by weight based on the weight of the base polymer (100% by weight) in the acrylic resin film (E-1).
 実施例10
 比較例4において、アクリル系樹脂フィルム(E)の代わりに、下記に示すトリアセチルセルロースフィルム(F-1)を用いたこと、粘着剤層(B2)の代わりに実施例4で製造した粘着剤層(B1-2)を用いたこと以外は比較例4と同様にして、粘着剤層(A1)/シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(G)/偏光子(P1)/トリアセチルセルロースフィルム(F-1)/粘着剤層(B1)/位相差フィルム(H)/粘着剤層(B1-2)の構成を有する粘着剤層付き偏光フィルムを作製した。
Example 10
In Comparative Example 4, the triacetyl cellulose film (F-1) shown below was used instead of the acrylic resin film (E), and the adhesive produced in Example 4 instead of the adhesive layer (B2). Adhesive layer (A1) / cycloolefin polymer film (G) / polarizer (P1) / triacetylcellulose film (F-1) as in Comparative Example 4 except that the layer (B1-2) was used A polarizing film with a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having a structure of: / pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1) / retardation film (H) / pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1-2) was produced.
 なお、トリアセチルセルロースフィルム(F-1)は下記に示す。 The triacetylcellulose film (F-1) is shown below.
 (トリアセチルセルロースフィルム(F-1)の作製)
 UV吸収能を有する厚さ40μmのトリアセチルセルロースフィルム(商品名:KC4UY,コニカミノルタ社製)100重量部をジクロロメタン:エタノール:n-ブタノール=80:15:5の重量比率で調整した混合溶媒に撹拌溶解させ、固形分が20重量%になるように溶解液を調整し、さらに製造例2で得られた色素化合物(C5)を1.0重量部添加してトリアセチルセルロース溶解液を調製した。前記溶解液を、離型処理を施したガラス板上に乾燥後の厚みが20μmになるように塗布し、80℃で3分間、続いて120℃で3分間乾燥させて溶媒を除去し、ガラス板から剥離することで厚み20μmのトリアセチルセルロースフィルム(F1)を得た。得られたトリアセチルセルロースフィルム(F-1)の波長380nmの光の透過率は0.2%、波長400nmの光の透過率は8.8%、420nmの光の透過率は64%、440nmの光の透過率は90%であった。トリアセチルセルロースフィルム(F-1)中のべースポリマー重量(100重量%)に対して、色素化合物(C5)の添加量は、1.0重量%であった。
(Preparation of triacetyl cellulose film (F-1))
A mixed solvent prepared by adjusting 100 parts by weight of a 40 μm-thick triacetyl cellulose film (trade name: KC4UY, manufactured by Konica Minolta Co., Ltd.) having a UV absorbing ability at a weight ratio of dichloromethane: ethanol: n-butanol = 80: 15: 5. The solution was stirred and dissolved, and the solution was adjusted so that the solid content was 20% by weight. Further, 1.0 part by weight of the dye compound (C5) obtained in Production Example 2 was added to prepare a triacetylcellulose solution. . The solution is applied on a release-treated glass plate so that the thickness after drying is 20 μm, and the solvent is removed by drying at 80 ° C. for 3 minutes and then at 120 ° C. for 3 minutes to remove glass. A triacetyl cellulose film (F1) having a thickness of 20 μm was obtained by peeling from the plate. The obtained triacetylcellulose film (F-1) has a light transmittance of 0.2%, a light transmittance of 8.8 nm, a light transmittance of 8.8%, a light transmittance of 420 nm, a light transmittance of 64%, and a wavelength of 440 nm. The light transmittance was 90%. The amount of the dye compound (C5) added was 1.0% by weight relative to the weight of the base polymer (100% by weight) in the triacetylcellulose film (F-1).
 実施例11
 比較例4において、粘着剤層(A1)の代わりに、実施例1で製造した粘着剤層(A1-1)を用いたこと、シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(G)の代わりに、実施例8で作成した表面処理層付保護フィルム(D-1)を用いたこと、アクリル系樹脂フィルム(E)の代わりに、下記に示すシクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(G-1)を用いたこと、粘着剤層(B1)の代わりに、下記に示す粘着剤層(B3-1)を用いたこと以外は比較例4と同様にして、粘着剤層(A1-1)/表面処理層付保護フィルム(D-1)/偏光子(P1)/シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(G-1)/粘着剤層(B3-1)/位相差フィルム(H)/粘着剤層(B2)の構成を有する粘着剤層付き偏光フィルムを作製した。
Example 11
In Comparative Example 4, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1-1) produced in Example 1 was used instead of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1), and it was prepared in Example 8 instead of the cycloolefin polymer film (G). The surface-treated protective film (D-1) was used, the following cycloolefin polymer film (G-1) was used in place of the acrylic resin film (E), and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B1 In the same manner as in Comparative Example 4 except that the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B3-1) shown below was used instead of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (A1-1) / protective film with surface treatment layer (D-1) A polarizing film with a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer comprising: / polarizer (P1) / cycloolefin polymer film (G-1) / pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B3-1) / retardation film (H) / pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B2) Produced.
 なお、シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(G-1)、粘着剤層(B3-1)は下記に示す。表面処理層付保護フィルム(D1)は基材フィルムA側が偏光子(P1)と接するように、ポリビニルアルコール系接着剤を用いて、貼り合せた。 The cycloolefin polymer film (G-1) and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B3-1) are shown below. The protective film with surface treatment layer (D1) was bonded using a polyvinyl alcohol-based adhesive so that the base film A side was in contact with the polarizer (P1).
 (シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(G-1)の作製)
 材料樹脂として、シクロオレフィンポリマー(ノルボルネン系モノマーの開環重合体の水素添加物、商品名「ZEONOR1420R」、日本ゼオン社製、ガラス転移温度(Tg)は136℃)のペレットを用意し、100.5kPa、100℃で12時間乾燥させた。樹脂重量(100重量部)に対して、製造例2で得られた色素化合物(C2)を1.5重量部添加し、単軸押出機にてダイス温度260℃でTダイ式のフィルム溶融押出成形機を使用して、厚さ20μmのシクロオレフィンポリマー樹脂フィルム(G1)を得た。得られたシクロオレフィンポリマー樹脂フィルム(G1)の波長380nmの光の透過率は、2.5%、波長400nmの光の透過率は18%、420nmの光の透過率は75%、440nmの光の透過率は91%であった。シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(G-1)中のべースポリマー重量(100重量%)に対して、色素化合物(C2)の添加量は、1.5重量%であった。
(Production of cycloolefin polymer film (G-1))
As a material resin, a pellet of a cycloolefin polymer (a hydrogenated product of a ring-opening polymer of a norbornene-based monomer, trade name “ZEONOR1420R”, manufactured by Nippon Zeon Co., Ltd., glass transition temperature (Tg) of 136 ° C.) is prepared. It was dried at 5 kPa and 100 ° C. for 12 hours. 1.5 parts by weight of the dye compound (C2) obtained in Production Example 2 is added to the resin weight (100 parts by weight), and a T-die type film melt extrusion is performed at a die temperature of 260 ° C. with a single screw extruder. A cycloolefin polymer resin film (G1) having a thickness of 20 μm was obtained using a molding machine. The resulting cycloolefin polymer resin film (G1) has a light transmittance of 380 nm, a light transmittance of 2.5%, a light transmittance of a wavelength of 400 nm of 18%, a light transmittance of 420 nm of 75%, and a light of 440 nm. The transmittance of was 91%. The amount of the dye compound (C2) added was 1.5% by weight based on the weight of the base polymer (100% by weight) in the cycloolefin polymer film (G-1).
 (粘着剤組成物(B3-1)の製造)
 ゴム系ポリマーとしてスチレン-エチレン-プロピレン-スチレンブロック共重合体(SEPS、商品名:SEPTON 2063、スチレン含有量:13%、(株)クラレ製)100重量部と、粘着付与剤として水添テルペンフェノール(商品名:YSポリスターTH130、軟化点:130℃、水酸基価:60、ヤスハラケミカル(株)製)40.4重量部、石油系粘着付与剤(商品名:ピコラスチックA5、ビニルトルエン系粘着付与剤、軟化点:5℃、イーストマンコダック社製)61.7部、軟化剤としてポリブテン(商品名:HV-300、重量平均分子量:3000、JX日鉱日石エネルギー(株)製)21.3部を配合したトルエン溶液(粘着剤溶液)を固形分が30重量%になるように調整し、さらに製造例2で得られた色素化合物(C1)を2.0重量部添加して粘着剤組成物(B3-1:溶液)を調製した。
(Production of pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B3-1))
100 parts by weight of a styrene-ethylene-propylene-styrene block copolymer (SEPS, trade name: SEPTON 2063, styrene content: 13%, manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd.) as a rubber polymer, and hydrogenated terpene phenol as a tackifier (Product name: YS Polystar TH130, softening point: 130 ° C., hydroxyl value: 60, manufactured by Yasuhara Chemical Co., Ltd.) 40.4 parts by weight, petroleum-based tackifier (trade name: Picolastic A5, vinyltoluene-based tackifier , Softening point: 5 ° C., 61.7 parts by Eastman Kodak Co., Ltd., polybutene (trade name: HV-300, weight average molecular weight: 3000, manufactured by JX Nippon Oil & Energy Corporation) as a softening agent 21.3 parts Toluene solution (adhesive solution) formulated with a solid content of 30% by weight, and the color obtained in Production Example 2 A pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B3-1: solution) was prepared by adding 2.0 parts by weight of elemental compound (C1).
 (粘着剤層(B3-1)の製造)
 前記粘着剤組成物(B2-1:溶液)を、厚さ38μmのセパレータ(表面が剥離処理されたポリエチレンテレフタレート系フィルム)上に、乾燥後の厚さが15μmとなるように塗布し、120℃で3分間乾燥層させて溶媒を除去し、粘着剤層を得た。以下、この粘着剤層を「粘着剤層(B3-1)」と言う。粘着剤層(B3-1)中のゴム系ポリマー重量(100重量%)に対して、色素化合物(C1)の添加量は、2.0重量%であった。
(Manufacture of adhesive layer (B3-1))
The pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (B2-1: solution) was applied onto a 38 μm-thick separator (polyethylene terephthalate-based film whose surface was peeled) so that the thickness after drying was 15 μm, and 120 ° C. And dried for 3 minutes to remove the solvent to obtain a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. Hereinafter, this pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is referred to as “pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B3-1)”. The amount of the dye compound (C1) added was 2.0% by weight based on the weight of the rubber-based polymer (100% by weight) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (B3-1).
 実施例12
 比較例4において、位相差フィルム(H)の代わりに、下記に示す位相差フィルム(H-1)を用いたこと、粘着剤層(B2)の代わりに、実施例4で製造した粘着剤層(B1-2)を用いたこと以外は比較例4と同様にして、粘着剤層(A1)/シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(G)/偏光子(P1)/アクリル系樹脂フィルム(E)/粘着剤層(B1)/位相差フィルム(H-1)/粘着剤層(B1-2)の構成を有する粘着剤層付き偏光フィルムを作製した。
Example 12
In Comparative Example 4, the retardation film (H-1) shown below was used instead of the retardation film (H), and the adhesive layer produced in Example 4 was used instead of the adhesive layer (B2). Adhesive layer (A1) / cycloolefin polymer film (G) / polarizer (P1) / acrylic resin film (E) / adhesive as in Comparative Example 4 except that (B1-2) was used A polarizing film with an adhesive layer having the structure of layer (B1) / retardation film (H-1) / adhesive layer (B1-2) was produced.
 なお、位相差フィルム(H-1)は下記に示す。 The retardation film (H-1) is shown below.
 (位相差フィルム(H-1)の作製)
 イソソルビド(ISB)26.2重慮部、9,9-[4-(2-ヒドロキシエトキシ)フェニル]フルオレン(BHEPF)100.5重量部、1,4-シクロヘキサンジメタノール(1,4-CHDM)10.7重量部、ジフェニルカーボネート(DPC)105.1重量部、および、触媒として炭酸セシウム(0.2重量%水溶液)0.591重量部をそれぞれ反応容器に投入し、窒素雰囲気下にて、反応の第1段目の工程として、反応容器の熱媒温度を150℃にし、必要に応じて攪拌しながら、約15分原料を溶解させた。次いで、反応容器内の圧力を常圧から13.3kPaにし、反応容器の熱媒温度を190℃まで1時間で上昇させながら、発生するフェノールを反応容器外へ抜き出した。
 反応容器内温度を190℃で15分保持した後、第2段目の工程として、反応容器内の圧力を6.67kPaとし、反応容器の熱媒温度を230℃まで、15分で上昇させ、発生するフェノールを反応容器外へ抜き出した。攪拌機の攪拌トルクが上昇してくるので、8分で250℃まで昇温し、さらに発生するフェノールを取り除くため、反応容器内の圧力を0.200kPa以下に減圧した。所定の攪拌トルクに到達後、反応を終了し、生成した反応物を水中に押し出した後に、ペレット化を行い、BHEPF/ISB/1,4-CHDM=47.4モル%/37.1モル%/15.5モル%のポリカーボネート樹脂を得た。
 得られたポリカーボネート樹脂のガラス転移温度は136.6℃であり、還元粘度は0.395dL/gであった。得られたポリカーボネート樹脂を80℃で5時間真空乾燥をした後、樹脂重量(100重量部)に対して、色素化合物(C2)を1.0重量部添加し、単軸押出機にてダイス温度220℃でTダイ式のフィルム溶融押出成形機を使用して、厚さ120μmのポリカーボネート樹脂フィルムを作製した。得られたポリカーボネート樹脂フィルムを、テンター延伸機を用いて横延伸し、厚み50μmの位相差フィルム(H-1)を得た。その際、延伸倍率は250%であり、延伸温度を137~139℃とした。
 得られた位相差フィルム(H1)のRe(550)は137~147nmであり、Δnxyは0.0027~0.0029であった。位相差フィルム(H-1)中のべースポリマー重量(100重量%)に対して、色素化合物(C2)の添加量は1.0重量%であった。
(Production of retardation film (H-1))
Isosorbide (ISB) 26.2 considerations, 9,9- [4- (2-hydroxyethoxy) phenyl] fluorene (BHEPF) 100.5 parts by weight, 1,4-cyclohexanedimethanol (1,4-CHDM) 10.7 parts by weight, 105.1 parts by weight of diphenyl carbonate (DPC), and 0.591 parts by weight of cesium carbonate (0.2% by weight aqueous solution) as a catalyst were put in a reaction vessel, respectively, under a nitrogen atmosphere, As the first step of the reaction, the temperature of the heating medium in the reaction vessel was set to 150 ° C., and the raw materials were dissolved for about 15 minutes while stirring as necessary. Next, the pressure in the reaction vessel was changed from normal pressure to 13.3 kPa, and the generated phenol was extracted out of the reaction vessel while the temperature of the heat medium in the reaction vessel was increased to 190 ° C. over 1 hour.
After holding the reaction vessel temperature at 190 ° C. for 15 minutes, as a second step, the pressure in the reaction vessel is set to 6.67 kPa, and the heat medium temperature of the reaction vessel is increased to 230 ° C. in 15 minutes. The generated phenol was extracted out of the reaction vessel. Since the stirring torque of the stirrer increased, the temperature was raised to 250 ° C. in 8 minutes, and the pressure in the reaction vessel was reduced to 0.200 kPa or less in order to remove the generated phenol. After reaching a predetermined stirring torque, the reaction was terminated, and the reaction product formed was extruded into water, and then pelletized to obtain BHEPF / ISB / 1,4-CHDM = 47.4 mol% / 37.1 mol%. /15.5 mol% polycarbonate resin was obtained.
The obtained polycarbonate resin had a glass transition temperature of 136.6 ° C. and a reduced viscosity of 0.395 dL / g. The obtained polycarbonate resin was vacuum-dried at 80 ° C. for 5 hours, and then 1.0 part by weight of the dye compound (C2) was added to the weight of the resin (100 parts by weight). Using a T-die type film melt extrusion molding machine at 220 ° C., a polycarbonate resin film having a thickness of 120 μm was produced. The obtained polycarbonate resin film was horizontally stretched using a tenter stretching machine to obtain a retardation film (H-1) having a thickness of 50 μm. At that time, the draw ratio was 250%, and the draw temperature was 137 to 139 ° C.
Re (550) of the obtained retardation film (H1) was 137 to 147 nm, and Δnxy was 0.0027 to 0.0029. The amount of the dye compound (C2) added was 1.0% by weight relative to the weight of the base polymer (100% by weight) in the retardation film (H-1).
 (評価)
 実施例6~12及び比較例4で得られた粘着剤層付き偏光フィルムについて、以下の評価を行った。評価は以下の手法で行った。結果を表5、表6に示す。
(Evaluation)
The following evaluations were performed on the polarizing films with pressure-sensitive adhesive layers obtained in Examples 6 to 12 and Comparative Example 4. The evaluation was performed by the following method. The results are shown in Tables 5 and 6.
 <粘着剤層付き偏光フィルムの透過率、色相の測定:初期値>
 実施例及び比較例で得られた粘着剤層付き偏光フィルムの離型フィルムを剥離して、スライドガラス(商品名:白研磨 No.1、厚さ:0.8~1.0mm、全光線透過率:92%、ヘイズ:0.2%、松浪硝子工業(株)製)に貼り合わせた。さらに他方の離型フィルムを剥離して、同じスライドガラスを貼り合せ、オートクレーブ処理(50℃、0.5MPa、15分)を経て、スライドガラス/粘着剤層付き偏光フィルム/スライドガラスの層構成を有する試験片を作製した。試験片を有機EL表示パネル側の粘着剤層側(B1側)から測定光が入光するように測定用治具に取り付け、自動偏光フィルム測定装置(製品名:V7100、日本分光株式会社製)で測定した。波長380nm~780nmの範囲における透過率(表5には、380nm、400nm、420nm、440nmの測定値を示す)、単体Y値、単体色相(L, a*, b)を測定した。
<Measurement of transmittance and hue of polarizing film with pressure-sensitive adhesive layer: initial value>
The release film of the polarizing film with the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer obtained in Examples and Comparative Examples was peeled off, and a slide glass (trade name: white polishing No. 1, thickness: 0.8 to 1.0 mm, total light transmission) Rate: 92%, haze: 0.2%, manufactured by Matsunami Glass Industrial Co., Ltd.). Furthermore, the other release film is peeled off, the same slide glass is laminated, and after autoclave treatment (50 ° C., 0.5 MPa, 15 minutes), the layer configuration of slide glass / polarizing film with adhesive layer / slide glass is obtained. A test piece was prepared. A test piece is attached to a measurement jig so that measurement light enters from the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer side (B1 side) on the organic EL display panel side, and an automatic polarizing film measuring device (product name: V7100, manufactured by JASCO Corporation) Measured with The transmittance in the wavelength range of 380 nm to 780 nm (Table 5 shows measured values of 380 nm, 400 nm, 420 nm, and 440 nm), simple substance Y value, simple substance hue (L * , a * , b * ).
 <信頼性の評価>
 前述の手法で初期測定を行った試験片を85℃のオーブン中に500時間投入し、耐熱性試験を実施した。また同様にして紫外線フェード試験機(装置名;紫外線フェードメーター試験機U48、スガ試験機株式会社製)に視認側粘着剤層側(A1側)から紫外線を照射するように試験片を投入し、100時間連続照射して耐光性試験を実施した。試験後の試験片を、初期測定と同様にして、単体Y値、単体色相(L, a*, b)の測定を実施した。試験前後の単体Y値の変化ΔY,単体色相変化ΔEを計算で求め、ΔY≦0.5、ΔE≦1.0の場合を合格(OK)、それ以外を不合格(NG)とした。
<Reliability evaluation>
The test piece that had been initially measured by the above-described method was put into an oven at 85 ° C. for 500 hours to conduct a heat resistance test. Similarly, a test piece was put into an ultraviolet fade tester (device name: UV fade meter tester U48, manufactured by Suga Test Instruments Co., Ltd.) so that ultraviolet rays were irradiated from the visible adhesive layer side (A1 side), The light resistance test was carried out by continuous irradiation for 100 hours. The test piece after the test was measured for the simple substance Y value and the simple substance hue (L * , a * , b * ) in the same manner as the initial measurement. Single Y value change ΔY and single hue change ΔE * before and after the test were obtained by calculation. When ΔY ≦ 0.5 and ΔE * ≦ 1.0, the result was accepted (OK), and the others were rejected (NG). .
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000035
 以下では、透明導電性フィルムを作製して評価した。 In the following, a transparent conductive film was produced and evaluated.
 比較例5
 (シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(Z1))
 長尺な透明基材として、厚み40μmのシクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(Z1)(COPフィルム、日本ゼオン社製、「ゼオノアZF16」)を用意した。
Comparative Example 5
(Cycloolefin polymer film (Z1))
As a long transparent substrate, a cycloolefin polymer film (Z1) (COP film, manufactured by Nippon Zeon Co., Ltd., “Zeonor ZF16”) having a thickness of 40 μm was prepared.
 (アンチブロッキング層の形成)
 紫外線硬化性ハードコート樹脂(DIC社製、商品名「UNIDIC(登録商標)RS29-120」)固形分100重量部に対し、直径3μmの複数の粒子(積水樹脂社製、商品名「SSX105」)を0.07重量部添加して、固形分濃度が30重量%となるように、酢酸エチルで希釈して、アンチブロッキング層形成用組成物を調製した。当該組成物を、上記シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(Z1)の片面に塗布した後、80℃で1分間の条件で乾燥後、積算光量300mJ/cmの紫外線(高圧水銀灯)を照射することでCOPフィルムの片面に膜厚1.5μmのアンチブロッキング層(AB層)を形成した。
(Formation of anti-blocking layer)
UV curable hard coat resin (trade name “UNIDIC (registered trademark) RS29-120” manufactured by DIC Corporation) with a solid content of 100 parts by weight, a plurality of particles having a diameter of 3 μm (trade name “SSX105” manufactured by Sekisui Resin Co., Ltd.) Was added with 0.07 part by weight and diluted with ethyl acetate so that the solid content concentration was 30% by weight to prepare an anti-blocking layer forming composition. The composition is applied to one side of the cycloolefin polymer film (Z1), dried at 80 ° C. for 1 minute, and then irradiated with ultraviolet rays (high pressure mercury lamp) with an integrated light amount of 300 mJ / cm 2 to obtain a COP film. An anti-blocking layer (AB layer) having a thickness of 1.5 μm was formed on one side of the film.
 (ハードコート層(Y)の形成)
 紫外線硬化型アクリル樹脂(DIC社製、「ELS888」)100重量部および光重合開始剤(BASF社製、「Irgacure184」)2重量部および酢酸エチル160重量部を混合して、組成物溶液(Y)を調製した。次いで、上記シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(Z1)において上記アンチブロッキング層を形成した面とは逆面に、前記組成物溶液(Y)を塗布して、80℃で1分間の条件で乾燥させて、積算光量300mJ/cmの紫外線(高圧水銀灯)を照射した。これにより、厚み1.0μmのハードコート層をシクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(Z1)の上面に形成した。
(Formation of hard coat layer (Y))
An ultraviolet curable acrylic resin (DIC, “ELS888”) 100 parts by weight, a photopolymerization initiator (BASF, “Irgacure 184”) 2 parts by weight and ethyl acetate 160 parts by weight were mixed to prepare a composition solution (Y ) Was prepared. Next, the composition solution (Y) is applied to the surface opposite to the surface on which the anti-blocking layer is formed in the cycloolefin polymer film (Z1), dried at 80 ° C. for 1 minute, and integrated. Irradiation with ultraviolet rays (high pressure mercury lamp) having a light amount of 300 mJ / cm 2 was performed. Thereby, a hard coat layer having a thickness of 1.0 μm was formed on the upper surface of the cycloolefin polymer film (Z1).
 (屈折率調整層(X)の形成)
 無機粒子含有樹脂溶液(JSR社製、「KZ7414」)100重量部に、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル700重量部を混合して、組成物溶液(X)を調製した。次いで、上記ハードコート層(Y1)の上面に、前記組成物溶液(X)を塗布して、60℃で1分間の条件で乾燥させて、積算光量300mJ/cmの紫外線(高圧水銀灯)を照射した。これにより、厚み100nmの屈折率調整層(X)をハードコート層の上面に形成した。
(Formation of refractive index adjustment layer (X))
A composition solution (X) was prepared by mixing 700 parts by weight of propylene glycol monomethyl ether with 100 parts by weight of an inorganic particle-containing resin solution (manufactured by JSR, “KZ7414”). Next, the composition solution (X) is applied to the upper surface of the hard coat layer (Y1) and dried at 60 ° C. for 1 minute, and ultraviolet rays (high pressure mercury lamp) with an integrated light quantity of 300 mJ / cm 2 are applied. Irradiated. Thereby, a refractive index adjusting layer (X) having a thickness of 100 nm was formed on the upper surface of the hard coat layer.
 (ITO層の形成)
 次いで、上記で得られた、屈折率調整層(X)/ハードコート層(Y)/シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(Z1)/アンチブロッキング層、の構成の積層体を、巻き取り式スパッタリング装置に投入して、屈折率調整層(X1)の上面に、厚みが30nmのITO層(非晶質)を形成した。具体的には、アルゴンガス98%および酸素ガス2%を導入した気圧0.4Paの真空雰囲気下で、97質量%の酸化インジウムおよび3質量%の酸化スズの焼結体からなるITOターゲットを用いて、屈折率調整層(X1)に対してスパッタリングを実施した。
 上記のようにして、ITO層/屈折率調整層(X)/ハードコート層(Y)/シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(Z1)/アンチブロッキング層、の構成の透明導電性フィルムを作製した。
(Formation of ITO layer)
Next, the laminate having the structure of the refractive index adjustment layer (X) / hard coat layer (Y) / cycloolefin polymer film (Z1) / anti-blocking layer obtained above is put into a take-up type sputtering apparatus. Then, an ITO layer (amorphous) having a thickness of 30 nm was formed on the upper surface of the refractive index adjustment layer (X1). Specifically, an ITO target made of a sintered body of 97% by mass indium oxide and 3% by mass tin oxide was used in a vacuum atmosphere at a pressure of 0.4 Pa into which argon gas 98% and oxygen gas 2% were introduced. Then, sputtering was performed on the refractive index adjustment layer (X1).
As described above, a transparent conductive film having a constitution of ITO layer / refractive index adjusting layer (X) / hard coat layer (Y) / cycloolefin polymer film (Z1) / anti-blocking layer was produced.
 実施例13
 比較例5において、ハードコート層(Y)の代わりに、ハードコート層(Y-1)を形成したこと以外は比較例5と同様にして、ITO層/屈折率調整層(X1)/ハードコート層(Y-1)/シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(Z1)/アンチブロッキング層、の構成の透明導電性フィルムを作製した。
Example 13
In Comparative Example 5, ITO layer / refractive index adjusting layer (X1) / hard coat was obtained in the same manner as Comparative Example 5 except that a hard coat layer (Y-1) was formed instead of the hard coat layer (Y). A transparent conductive film having a structure of layer (Y-1) / cycloolefin polymer film (Z1) / anti-blocking layer was produced.
 なお、ハードコート層(Y-1)の形成は、ハードコート層(Y)の形成において、紫外線硬化型アクリル樹脂(DIC社製、「ELS888」)100重量部に対して、さらに、製造例2で得られた色素化合物(C2)を2重量部添加して調製した組成物溶液(Y-1)を用いたこと以外はハードコート層(Y)の形成と同様の操作を行った。ハードコート層(Y-1)中のベースポリマー(100重量%)に対して、色素化合物(C2)の添加量は2.0重量%であった。 The formation of the hard coat layer (Y-1) is further carried out with respect to 100 parts by weight of the ultraviolet curable acrylic resin (“ELS888” manufactured by DIC) in the formation of the hard coat layer (Y). The same operation as in the formation of the hard coat layer (Y) was carried out except that the composition solution (Y-1) prepared by adding 2 parts by weight of the dye compound (C2) obtained in 1 above was used. The amount of the dye compound (C2) added was 2.0% by weight relative to the base polymer (100% by weight) in the hard coat layer (Y-1).
 実施例14
 比較例5において、屈折率調整層(X)の代わりに、屈折率調整層(X-1)を形成したこと以外は比較例5と同様にして、ITO層/屈折率調整層(X-1)/ハードコート層(Y)/シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(Z1)/アンチブロッキング層、の構成の透明導電性フィルムを作製した。
Example 14
In Comparative Example 5, an ITO layer / refractive index adjusting layer (X-1) was prepared in the same manner as Comparative Example 5 except that a refractive index adjusting layer (X-1) was formed instead of the refractive index adjusting layer (X). ) / Hard coat layer (Y) / cycloolefin polymer film (Z1) / anti-blocking layer.
 なお、屈折率調整層(X-1)の形成は、屈折率調整層(X)の形成において、組成物溶液(X)の代わりに、無機粒子含有樹脂溶液(JSR社製、「KZ7412」)100重量部に、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル700重量部を混合して、さらに、製造例2で得られた色素化合物(C2)を前記樹脂溶液中の樹脂固形成分に対して、5重量部となるように混合して調整した組成物溶液(X-1)を用いたこと以外は屈折率調整層(X)の形成と同様の操作を行った。屈折率調整層(X-1)中のベースポリマー重量(100重量%)に対して、色素化合物(C2)の添加量は5.0重量%であった。 The refractive index adjusting layer (X-1) is formed by replacing the composition solution (X) in the formation of the refractive index adjusting layer (X) with an inorganic particle-containing resin solution (“KZ7412” manufactured by JSR). To 100 parts by weight, 700 parts by weight of propylene glycol monomethyl ether is mixed, and further, the dye compound (C2) obtained in Production Example 2 is 5 parts by weight with respect to the resin solid component in the resin solution. The same operation as in the formation of the refractive index adjusting layer (X) was performed except that the composition solution (X-1) prepared by mixing with the above was used. The amount of the dye compound (C2) added was 5.0% by weight based on the weight of the base polymer (100% by weight) in the refractive index adjusting layer (X-1).
 実施例15
 比較例5において、屈折率調整層(X)の代わりに、屈折率調整層(X-2)を形成したこと以外は比較例5と同様にして、ITO層/屈折率調整層(X-2)/ハードコート層(Y)/シクロオレフィンポリマーフィルム(Z1)/アンチブロッキング層、の構成の透明導電性フィルムを作製した。
Example 15
In Comparative Example 5, an ITO layer / refractive index adjusting layer (X-2) was prepared in the same manner as Comparative Example 5 except that a refractive index adjusting layer (X-2) was formed instead of the refractive index adjusting layer (X). ) / Hard coat layer (Y) / cycloolefin polymer film (Z1) / anti-blocking layer.
 なお、屈折率調整層(X-2)の形成は、屈折率調整層(X)の形成において、組成物溶液(X)の代わりに、無機粒子含有樹脂溶液(東洋インキ社製、「TYZ68-A12」)100重量部に、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル700重量部を混合して、さらに、製造例2で得られた色素化合物(C2)2重量部を前記樹脂溶液中の樹脂固形成分に対して、5重量部となるように混合して調製した組成物溶液(X-2)を用いたこと以外は屈折率調整層(X1)の形成と同様の操作を行った。屈折率調整層(X-2)中のベースポリマー重量(100重量%)に対して、色素化合物(C2)の添加量は5.0重量%であった。 The refractive index adjusting layer (X-2) is formed by using an inorganic particle-containing resin solution (“TYZ68-”, manufactured by Toyo Ink Co., Ltd.) instead of the composition solution (X) in forming the refractive index adjusting layer (X). A12 ") is mixed with 100 parts by weight of propylene glycol monomethyl ether (700 parts by weight), and 2 parts by weight of the dye compound (C2) obtained in Production Example 2 is added to the resin solid component in the resin solution. The same operation as in the formation of the refractive index adjusting layer (X1) was performed except that the composition solution (X-2) prepared by mixing so as to be 5 parts by weight was used. The amount of the dye compound (C2) added was 5.0% by weight based on the weight of the base polymer (100% by weight) in the refractive index adjusting layer (X-2).
 比較例6
 (ポリエステルフィルム(Z2)の調製)
 テレフタル酸ジメチルおよびエチレングリコールから、三酸化アンチモンを触媒として常法により重合を行い、溶融重合ポリエチレンテレフタレートを得た。得られたポリエチレンテレフタレートを160℃で2時間真空乾燥した後、フィルム溶融押出成形機に投入し、290℃で溶融させ、キャスティングドラム上に押出後、延伸することで、厚み50μmのポリエステルフィルム(Z2)を得た。
Comparative Example 6
(Preparation of polyester film (Z2))
Polymerization was performed from dimethyl terephthalate and ethylene glycol by a conventional method using antimony trioxide as a catalyst to obtain melt-polymerized polyethylene terephthalate. The obtained polyethylene terephthalate was vacuum-dried at 160 ° C. for 2 hours, then charged into a film melt extruder, melted at 290 ° C., extruded onto a casting drum, and stretched to obtain a polyester film (Z2 having a thickness of 50 μm). )
 (アンチブロッキング層の形成)
 上記ポリエステルフィルム(Z2)の片面に、比較例5と同様にして、膜厚1.5μmのアンチブロッキング層(AB層)を形成した。
(Formation of anti-blocking layer)
An anti-blocking layer (AB layer) having a thickness of 1.5 μm was formed on one side of the polyester film (Z2) in the same manner as in Comparative Example 5.
 (クラック防止層(Q)の形成)
 ゴム変性エポキシ樹脂(エポキシ樹脂骨格部分の重量平均分子量:2000)を主成分とするアデカフィルテラBUR-12A(ADEKA社製)を10重量部、アンチモン系硬化促進剤であるアデカフィルテラBUR-12B(ADEKA社製)を0.001部混合し、この混合物に対してメチルイソブチルケトンを90重量部添加して全体が100重量部となるように組成物溶液(Q)を調製した。当該組成物溶液(Q)を170℃にて加熱した際のゲル化時間は10秒であった。次いで、上記ポリエステルフィルム(Z2)において上記アンチブロッキング層を形成した面とは逆面に、前記組成物溶液(Q)を塗布して、195℃で1分間の条件で乾燥させることにより、厚み30nmのクラック防止層(Q)をポリエステルフィルム(Z2)の上面に形成した。
(Formation of crack prevention layer (Q))
10 parts by weight of Adekafilterra BUR-12A (made by ADEKA) mainly composed of rubber-modified epoxy resin (weight average molecular weight of epoxy resin skeleton part: 2000), Adekafilterra BUR-12B which is an antimony-based curing accelerator 0.001 part of (made by ADEKA) was mixed, 90 weight part of methyl isobutyl ketone was added to this mixture, and the composition solution (Q) was prepared so that the whole might be 100 weight part. The gel time when the composition solution (Q) was heated at 170 ° C. was 10 seconds. Next, the thickness of the polyester film (Z2) is 30 nm by applying the composition solution (Q) on the surface opposite to the surface on which the anti-blocking layer is formed and drying it at 195 ° C. for 1 minute. The anti-cracking layer (Q) was formed on the upper surface of the polyester film (Z2).
 (ITO層の形成)
 次いで、上記で得られた、クラック防止層(Q)/ポリエステルフィルム(Z2)/アンチブロッキング層、の構成の積層体を、巻き取り式スパッタリング装置に投入して、クラック防止層(Y2)の上面に、厚みが30nmのITO層(非晶質)を形成した。具体的には、アルゴンガス98%および酸素ガス2%を導入した気圧0.4Paの真空雰囲気下で、97質量%の酸化インジウムおよび3質量%の酸化スズの焼結体からなるITOターゲットを用いて、クラック防止層(Q)に対してスパッタリングを実施した。
 上記のようにして、ITO層/クラック防止層(Q)/ポリエステルフィルム(Z2)/アンチブロッキング層、の構成の透明導電性フィルムを作製した。
(Formation of ITO layer)
Next, the laminate having the structure of crack prevention layer (Q) / polyester film (Z2) / anti-blocking layer obtained above was put into a take-up type sputtering apparatus, and the top surface of the crack prevention layer (Y2). In addition, an ITO layer (amorphous) having a thickness of 30 nm was formed. Specifically, an ITO target made of a sintered body of 97% by mass indium oxide and 3% by mass tin oxide was used in a vacuum atmosphere at a pressure of 0.4 Pa into which argon gas 98% and oxygen gas 2% were introduced. Then, sputtering was performed on the crack prevention layer (Q).
As described above, a transparent conductive film having a configuration of ITO layer / crack prevention layer (Q) / polyester film (Z2) / anti-blocking layer was produced.
 実施例16
 比較例6において、ポリエステルフィルム(Z2)の代わりに、ポリエステルフィルム(Z2-1)を用いたこと以外は比較例6と同様にして、ITO層/クラック防止層(Q)/ポリエステルフィルム(Z2-1)/アンチブロッキング層、の構成の透明導電性フィルムを作製した。
Example 16
In Comparative Example 6, an ITO layer / crack prevention layer (Q) / polyester film (Z2-) was used in the same manner as Comparative Example 6 except that the polyester film (Z2-1) was used instead of the polyester film (Z2). A transparent conductive film having the structure 1) / anti-blocking layer was produced.
 なお、ポリエステルフィルム(Z2-1)は、ポリエステルフィルム(Z2)の調製にあたり、得られたポリエチレンテレフタレート100重量部に対して、さらに、製造例2で得られた色素化合物(C2)を1重量部添加した組成物を用いて成膜したこと以外は、ポリエステルフィルム(Z2)の調製と同様の操作を行って得たものを用いた。ポリエステルフィルム(Z2-1)中のべースポリマー重量(100重量%)に対して、色素化合物(C2)の添加量は、1重量%であった。 In the preparation of the polyester film (Z2), the polyester film (Z2-1) further comprises 1 part by weight of the dye compound (C2) obtained in Production Example 2 with respect to 100 parts by weight of the obtained polyethylene terephthalate. Except having formed into a film using the added composition, what was obtained by performing operation similar to preparation of a polyester film (Z2) was used. The amount of the dye compound (C2) added was 1% by weight relative to the weight of the base polymer (100% by weight) in the polyester film (Z2-1).
 実施例17
 比較例6において、易接着層(R-1)をさらに設けたこと以外は比較例6と同様にして、ITO層/クラック防止層(Q)/易接着層(R-1)/ポリエステルフィルム(Z2)/アンチブロッキング層、の構成の透明導電性フィルムを作製した。
Example 17
In Comparative Example 6, an ITO layer / crack preventing layer (Q) / easy-adhesive layer (R-1) / polyester film (with the exception of further providing an easy-adhesion layer (R-1)) A transparent conductive film having a configuration of Z2) / anti-blocking layer was produced.
 なお、易接着層(R-1)は下記方法で設けた。易接着層形成用組成物(R-1)は、フタル酸エステル(フタル酸/エチレングリコール・プロピレングリコールの反応物)、メタクリル酸、オキサゾリン、エチレングリコール、プロピレングリコール、メラミンから形成された樹脂100重量部に対し、製造例2で得られた色素化合物(C2)を5重量部添加することで調製した。次いで、上記ポリエステルフィルム(Z2)において上記アンチブロッキング層を形成した面とは逆面に、前記易接着組成物(R-1)を塗布して、195℃で1分間の条件で乾燥させることにより、厚み0.1μmの易接着層(R-1)を形成した。次いで、クラック防止層(Y2)を、易接着層(R-1)上に設けた。易接着層(R-1)中のベースポリマー重量(100重量%)に対して、色素化合物(C2)の添加量は5重量%であった。 The easy adhesion layer (R-1) was provided by the following method. The easily adhesive layer forming composition (R-1) is a resin 100 weight formed from phthalic acid ester (phthalic acid / reaction product of ethylene glycol / propylene glycol), methacrylic acid, oxazoline, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, and melamine. It was prepared by adding 5 parts by weight of the dye compound (C2) obtained in Production Example 2 to parts. Next, by applying the easy-adhesive composition (R-1) on the surface opposite to the surface on which the anti-blocking layer is formed in the polyester film (Z2), and drying it at 195 ° C. for 1 minute. Then, an easy-adhesion layer (R-1) having a thickness of 0.1 μm was formed. Next, a crack prevention layer (Y2) was provided on the easy adhesion layer (R-1). The amount of the dye compound (C2) added was 5% by weight based on the weight of the base polymer (100% by weight) in the easy-adhesion layer (R-1).
 実施例18
 比較例6において、クラック防止層(Y2)の代わりに、クラック防止層(Q-1)を形成したこと以外は比較例6と同様にして、ITO層/クラック防止層(Q-1)/ポリエステルフィルム(Z2)/アンチブロッキング層、の構成の透明導電性フィルムを作製した。
Example 18
In Comparative Example 6, an ITO layer / crack preventing layer (Q-1) / polyester was prepared in the same manner as Comparative Example 6 except that a crack preventing layer (Q-1) was formed instead of the crack preventing layer (Y2). A transparent conductive film having a structure of film (Z2) / anti-blocking layer was produced.
 なお、クラック防止層(Q-1)の形成は、クラック防止層(Q)の形成において、組成物溶液(Q-1)の代わりに、ゴム変性エポキシ樹脂100重量部に対して、さらに、製造例2で得られた色素化合物(C2)を5重量部添加して調製した組成物溶液(Q-1)を用いたこと、さらに厚みを70nmとしたこと以外はクラック防止層(Q)の形成と同様の操作を行った。 The formation of the crack prevention layer (Q-1) was further carried out with respect to 100 parts by weight of the rubber-modified epoxy resin instead of the composition solution (Q-1) in the formation of the crack prevention layer (Q). Formation of a crack prevention layer (Q) except that the composition solution (Q-1) prepared by adding 5 parts by weight of the dye compound (C2) obtained in Example 2 was used and that the thickness was 70 nm. The same operation was performed.
 (評価)
 実施例13~18及び比較例5,6で得られた透明導電性フィルムについて、以下の評価を行った。評価は以下の手法で行った。結果を表4、表5に示す。
(Evaluation)
The transparent conductive films obtained in Examples 13 to 18 and Comparative Examples 5 and 6 were evaluated as follows. The evaluation was performed by the following method. The results are shown in Tables 4 and 5.
 <透明導電性フィルムの透過率、色相の測定:初期値>
 実施例及び比較例で得られた透明導電性フィルムを、切り出して試験片を作製した。試験片を透明導電層(ITO層)側から測定光が入光するように測定用治具に取り付け、反射型分光光度計(製品名:U4100、日立ハイテクノロジーズ社製)で測定した。波長380nm~780nmの範囲における透過率(表5には、380nm、400nm、420nmの測定値を示す)、単体Y値、単体色相(L, a*, b)を測定した。
<Measurement of transmittance and hue of transparent conductive film: initial value>
The transparent conductive films obtained in Examples and Comparative Examples were cut out to produce test pieces. The test piece was attached to a measurement jig so that measurement light was incident from the transparent conductive layer (ITO layer) side, and measured with a reflection type spectrophotometer (product name: U4100, manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation). The transmittance in the wavelength range of 380 nm to 780 nm (measured values at 380 nm, 400 nm, and 420 nm are shown in Table 5), simple substance Y value, simple substance hue (L * , a * , b * ) were measured.
 <透明導電性フィルムのITO層の表面抵抗値>
 ITO層を成膜後に140℃で90分間の加熱処理を行ってITO層を結晶化することで、結晶質の透明導電性フィルムを作製した。結晶質の透明導電層の表面抵抗値(Ω/□)はJIS K7194(1994年)に準じて四端子法により測定した。
<Surface resistance value of ITO layer of transparent conductive film>
After forming the ITO layer, a heat treatment at 140 ° C. for 90 minutes was performed to crystallize the ITO layer, thereby producing a crystalline transparent conductive film. The surface resistance value (Ω / □) of the crystalline transparent conductive layer was measured by the four-terminal method according to JIS K7194 (1994).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000036
  1  光学積層体
  2  粘接着剤層
  3  透明保護フィルム
  4  偏光子
  5  位相差フィルム
  6  粘着剤層
  7  カバー部材
  8  有機ELパネル
 10  有機EL表示装置
 20  透明導電性フィルム
 21  透明基材フィルム
 22  透明導電層を
 23  中間層
 24  アンチブロッキング層
 
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Optical laminated body 2 Adhesive layer 3 Transparent protective film 4 Polarizer 5 Phase difference film 6 Adhesive layer 7 Cover member 8 Organic EL panel 10 Organic EL display device 20 Transparent electroconductive film 21 Transparent base film 22 Transparent electroconductivity 23 intermediate layers 24 anti-blocking layers

Claims (25)

  1.  ベースポリマー及び下記一般式(1)で表される化合物を含有することを特徴とする光学部材用組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
    (一般式(1)中、mは1~6の整数を表し、
    は、mが1のとき水素原子を表し、mが2~6のとき2~6価の連結基を表し、
    は、下記一般式(2)で表される化合物から水素原子が1つ外れた基を表し、mが2~6のとき、複数のDは、全て同じであってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
    (一般式(2)中、Rは、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。Rは、水素原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、複素環含有基、-C(O)-R又は-SO-Rを表す。Rは、ヒドロキシ基又は-OR71を表し、Rは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、-OR81、-NR8283又は-R84を表す。R71及びR81~R84は、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。
    は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。
    402及びR403は、同一又は異なって、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよいアリール基、-NR406407、-OR408、シアノ基、-C(O)R409、-O-C(O)R410又は-C(O)OR411を表し、
    404~R411は、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。R404と、R405と、R404及びR405が結合している窒素原子とで、置換基を有していてもよい4~8員の含窒素複素環を形成してもよい。))
    A composition for optical members, comprising a base polymer and a compound represented by the following general formula (1).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
    (In the general formula (1), m represents an integer of 1 to 6,
    Q 1 represents a hydrogen atom when m is 1, and a divalent to hexavalent linking group when m is 2 to 6,
    D 1 represents a group in which one hydrogen atom is removed from the compound represented by the following general formula (2). When m is 2 to 6, a plurality of D 1 may be the same or different. It may be.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
    (In General Formula (2), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent. R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a cyano group. , A nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7 or —SO 2 —R 8. R 7 represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71 , and R 8 represents a halogen atom. Represents an atom, a hydroxy group, —OR 81 , —NR 82 R 83 or —R 84 , wherein R 71 and R 81 to R 84 are the same or different and each represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a substituent; Or the aryl group which may have a substituent is represented.
    R 3 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
    R 402 and R 403 are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group, an optionally substituted aryl group, —NR 406 R 407 , —OR 408 , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409 , —O—C (O) R 410 or —C (O) OR 411 ,
    R 404 to R 411 are the same or different and each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent. R 404 , R 405, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404 and R 405 are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent. ))
  2.  前記一般式(1)におけるmが1又は2であることを特徴とする請求項1に光学部材用組成物。 M in the said General formula (1) is 1 or 2, The composition for optical members in Claim 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.
  3.  前記一般式(1)で表される化合物が、下記一般式(3)で表される化合物であることを特徴とする請求項1又は2に記載の光学部材用組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
    (一般式(3)中、R1aは、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表し、R2aは、水素原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、複素環含有基、-C(O)-R7a又は-SO-R8aを表す。R7aは、ヒドロキシ基又は-OR71aを表し、R8aは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、-OR81a、-NR82a83a又は-R84aを表す。R71a及びR81a~R84aは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
    3aは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
    402aは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基、-NR406a407a、-OR408a、シアノ基、-C(O)R409a、-O-C(O)R410a又は-C(O)OR411aを表し、R404a~R411aは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。R404aと、R405aと、R404a及びR405aが結合している窒素原子とで、置換基を有していてもよい4~8員の含窒素複素環を形成してもよい。
    413は、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表すか、又は、下記一般式(4)で表される基を表す。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
    (一般式(4)中、Qは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の2価の炭化水素基を表し、*は一般式(3)との結合部位を表す。
    1bは、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表し、R2bは、水素原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、複素環含有基、-C(O)-R7b又は-SO-R8bを表す。R7bは、ヒドロキシ基又は-OR71bを表し、R8bは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、-OR81b、-NR82b83b又は-R84bを表す。R71b及びR81b~R84bは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
    3bは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
    402bは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基、-NR406b407b、-OR408b、シアノ基、-C(O)R409b、-O-C(O)R410b又は-C(O)OR411bを表し、R404b~R411bは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。R404bと、R405bと、R404b及びR405bが結合している窒素原子とで、置換基を有していてもよい4~8員の含窒素複素環を形成してもよい。))
    The composition for optical members according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the compound represented by the general formula (1) is a compound represented by the following general formula (3).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
    (In General Formula (3), R 1a is a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. R 2a represents a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7a or —SO 2 —R 8a , where R 7a represents a hydroxy group Or -OR 71a , R 8a represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, -OR 81a , -NR 82a R 83a, or -R 84a, and R 71a and R 81a to R 84a are the same or different, Represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
    R 3a represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. .
    R 402a represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, —NR 406a R 407a , —OR 408a , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409a , —O—C (O) R 410a or —C (O) OR 411a , and R 404a to R 411a are the same or different and represent hydrogen It represents an atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 404a , R 405a, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404a and R 405a are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent.
    R 413 represents a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or the following general formula The group represented by Formula (4) is represented.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
    (In the general formula (4), Q 2 represents an optionally substituted divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and * represents a bonding site with the general formula (3).
    R 1b represents a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and R 2b represents a hydrogen atom. An atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7b or —SO 2 —R 8b is represented. R 7b represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71b , and R 8b represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, —OR 81b , —NR 82b R 83b or —R 84b . R 71b and R 81b to R 84b are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an alkyl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Represents an aryl group.
    R 3b represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. .
    R 402b is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, —NR 406b R 407b , —OR 408b , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409b , —O—C (O) R 410b or —C (O) OR 411b , and R 404b to R 411b are the same or different and represent hydrogen It represents an atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 404b , R 405b, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404b and R 405b are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent. ))
  4.  前記R413が、前記一般式(4)で表される基であることを特徴とする請求項3に記載の光学部材用組成物。 4. The optical member composition according to claim 3, wherein R 413 is a group represented by the general formula (4).
  5.  前記一般式(1)で表される化合物が、下記一般式(5)で表される化合物であることを特徴とする請求項1又は2に記載の光学部材用組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
    (一般式(5)中、R2cは、水素原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、複素環含有基、-C(O)-R7c又は-SO-R8cを表す。R7cは、ヒドロキシ基又は-OR71cを表し、R8cは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、-OR81c、-NR82c83c又は-R84cを表す。R71c及びR81c~R84cは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
    3cは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
    402c及びR403cは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基、-NR406c407c、-OR408c、シアノ基、-C(O)R409c、-O-C(O)R410c又は-C(O)OR411cを表し、R404c~R411cは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。R404cと、R405cと、R404c及びR405cが結合している窒素原子とで、置換基を有していてもよい4~8員の含窒素複素環を形成してもよい。
    501は、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基、又は、下記一般式(6)で表される基を表す。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
    (一般式(6)中、Qは、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の2価の炭化水素基を表し、*は一般式(5)との結合部位を表す。
    2dは、水素原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、複素環含有基、-C(O)-R7d又は-SO-R8dを表す。R7dは、ヒドロキシ基又は-OR71dを表し、R8dは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、-OR81d、-NR82d83d又は-R84dを表す。R71d及びR81d~R84dは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
    3dは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。
    402d及びR403dは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基、-NR406d407d、-OR408d、シアノ基、-C(O)R409d、-O-C(O)R410d又は-C(O)OR411dを表し、R404d~R411dは、同一又は異なって、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。R404dと、R405dと、R404d及びR405dが結合している窒素原子とで、置換基を有していてもよい4~8員の含窒素複素環を形成してもよい。))
    3. The composition for an optical member according to claim 1, wherein the compound represented by the general formula (1) is a compound represented by the following general formula (5).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
    (In the general formula (5), R 2c represents a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7c or —SO 2 —R 8c ). 7c represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71c , and R 8c represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, —OR 81c , —NR 82c R 83c or —R 84c, and R 71c and R 81c to R 84c are the same or Differently, it represents a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
    R 3c represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. .
    R 402c and R 403c are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon atom having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. Represents an aryl group, —NR 406c R 407c , —OR 408c , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409c , —O—C (O) R 410c or —C (O) OR 411c , and R 404c to R 411c Are the same or different and each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 404c , R 405c, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404c and R 405c are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent.
    R 501 is a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or the following general formula (6 ) Represents a group represented by
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
    (In the general formula (6), Q 3 represents a divalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and * represents a binding site with the general formula (5).
    R 2d represents a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, a heterocyclic ring-containing group, —C (O) —R 7d or —SO 2 —R 8d . R 7d represents a hydroxy group or —OR 71d , and R 8d represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, —OR 81d , —NR 82d R 83d or —R 84d . R 71d and R 81d to R 84d are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. Represents an aryl group.
    R 3d represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. .
    R 402d and R 403d are the same or different and are a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted carbon atom having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. An aryl group of —NR 406d R 407d , —OR 408d , a cyano group, —C (O) R 409d , —O—C (O) R 410d or —C (O) OR 411d , and R 404d to R 411d Are the same or different and each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. R 404d , R 405d, and the nitrogen atom to which R 404d and R 405d are bonded may form a 4- to 8-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring which may have a substituent. ))
  6.  前記R501が、前記一般式(6)で表される基であることを特徴とする請求項5に記載の光学部材用組成物。 The composition for an optical member according to claim 5, wherein R 501 is a group represented by the general formula (6).
  7.  前記一般式(1)で表される化合物は、吸収スペクトルの吸収極大波長が380~430nmの波長領域に存在する色素化合物であることを特徴とする請求項1~6のいずれかに記載の光学部材用組成物。 The optical compound according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the compound represented by the general formula (1) is a dye compound having an absorption maximum wavelength of an absorption spectrum in a wavelength region of 380 to 430 nm. Composition for members.
  8.  さらに、紫外線吸収剤を含有することを特徴とする請求項1~7のいずれかに記載の光学部材用組成物。 The composition for optical members according to any one of claims 1 to 7, further comprising an ultraviolet absorber.
  9.  前記紫外線吸収剤の吸収スペクトルの吸収極大波長が、300~400nmの波長領域に存在することを特徴とする請求項8に記載の光学部材用組成物。 The composition for an optical member according to claim 8, wherein the absorption maximum wavelength of the absorption spectrum of the ultraviolet absorber is in a wavelength region of 300 to 400 nm.
  10.  請求項1~9のいずれかに記載の光学部材用組成物から形成されることを特徴とする光学部材。 An optical member formed from the composition for an optical member according to any one of claims 1 to 9.
  11.  光学フィルムとして用いられることを特徴とする請求項1~10のいずれかに記載の光学部材。 The optical member according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the optical member is used as an optical film.
  12.  光学フィルム用粘着剤層又は接着剤層として用いられることを特徴とする請求項1~10のいずれかに記載の光学部材。 11. The optical member according to claim 1, wherein the optical member is used as an adhesive layer or an adhesive layer for an optical film.
  13.  前記光学フィルム用粘着剤層を形成する組成物が含有するベースポリマーが、(メタ)アクリル系ポリマーであることを特徴とする請求項12に記載の光学部材。 The optical member according to claim 12, wherein the base polymer contained in the composition forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer for an optical film is a (meth) acrylic polymer.
  14.  光学フィルムに設けられる表面処理層として用いられることを特徴とする請求項1~10のいずれかに記載の光学部材。 The optical member according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the optical member is used as a surface treatment layer provided on an optical film.
  15.  前記光学フィルムが、偏光フィルム、偏光子、偏光子用透明保護フィルム、又は位相差フィルムであることを特徴とする請求項11~14のいずれかに記載の光学部材。 The optical member according to any one of claims 11 to 14, wherein the optical film is a polarizing film, a polarizer, a transparent protective film for a polarizer, or a retardation film.
  16.  偏光子及び位相差フィルムを含む光学積層体であって、
     前記光学積層体が、請求項10~15のいずれかに記載の光学部材を含有する光学積層体(1)であることを特徴とする光学積層体。
    An optical laminate including a polarizer and a retardation film,
    An optical laminate, wherein the optical laminate is an optical laminate (1) containing the optical member according to any one of claims 10 to 15.
  17.  画像表示部及び請求項10~15のいずれかに記載の光学部材又は請求項16記載の光学積層体(1)を有することを特徴とする画像表示装置。 An image display device comprising an image display unit and the optical member according to any one of claims 10 to 15, or the optical laminate (1) according to claim 16.
  18.  前記光学部材又は光学積層体(1)は画像表示部よりも視認側に設けられていることを特徴とする請求項17記載の画像表示装置。 18. The image display device according to claim 17, wherein the optical member or the optical laminate (1) is provided on the viewing side with respect to the image display unit.
  19.  画像表示装置が、
     視認側から、少なくとも、偏光子及び位相差フィルムをこの順に含む光学積層体、並びに前記画像表示部として有機ELパネルを、含む有機EL表示装置であって、
     前記光学積層体が、請求項10~15のいずれかに記載の光学部材又は請求項16記載の光学積層体(1)を含有することを特徴とする請求項17又は18記載の画像表示装置。
    The image display device
    From the viewing side, at least an optical laminate including a polarizer and a retardation film in this order, and an organic EL display device including an organic EL panel as the image display unit,
    The image display device according to claim 17 or 18, wherein the optical laminate comprises the optical member according to any one of claims 10 to 15 or the optical laminate (1) according to claim 16.
  20.  透明基材フィルム及び透明導電層を有する透明導電性フィルムにおいて、前記透明基材フィルム、又は前記透明基材フィルムと透明導電層との間に設けられる中間層として用いられることを特徴とする請求項1~10のいずれかに記載の光学部材。 The transparent conductive film having a transparent base film and a transparent conductive layer is used as the transparent base film or an intermediate layer provided between the transparent base film and the transparent conductive layer. The optical member according to any one of 1 to 10.
  21.  前記中間層が、屈折率調整層、易接着剤層、ハードコート層及びクラック防止層から選ばれるいずれか少なくとも1つであることを特徴とする請求項20記載の光学部材。 21. The optical member according to claim 20, wherein the intermediate layer is at least one selected from a refractive index adjustment layer, an easy-adhesive layer, a hard coat layer, and a crack prevention layer.
  22.  透明基材フィルム及び透明導電層を有する透明導電性フィルムであって、前記透明基材フィルム、又は前記透明基材フィルムとの間に設けられる中間層として、請求項20又は21記載の光学部材を含有することを特徴とする透明導電性フィルム。 The transparent conductive film having a transparent substrate film and a transparent conductive layer, wherein the optical member according to claim 20 or 21 is used as an intermediate layer provided between the transparent substrate film or the transparent substrate film. A transparent conductive film characterized by containing.
  23.  画像表示部及び請求項22記載の透明導電性フィルムを含有することを特徴とする画像表示装置。 An image display device comprising an image display unit and the transparent conductive film according to claim 22.
  24.  前記透明導電性フィルムは画像表示部よりも視認側に設けられていることを特徴とする請求項23記載の画像表示装置。 24. The image display device according to claim 23, wherein the transparent conductive film is provided on the viewing side with respect to the image display unit.
  25.  画像表示装置が、前記画像表示部として有機ELパネルを含む有機EL表示装置であることを特徴とする請求項23又は24記載の画像表示装置。 The image display device according to claim 23 or 24, wherein the image display device is an organic EL display device including an organic EL panel as the image display unit.
PCT/JP2018/017528 2017-05-09 2018-05-02 Composition for optical members, optical member and image display device WO2018207701A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201880009453.7A CN110249242B (en) 2017-05-09 2018-05-02 Composition for optical member, and image display device
KR1020197022167A KR102051269B1 (en) 2017-05-09 2018-05-02 Composition for Optical Member, Optical Member and Image Display Device
SG11201909102R SG11201909102RA (en) 2017-05-09 2018-05-02 Composition for optical member, optical member and image display device

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2017-092869 2017-05-09
JP2017092869 2017-05-09
JP2018-086402 2018-04-27
JP2018086402A JP6510113B2 (en) 2017-05-09 2018-04-27 Composition for optical member, optical member and image display device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018207701A1 true WO2018207701A1 (en) 2018-11-15

Family

ID=64104580

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2018/017528 WO2018207701A1 (en) 2017-05-09 2018-05-02 Composition for optical members, optical member and image display device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2018207701A1 (en)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2020098234A (en) * 2018-12-17 2020-06-25 日東電工株式会社 Image display panel, image display device, and optical film with adhesive layer
JP2020098321A (en) * 2018-12-17 2020-06-25 日東電工株式会社 Optical film with adhesive layer, image display panel, and image display device
WO2020139926A2 (en) 2018-12-26 2020-07-02 Akrevia Therapeutics Inc. Anti-ctla4 antibodies and methods of use thereof
WO2022187272A1 (en) 2021-03-01 2022-09-09 Xilio Development, Inc. Combination of masked ctla4 and pd1/pdl1 antibodies for treating cancer
WO2022187270A1 (en) 2021-03-01 2022-09-09 Xilio Development, Inc. Combination of ctla4 and pd1/pdl1 antibodies for treating cancer

Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB741667A (en) * 1952-12-05 1955-12-07 Ici Ltd New pyrimidine derivatives
JPH1180130A (en) * 1997-09-08 1999-03-26 Chemprokasei Kaisha Ltd New aminomethylenepyrimidine derivative, ultraviolet absorber by using the same, and its production
JPH1180129A (en) * 1997-09-08 1999-03-26 Chemprokasei Kaisha Ltd New aminomethylenepyrimidine derivative, ultraviolet absorber by using the same, and its production
JP2000319629A (en) * 1999-05-07 2000-11-21 Shiseido Co Ltd Water-soluble wide-range ultraviolet absorber and ultraviolet absorbing composition and external dermatologic preparation containing same
JP2001055557A (en) * 1999-08-17 2001-02-27 Shiseido Co Ltd Water-soluble ultraviolet absorber, ultraviolet- absorbing composition containing the same, and skin external preparation
WO2011078157A1 (en) * 2009-12-21 2011-06-30 コニカミノルタオプト株式会社 Film mirror, method for producing same, and reflecting device for solar thermal power generator
JP2013075978A (en) * 2011-09-30 2013-04-25 Nitto Denko Corp Adhesive sheet
WO2014129275A1 (en) * 2013-02-20 2014-08-28 富士フイルム株式会社 Sunlight-collecting film mirror and method for producing same
WO2017010280A1 (en) * 2015-07-13 2017-01-19 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Heat ray shielding film

Patent Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB741667A (en) * 1952-12-05 1955-12-07 Ici Ltd New pyrimidine derivatives
JPH1180130A (en) * 1997-09-08 1999-03-26 Chemprokasei Kaisha Ltd New aminomethylenepyrimidine derivative, ultraviolet absorber by using the same, and its production
JPH1180129A (en) * 1997-09-08 1999-03-26 Chemprokasei Kaisha Ltd New aminomethylenepyrimidine derivative, ultraviolet absorber by using the same, and its production
JP2000319629A (en) * 1999-05-07 2000-11-21 Shiseido Co Ltd Water-soluble wide-range ultraviolet absorber and ultraviolet absorbing composition and external dermatologic preparation containing same
JP2001055557A (en) * 1999-08-17 2001-02-27 Shiseido Co Ltd Water-soluble ultraviolet absorber, ultraviolet- absorbing composition containing the same, and skin external preparation
WO2011078157A1 (en) * 2009-12-21 2011-06-30 コニカミノルタオプト株式会社 Film mirror, method for producing same, and reflecting device for solar thermal power generator
JP2013075978A (en) * 2011-09-30 2013-04-25 Nitto Denko Corp Adhesive sheet
WO2014129275A1 (en) * 2013-02-20 2014-08-28 富士フイルム株式会社 Sunlight-collecting film mirror and method for producing same
WO2017010280A1 (en) * 2015-07-13 2017-01-19 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Heat ray shielding film

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2020098234A (en) * 2018-12-17 2020-06-25 日東電工株式会社 Image display panel, image display device, and optical film with adhesive layer
JP2020098321A (en) * 2018-12-17 2020-06-25 日東電工株式会社 Optical film with adhesive layer, image display panel, and image display device
WO2020129333A1 (en) * 2018-12-17 2020-06-25 日東電工株式会社 Image display panel and image display device
CN113168044A (en) * 2018-12-17 2021-07-23 日东电工株式会社 Image display panel and image display device
JP7229006B2 (en) 2018-12-17 2023-02-27 日東電工株式会社 Image display panel, image display device and optical film with adhesive layer
JP7440993B2 (en) 2018-12-17 2024-02-29 日東電工株式会社 Optical film with adhesive layer, image display panel and image display device
WO2020139926A2 (en) 2018-12-26 2020-07-02 Akrevia Therapeutics Inc. Anti-ctla4 antibodies and methods of use thereof
WO2020139920A2 (en) 2018-12-26 2020-07-02 City Of Hope Activatable masked anti-ctla4 binding proteins
WO2022187272A1 (en) 2021-03-01 2022-09-09 Xilio Development, Inc. Combination of masked ctla4 and pd1/pdl1 antibodies for treating cancer
WO2022187270A1 (en) 2021-03-01 2022-09-09 Xilio Development, Inc. Combination of ctla4 and pd1/pdl1 antibodies for treating cancer

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6510113B2 (en) Composition for optical member, optical member and image display device
TWI775737B (en) Adhesive composition for organic EL display device, adhesive layer for organic EL display device, polarizing film with adhesive layer for organic EL display device, and organic EL display device
WO2018207701A1 (en) Composition for optical members, optical member and image display device
JP6592254B2 (en) UV-curable acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, UV-curable acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, polarizing film with pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, method for producing UV-curable acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, and image display device
TWI711843B (en) Organic EL display device
WO2017111034A1 (en) Adhesive composition for organic electroluminescent display device, adhesive layer for organic electroluminescent display device, polarizing film equipped with adhesive layer for organic electroluminescent display device, and organic electroluminescent display device
JP2022000694A (en) Polarizing film with pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, and image display device
JP2006291027A (en) Adhesive composition, adhesive layer, method for producing the same and adhesive sheet
WO2019107492A1 (en) Polarizing film with adhesive layer, and liquid crystal display device
WO2017216913A1 (en) Ultraviolet-curable acrylic adhesive composition, ultraviolet-curable acrylic adhesive layer, adhesive layer-equipped polarization film, method for producing ultraviolet-curable acrylic adhesive layer, and image display device
WO2017110332A1 (en) Polarizing film with pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, and image display device
JP4880315B2 (en) Adhesive composition, adhesive layer, and optical member with adhesive
JP5717940B2 (en) Method for accelerating curing of mixture and method for accelerating curing of pressure-sensitive adhesive composition
WO2017111038A1 (en) Organic electroluminescent display device
KR102287533B1 (en) Optical member with optical function layer
JP2008045067A (en) Pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, adhesive layer, method for producing the same, and optical member with adhesive
JP2022003390A (en) Polarizing film having optical functional layer and liquid crystal display device
WO2017216912A1 (en) Adhesive layer-equipped polarization film, and image display device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18798620

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20197022167

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 18798620

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1